THE INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
THE INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 1956
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
PRELIMINARY
1. Short title and commencement
2. Definitions
3. Authorisation
CHAPTER II
INSPECTORS
4. Qualification of Inspectors
4A. Appointment of officers to assist the Inspectors
4B. Qualification of officers appointed to assist the Inspectors
5. Entry and inspection
6. Appeals
7. Amount of fees
8. Incidence of fees recoverable in the cases of dispute
9. Submission of records
10. List of consumers
CHAPTER III
LICENCE
11. Application for licence
12. Copies of maps and draft licence for public inspection
13. Contents of draft licence
14. Form of draft licence
15. Advertisement of application and contents thereof
16. Amendment of draft licence
17. Local enquiries
18. Approval of draft licence
19. Notification of grant of licence
20. Date of commencement of licence
21. Deposit of maps
22. Deposit of printed copies
23. Application for written consent of State Government in certain cases
24. Amendment of licence
25. Sale of Plans
26. Preparations and submission of accounts
27. Model conditions of supply
28. Forms of requisitions
CHAPTER IV
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
29. Construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric
supply lines and apparatus
30. Service lines and apparatus on consumer’s premises
31. Cut-out on consumer’s premises
32. Identification of earthed and earthed neutral conductors and position of
switches and cut-outs therein
33. Earthed terminal on consumer’s premises
34. Accessibility of bare conductors
35. Danger Notices
36. Handling of electric supply lines and apparatus
37. Supply to vehicles, cranes, etc.
38. Cables for portable or transportable apparatus
39. Cables protected by bituminous materials
40. Street boxes
41. Distinction of different circuits
41A. Distinction of the installations having more than one feed
42. Accidental charge
43. Provisions applicable to protective equipment
44. Instructions for restoration of persons suffering from electric shock
44A. Intimation of Accident
45. Precautions to be adopted by consumers, owner’s occupiers, electrical
contractors, electrical workmen and suppliers
46. Periodical inspection and testing of consumer’s installation
CHAPTER V
GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATING
TO SUPPLY AND USE OF ENERGY
47. Testing of consumer’s installation
47A. Installation and Testing of Generating Units
48. Precautions against leakage before connection
49. Leakage on consumer’s premises
50. Supply and use of energy
50A. Additional provisions for supply and use of energy in multi-storeyed building
(more than 15 metres in height)
51. Provisions applicable to medium, high or extra-high voltage installations
52. Appeal to Inspector in regard to defects
53. Cost of inspection and test of consumer’s installation
54. Declared voltage of supply to consumer
55. Declared frequency of supply to consumer
56. Sealing of meters, and cut-outs
57. Meters, maximum demand indicators and other apparatus on consumer’s
premises
58. Point of commencement of supply
59. Precautions against failure of supply: Notice of failures
CHAPTER VI
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR LOW AND
MEDIUM VOLTAGES
60. Test for resistance of insulation
61. Connection with earth
61A. Earth leakage protective device
62. Systems at medium voltage
CHAPTER VII
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH AND
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGES
63. Approval by Inspector
64. Use of energy at high and extra-high voltage
64A. Additional provisions for use of energy at high and extra-high voltage
65. Testing, Operation and Maintenance
66. Metal sheathed electric supply lines. Precautions against excess leakage
67. Connection with earth
68. General conditions as to transformation and control of energy
69. Pole type sub-stations
70. Condensers
71. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage luminous tube sign
installation
72. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage electrode boilers
73. Supply to X-ray and high frequency installation
CHAPTER VIII
OVERHEAD LINES, UNDER GROUND CABLES AND GENERATING
STATIONS
74. Material and strength
75. Joints
76. Maximum stresses: Factors of safety
77. Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor
78. Clearance between conductors and trolley wires
79. Clearances from buildings of low and medium voltage lines and service
lines
80. Clearances from buildings of high and extra-high voltage lines
81. Conductors at different voltages on same supports
82. Erection of or alternation to buildings, structures, flood banks and elevation
of roads
82A. Transporting and Storing of material near overhead lines
83. Clearances: General
84. Routes: Proximity to aerodromes
85. Maximum interval between supports
86. Conditions to apply where telecommunication lines and power lines
are carried on same supports
87. Lines crossing or approaching each other
88. Guarding
89. Service-lines from Overhead lines
90. Earthing
91. Safety and protective devices
92. Protection against lightning
93. Unused overhead lines
CHAPTER IX
ELECTRIC TRACTION
94. Additional rules for electric traction
95. Voltage of supply to vehicle
96. Insulation of lines
97. Insulation of returns
98. Proximity to metallic pipes, etc.
99. Difference of potential on return
100. Leakage on conduit system
101. Leakage on system other than conduit system
102. Passengers not to have access to electric circuit
103. Current density in rails
104. Isolation of sections
105. Minimum size and strength of trolley-wire
106. Height of trolley-wire and length of span
107. Earthing of guard wires
107A. Proximity to magnetic observatories and laboratories
108. Records
CHAPTER X
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE
ADOPTED IN MINES AND OIL-FIELDS
109. Application of Chapter
110. Responsibility for observance
111. Notices
112. Plans
113. Lighting, communications and fire precautions
114. Isolation and fixing of transformer, switchgear, etc.
115. Method of earthing
116. Protective equipment
117. Earthing metal, etc.
118. Voltage limits
119. Transformers
120. Switchgear and terminals
121. Disconnection of supply
122. Cables
123. Flexible cables
124. Portable and transportable machines
125. Sundry precautions
126. Precautions where gas exists
127. Shot-firing
128. Signalling
129. Haulage
130. Earthing of neutral points
131. Supervision
132. Exemptions
CHAPTER XI
MISCELLANEOUS
133. Relaxation by Government
134. Relaxation by Inspector
135. Supply and use of energy by non-licensees and others
136. Responsibility of Agents and Managers
137. Mode of entry
138. Penalty for breaking seal
138A. Penality for breach of rule 44A
139. Penalty for breach of rule 45
140. Penalty for breach of rule 82
140A. Penalty for breach of rule 77, 79 or 80
141. Penalty for breach of rules
142. Application of rules
143. Repeal
ANNEXURE I
Specification relating to the deposition of silver
ANNEXURE II
Scale of fees for comparison with the Government of India standards referred to in
sub-rule (1) of rule 2
ANNEXURE III
Model form of draft licence under the Indian Electricity Act, 1910
ANNEXURE IV
Summary of technical and financial particulars for the year ended 31st March 19...
ANNEXURE V
Model form of Accounts
ANNUXURE VI
Model form of draft conditions of supply
ANNEXURE VII
Form of requisition under clause V (4) of the schedule to the Act
ANNEXURE VIII
Form of requisition for supply of energy under clause VI (5) of the schedule to the
Act
ANNEXURE IX
Form of order under sub-rule (4) of rules 5, sub-rule (2) of rule 46
ANNEXURE IX A
Model forms of inspection report
ANNUXURE X
Form of annual return for mines
ANNEXURE XI
Form of annual return for oil-fields
ANNEXURE XII
Log sheet for mines and oil-fields
ANNEXURE XIII
Form for reporting electric al accidents
ANNEXURE XIV
Guidelines for providing training as required under rule 3(2A)
APPENDIX I
Syllabus for the operating and supervisory staff engaged in the
operation and maintenance of the thermal power stations
APPENDIX II
1. Specialised mechanical course for operating & supervisory staff who will be
engaged on the mechanical side of the power plant
2. Specialised electrical course for operating and supervisory staff who will be
engaged in the electrical side of the power plant
APPENDIX III
Syllabus for skilled persons for assisting the operation and maintenance of thermal
power stations
APPENDIX IV
1. Specialised electrical course for skilled persons who will be engaged on the
electrical side of the power plant
2. Specialised mechanical course for skilled persons who will be engaged in
the mechanical side of the power station
APPENDIX V
Syllabus for operation and maintenance staff who will be engaged in the operation
and maintenance of hydroelectric generating station
APPENDIX VI
Syllabus for operation and maintenance staff in extra-high voltage sub-station
APPENDIX VII
(I) Assessment form for operating and supervisory staff
(II) Assessment form for operating and supervisory staff (for the use of Training
Department)
(III) Assessment form for skilled persons to assist operators and supervisors
(IV) Assessment form for skilled persons to assistant operators and supervisors
(for the use of Training Department)
MINISTRY OF IRRIGATION AND POWER
NOTIFICATION
NEW DELHI, THE 26TH JUNE 1956
THE INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 19561
SRO 1455- In exercise of the powers conferred by Section 37 of the Indian
Electricity Act, 1910 (IX of 1910), the Central Electricity Board hereby makes the
following rules, the same having been previously published as required by
subsection (1) of Section 38 of the said Act, namely: -
1. As published in Gazette of India, Pt. II (3), dt. 26.6.1956.
CHAPTER I
PRELIMINARY
1. Short title and commencement-
(1) These rules may be called the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
(2) They shall come into force at once.
2. Definitions-
(1) In these rules, unless the context otherwise requires, -
(a) “The Act” means the Indian Electricity Act, 1910;
(b) “Accessible” means within physical reach without the use of any appliance
or special effort;
(c) “Ampere” means a unit of electric current and is the unvarying electric
current which when passed through a solution of nitrate of silver in water, in
accordance with the specification set out in Annexure I, deposits silver at the rate
of 0.001118 of a gramme per second; the aforesaid unit is equivalent to the
current which, in passing through the suspended coil of wire forming part of the
instrument marked “Government of India Ampere Standard Verified” when the
suspended coil is in its sighted position, exerts a force which is exactly balanced
by the force exerted by gravity in Calcutta on the counter balancing iridio-platinum
weight of the said instrument;
(d) “Annexure” means an Annexure to these rules;
(e) “Apparatus” means electrical apparatus and includes all machines, fittings,
accessories and appliances in which conductors are used;
1[(ee) “Authorised person” means a person authorised under rule 3;]
(f) “Bare” means not covered with insulating materials;
(g) “Cable” means a length of insulated single conductor (solid or stranded or
of two or more such conductors, each provided with its own insulation, which are
laid up together. Such insulated conductor or conductors may or may not be
provided with an overall mechanical protective covering;
(gg) “Flexible cable” means a cable consisting of one or more cores each
formed of a group of wires, the diameter and the physical properties of the wires
and the insulating materials being such as to afford flexibility;
(h) “Circuit” means an arrangement of conductor or conductors for the purpose
of conveying energy and forming a system or a branch of a system;
(i) “Circuit breaker” means a device, capable of making and breaking the
circuit under all conditions, and unless otherwise specified, so designed as to
break the current automatically under abnormal conditions;
(j) “Concentric cable” means a composite cable comprising an inner conductor
which is insulated and one or more outer conductors which are insulated from one
another and are disposed over the insulation of, and more or less around, the
inner conductor;
(k) “Conductor” means any wire, cable, bar, tube, rail or plate used for
conducting energy and so arranged as to be electrically connected to a system;
(1) “Conduit” means rigid or flexible metallic tubing or mechanically strong and
fire resisting non-metallic tubing into which a cable or cables may be drawn for the
purpose of affording it or them mechanical protection;
(m) “Covered with insulating material” means adequately covered with
insulating material of such quality and thickness as to prevent danger;
(n) “Cut-out” means any appliance for automatically interrupting the
transmission of energy through any conductor when the current rises above a predetermined
amount, and shall also include fusible cutout;
(o) “Danger” means danger to health or danger to life or any part of body from
shock, burn or other injury to persons, or property, or from fire or explosion,
attendant upon the generation, transmission, transformation, conversion,
distribution or use of energy;
(p) “Dead” means at or about earth potential and disconnected from any live
system;
Provided that apparatus separated from a live conductor by a spark gap shall not
be deemed to be “dead”;
NOTE- The term “dead” is used only with reference to current carrying parts when
these parts are not live.
(q) “Earthed” or “connected with earth” means connected with the general
mass of earth in such manner as to ensure at all times an immediate discharge of
energy without danger;
(r) “Earthing system” means an electrical system in which all the conductors
are earthed;
2[(s) * * * * *]
(t) “Enclosed sub-station” means any premises or enclosure or part thereof,
being large enough to admit the entrance of a person after the apparatus therein is
in position, containing apparatus for transforming or converting energy to or from a
voltage at or above medium voltage (other than transforming or converting solely
for the operation of switchgear or instruments) with or without any other apparatus
for switching, controlling or otherwise regulating the energy, and includes the
apparatus therein;
(u) “Enclosed switch-station” means any premises or enclosure or part thereof,
being large enough to admit the entrance of a person after the apparatus therein is
in position, containing apparatus for switching, controlling or otherwise regulating
energy at or above medium voltage but not for transforming or converting energy
(other than for transforming or converting solely for the operation of switchgear or
instruments), and includes the apparatus therein;
3[(uu) “Flameproof enclosure” means an enclosure for electrical machinery or
apparatus that will withstand, when the covers or other access doors are properly
secured, an internal explosion of the inflammable gas or vapour which may enter
or originate inside the enclosure, without suffering damage and without
communicating the internal flammation (or explosion) to the external inflammable
gas or vapour in which it is designed to be used, through any joints or other
structural openings in the closure;]
(v) “Guarded” means covered, shielded, fenced or otherwise protected by
means of suitable casings, barrier, rails or metal screens to remove the possibility
of dangerous contact or approach by persons or objects to a point of danger;
4[(vv) “Hand-held portable apparatus” means an apparatus which is so designed
as to be capable of being held in the hands and moved while connected to a
supply of electricity;]
(w) “Inspector” means an Electrical Inspector appointed under section 36;
(x) “Inspector of Mines” means an Inspector appointed under the Mines Act,
1952 (35 of 1952);
(y) “Installation” means any composite electrical unit used for the purpose of
generating, transforming, transmitting, converting, distributing or utilizing energy;
(z) “Intrinsically safe” as applied to apparatus or associated circuits shall
denote that any sparking that may occur in normal working is incapable of causing
explosion of inflammable gas or vapour;
(aa) “Lighting arrestor” means a device which has the property of diverting to
earth any electrical surge of excessively high amplitude applied to its terminals
and is capable of interrupting follow current if present and restoring itself thereafter
to its original operating conditions;
5[(aaa) “Linked switch” means a switch with all the poles mechanically linked
so as to operate simultaneously;]
(ab) “Live” means electrically charged;
(ac) “Metallic covering” means mechanically strong metal covering surrounding
one or more conductors;
6[(ad) “Neutral conductor” means that conductor of a multi-wire system, the
voltage of which is normally intermediate between the voltages of the other
conductors of the system and shall also include return wire of the single phase
system;]
(ae) “Non-licensee” means a person generating, supplying, transmitting or using
energy to whom any of the provisions of Part III of the Act apply;
(af) “Occupier” means the owner or person in occupation of the premises where
energy is used or proposed to be used;
7[(aff) “Officer appointed to assist the Inspector” means an officer appointed under
rule 4A;]
(ag) “Ohm” means a unit of electric resistance and is the resistance offered to an
unvarying electric current by a column of mercury at the temperature of melting ice
14.4521 grammes in mass of an uniform cross-sectional area and of a length of
106.3 centimetres; the aforesaid unit is represented by the resistance between the
terminals of the instrument marked “Government of India Ohm Standard Verified”
to the passage of an electric current when the coil of wire, forming part of the
aforesaid instrument and connected to the aforesaid terminals is in all parts at a
temperature of 30OC;
(ah) “Open sparking” means sparking which owing to the lack of adequate
provisions for preventing the ignition of inflammable gas external to the apparatus
would ignite such inflammable gas;
(ai) “Overhead line” means any electric supplying, which is placed above
ground and in the open air but excluding live rails of a traction system;
(aj) “Owner”, “agent” and “manager” of a mine have the same meanings as are
assigned to them in the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952);
8[(ak) “Portable apparatus” means an apparatus which is so designed as to be
capable of being moved while in operation;]
(al) “Portable hand lamp” means a portable light-fitting provided with suitable
handle, guard and flexible cord connected to a plug;
(am) “Section” means a section of the Act;
(an) “Span” means the horizontal distance between two adjacent supporting
points of an overhead conductor;
(ao) “Street box” means a totally enclosed structure, either above or below
ground containing apparatus for transforming, switching, controlling or otherwise
regulating energy;
(ap) “Supplier” means a licensee, a non-licensee or any other supplier of energy,
9[including the Government];
(aq) “Switch” means a manually operated device for opening and closing or for
changing the connection of a circuit;
10[(aqa) “Switchboard” means an assembly including the switchgear for the
control of electrical circuits, electric connections and the supporting frame;]
(ar) “Switchgear” shall denote switches, circuit breakers, cut-outs and other
apparatus used for the operation, regulation and control of circuits;
(as) “System” means an electrical system in which all the conductors and
apparatus are electrically connected to a common source of electric supply;
(at) “Transportable apparatus” means apparatus which is operated in a fixed
position but which is so designed as to be capable of being moved readily from
one place to another;
(au) “Volt” means a unit of electromotive force and is the electric pressure,
which, when steadily applied to a conductor, the resistance of which is one ohm,
will produce a current of one amphere;
(av) “Voltage” means the difference of electric potential measured in volts
between any two conductors or between any part of either conductor and the earth
as measured by a suitable voltmeter and is said to be;
“Low” where the voltage does not exceed 250 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“Medium” where the voltage does not exceed 650 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“High” where the voltage does not exceed 33,000 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“Extra high” where the voltage exceeds 33,000 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules.
(2) All other words and expressions used herein and not defined shall have the
meanings respectively assigned to them in the Act.
1. Ins. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 31.12.1977.
2. Clause (s) omitted by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
3. Ins. by G.S.R. 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
4. Ins. by GSR 225, dt. 10.2.1961, w.e.f. 25.2.1961.
5. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
6. Subs. by GSR 522, dt. 17.3.1970, w.e.f. 4.4.1970.
7. Ins. by G.S.R. 336, dt, 28.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
8. Subs. by GSR 225, dt. 10.2.1961.
9. Ins. by GSR 1640, dt. 26.9.1963, w.e.f. 12.10.1963.
10. Ins. by GSR 170, dt. 15.1.1979, w.e.f. 3.2.1979.
3. Authorisation-
(1) A supplier or a consumer, or the owner, agent or manager of a mine, or the
agent of any company operating in an oil-field or the owner of a drilled well in an
oil-field or a contractor for the time being under contract with a supplier or a
consumer to carry out duties incidental to the generation, transformation,
transmission, conversion, distribution or use of energy may authorise any person
for the purpose of any or all of the following, namely:-
Sub-rule (2) of rule 36, clause (a) sub-rule (1) of rule 51, clause (a) of sub-rule (1)
and 1[clauses (e) 2[and (f)] of sub-rule (2)] of rule 64, sub rule (2) of rule 110, subrules
(1) and (4) of rule 121, sub-rule (4) of rule 123, rule 124 and sub-rule (8) of
rule 125.
3[(2) No person shall be authorised under sub-rule (1) unless he is competent to
perform the duties assigned to him and possesses either an appropriate certificate
of competency or permit to work.]
4[(2A) (a) No person shall be authorised to operate or undertake maintenance
of any part or whole of a generating station of capacity 100 MW and above
together with the associated sub-station unless he is adequately qualified and has
successfully undergone the type of training specified in Annexure XIV;
Provided that the provisions contained in this sub-rule shall have effect in respect
of the persons already authorised to operate or undertake maintenance of any part
or whole of a generating station as aforesaid from the date to be specified by the
appropriate Government, but such a date shall not be later than a period of 5[6
years, 2 months] from the date this rule comes into force.
(b) The appropriate Government may, on the recommendations of the owner of
such generating station, relax the conditions stipulated in clause (a) of this subrule
for any engineer and such other person who have already sufficient
experience in the operation and maintenance of a generating station.
(c) The owner of a generating station, in consultation with Central Electricity
Authority may alter the duration and manner of training in respect of those persons
who have been already engaged in the operation and maintenance of a generating
station or a sub-station.]
6[(2B) The provisions contained in rule 3(2A) will also be applicable in respect of
other sub-stations of 132 KV and above from a date to be specified by the
appropriate Government but such a date shall not be later than 3 years from which
this rule comes into force.]
(3) No person shall be deemed to be authorised under sub-rule (1) unless his
name has been entered in a list maintained at the office or premises of the person
authorizing him, and giving the purpose for which such person is authorised and
the entry has been attested by the authorised person and the person authorising
him.
(4) Every list maintained under sub-rule (3) shall be produced before an
Inspector 7[or any officer of a specified rank and class appointed to assist the
Inspector] when required.
8[(5) An Inspector may cancel or amend, in such manner as he considers
necessary, any authorisation, made under sub-rule (1).
9[(6) In every registered factory, where more than 250 KW of electrical load is
connected, there shall be a person authorised by the management of the factory
for ensuring the observance of the safety provisions laid under the Act and the
rules made thereunder, who shall periodically inspect such installation, get them
tested and keep a record thereof and such records shall be made available to the
Inspector 2[or any officer of a specified rank and class appointed to assist the
Inspector], if and when required.]
1. Ins. by GSR 1640, dt. 26.9.1963, w.e.f, 12.10.1963.
2. Ins. by G.S.R. 256, dt. 26.3.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
3. Subs. by G.S.R. 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
4. Ins. by G.S.R. 461, dt. 24.4.1981, w.e.f. 9.5.1981.
5. Subs. by G.S.R. 481, dt. 10.6.1987, w.e.f. 20.6.1987.
6. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
7. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
8. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
9. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
CHAPTER II
INSPECTORS
1[4. Qualification of Inspectors- No person shall be appointed to be an
Inspector, unless-
(a) He possesses a degree in electrical engineering or its equivalent from
recognised University or Institution; and
(b) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least eight years in the
practice of electrical engineering of which not less than two years have been spent
in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity, or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility;
Provided that the appropriate Government may, for a period of seven years
commencing on the date the Indian Electricity (Amendment) Rules, 1986 are
brought into force, also appoint a person possessing recognised Diploma in
Electrical Engineering and having prescribed experience to be an Inspector in
respect of low and medium voltage installations only]
1. Subs. by GSR 772, dt. 5.9.1986, w.e.f. 20.9.1986.
1[4A. Appointment of officers to assist the Inspectors-
(1) The appropriate Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
appoint as many officers as it thinks fit to assist an Inspector.
2[(2) The appropriate Government may, by a separate notification in the Official
Gazette, authorise certain officers appointed under sub-rule (1) for the purposes of
3[sub-rule (4) and sub-rule (6) of rule 3,] sub-rule (3) and sub-rule (4) of the rule 5,
rule 9, rule 10, clauses (c) of sub-rule (1) of the rule 32, clause (b) of sub-rule (1)
and clause (c) of sub-rule (2) of rule 46, sub-rule (1) of rule 49, 3[sub-rule (3) of
rule 51, sub-rule (3) of rule 59,] sub-rule (6) of rule 61 4[and clause (b) of sub-rule
(5) of rule 671.]
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
2. Subs. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 13.12.1977.
3. Ins. by G.S.R. 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Subs. by G.S.R. 29, dt. 24.12.1983, w.e.f. 24.1.1984.
1[4B. Qualification of officers appointed to assist the Inspectors. -
2[(1) No person shall be appointed as an officer to assist an Inspector, unless-
7[(a) (i) He possesses a Degree in Electrical Engineering or its equivalent
from a recognised University or Institution; and
(ii) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least three years in the
practice of electrical engineering, of which not less than one year has been spent
in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity, or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility;
Provided that the appropriate Government may relax the requirements of
experience in case of officers otherwise well qualified.]
Or
3[(b) (i) He possesses a diploma in electrical engineering or its equivalent
from a recognised institution; and
(ii) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least six years in the
practice of electrical engineering, of which not less than two years have been
spent in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility.]
4[(2) The persons appointed under rule 4A shall undergo such training as the
appropriate Government may consider it necessary for the purpose and such
training shall be completed to the satisfaction of the appropriate Government.]
5[(3) The appropriate Government may relax requirements of practical
experience in case of officers otherwise found suitable but a notification under
sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in case of such officers shall be issued only after they have
acquired the experience as required by sub-rule (1).]
1. Subs. by G.S.R. 722, dt. 5.9.1986, w.e.f. 20.9.1986.
2. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
3. Clauses (a) and (b) renumbered as clauses (a) and (b) of sub-rule (1) by
GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
4. Clause (c) ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987, renumbered as
sub-rule (2) by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
5. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
5. Entry and inspection-
(1) Any Inspector or any officer appointed to assist an Inspector may enter,
inspect and examine any place, carriage or vessel in which he has reason to
believe that there is any appliance or apparatus used in the generation,
transmission, transformation, conversion, distribution or use of energy and may
carry out tests therein.
(2) Every supplier, consumer, owner and occupier shall afford at all times all
reasonable facilities to any such Inspector or officer to make such examinations
and tests as may be necessary to satisfy himself as to the due observance of the
provisions of the Act, the terms of the licence (if any) and these rules.
(3) Every supplier and every owner of a generating station or of a high/extra
high voltage installation shall, if required so to do by in Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A
provide reasonable means for carrying out all tests, prescribed by or under the
Act, of the appliances or apparatus used for the supply or use of energy by him as
the case may be.
(4) An Inspector, or any officer appointed to assist an Inspector and authorised
under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A, may serve an order in the form set out in Annexure
IX, upon any supplier, consumer, owner or occupier, calling upon him to comply
with any specified rule and the person so served shall thereupon comply with the
order within the period named therein, and shall report in writing to the Inspector or
the officer serving the order, as the case may be, when the order is complied with.
Provided that, if within the period specified in the aforesaid order an appeal is filed
against the order, the appellate authority may suspend its operation pending the
decision of the appeal.
6. Appeals-
(1) An appeal against an order served under these rules shall lie(
a) If the order is served by an officer appointed to assist an Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A, to the Inspector;
(b) If the order is served by an Inspector, to the Central Government or the
State Government, as the case may be.
(2) In the case of an order of an Inspector on an appeal preferred to him under
clause (a) of sub-rule (1), a further appeal shall lie to the Central Government or
the State Government, as the case may be.
(3) Every appeal made under sub-rule (1) shall be in writing, shall be
accompanied by a copy of the order appealed against and shall be presented
within 3 months of the date on which such order has been served or delivered or is
deemed to have been served or delivered as the case may be.
7. Amount of fees-
(1) The fees set out in Annexure-II shall be payable in respect of the services
therein mentioned where the tests are carried out by comparison with the
Government of India Standards referred to in sub-rule (1) of rule 2.
(2) The Central Government or the State Government as the case may be,
may levy such fees for testing and inspection and generally for the services of
Inspectors or any officers appointed to assist the Inspector as it may from time to
time by general or special order, direct; and may, if it thinks fit, remit any fee or any
portion thereof.
8. Incidence of fees recoverable in the cases of dispute- Where an Inspector
is called in to decide any difference or dispute and where a fee for such service is
recoverable, the Inspector shall decide by whom such fees shall be payable.
9. Submission of records- An Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A may require a supplier or an
owner to submit to him for examination any records of tests made in connection
with his works and he shall comply with such requisition. Similarly, a supplier or
an owner may require the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector
and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A to submit to him for examination any
records of tests made by the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in connection with his works
and the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised
under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A shall comply with such requisition.
10. List of consumers- An inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A may require a supplier to
submit to him a list of all persons supplied with energy by him, the addresses at
which such energy is supplied, the month of connecting services, the voltage of
supply, the connected load, the purpose of supply and the name of contractor
carrying out the installation work and the supplier shall comply with such
requisition.
CHAPTER III
LICENCE
11. Application for licence-
(1) Every application for a licence shall be signed by or on behalf of the
applicant and addressed to such officer as the State Government may designate
in this behalf and it shall be accompanied by-
(a) Six copies, in print, of the draft licence as proposed by the applicant, with,
he name and address of the applicant and of his agent (if any), printed on the
outside of the draft;
(b) Three copies, each signed by the applicant, of maps of the proposed area
of supply and of the streets or roads in which the supply of energy is to be
compulsory, which shall be so marked or coloured as to define any portion of such
area and streets or roads which are under the administrative control of any local
authority and shall be on a scale-
(i) Of not less than 10 centimetres to a kilometre, or
(ii) If no such maps are available, of not less than that of the largest scale
ordinance maps available, or
(iii) On such other scales as may be approved by State Government;
(c) A list of any local authorities vested with the administration of any portion of
the area of supply;
(d) An approximate statement describing any lands which the applicant
proposes to acquire for the purpose of the licence under the provisions of the Land
Acquisition Act, 1894 (1 of 1894);
(e) An approximate statement of the capital proposed to be expended in
connection with the undertaking and such other particulars as the State
Government may require;
(f) If the applicant is a Company which is registered under any of the
enactments relating to Companies for the time being in force in India or is a
Corporation by an Act of the Parliament, a copy of the Memorandum and Articles
of Association; and
(g) A treasury receipt for such fee not exceeding fifteen hundred rupees, as the
State Government may require, paid into a Government treasury in the State
concerned, unless such fee is remitted, wholly or in part, by general or special
order of the State Government.
(2) If the application for a licence is rejected or if a licence is revoked under
sub-section (2) of section 4 as to the whole or any part of the area of supply, the
State Government may at its discretion refund, wholly or in part, the fee referred to
in clause (g) of sub-rule (1).
12. Copies of maps and draft licence for public inspection- The applicant shall
deposit at his own office and of his agents (if any) and at the office of every local
authority invested with the administration of any portion of the proposed area of
supply-
(a) Copies of the maps referred to in clause (b) of sub-rule (1) of rule 11 for
public inspection; and
(b) A sufficient number of copies of the draft licence to be furnished to all
persons applying for them at a price not exceeding twenty-five 1[* * *] paise per
copy.
1. The word “naye” omitted by GSR 256, dt. 26.3.1983.
13. Contents of draft licence- The draft licence shall contain the following
particulars:
(a) A short title descriptive of the proposed undertaking together with the
address and description of the applicant, or in the case of a firm, the names of all
the directors or partners of the firm;
(b) A Statement of the boundaries of the proposed area of supply;
(c) If the generating station is situated or is to be situated outside the area of
supply or if any intervening area not included in the area of supply is to be
crossed, a list of the streets not included in the area of supply along or across
which electric supply lines are to be laid down or placed;
(d) The proposed limits within which and the conditions under which the supply
of energy is to be compulsory or permissive, the nature and amount of the supply
(if limited) and the like;
(e) A list of the streets (if any) which are repairable neither by the Central or the
State Government nor by a local authority and of the railways and tramways (if
any), the soil or pavement of which the applicant seeks powers to open or break
up, and the names of the persons or designations of authorities by whom such
streets are repairable or who are for the time being entitled to work such railways
or tramways;
(f) The proposed periods after which the right to purchase is to take effect;
(g) A statement of any special terms of purchase or orders proposed to be
made under section 10; and
(h) Any proposed modification of the Schedule to the Act to be made under
clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3.
14. Form of draft licence- The form of draft licence contained in Annexure III
may, with such variation as the circumstances of each case require, be used for
the purposes of rules 11 and 13 and if used, shall be sufficient.
15. Advertisement of application and contents thereof-
(1) The applicant shall, within fourteen days from the submission of the
application under rule 11, publish notice of his application by public advertisement
and such advertisement shall publish such particulars as the State Government
may specify.
(2) The advertisement shall be headed by a short title corresponding to that
given at the head of the draft licence and shall give the addresses of the offices at
which, under rule 12, copies of maps therein referred to may be inspected and the
copies of draft licence perused or purchased and shall state that every local
authority, company or person, desirous of making any representation with
reference to the application to the State Government, may do so by letter
addressed to such officer as the State Government may designate in this behalf
within three months of the date of issue of the first advertisement.
(3) The advertisement shall be inserted by the applicant in at least two
successive issues of such newspapers as the State Government, having regard to
its circulation among persons likely to be interested, may direct, and in the
absence of any such direction, in at least two successive issues of any
newspaper, in any newspaper, published within the State.
(4) The applicant shall send a copy of each of the two successive issues of the
newspaper containing the advertisement to such officer as the State Government
may designate in this behalf as soon as the second issue has appeared and the
State Government shall publish the advertisement at least once in the Official
Gazette within six weeks from the date of the first advertisement published under
sub-rule (3).
Provided that any failure or delay on the part of the State Government in
publishing the advertisement shall not of itself preclude the grant of a licence.
16. Amendment of draft licence- Any person who desires to have any
amendment made in the draft licence shall deliver a statement of the amendment
to the applicant and to such officer as the State Government may designate in this
behalf within the time allowed under sub-rule (2) of rule 15 for the submission of
representations referring to the application.
17. Local enquiries- If any person locally interested objects to the grant of a
licence applied for under the Act, the State Government shall, if either the
applicant or the objector so desires, cause a local enquiry to be held of which the
notice in writing shall be given to both the applicant and the objector.
Provided that the State Government may refuse such an enquiry if in its opinion
the objection is of a trifling or vexatious nature.
18. Approval of draft licence- When the State Government has approved a draft
licence, either in its original form or in a modified form, such officer as the State
Government may designate in this behalf shall inform the applicant of such
approval and of the form in which it is proposed to grant the licence.
19. Notification of grant of licence- On receiving an intimation in writing from the
applicant that he is willing to accept a licence in the form approved by the State
Government, the State Government shall publish the licence within two months by
a notification in the Official Gazette, together with a statement that it has been
granted.
20. Date of commencement of licence- The date of a notification under rule 19
shall be deemed to be the date of commencement of the licence.
21. Deposit of maps- When a licence has been granted, three sets of maps
showing, as regards such licence, the particulars specified in clause (b) of sub-rule
(1) of rule 11 shall be signed and dated to correspond with the date of the
notification of the grant of the licence by such officer as the State Government may
designate in this behalf. One set of such maps shall be retained as the deposited
maps by the said officer and of the remaining two sets, one shall be furnished to
the State Electricity Board constituted under section 5 of the Electricity (Supply)
Act, 1948, and the other to the licensee.
22. Deposit of printed copies-
(1) Every person who is granted a licence, shall within thirty days of the grant
thereof-
(a) Have adequate number of copies of the licence printed;
(b) Have adequate number of maps prepared showing the area of supply and
the compulsory areas specified in the licence;
(c) Arrange to exhibit a copy of such licence and maps for public inspection at
all reasonable times at his head office, his local offices (if any), and at the office of
every authority within the area of supply.
(2) Every such licence shall, within the aforesaid period of thirty days supply
free of charge one copy of the licence and the relevant maps to every local
authority within the area of supply and shall also make necessary arrangements
for the sale of printed copies of the licence to all persons applying for the same, at
a price no’, exceeding twenty-five 1[***] paise per copy.
1. The word “naye” omitted by GSR 256, dt. 26.3.1983.
23. Application for written consent of State Government in certain cases. -If a
licensee desires the written consent of the State Government under sub-section
(5) of section 12 to enable him to open or break up the soil or pavement of any
street (which is repairable neither by the Central or the State Government nor by a
local authority), or any railway or tramway, he shall apply for such consent in
writing to such officer as the State Government may designate in this behalf and
shall describe accurately the street, railway or tramway, which he seeks power to
open or break up and the names of the persons or designations of the authorities
by the whom such street is repairable or who are for the time being entitled to work
such railway or tramway; and the extent to which he purposes to open or break up
the same.
24. Amendment of licence-
(1) If a licensee desires that any alterations or amendments should be made in
the terms and conditions of his licence under subsection (1) of section 4A, he shall
submit a written application to the officer designated by the State Government
under rule 11 and shall within fourteen days from the submission of the application
publish notice of his application by public advertisement; and the provisions of
sub-rules (2), (3) and (4) of rule 15 shall apply to such publication.
(2) The State Government shall within six months of the date of submission of
the application either approve of the alterations or amendments in the form
proposed by the licensee or in any other modified form which he accepts or rejects
them. When the State Government has approved of the alterations or
amendments either in the form proposed by the licensee or in any other modified
form which he accepts, it shall notify the alterations or amendments so approved,
in the Official Gazette.
25. Sale of Plans- Copies of plans or sections such as are referred to in Clause
XVI of the Schedule to the Act shall be supplied by the licensee to every applicant
at a price not exceeding one rupee per 1000 square centimetres.
26. Preparations and submission of accounts-
(1) Every licensee, unless exempted under section 11, shall cause the
accounts of his undertaking to be made upto the thirty-first day of March each
year.
(2) Such licensee shall prepare and render an annual statement of his
accounts in accordance with the provisions of section 11 within a period of six
months from the aforesaid date, or such extended period as the State Government
may authorise after it is satisfied that the time allowed is insufficient owing to any
cause beyond the control of the licensee; and the statement shall be rendered in
quadruplicate if the State Government so desires.
(3) The accounts shall be made up in the prescribed forms set out in
Annexures IV and V and shall be rendered in Indian currency. All the forms shall
be signed by the licensee or his accredited agent or manager.
(4) The State Government may, by special or general order, direct that in
addition to the Submission of the annual statements of accounts in the forms
prescribed in sub-rule (3), a licensee shall submit to the State Government or such
other authority as it may appoint in this behalf such additional information as it may
require for the purpose.
27. Model conditions of supply-
(1) Without prejudice to the powers conferred by section 21 on the State
Government in this behalf, the model conditions of supply contained in Annexure
VI may, with such variations as the circumstances of each case require, be
adopted by the licensee for the purpose of sub-section (2) of that section with the
previous sanction of the State Government.
(2) The licensee shall always keep in his office an adequate number of printed
copies of the sanctioned conditions of supply and shall, on demand, sell such
copies to any applicant at a price not exceeding fifty paise per copy.
28. Forms of requisitions- Requisitions under sub-clause (4) of Clause V or
sub-clause (5) of Clause VI, as the case may be, of the Schedule to the Act shall
be made in the form set out in Annexure VII or Annexure VIII.
CHAPTER IV
1[GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS]
29. Construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric
supply lines and apparatus-
1[(1) All electric supply lines and apparatus shall be of sufficient ratings for
power, insulation and estimated fault current and of sufficient mechanical strength,
for the duty which they may be required to perform under the environmental
conditions of installation, and shall be constructed, installed, protected, worked
and maintained in such a manner as to ensure safety of 2[human beings, animals
and property].]
(2) Save as otherwise provided in these rules, the relevant code of practice of
the 3[Bureau of Indian Standards] 4[including National Electrical Code] if any may
be followed to carry out the purposes of this rule and in the event of any
inconsistency, the provision of these rules shall prevail.
(3) The material and apparatus used shall conform to the relevant
specifications of the 3[Bureau of Indian Standards] where such specifications have
already been laid down.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
2. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Subs. by GR. 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 5.9.1987.
30. Service lines and apparatus on consumer’s premises-
(1) The supplier shall ensure that all electric supply lines, wires, fittings and
apparatus belonging to him or under his control, which are on a consumer’s
premises, are in a safe condition and in all respects fit for supplying energy and
the supplier shall take due precautions to avoid danger arising on such premises
from such supply lines, wires, fittings and apparatus.
(2) Service-lines placed by the supplier on the premises of a consumer which
are underground or which are accessible shall be so insulated and protected by
the supplier as to be secured under all ordinary conditions against electrical,
mechanical, chemical or other injury to the insulation.
(3) The consumer shall, as far as circumstances permit, take precautions for
the safe custody of the equipment on his premises belonging to the supplier.
(4) The consumer shall also ensure that the installation under his control is
maintained in a safe condition.
31. Cut-out on consumer’s premises(
1) The supplier shall provide a suitable cut-out in each conductor of every
service-line other than an earthed or earthed neutral conductor or the earthed
external conductor of a concentric cable within a consumer’s premises, in an
accessible position. Such cut-out shall be contained within an adequately
enclosed fireproof receptacle.
Where more than one consumer is supplied through a common service-line, each
such consumer shall be provided with an independent cut-out at the point of
junction to the common service.
(2) Every electric supply line other than the earth or earthed neutral conductor
of any system or the earthed external conductor of a concentric cable shall be
protected by a suitable cut-out by its owner.
1[(3) * * * * *]
1. Sub-rule (3) omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 5.9.1987.
32. Identification of earthed and earthed neutral conductors and position of
switches and cut-outs therein- Where the conductors include an earthed conductor
of a two-wire system or an earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected thereto, the following conditions shall be
complied with--
(1) An indication of a permanent nature shall be provided by the owner of the
earthed or earthed neutral conductor, or the conductor which is to be connected
thereto, to enable such conductor to be distinguished from any live conductor.
Such indication shall be provided-
(a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral conductor is the property of the
supplier, at or near the point of commencement of supply;
(b) Where a conductor forming part of a consumer’s system is to be connected
to the supplier’s earthed or earthed neutral conductor, at the point where such
connection is to be made;
(c) In all other cases, at a point corresponding to the point of commencement
of supply or at such other points as may be approved by an Inspector or any
officer appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule
4A.
(2) No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked switch arranged to operate
simultaneously on the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and live conductors
shall be inserted or remain inserted in any earthed or earthed neutral conductor of
a two wire-system or in any earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire
system or in any conductor connected thereto with the following exceptions: -
(a) A link for testing purposes, or
(b) A switch for use in controlling a generator or transformer.
33. Earthed terminal on consumer’s premises-
(1) The supplier shall provide and maintain on the consumer’s premises for the
consumer’s use a suitable earthed terminal in an accessible position at or near the
point of commencement of supply as defined under rule 58.
Provided that in the case of medium, high or extra-high voltage installation the
consumer shall, in addition to the afore mentioned earthing arrangement, provide
his own earthing system with an independent electrode.
Provided further that the supplier may not provide any earthed terminal in the case
of installations already connected to his system on or before the date to be
specified by the State Government in this behalf if he is satisfied that the
consumer’s earthing arrangement is efficient.
(2) The consumer shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent mechanical
damage to the earthed terminal and its lead belonging to the supplier.
1[(3) The supplier may recover from the consumer the cost of installation on the
basis of schedule of charges notified in advance and where such schedule of
charges is not notified, the procedure prescribed, in sub-rule (5) of rule 82 will
apply]
1. Subs. by GSR 1074, dt. 5.11.1985, w.e.f. 16.11.1985.
34. Accessibility of bare conductors- Where bare conductors are used in a
building, the owner of such conductors shall-
(a) Ensure that they are inaccessible;
(b) Provide in readily accessible position switches for rendering them dead
whenever necessary; and
(c) Take such other safety measures as are considered necessary by the
Inspector.
35. Danger Notices- The owner of every medium, high and extra-high voltage
installation shall affix permanently in a conspicuous position a danger notice in
Hindi or English and the local language of the district, with a sign of skull and
bones 1[of a design as per the relevant ISS No. 2551] on(
a) Every motor, generator, transformer and other electrical plant and
equipment together with apparatus used for controlling or regulating the same;
(b) All supports of high and extra-high voltage overhead lines which can be
easily climb-upon without the aid of ladder or special appliances;
Explanation-- Rails, tubular poles, wooden supports, reinforced cement concrete
poles without steps, I-sections and channels, shall be deemed as supports which
cannot be easily climbed upon for the purposes of this clause.
(c) Luminous tube sign requiring high voltage supply, X-ray and similar highfrequency
installations;
Provided that where it is not possible to affix such notices on any generator, motor
transformer of other apparatus, they shall be affixed as near as possible thereto;
or the word ‘danger’ and the voltage of the apparatus concerned shall be
permanently painted on it.
Provided further that where the generator, motor, transformer of other apparatus is
within an enclosure one notice affixed to the said enclosure shall be sufficient for
the purposes of this rule.
1. Added by GSR 512, dt. 29.6.1983, w.e.f. 16.7.1983.
36. Handling of electric supply lines and apparatus-
(1) Before any conductor or apparatus is handled adequate precautions shall
be taken, by earthing or other suitable means, to discharge electrically such
conductor or apparatus, and any adjacent conductor or apparatus if there is
danger therefrom, and to prevent any conductor or apparatus from being
accidentally or inadvertently electrically charged when persons are working
thereon.
Every person who is working on an electric supply line or apparatus or both shall
be provided with tools and devices such as gloves, rubber shoes, safety belts,
ladders, earthing devices, helmets, line testers, hand lines and the like for
protecting him from mechanical and electrical injury. Such tools and devices shall
always be maintained in sound and efficient working conditions:
(2) No person shall work on any live electric supply line or apparatus and no
person shall assist such person on such work, unless he is authorised in that
behalf, and takes the safety measures approved by the Inspector.
1[* * *]
(3) Every telecommunication line on supports carrying a high or extra-high
voltage line shall, for the purpose of working thereon, be deemed to be a high
voltage line.
1. Proviso omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
37. Supply to vehicles, cranes, etc.- Every person owning a vehicle, travelling
crane or the like to which energy is supplied from an external source shall ensure
that it is efficiently controlled by a suitable switch enabling all voltage to be cut off
in one operation and, where such vehicle, travelling crane or the like runs on metal
rails, the owner shall ensure that the rails are electrically continuous and earthed.
38. Cables for portable or transportable apparatus-
(1) Flexible cables shall not be used for portable or transportable motors,
generators, transformer rectifiers, electric drills, electric sprayers, welding sets or
any other portable or transportable apparatus unless they are heavily insulated
and adequately protected from mechanical injury.
(2) Where the protection is by means of metallic covering, the covering shall be
in metallic connection with the frame of any such apparatus and earth.
(3) The cables shall be three core type and four-core type for portable and
transportable apparatus working on single phase and three phases supply
respectively and the wire meant to be used for ground connection shall be easily
identifiable.
39. Cables protected by bituminous materials-
(a) Where the supplier or the owner has brought into use an electric supply line
(other than an overhead line) which is not completely enclosed in a continuous
metallic covering connected with earth and is insulated or protected in situ by
composition or material of a bituminous character-
(i) Any pipe, conduit or the like into which such electric supply line may have
been drawn or placed shall, unless other arrangements are approved by the
Inspector in any particular case, be effectively sealed at its point of entry into any
street box so as to prevent any flow of gas to or from the street box; and
(ii) Such electric supply line shall be periodically inspected and tested where
accessible, and the result of each such inspection and test shall be duly recorded
by the supplier or the owner.
(2) It shall not be permissible for the supplier or the owner after the coming into
force of these rules, to bring into use any further electric supply line as aforesaid
which is insulated or protected in situ by any composition or material known to be
liable to produce noxious or explosive gases on excessive heating.
40. Street boxes-
(1) Street boxes shall not contain gas pipes, and precautions shall be taken to
prevent, as far as reasonably possible, any influx of water or gas.
(2) Where electric supply lines forming part of different systems pass through
the same street box, they shall be readily distinguishable from one another and all
electric supply lines at high or extra-high voltage in street boxes shall be
adequately supported and protected to as to prevent risk of damage to or danger
from adjacent electric supply lines.
(3) All street boxes shall be regularly inspected for the purpose of detecting the
presence of gas and if any influx or accumulation is discovered, the owner shall
give immediate notice to any authority or company who have gas mains in the
neighbourhood of the street box and in cases where a street box is large enough
to admit the entrance of a person after the electric supply lines or apparatus
therein have been placed in position, ample provision shall be made-
(a) To ensure that any gas which may by accident have obtained access to the
box shall escape before a person is allowed to enter; and
(b) For the prevention of danger from sparking.
(4) The owners of all street boxes or pillars containing circuits or apparatus
shall ensure that their covers and doors are so provided that they can be opened
only by means of a key or a special appliance.
41. Distinction of different circuits- The owner of every generating station, substation,
junction-box or pillar in which there are any circuits or apparatus, whether
intended for operation at different voltages or at the same voltage, shall ensure by
means of indication of a permanent nature that the respective circuits are readily
distinguishable from one another.
1[41A. Distinction of the installations having more than one feed- The owner of the
every installation including sub-station, double pole structure, four pole structure or
any other structure having more than one feed, shall ensure by means of
indication of a permanent nature, that the installation is readily distinguishable
from other installations.]
1. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
42. Accidental charge- The owners of all circuits and apparatus shall so
arrange them that there shall be no danger of any part thereof becoming
accidentally charged to any voltage beyond the limits of voltage for which they are
intended.
Where A.C. and D.C. circuits are installed on the same support they shall be so
arranged and protected that they shall not come into contact with each other when
live.
43. Provisions applicable to protective equipment-
(1) Fire buckets filled with clean dry sand and ready for immediate use for
extinguishing fires, in addition to fire extinguishers suitable for dealing with electric
fires, shall be conspicuously marked and kept in all generating stations, enclosed
sub-stations and switch stations in convenient situation.
The fire extinguishes shall be tested for satisfactory operation at least once a year
and record of such tests shall be maintained.
(2) First-aid boxes or cupboards, conspicuously marked and equipped with
such contents as the State Government may specify, shall be provided and
maintained in every generating station, enclosed sub-station and enclosed switch
station so as to be readily accessible during all working hours. All such boxes and
cupboards shall, except in the case of unattended sub-stations and switch
stations, be kept in charge of responsible persons who are trained in first-aid
treatment and one of such person shall be available during working hours.
1[(3) Two or more gas masks shall be provided conspicuously and installed and
maintained at accessible places in every generating station with capacity of 5 MW
and above and enclosed sub-station with transformation capacity of 5 MVA and
above for use in the event of fire or smoke.
Provide that where more than one generator with capacity of 5 MW and above is
installed in a power station, each generator would be provided with at least two
separate gas masks in accessible and conspicuous position.
Provided further that adequate number of gas masks would be provided by the
owner of every generating station and enclosed sub-station with capacity less than
5MW and 5MVA respectively, if so desired by the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
44. Instructions for restoration of persons suffering from electric shock-
(1) Instructions, in English or Hindi and the local language of the district and
where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi for the restoration of
persons suffering from electric shock, shall be affixed by the owner in a
conspicuous place in every generating station, enclosed sub-station, enclosed
switch-station and in every factory as defined in clause (m) of section 2 of the
Factories Act, 1948 (63 of 1948) in which electricity is used and in such other
premises where electricity is used as the Inspector or any officer appointed to
assist the Inspector may, by notice in writing served on the owner, direct.
(2) Copies of the instructions shall be supplied on demand by an officer or
officers appointed by the Central or the State Government in this behalf at a price
to be fixed by the Central or the State Government.
(3) The owner of every generating station, enclosed sub-station, enclosed
switch-station and every factory or other premises to which this rule applies, shall
ensure that all authorised persons employed by him are acquainted with and are
competent to apply the instructions referred to in sub-rule (1).
(4) In every manned high voltage or extra-high voltage generating station, substation
or switch station, an artificial respirator shall be provided and kept in good
working condition.
1[44A. Intimation of Accident- If any accident occurs in connection with the
generation, transmission, supply or use of energy in or in connection with, any part
of the electric supply lines or other works of any person and the accident results in
or is likely to have resulted in loss of human or animal life or in any injury to a
human being or an animal, such person or any authorised person of the State
Electricity Board/Supplier, not below the rank of a Junior Engineer or equivalent
shall send to the Inspector a telegraphic report within 24 hours of the knowledge of
the occurrence of the fatal accident and a written report in the form set out in
Annexure XIII within 48 hours of the knowledge of occurrence of fatal and all other
accidents. Where practicable a telephonic message should also be given to the
Inspector immediately the accident comes to the knowledge of the authorised
officer of the State Electricity Board/ Supplier or other person concerned.]
1. Subs. by GSR 1049, dt. 17.10.1985, w.e.f. 9.11.1985.
45. Precautions to be adopted by consumers 1[owners occupiers], electrical
contractors, electrical workmen and suppliers-
(1) No electrical installation work, including additions, alterations, repairs and
adjustments to existing installations, except such replacement of lamps, fans,
fuses, switches, low voltage domestic appliances and fittings as in no way alters
its capacity or character, shall be carried out upon the premises of or on behalf of
any 2[consumer, supplier, owner or occupier] for the purpose of supply to such
2[consumer, supplier, owner or occupier] except by an electrical contractor
licensed in this behalf by the State Government and under the direct supervision of
a person holding a certificate of competency and by a person holding a permit
issued or recognised by the State Government.
Provided that in the case of works executed for or on behalf of the Central
Government and in the case of installations in mines, oil fields and railways, the
Central Government and in other cases the State Government may, by notification
in the Official Gazette, exempt, on such conditions as it may impose, any such
work described therein either generally or in the case of any specified class of
2[consumers, suppliers, owners or occupiers] from so much of this sub-rule as
requires such work to be carried out by an electrical contractor licensed by the
State Government in this behalf.
3[(2) No electrical installation work which has been carried out in contravention of
sub-rule (1) shall either be energised or connected to the works of any supplier.]
4[(3) * *]
1. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
4. Sub-rule (3) omitted by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
46. Periodical inspection and testing of consumer’s installation. -
(1) (a) Where an installation is already connected to the supply system of
the supplier, every such installation shall be periodically inspected and tested at
intervals not exceeding five years either by the Inspector or any officer appointed
to assist the Inspector or by the supplier as may be directed by the State
Government in this behalf or in the case of installations belonging to, or under the
control of the Central Government, and in the case of installation in mines, oilfields
and railways by the Central Government.
(b) Where the supplier is directed by the Central or the State Government as
the case may be to inspect and test the installation he shall report on the condition
of the installation to the consumer concerned in a form approved by the Inspector
and shall submit a copy of such report to the Inspector or to any officer appointed
to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A.
(c) Subject to the approval of the Inspector, the forms of inspection report
contained in Annexure IX-A may, with such variations as the circumstances of
each case require, be used for the purposes of this sub-rule.
(2) (a) The fees for such inspection and test shall be determined by the
Central or the State Government, as the case may be, in the case of each class of
consumers and shall be payable by the consumer in advance.
(b) In the even it of the failure of any consumer to pay the fees on or before the
date specified in the fee-notice, supply to the installation of such consumer shall
be liable to be disconnected under the direction of the Inspector. Such
disconnection, however, shall not be made by the supplier without giving to the
consumer seven clear days’ notice in writing of his intention so to do.
(c) In the event of the failure of the owner of any installation to rectify the
defects in his installation pointed out by the Inspector or by any officer appointed
to assist him and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in the form set out in
Annexure IX and within the time indicated therein, such installation shall be liable
to be disconnected 1[under the directions of the Inspector] after serving the owner
of such installation with a notice.
Provided that the installation shall not be disconnected in case an appeal in made
under rule 6 and the appellate authority has stayed the orders of disconnection.
Provided further that the time indicated in the notice shall not be less than 48
hours in any case.
Provided also that nothing contained in this clause shall have any effect on the
application of rule 49.
(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of this rule, the consumer shall at all times
be solely responsible for the maintenance of his installation in such condition as to
be free from danger.
1. Subs. by GSR 29, dr. 24.12.1983, w.e.f. 14.1.1984.
CHAPTER V
GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATING
TO SUPPLY AND USE OF ENERGY
47. Testing of consumer’s installation-
(1) Upon receipt of an application for a new or additional supply of energy and
before connecting the supply or reconnecting the same after a period of six
months, the supplier shall inspect and test the applicants’ installation.
The supplier shall maintain a record of test results obtained at each supply point to
a consumer, in a form to be approved by the Inspector.
(2) If as a result of such inspection and test, the supplier is satisfied that the
installation is likely to constitute danger, he shall serve on the applicant a notice in
writing requiring him to make such modifications as are necessary to render the
installation safe. The supplier may refuse to connect or reconnect the supply until
the required modifications have been completed and he has been notified by the
applicant.
1[47A. Installation and Testing of Generating Units- Where any consumer or
occupier installs a generating plant, he shall give a thirty days’ notice of his
intention to commission the plant to the supplier as well as the Inspector.
Provided that no consumer or occupier shall commission his generating plant of a
capacity exceeding 10KW without the approval in writing of the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
48. Precautions against leakage before connection-
1[(l) The supplier shall not connect with his works the installation or apparatus
on the premises of any applicant for supply unless he is reasonably satisfied that
the connection will not at the time of making the connection cause a leakage from
that installation or apparatus of a magnitude detrimental to safety. Compliance
with this rule shall be checked by measuring the insulation resistance as provided
below:
(i) High Voltage Equipments installations-
(a) High Voltage equipments shall have the IR value as stipulated in the
relevant Indian Standard.
(b) At a pressure of 1000 V applied between each live conductor and earth for
a period of one minute the insulation resistance of HV installations shall be at least
1 Mega ohm or as specified by the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards] from time to
time.
(ii) Medium and Low Voltage Installations- At a pressure of 500 V applied
between each live conductor and earth for a period of one minute, the insulation
resistance of medium and low voltage installations shall be at least 1 Mega ohm or
as specified by the 2[Bureau of Indian Standards] from time to time.]
(2) If the supplier declines to make a connection under the provisions of subrule
(1), he shall serve upon the applicant a notice in writing stating his reason for
so declining.
1. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
49. Leakage on consumer’s premises-
(1) If the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A or the supplier had reason to believe that
there is in the system of a consumer leakage which is likely to affect injuriously the
use of energy by the supplier or by other persons, or which is likely to cause
danger, he may give the consumer reasonable notice in writing that he desires to
inspect and test the consumer’s installation.
(2) If on such notice being given-
(a) The consumer does not give all reasonable facilities for inspection and
testing of his installation, or
1[(b) When an insulation resistance at the consumer’s installation is so low as to
prevent safe use of energy.]
The supplier may, and if directed so to do by the Inspector shall discontinue the
supply of energy to the installation but only after giving to the consumer 48 hours
notice in writing of disconnection of supply and shall not recommence the supply
until he or the Inspector is satisfied that the cause of the leakage has been
removed.]
1. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
1[50. Supply and use of energy-
(1) The energy shall not be supplied, transformed, converted or used or
continued to be supplied, transformed, converted or used unless provisions as set
out below are observed:-
(a) The following controls of requisite capacity to carry and break the current
2[are placed] after the point of commencement of supply as defined in rule 58 so
as to be readily accessible and capable of being easily operated to completely
isolate the supply to the installation such equipment being in addition to any
equipment installed for controlling individual circuits or apparatus: -
(i) A linked switch with fuse(s) or a circuit breaker by low and medium voltage
consumers.
(ii) A linked switch with fuse(s) or a circuit breaker by HV consumers having
aggregate installed transformer/apparatus capacity up to 1000 KVA to be supplied
at voltage upto 11 KV and 2500 KVA at higher -voltages (above 11 KV and not
exceeding 33 KV).
(iii) A circuit breaker by HV consumers having an aggregate installed
transformer/apparatus capacity above 1000 KVA and supplied at 11 KV and above
2500 KVA supplied at higher voltages (above 11 KV and not exceeding 33 KV).
(iv) A circuit breaker by EHV consumer;
Provided that where the point of commencement of supply and the consumer
apparatus are near each other one linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit breaker
near the point of commencement of supply as required by this clause shall be
considered sufficient for the purpose of this rule;
(b) In case of every transformer the following shall be provided: -
(i) On primary side for transformers a linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit
breaker of adequate capacity:
Provided that the linked switch on the primary side of the transformer may be of
such capacity as to carry the full load current and to break only the magnetising
current of the transformer:
Provided further that for transformers of capacity 5000 KVA and above a circuit
breaker shall be provided:
Provided further that the provision of linked switch on the primary side of the
transformer shall not apply to the unit auxiliary transformer of the generator.
(ii) On the secondary side of transformers of capacity 100 KVA and above
transforming HV to MV or LV, a linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit breaker of
adequate capacity capable of carrying and breaking full load current and for
transformers transforming HV to EHV as the case may be, a circuit breaker:
Provided that where the transformer capacity exceeds 630 KVA a circuit breaker
of adequate capacity shall be installed on the secondary side;
(c) Except in the case of composite control gear designed as a unit distinct
circuit is protected against excess energy by means of suitable cut-out or a circuit
breaker of adequate breaking capacity suitably located and, so constructed as to
prevent danger from overheating, arcing or scattering of hot metal when it comes
into operation and to permit for ready renewal of the fusible metal of the cut-out
without danger;
(d) The supply of energy of each motor or a group of motors or other apparatus
meant for operating one particular machine is controlled by a suitable linked switch
or a circuit breaker or an emergency tripping device with manual reset of requisite
capacity placed in such a position as to be adjacent to the motor or a group of
motors or other apparatus readily accessible to and easily operated by the person
incharge and so connected in the circuit that by its means all supply of energy can
be cut off from the motor or group of motors or apparatus from any regulating
switch, resistance of other device associated therewith;
(e) All insulating materials are chosen with special regard to the circumstances
of its proposed use and their mechanical strength is sufficient for its purpose and
so far as is practicable of such a character or so protected as to maintain
adequately its insulating property under all working conditions in respect of
Temperature and moisture; and
(f) Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
(2) Where energy is being supplied, transformed, converted or used the
3[consumer, supplier or the owner] of the concerned installation shall be
responsible for the continuous observance of the provisions of sub-rule (1) in
respect of his installations.
(3) Every consumer shall use all reasonable mean to ensure that where energy
is supplied by a supplier no person other than the supplier shall interfere with the
service lines and apparatus placed by the supplier on the premises of the
consumer.]
1. Subs. by GSR 11”, dt. 21.1.1986, w.e.f. 8.2.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
3. Subs. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
1[50A. Additional provisions for supply and use of energy in multi-storeyed
building (more than 15 metres in height)-
(1) Before making an application for commencement of supply or
recommencement of supply after an installation has been disconnected for a
period of six months or more the owner/occupier of a multi-storeyed building shall
give not less than 30 days’ notice in writing to the Inspector together with
particulars. The supply of energy shall not be commenced or recommenced within
this period, without the approval or otherwise in writing of the Inspector.
(2) The supplier/owner of the installation shall provide at the point of
commencement of supply a suitable isolating device with cut out or breaker to
operate on all phases except neutral in the 3 phase 4 wire circuit and fixed in a
conspicuous position at not more than 2.75 metres above the ground so as to
completely isolate the supply to the building in case of emergency.
(3) The owner/occupier of a multi-storeyed building shall ensure that electrical
installations/works inside the building are carried out and maintained in such a
manner as to prevent danger due to shock and fire hazards’ and the installation is
carried out in accordance with the relevant codes of practices.
(4) No other service pipes shall be taken along the ducts provided for laying
power cables. All ducts provided for power cables and other services shall be
provided with fire-barrier at each floor crossing.]
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
51. Provisions applicable to medium, high or extra-high voltage installations-
The following provisions shall be observed where energy at medium, high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or used
(1) (a) All conductors (other than those of overhead lines) shall be
completely enclosed in mechanically strong metal casting or metallic covering
which is electrically and mechanically continuous and adequately protected
against mechanical damage unless the said conductors are accessible only to an
authorised person or are installed and protected to the satisfaction of the Inspector
so as to prevent danger;
1[Provided that non-metallic conduits conforming to the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications may be used for medium voltage installations, subject to such
conditions as the Inspector or Officer appointed to assist an Inspector may think fit
to impose.]
2[(b) All metal works, enclosing, supporting or associated with the installation,
other than that designed to serve as a conductor shall be connected with an
earthing system as per standards laid down in the Indian Standards in this regard
and in also accordance with rule 61(4).]
(c) Every switchboard shall comply with the following provisions, namely: -
(i) A clear space of not less than 1 metre in width shall be provided in front of
the switchboard;
(ii) If there are any attachments or bare connections at the back of the
switchboard, the space (if any) behind the switchboard shall be either less than 20
centimetres or more than 75 centimetres in width, measured from the farthest
outstanding part of any attachment or conductor;
(iii) If the space behind the switchboard exceeds 75 centimetres in width, there
shall be a passage-way from either end of the switchboard clear to a height of 1.8
metres.
3[(d) In case of installations provided in premises where inflammable materials
including gases and/or chemicals are produced, handled or stored, the electrical
installations, equipment and apparatus shall comply with the requirements of flame
proof, dust tight, totally enclosed or any other suitable type of electrical fittings
depending upon the hazardous zones as per relevant Indian Standard
Specification.]
4[(2) Where an application has been made to a supplier for supply of energy to
any installation, he shall not commence the supply or where the supply has been
discontinued for a period of one year and above, recommence the supply unless
he is satisfied that the consumer has complied with, in all respects the conditions
of supply set out in sub-rule (1), of this rule, rules 50, 63 and 64.]
(3) Where a supplier proposes to supply or use energy at a medium voltage or
to recommence supply after it has been discontinued for a period of six months,
he, shall, before connecting or reconnecting the supply, give notice in writing of
such intention to the Inspector 5[or any officer of specified rank and class
appointed to assist the Inspector].
6[(4) If at any time after connecting the supply, the supplier is satisfied that any
provision of the sub-rule (1) of this rule or of rules 50 and 64, is not being observed
he shall give notice of the same in writing to the consumer and the inspector,
specifying how the provisions has not been observed and to rectify such defects in
a reasonable time and if the consumer fails to rectify such defects pointed out, he
may discontinue the supply after giving the consumer a reasonable opportunity of
being heard and recording reasons in writing, unless the inspector directs
otherwise. The supply shall be discontinued only on written orders of an officer
duly notified by the supplier in this behalf. The supply shall be restored with all
possible speed after such defects are rectified by the consumer to the satisfaction
of the supplier.]
1. Subs. by GSR 336, dt. 28.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
2. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
3. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
4. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2-1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983
5. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
6. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
52. Appeal to Inspector in regard to defects-
(1) If any applicant for a supply or a consumer is dissatisfied with the action of
the supplier in declining to commence, to continue or to recommence the supply of
energy to his premises on the grounds that the installation is defective or is likely
to constitute danger, he may appeal to the Inspector to test the installation and the
supplies shall not, if the Inspector or under his orders, any other officer appointed
to assist the Inspector, is satisfied that the installation is free from the defect or
danger complained of, be entitled to refuse supply to the consumer on the grounds
aforesaid, and shall, within twenty-four hours after the receipt of such intimation
from the Inspector, commence, continue or recommence the supply of energy.
(2) Any test for which application has been made under the provision of subrule
(1) shall be carried out within seven days after the receipt of such application.
(3) This rule shall be endorsed on every notice given under the provisions of
rules 47, 48, and 49.
53. Cost of inspection and test of consumer’s installation-
(1) The cost of the first inspection and test of consumer’s installation carried
out in pursuance of the provisions of rule 47 shall be borne by the supplier and the
cost of every subsequent inspection and test shall be borne by the consumer,
unless in the appeal under rule 52, the Inspector directs otherwise.
(2) The cost of any inspection and test made by the Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector, at the request of the consumer or other
interested party, shall be borne by the consumer or other interested party, unless
the Inspector directs otherwise.
(3) The cost of each and every such inspection and test by whomsoever borne
shall be calculated in accordance with the scale specified by the Central or the
State Government as the case may be in this behalf.
54. Declared voltage of supply to consumer. - Except with the written consent
of the consumer or with the previous sanction of the State Government a supplier
shall not permit the voltage at the point of commencement of supply as defined
under rule 58 to vary from the declared voltage-
(i) In the case of low or medium voltage, by more than 6 per cent, or;
(ii) In the case of high voltage, by more than 6 per cent on the higher side or by
more than 9 per cent on the lower side, or;
(iii) In the case of extra-high voltage, by more than 10 per cent on the higher
side or by more than 12.5 per cent on the lower side.
55. Declared frequency of supply to consumer- Except with the written consent
of the consumer or with the previous sanction of the State Government a supplier
shall not permit the frequency of an alternating current supply to vary from the
declared frequency by more than 3 per cent.
56. Sealing of meters, and cut-outs-
(1) A supplier may affix one or more seals to any cut-out and to any meter,
maximum demand indicator, or other apparatus placed upon a consumer’s
premises in accordance with section 26, and no person other than the supplier
shall break any such seal.
(2) The consumer shall use all reasonable means in his power to ensure that
no such seal is broken otherwise than by the supplier.
(3) The word ‘supplier’ shall for the purpose of this rule include a State
Government when any meter, maximum demand indicator or other apparatus is
placed upon a consumer’s premises by such Government.
57. Meters, maximum demand indicators and other apparatus on consumer’s
premises-
(1) Any meter or maximum demand indicator or other apparatus placed upon a
consumer’s premises in accordance with section 26 shall be of appropriate
capacity and shall be deemed to be correct if its limits of error are within the limits
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specification and where no such
specification exists, the limits of error do not exceed 3 per cent above or below
absolute accuracy at all loads in excess of one tenth of full load and up to full load.
1[Provided that for extra high voltage consumers the limit of error shall be 1 per
cent.]
(2) No meter shall register at no load.
(3) Every supplier shall provide and maintain in proper condition such suitable
apparatus as may be prescribed or approved by the Inspector for the examination,
testing and regulation of meters used or intended to be used in connection with the
supply of energy.
Provided that the supplier may with the approval of the Inspector and shall, if
required by the Inspector, enter into a joint arrangement with any other supplier for
the purpose aforesaid.
(4) Every supplier shall examine, test and regulate all meters, maximum
demand indicators and other apparatus for ascertaining the amount of energy
supplied before their first installation at the consumer’s premises and at such other
intervals as may be directed by the State Government in this behalf.
(5) Every supplier shall maintain a register of meters showing the date of the
last test, the error recorded at the time of the test, the limit of accuracy after
adjustment and final test, the date of installation, withdrawal, reinstallation, etc., for
the examination of the Inspector or his authorised representative.
2[(6) Where the supplier has failed to examine, test and regulate the meters and
keep records thereof as aforesaid, the Inspector may cause such meters to be
tested and sealed at the cost of the owner of the meters in case these are found
defective.]
1. Added by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
2. Added by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
1[58. Point of commencement of supply- The point of commencement of supply of
energy to a consumer shall be deemed to be the point at the incoming terminal of
the cut-outs installed by the consumer under rule 50.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f 23.1.1993.
59. Precautions against failure of supply: Notice of failures-
(1) The layout of the electric supply lines of the supplier for the supply of
energy throughout his area of supply shall under normal working conditions be
sectionalised and so arranged, and provided with cut-outs or circuit-breakers so
located, as to restrict within reasonable limits the extent of the portion of the
system affected by any failure of supply.
(2) The, supplier shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid any accidental
interruptions of supply, and also to avoid danger to the public or to any employee
or authorised person when engaged on any operation during and in connection
with the installation, extension, replacement, repair and maintenance of any works.
(3) The supplier shall send to the Inspector 1[or any officer of a specified rank
and class appointed to assist the Inspector] notice of failure of supply of such kind
as the Inspector 1[or any officer of specified rank and class to assist the Inspector]
may from time to time require to be notified to him, and such notice shall be sent
by the earliest practicable post after the failure occurs or after the failure becomes
known to the supplier and shall be in such form and contain such particulars as
Inspector may from time to time specify
2[(4) For the purpose of testing or for any other purpose connected with the
efficient working of the undertaking, the supply of energy may be discontinued by
the supplier for such period as may be necessary, subject (except in cases of
emergency) to not less than 24 hours notice being given by the supplier to all
consumers likely to be affected by such discontinuance:
Provided that the supply of energy shall be discontinued during such hours as are
likely to interfere the least with the use of energy by consumers and the energy
shall not be discontinued if the Inspector so directs.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
CHAPTER VI
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR LOW AND
MEDIUM VOLTAGES
60. Test for resistance of insulation-
(1) Where any electric supply line for use at low or medium voltage has been
disconnected from a system for the purpose of addition, alteration or repair, such
electric supply line shall not be reconnected to the system until the supplier or the
owner has applied the test prescribed under rule 48.
(2) The provision of sub-rule (1) shall not apply to overhead lines except,
overhead insulated cables unless the Inspector otherwise directs in any particular
case.
61. Connection with earth-
(1) The following provisions shall apply to the connection with earth of systems
at low voltage in cases where the voltage normally exceeds 125 volts and of
systems at medium voltage: -
1[(a) Neutral conductor of a phase, 4 wire system and the middle conductor of a
2 phase, 3-wire system shall be earthed by not less than two separate and distinct
connections with a minimum of two different earth electrodes of such large number
as may be necessary to bring the earth resistance to a satisfactory value both at
the generating station and at the sub-station. The earth electrodes so provided,
may be interconnected to reduce earth resistance. It may also be earthed at one
or more points along the distribution system or service line in addition to any
connection with earth which may be at the consumer’s premises.]
(b) In the case of a system comprising electric supply lines having concentric
cables, the external conductor of such cables shall be earthed by two separate
and distinct connections with earth.
(c) The connection with earth may include a link by means of which the
connection may be temporarily interrupted for the purpose of testing or for locating
a fault.
(d) (i) In a direct current three wire system the middle conductor shall be
earthed at the generating station only, and the current from the middle conductor
to earth shall be continuously recorded by means of a recording ammeter, and if
any time the current exceeds one-thousandth part of the maximum supply-current
immediate steps shall be taken to improve the insulation of the system.
(ii) Where the middle conductor is earthed by means of a circuit breaker with a
resistance connected in parallel, the resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms and on
the opening of the circuit breaker, immediate steps shall be taken to improve the
insulation of the system, and the circuit-breaker shall be reclosed as soon as
possible.
(iii) The resistance shall be used only as a protection for the ammeter in case of
earths on the system and until such earths are removed. Immediate steps shall be
taken to locate and remove the earth.
(e) In the case of an alternating current system, there shall not be inserted in
the connected with earth any impedance (other than that required solely for the
operation of switch-gear of instruments), cut-out or circuit-breaker, and the result
of any test made to ascertain whether the current (if any) passing through the
connection with earth is normal shall be duly recorded by the supplier.
(f) No person shall make connection with earth by the aid of, nor shall be keep
it in contact with, any water main not belonging to him except with the consent of
the owner thereof and of the Inspector.
(g) Alternating current systems which are connected with earth as aforesaid
may be electrically interconnected.
Provided that each connection with earth is bonded to the metal sheathing and
metallic armouring (if any) of the electric supply lines concerned.
(2) The frame of every generator, stationary motor, portable motor, and the
metallic parts (not intended as conductors) of all transformers and any other
apparatus used for regulating or controlling energy and all medium voltage energy
consuming apparatus shall be earthed by the owner by two separate and distinct
connections with earth.
2[(3) All metal castings or metallic coverings containing or protecting any electric
supply-line or apparatus shall be connected with earth and shall be so joined and
connected across all junction boxes and other openings as to make good
mechanical and electrical connection throughout their whole length.
Provided that where the supply is at low voltage, this sub-rule shall not apply to
isolated wall tubes or to brackets, electroliers, switches, ceiling fans or other
fittings (other than portable hand lamps and portable and transportable apparatus)
unless provided with earth terminal and to class-II apparatus/ appliances.
Provided further that where the supply is at low voltage and where the installations
are either new or renovated all plug sockets shall be of the three-pin type, and the
third pin shall be permanently and efficiently earthed.
Explanation- The words “Class-II apparatus/appliance” will have the same
meaning as assigned to these words in the relevant ISS.]
3[(4) All earthing systems shall(
a) Consist of equipotential bonding conductors capable of carrying the
prospective earth fault current and a group of pipe/rod/plate electrodes for
dissipating the current to the general mass of earth without exceeding the
allowable temperature limits as per relevant Indian Standards in order to maintain
all non-current carrying metal works reasonably at earth potential and to avoid
dangerous contact potentials being developed on such metal works;
(b) Limit earth resistance sufficiently low to permit adequate fault current for the
operation of protective devices in time and to reduce neutral shifting;
(c) Be mechanically strong, withstand corrosion and retain electrical continuity
during the life of the installation. All earthing systems shall be tested to ensure
efficient earthing, before the electric supply lines or apparatus are energised.]
(5) All earthing systems belonging to the supplier shall in addition, be tested for
resistance on dry day during the dry season not less than once every two years.
(6) A record of every earth test made and the result thereof shall be kept by the
supplier for a period of not less than two years after the day of testing and shall be
available to the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A when required.
1. Subs. by GSR 1051, dt. 25.10.1985, w.e.f. 9.11.1985.
2. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f 26.3.1983.
3. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.7.1987.
1[61A. Earth leakage protective device- The supply of Energy to every electrical
installation other than low voltage installation below 5 KW and those low voltage
installations which do not attract provisions of section 30 of the Indian Electricity
Act, 1910, shall be controlled by an earth leakage protective device so as to
disconnect the supply instantly on the occurrence of earth fault or leakage of
current.
Provided that the above shall not apply to overhead supply lines having protective
devices which are effectively bonded to the neutral of supply transformers and
conforming to rule 91 of 1,E. Rules, 1956.]
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
62. Systems at medium voltage- Where a medium voltage supply system is
employed, the voltage between earth and any conductor forming part of the same
system shall not, under normal conditions, exceed low voltage.
CHAPTER VII
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH AND
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGES
63. Approval by Inspector-
(1) Before making an application to the Inspector for permission 1[to commence
or recommence supply after an installation has been disconnected for one year
and above] at high or extra-high voltage to any person, the supplier shall ensure
that the high or extra-high voltage electric supply lines or apparatus belonging to
him are placed in position, properly joined and duly completed and examined. The
supply of energy shall not be commenced by the supplier unless and until the
Inspector is satisfied that the provisions of rules 65 to 69 both inclusive have been
complied with and the approval in writing of the Inspector have been obtained by
him.
Provided that the supplier may exercise the aforesaid electric supply lines or
apparatus for the purpose of tests specified in rule 65.
(2) The owner of any high or extra-high voltage installation shall, before making
application to the Inspector for approval of his installation or additions thereto, test
every high or ext.-a-high voltage circuit or additions thereto, other than an
overhead line, and satisfy himself that they withstand the application of the testing
voltage set out in sub-rule (1) of rule 65 and shall duly record the results of such
tests and forward them to the Inspector.
Provided that an Inspector may direct such owner to carry out such tests as he
deems necessary or, if he thinks fit, accept the manufacturer’s certified tests in
respect of any particular apparatus in place of the tests required by this sub-rule.
(3) The owner of any high or extra-high voltage installation who makes any
additions or alterations to his installation shall not connect to the supply his
apparatus or electric supply lines, comprising the said alterations or additions
unless and until such alterations or additions have been approved in writing by the
Inspector.
1. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
64. Use of energy at high and extra-high voltage-
1[(1) The Inspector shall not authorise the supplier to commence supply or where
the supply has been discontinued for a period of one year and above, to
commence the supply at high or extra-high voltage to any consumer unless,]
(a) All conductors and apparatus situated on the premises of the consumer are
so placed as to be inaccessible except to an authorised person and all operations
in connection with the said conductors and apparatus are carried out by an
authorised person;
(b) The consumer has provided and agrees to maintain a separate building or a
locked weather-proof and fire-proof enclosure of agreed design and location, to
which the supplier at all times have access for the purpose of housing his
apparatus and metering equipment, or where the provision for a separate building
or enclosure is impracticable, the consumer has segregated the aforesaid
apparatus of the supplier from any other part of his own apparatus;
Provided that such segregation shall be by the provision of fire proof walls, if the
Inspector considers it to be necessary;
Provided further that in the case of an out-door installation consumer shall suitably
segregate the aforesaid apparatus belonging to the supplier from his own to the
satisfaction of the Inspector;
(c) All pole type sub-stations are constructed and maintained in accordance
with rule 69.
(2) The following provisions shall be observed where energy at high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or used: -
2[(a) (i) Clearances as per Indian Standard Code shall be provided for
electrical apparatus so that sufficient space is available for easy operation and
maintenance without any hazard to the operating and maintenance personnel
working near the equipment and for ensuring adequate ventilation.
(ii) The following minimum clearances shall be maintained for bare conductors
or live parts of any apparatus in out-door substations, excluding overhead lines, of
HV and EHV installations: -
Voltage Class Ground clearance
(Metres)
Sectional
clearance (Metres)
Not exceeding
-do-
-do-
-do-
-do-
-do-
11KV
33KV
66KV
132KV
22OKV
40OKV
2.75
3.7
4.0
4.6
5.5
8.0
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.5
4.3
6.5]
(b) The windings of motors or other apparatus within reach from any position in
which a person may require to be shall be suitably protected so as to prevent
danger.
(c) Where transformer or transformers are used, suitable provision shall be
made, either by connecting with earth a point of the circuit at the lower voltage or
otherwise, to guard against danger by reason of the said circuit becoming
accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage from or contact with the
circuit at the higher voltage.
(d) A sub-station or a switch station with apparatus having more than 2000
litres of oil shall not 3[***] be located in the basement where proper oil draining
arrangement cannot be provided.
(e) Where a sub-station or a switch station with apparatus having more than
2000 litres of oil is installed, whether indoor or out-doors, the following measures
shall be taken, namely: -
(i) The baffle walls 4[of 4 hour fire rating] shall be provided between the
apparatus in the following cases: -
(A) Single phase banks in the switch-yards of generating stations and substations;
(B) On the consumer premises;
(C) Where adequate clearance between the units is not available.
(ii) Provisions shall be made for suitable oil soakpit and where use of more
than 9000 litres of oil in any one oil tank, receptacle or chamber is involved,
provision shall be made for the draining away or removal of any oil which may leak
or escape from the tanks receptacles or chambers containing the same, special
precautions shall be taken to prevent the spread of any fire resulting from the
ignition of the oil from any cause and adequate provision shall be made for
extinguishing any fire which may occur. Spare oil shall not be stored in an such
sub-station or switch station.
5[(f) (i) Without prejudice to the above measures, adequate fire protection
arrangement shall be provided for quenching the fire in the apparatus;
(ii) Where it is necessary to locate the sub-station/switch station in the
basement following measures shall be taken:-
(a) The room shall necessarily be in the first basement at the periphery of the
basement;
(b) The entrances to the room shall be provided with fire resisting doors of 2
hours fire rating. A curb (sill) of a suitable height shall be provided at the entrance
in order to prevent the flow of oil from a ruptured transformer into other parts of the
basement. Direct access to the transformer room shall be provided from outside.
(c) The transformer shall be protected by an automatic high velocity water
spray system or by carbon dioxide or BCF (Bromochlorodifeuromethane) or BTM
(Bromotrifluromethane) fixed installation system; and
(iii) Oil filled transformers installed indoors shall not be on any floor above the
ground or below the first basement.]
(g) Cable trenches inside the sub-stations and switch stations containing
cables shall be filled with sand, pebbles or similar non-inflammable materials or
completely cover with non-inflammable slabs.
(h) Unless the conditions are such that all the conductors and apparatus may
be made dead at the same time for the purpose of cleaning or for other work, the
said conductors and apparatus shall be so arranged that these may be made dead
in sections, and that work on any such section may be carried on by an authorised
person without danger.
(i) Only persons authorised under sub-rule (1) of rule 3, shall carry out the
work on live lines and apparatus.]
6[(3) All EHV apparatus shall be protected against lightning as well as against
switching over voltages. The equipment used for protection and switching shall be
adequately coordinated with the protected apparatus to ensure safe operation as
well as to maintain the stability of the inter-connected units of the power system.]
1. Subs. by CSR 843, dt. 23.7.1983, w.e.f. 7.9.1985
2. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
3. The word ‘ordinarily’ omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
4. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
5. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
6. Ins. by GSR 336, dt. 20.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
1[64A. Additional provisions for use of energy at high and extra-high voltage- The
following additional provisions shall be observed where energy at high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transferred or used, namely: -
(1) Inter-locks- Suitable inter-locks shall be provided in the following cases: -
(a) Isolators and the controlling circuit breakers shall be interlocked so that the
isolators cannot be operated unless the corresponding breaker is in open position;
(b) Isolators and the corresponding earthing switches shall be interlocked so
that no earthing switch can be closed unless and until the corresponding isolator is
in open position;
(c) Where two or more supplies are not intended to be operated in parallel, the
respective circuit breakers or linked switches controlling the supplies shall be interlocked
to prevent possibility of any inadvertent paralleling or feedback;
(d) When two or more transformers are operated in parallel, the system shall
be so arranged as to trip the secondary breaker of a transformer in case the
primary breaker of that transformer trips;
(e) All gates or doors which give access to live parts of an installation shall be
inter-locked in such a way that these cannot be opened unless the live parts are
made dead. Proper discharging and earthing of these parts should be ensured
before any person comes in close proximity of such parts;
(f) Where two or more generators operate in parallel and neutral switching is
adopted, inter-lock shall be provided to ensure that generator breaker cannot be
closed unless one of the neutrals is connected to the earthing system.
(2) Protection- All systems and circuits shall be so protected as to automatically
disconnect the supply under abnormal conditions. The following protection shall
be provided, namely: -
(a) Over current protection to disconnect the supply automatically if the rated
current of the equipment, cable or supply line is exceeded for a time which the
equipment, cable or supply line is not designed to withstand;
(b) Earth-fault/earth leakage protection to disconnect the supply automatically if
the earth fault current exceeds the limit of current for keeping the contact potential
within the reasonable values;
(c) Gas pressure type protection to given alarm and tripping shall be provided
on all transformers of ratings 1000 KVA and above;
(d) Transformers of capacity 10 MVA and above shall be protected against
incipient faults by differential protection; and
(e) All generators with rating of 100 KVA and above shall be protected against
earth fault/leakage. All generators of rating 1000KVA and above shall be
protected against faults within the generator winding using restricted earth fault
protection or differential protection or by both.]
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
65. Testing, Operation and Maintenance-
(1) Before approval is accorded by the Inspector under rule 63, the
manufacturer’s test certificates shall, if required, be produced for all the routine
tests as required under the relevant Indian Standard.
(2) No new HV or EHV apparatus, cable or supply line shall be commissioned
unless such apparatus, cable or supply line are subjected to site tests as per
relevant code of practice of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards].
(3) No HV of EHV apparatus, cable or supply line which has been kept
disconnected, for a period of 6 months or more, from the system for alterations or
repair shall be corrected to the system until such apparatus, cable or supply line
are subjected to the relevant tests as per code of practice of 1[Bureau of Indian
Standards.]
(4) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-rules (1) to (3) (both inclusive) the
Inspector may require certain additional tests to be carried out before charging the
installations or subsequently.
(5) All apparatus, cables and supply lines shall be maintained in healthy
conditions and tests shall be carried out periodically as per the relevant codes of
practice of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards].
(6) Records of all tests, trappings, maintenance works and repairs of all
equipments, cables and supply lines shall be duly kept in such a way that these
records can be compared with earlier ones.
(7) It shall be the responsibility of the owner of all HV and EHV installations to
maintain and operate the installations in a condition free from danger and as
recommended by the manufacturer and/or by the relevant codes of practice of the
1[Bureau of Indian Standards] and/or by the Inspector.]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
66. Metal sheathed electric supply lines. Precautions against excess leakage-
(1) The following provisions shall apply to electric supply lines (other than
overhead lines 1[***] for use at high or extra-high voltage: -
(a) The conductors shall be enclosed in metal sheathing which shall be
electrically continuous and connected with earth, and the conductivity of the metal
sheathing shall be maintained and reasonable precautions taken where necessary
to avoid corrosion of the sheathing;
Provided that in the case of thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables with
metallic armour the metallic wire or tape armour shall be considered as metal
sheathing for the purpose of this rule;
Provided further that this rule shall not apply to cable with thermoplastic insulation
without any metallic screen or armour.
2[(b) The resistance of the earth connection with metallic sheath shall be kept
low enough to permit the controlling circuit breaker or cut-out to operate in the
event of any failure of insulation between the metallic sheath and the conductor.]
(c) Where an electric supply-line as aforesaid has concentric cables and the
external conductor is insulated from an outer metal sheathing and connected with
earth, the external conductor may be regarded as the metal sheathing for the
purposes of this rule provided that the foregoing provisions as to conductivity are
complied with.
(2) Nothing in the provisions of sub-rule (1) shall preclude the employment in
generating stations, sub-stations and switch-stations (including outdoor
substations and outdoor switch-stations) of conductors for use at high or extrahigh
voltages which are not enclosed in metal sheathing or preclude the use of
electric supply lines laid before the prescribed date to which the provisions of
these rules apply
1. The words “of a supplier” omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f.
9.5.1987.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
67. Connection with earth-
1[(1) All non-current carrying metal parts associated with HV/EHV installation
shall be effectively earthed to a grounding system or mat which will: -
(a) Limit the touch and step potential to tolerable values;
(b) Limit the ground potential rise to tolerable values so as to prevent danger
due to transfer of potential through ground, earth wires, cables sheath fences, pipe
lines, etc.;
(c) Maintain the resistance of the earth connection to such a value as to make
operation of the protective device effective.
(lA) In the case of star-connected system with earthed neutrals or delta
connected system with earthed artificial neutral point: -
(a) The neutral point of every generator and transformer shall be earthed by
connecting it to the earthing system as defined in rule 61(4) and hereinabove by
not less than two separate and distinct connections;
Provided that the neutral point of a generator may be connected to the earthing
system through an impedance to limit the fault current to the earth;
Provided further that in the case of multi-machine system neutral switching may be
resorted to, for limiting the injurious effect of harmonic current circulation in the
system;
(b) In the event of an appreciable harmonic current flowing in the neutral
connection so as to cause interference, with communication circuits, the generator
or transformer neutral, shall be earthed through a suitable impedance;
(c) In case of the delta connected system the neutral point shall be obtained by
the insertion of a grounding transformer and current limiting resistance or
impedance wherever considered necessary at the commencement of such a
system.]
(2) Single-phase high or extra-high voltage systems shall be earthed in a
manner approved by the Inspector.
(3) In the case of a system comprising electric supply lines having concentric
cables, the external conductor shall be the one to be connected with earth.
(4) Where a supplier proposes to connected with earth an existing system for
use at high or extra-high voltage which has not hitherto been so connected with
earth he shall give not less than fourteen days’ notice in writing together with
particulars to the telegraph-authority of the proposed connection with earth.
(5) (a) Where the earthing lead and earth connection are used only in
connection with earthing guards erected under high or extra-high voltage overhead
lines where they cross a telecommunication line or a railway line, and where such
lines are equipped with earth leakage relays of a type and setting approved by the
Inspector, the resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms.
(b) Every earthing system belonging to either the supplier or the consumer
shall be tested for its resistance to earth on a dry day during dry season not less
than once a year. Records of such tests shall be maintained and shall be
produced, if required before the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist him
and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A.
(6) In so far as the provisions of rule 61 are consistent with the provisions of
this rule, all connections with earth shall also comply with the provisions of that
rule.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
68. General conditions as to transformation and control of energy-
(1) Where energy at high or extra-high voltage is transformed, converted,
regulated or otherwise controlled in sub-stations or switch-stations (including
outdoor substations and out-door switch-stations) or in street boxes constructed
underground, the following provisions shall have effect: -
1[(a) Sub-stations and switch-stations shall preferably be erected above ground,
but where necessarily constructed underground due provisions for ventilation and
drainage shall be made and any space housing switchgear shall not be used for
storage of any materials especially inflammable and combustible materials or
refuse.]
(b) Outdoor sub-station is except pole type sub-stations and. outdoor switchstations
shall (unless the apparatus is completely enclosed in a metal covering
connected with earth, the said apparatus also being connected with the system by
armoured cables) be efficiently protected by fencing not less than 1.8 metres in
height or other means so as to prevent access to the electric-supply lines and
apparatus therein by an unauthorised person.
(c) Underground street boxes (other than sub-stations) which contain
transformers shall not contain switches or other apparatus, and switches, cut-outs
or other apparatus required for controlling or other purposes shall be fixed in
separate receptacles above ground wherever practicable.
(2) Where energy is transformed, suitable provisions shall be made either by
connecting with earth a point of the system at the lower voltage or otherwise to
guard against danger by reason of the said system becoming accidentally charged
above its normal voltage by leakage from a contact with the system at the higher
voltage.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
69. Pole type sub-stations- Where platform type construction is used for a pole
type sub-station and sufficient space for a person to stand on the platform is
provided a substantial hand rail shall be built around the said platform and if the
hand rail is of metal, it shall be connected with earth;
Provided that in the case of pole type sub-station on wooden supports and
wooden platform the metal hand-rail shall not be connected with earth.
70. Condensers- Suitable provision shall be made for immediate and automatic
discharge of every static condenser on disconnection of supply.
71. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage luminous tube sign
installation-
(1) Any person who proposes to use or who is using energy for the purpose of
operating a luminous tube sign installation, or who proposes to transform or who is
transforming energy to a high voltage for any such purpose shall comply with the
following conditions: -
(a) All live parts of the installation (including all apparatus and live conductors
in the secondary circuit, but excluding tubes except in the neighbourhood of their
terminals) shall be inaccessible to unauthorised persons and such parts shall be
effectively screened.
(b) Irrespective of the method of obtaining the voltage of the circuit which feeds
the luminous discharge tube sign, no part of any conductor of such circuit shall be
in metallic connection (except in respect of its connection with earth) with any
conductor of the supply system or with the primary winding of the transformer.
(c) All live parts of an exterior installation shall be so disposed as to protect
them against the effects of the weather and such installation shall be so arranged
and separated from the surroundings as to limit, as far as possible, the spreading
of fire.
(d) The secondary circuit shall be permanently earthed at the transformer and
the core of every transformer shall be earthed.
(e) Where the conductors of the primary circuit are not in metallic connection
with the supply conductors, (e.g., where a motor-generator or a double-wound
convertor is used), one phase of such primary circuit shall be permanently earthed
at the motor generator or convertor, or at the transformer.
1[(ee) An earth leakage circuit breaker of sufficient rating shall be provided on the
low voltage side to detect the leakage in such luminous tube sign installations.]
(f) A final sub-circuit which forms the primary circuit of a fixed luminous
discharge tube sign installation shall be reserved solely for such purpose.
(g) A separate primary final sub-circuit shall be provided for each transformer
or each group of transformers having an aggregate input not exceeding 1,000 volt
amperes, of a fixed luminous-discharge tube sign installation.
(h) An interior installation shall be provided with suitable adjacent means for
disconnecting all phases of the supply except the “neutral” in a three-phase four
wire circuit.
(i) For installations on the exterior of a building a suitable emergency fire-proof
linked switch to operate on all phases except the neutral in a three phase four wire
circuit shall be provided and fixed in a conspicuous position at not more than 2.75
metres above the ground.
(j) A special “caution” notice shall be affixed in a conspicuous place on the
door of every high voltage enclosure to the effect that the low voltage supply must
be cut off before the enclosure is opened.
(k) Where static condensers are used, they shall be installed on the load side
of the fuses and the primary (low voltage) side of the transformers.
(1) Where static condensers are used on primary side, means shall be
provided for automatically discharging the condensers when the supply is cut off;
Provided that static condensers or any circuit interrupting devices on the high or
extra-high voltage side shall not be used without the approval in writing of the
Inspector.
(2) The owner or user of any luminous tube sign or similar high voltage
installation shall not bring the same into use without giving to the Inspector not
less than 14 days notice in writing of his intention so to do.
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
72. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage electrode boilers-
(1) Where a system having a point connected with earth is used for supply of
energy at high or extra-high voltage to an electrode boiler which is also connected
with earth, the following conditions shall apply: -
(a) The metal work of the electrode boiler shall be efficiently connected to the
metal sheathing and metallic armouring (if any) of the high voltage electric supply
line whereby energy is supplied to the electrode boiler.
(b) The supply of energy at high or extra-high voltage to the electrode boiler
shall be controlled by a suitable circuit-breaker so set as to operate in the event of
the phase currents becoming unbalanced to the extent of 10 per cent of the rated
current consumption of the electrode boiler under normal conditions of operation;
Provided that if in any case a higher setting is essential to ensure stability of
operation of the electrode boiler, the setting may be increased so as not to exceed
15 per cent of the rated current consumption of the electrode boiler under normal
conditions of operation.
(c) An inverse time element device may be used in conjunction with the
aforesaid circuit breaker to prevent the operation thereof unnecessarily on the
occurrence of unbalanced phase currents of momentary or short duration.
(d) The supplier shall serve a notice in writing on the telegraph-authority at
least seven days prior to the date on which such supply of energy is to be afforded
specifying the location of every point (including the earth connection of the
electrode boiler) at which the system is connected with earth.
(2) The owner or user of any high or extra-high voltage electrode boiler shall
not bring the same into use without giving the Inspector not less than 14 days’
notice in writing of his intention so to do.
73. Supply to X-ray and high frequency installation-
(1) Any person who proposes to employ or who is employing energy for the
purpose of operating an X-ray or similar high-frequency installation, shall comply
with the following conditions:-
(a) Mechanical barriers shall be provided to prevent too close an approach to
any high-voltage parts of the X-ray apparatus, except the X-ray tube and its leads,
unless such high-voltage parts have been rendered shock-proof by being shielded
by earthed metal or adequate insulating material.
(b) Where extra-high voltage generators operating at 300 peak KV or more are
used, such generators shall be installed in rooms separate from those containing
the other equipment and any step-up transformer employed shall be so installed
and protected as to prevent danger.
(c) A suitable switch shall be provided to control the circuit supplying a
generator, and shall be so arranged as to be open except while the door of the
room housing the generator is locked from the outside.
(d) X-ray tubes used in therapy shall be mounted in an earthed metal
enclosure.
(e) Every X-ray machine shall be provided with a millimeter or other suitable
measuring instrument, readily visible from the control position and connected, if
practicable, in the earthed lead, but guarded if connected in the high-voltage lead.
1[(ee) Notwithstanding the provisions of clause (e), earth. leakage circuit breaker
of sufficient rating shall be provided on the low voltage side to detect the leakage
in such X-ray installations.]
(f) This sub-rule shall not apply to shock-proof portable units or shockproof self
contained and stationary units.
Note: - The expression “shock-proof”, as applied to X-ray and high-frequency
equipment, shall mean that such equipment is guarded with earthed metal so that
no person may come into contact with any live part.
(2) (a) In the case of non-shock-proof equipment, overhead high-voltage
conductors, unless suitably guarded against personal contact, shall be adequately
spaced and high-voltage leads on tilting tables and fluroscopes shall be
adequately insulated or so surrounded by barriers as to prevent inadvertent
contact.
(b) The low voltage circuit of the step up transformer shall contain a manually
operated control device having overload protection, in addition to the over-current
device for circuit protection, and these devices shall have no exposed live parts
and for diagnostic work there shall be an additional switch in the said circuit, which
shall be of one of the following types:
(i) A switch with a spring or other mechanism that will open automatically
except while held close by the operator, or
(ii) A time switch which will open automatically after a definite period of time for
which it has been set.
(c) If more than one piece of apparatus be operated from the same high or
extra-high voltage source each shall be provided with a high or extra-high voltage
switch to give independent control.
(d) Low frequency current-carrying parts of a machine of the quenched gap or
open gap type shall be so insulated or guarded that they cannot be touched during
operation, the high frequency circuit proper which delivers high-frequency current
normally for the therapeutic purposes, being exempted.
(e) All X-ray generators having capacitors shall have suitable means for
discharging the capacitors manually.
(f) Except in the case of self-contained units, all 200 peak KV or higher, X-ray
generators shall have a sphere gap installed in the high-voltage system adjusted
so that it will break down on over-voltage surges.
(3) (a) All non-current carrying metal parts of tube stands, fluroscopes and
other apparatus shall be properly earthed and insulating floors, mats or platforms
shall be provided for operator in proximity to high or extra-high voltage parts
unless such parts have been rendered shock proof.
(b) Where short wave therapy machines are used, the treatment tables and
examining chairs shall be wholly non-metallic.
(4) The owner of any X-ray installations or similar high frequency apparatus
shall not bring the same into use without giving to the Inspector not less than 14
days’ notice in writing of his intention to do so.
Provided that the aforesaid notice shall not be necessary in the case of shockproof
portable X-ray and high-frequency equipment which have been inspected before
the commencement of their use and periodically, thereafter.
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
CHAPTER VIII
1[OVERHEAD LINES, UNDER GROUND
CABLES AND GENERATING STATIONS]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f 17.8.1991.
74. Material and strength-
(1) All conductors of overhead lines other than those specified in sub-rule (1) of
rule 86 shall have a breaking strength of not less than 350 kg.
(2) Where the voltage is low and the span is of less than 15 metres and is on
the owner’s or consumer’s premises, a conductor having an actual breaking
strength of not less than 150 kg may be used.
75. Joints-Joints between conductors of overhead lines shall be mechanically
and electrically secure under the conditions of operation. The ultimate strength of
the joint shall not be less than 95 per cent of that of the conductor, and the
electrical conductivity not less than that of the conductor.
1[Provided that no conductor of an overhead line shall have more than two joints in
a span.]
1. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
76. Maximum stresses: Factors of safety-
(1) (a) The owner of every overhead line shall ensure that it has the
following minimum factors of safety:-
(i) For metal supports 1.5
(ii) For mechanically processed concrete supports 2.0
(iii) For hand-moulded concrete supports 2.5
(iv) For wood supports 3.0.
The minimum factors of safety shall be based on such load as would cause failure
of the support to perform its function (assuming that the foundation and other
components of the structure are intact).
The aforesaid load shall be-
(i) Equivalent to the yield point stress or the modulus of rupture, as the case
may be, for supports subject to bending and vertical loads,
(ii) The crippling load for supports used struts.
The said owner shall also ensure that the strength of the supports in the direction
of the line is not less than one-fourth of the strength required in the direction
transverse to the line.
Provided that in the case of latticed steel or other compound structures, factors of
safety shall not be less than 1.5 under such broken wire conditions as may be
specified by the State Government in this behalf.
(b) The minimum factor of safety for stay-wires, guard-wires or bearer wires
shall be 2.5 based on the ultimate tensile strength of the wire.
(c) The minimum factor of safety for conductors shall be 2, based on their
ultimate tensile strength. In addition, the conductors tension at 320C, without
external load, shall not exceed the following percentages of the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor: -
Initial unloaded tension 35 per cent
Final unloaded tension 25 per cent.
Provided that in the case of conductors having a cross section of a generally
triangular shape, such as conductors composed of 3-wires, the final unloaded
tension at 32’C shall not exceed 30 per cent of the ultimate tensile strength of such
conductor.
(2) For the purpose of calculating the factors of safety prescribed in sub-rule (l)-
(a) The maximum wind pressure shall be such as the State Government may
specify in each case;
(b) For cylindrical bodies the effective area shall be taken as two-thirds of the
projected area exposed to wind pressure;
(c) For latticed steel or other compound structures the wind pressure on the lee
side members shall be taken as one-half of the wind pressure on the windward
side members and the factors of safety shall be calculated on the crippling load of
struts and upon the elastic limit of tension members;
(d) The maximum and minimum temperatures shall be such as the State
Government may specify in each case.
(3) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-rules (1) and (2), in localities
where overhead lines are liable to accumulations of ice or snow the State
Government may, by order in writing, specify the loading conditions for the
purpose of calculating the factor of safety.
77. Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor-
(1) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected across a
street shall at any part thereof be at a height of less than-
(a) For low and medium voltage lines 5.8 metres
(b) For high voltage lines 6.1 metres
(2) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected along
any street shall at any part thereof be at a height less than-
(a) For low and medium voltage lines 5.5 metres
(b) For high voltage lines 5.8 metres
(3) No conductor of in overhead line including service lines, erected
elsewhere than along or across any street shall be at a height less than-
(a) For low, medium and high voltages lines
upto and including 11,000 volts, if bare 4.6
metres
(b) For low, medium and high voltage
lines upto and including 11,000 volts, if insulated
4.0 metres
(c) For high voltage lines above 11,000 volts
5.2 metres
(4) For extra-high voltage lines the clearance above ground shall not be less
than 5.2 metres plus 0.3 metre for every 33,000 volts or part thereof by which the
voltage of the line exceeds 33,000 volts.
Provided that the minimum clearance along or across any street shall not be less
than 6.1 metres.
78. Clearance between conductors and trolley wires-
1[(l)] No conductor of an overhead line crossing a tramway or trolley bus route
using trolley wires shall have less than the following clearances above and trolley
wire-
(a) Low and medium voltage lines 1.2 metres.
Provided that where an insulated conductor suspended from a bearer
wire crosses over a trolley wire the minimum clearance for such insulated
conductor shall be 0.6 metre.
(b) High voltage lines up to and including 11,000 volts
1.8 metres
(c) High voltage lines above 11,000 volts
2.5 metres
(d) Extra-high voltage lines 3.0
metres
2[(2) In any case of a crossing referred to in sub-rule (1), whoever lays his line
later in time, shall provide the clearance between his own line and the line which
will be crossed in accordance with the provisions of said sub-rule.
Provided that if the later entrant is the owner of the lower line and is not able to
provide adequate clearance, he should bear the cost of modification of the upper
line so as to comply with this rule.]
1. Rule 78 renumbered as sub-rule (1) by GSR 528, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f.
19.7.1986.
2. Sub-rule (2) ins. by GSR 528, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
79. Clearances from buildings of low and medium voltage lines and service
lines-
(1) Where a low or medium voltage, overhead line passes above or adjacent
to or terminates on any building, the following minimum clearances from any
accessible point, on the basis of maximum sag, shall be observed: -
(a) For any flat roof, open balcony, verandah roof and lean-to-roof-
(i) When the line passes above the building a vertical clearance of 2.5
metres from the highest point, and
(ii) When the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2
metres from the nearest point, and
(b) For pitched roof-
(i) When the line passes above the building a vertical clearance of 2.5
metres immediately under the lines, and
(ii) When the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2
metres.
(2) Any conductor so situated as to have a clearance less than that specified
in sub-rule (1) shall be adequately insulated and shall be attached at suitable
intervals to a bare earthed bearer wire having a breaking strength of not less
than 350 kg.
(3) The horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at a
maximum deflection from the vertical due to wind pressure.
1[Explanation- For the purpose of this rule, expression “building” shall be deemed
to include any structure, whether permanent or temporary]
1. Added by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
80. Clearances from buildings of high and extra-high voltage lines-
(1) Where a high or extra-high voltage overhead line passes above or
adjacent to any building or part of a building it shall have on the basis of
maximum sag a vertical clearance above the highest part of the building
immediately under such line, of not less than-
(a) For high voltage lines upto and
including 33,000 volts
3.7 metres
(b) For extra-high voltage lines
3.7 metres plus 0.30 metre
for every additional 33,000
volts or part thereof.
(2) The horizontal clearance between the nearest conductor and any part of
such building shall, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, be
not less than-
(a) For high voltage lines upto and
including 11,000 volts
1.2 metres
(b) For high voltage lines above
11,000 volts and up to and
including 33,000 volts
2.0 metres
(c) For extra-high voltage lines
2.0 metres plus 0.3
metre
for every additional
33,000 volts for part
thereof.
1[Explanation- For the purpose of this rule expression “building” shall be deemed
to include any structure, whether permanent or temporary]
1. Added by GSR 844, di. 31.7.1985. w.e.f- 7.9.1985.
81. Conductors at different voltages on same supports- Where conductors
forming parts of systems at different voltages are erected on the same supports,
the owner shall make adequate provision to guard against danger to linesman
and others from the lower voltage system being charged above its normal
working voltage by leakage from or contact with the higher voltage system and
the methods of construction and the clearances between the conductors of the
two systems shall be subject to the prior approval of the Inspector.
82. Erection of or alternation to buildings, structures, flood banks and
elevation of roads-
(1) If at any time subsequent to the erection of an overhead line (whether
covered with insulating material or bare), any person proposes to erect a new
building or structure or flood bank or to raise any road level or to carry out any
other type of work whether permanent or temporary or to make in or upon any
building or structure of flood bank or road, any permanent or temporary addition
or alternation, he and the contractor whom he employs to carry out the erection,
addition or alteration, shall if such work, building, structure, flood bank, road or
additions and alterations thereto, would, during or after the construction result in
contravention of any of the provisions of rule 77, 79 or 80, give notice in writing of
his intention to the supplier and to the Inspector and shall furnish therewith a
scale drawing showing the proposed building, structure, flood bank road, any
addition or alteration and scaffolding required during the construction.
(2) (a) On receipt of the notice referred to in sub-rule (1) or otherwise, the
supplier shall examine whether the line under reference was lawfully laid and
whether the person was liable to pay the cost of alteration and if so, send a
notice without undue delay, to such person together with an estimate of the cost
of the expenditure likely to be incurred to so after the overhead line and require
him to deposit, within 30 days of the receipt of the notice with the supplier, the
amount of the estimated cost.
(b) If the person referred to in sub-rule (1) disputes the suppliers estimated
cost of alteration of the overhead line or even the responsibility to pay such cost
the dispute may be referred to the Inspector by either of the parties whereupon
the same shall be decided by the Inspector.
(3) No work upon such building, structure, flood bank, road and addition or
alternation thereto shall be commenced or continued until the Inspector has
certified that the provisions of rule 77, 79 or 80 are not likely to be contravened
either during or after the aforesaid construction.
Provided that the Inspector may, if he is satisfied that the overhead line has been
so guarded as to secure the protection of persons or property from injury, or risk
of injury, permit the work to be executed prior to the alteration of the
overhead line or in the case of temporary addition or alteration, without
alteration of the overhead line.
(4) On receipt of the deposit, the supplier shall after the overhead line within
one month of the date of deposit or within such longer period as the Inspector
may allow and ensure that it shall not contravene the provisions of rule 77, 79 or
80 either during or after such construction.
(5) In the absence of an agreement to the contrary between the parties
concerned, the cost of such alteration of the overhead line laid down shall be
estimated on the following basis, namely: -
(a) The cost of additional material used on the alteration giving due credit for
the depreciated cost of the material which would be available from the existing
line;
(b) The wages of Labour employed in affecting the alteration;
(c) Supervision charges to the extent of 15 per cent of the wages mentioned
in clause (b); and
(d) Any charges incurred by the supplier in complying with the provisions of
section 16 of the Act in respect of such alterations.
(6) Where the estimated cost of the alteration of the overhead line is not
deposited the supplier shall be considered as an aggrieved party for the purpose
of this rule.
1[82A. Transporting and Storing of material near overhead lines-
(1) No rods, pipes or similar materials shall be taken below or in the vicinity of
any bare overhead conductors or lines if they are likely to infringe the provisions
for clearances under rules 79 and 80, unless such materials are transported
under the direct supervision of a competent person authorised in this behalf by
the owner of such overhead conductors or lines.
(2) Under no circumstances rods, pipes or other similar materials shall be
brought within the flash over distance of bare live conductors or lines; and
(3) No material or earth work or agricultural produce shall be dumped or
stored or trees grown below or in the vicinity of bare overhead conductors lines
so as to reduce the requisite safety clearances specified under rules 79 and 80.]
83. Clearances: General- For the purpose of computing the vertical clearance
of an overhead line, the maximum sag of any conductor shall be calculated on
the basis of the maximum sag in still air and the maximum temperature as
specified by the State Government under rule 76(2)(d). Similarly, for the purpose
of computing any horizontal clearance of an overhead line the maximum
deflection of any conductor shall be calculated on the basis of the wind pressure
specified by the State Government under rule 76(2)(a) or may be taken as 350,
whichever is greater.
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
84. Routes: Proximity to aerodromes- Overhead lines shall not be erected in
the vicinity of aerodromes until the aerodrome authorities have approved in
writing the route of the proposed lines.
85. Maximum interval between supports- All conductors shall be attached to
supports at intervals not exceeding the safe limits based on the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor and the factor of safety prescribed in rule 76.
Provided that in the case of overhead lines carrying low or medium voltage
conductors, when erected in, over, along or across any street, the interval shall
not, without the consent in writing of the Inspector, exceed 65 metres.
86. Conditions to apply where telecommunication lines and power lines are
carried on same supports-
(1) Every overhead telecommunication line erected on supports carrying a
power line shall consist of conductors each having a breaking strength of not less
than 270 kg.
(2) Every telephone used on a telecommunication line erected on supports
carrying a power line shall be suitably guarded against lightning and shall be
protected by cutouts.
(3) Where a telecommunication line is erected on supports carrying a high or
extra-high voltage power line arrangement shall be made to safeguard any
person using the telephone against injury resulting from contact, leakage or
induction between such power and telecommunication lines.
87. Lines crossing or approaching each other-
(1) Where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to any
telecommunication line, either the owner of the overhead line or the
telecommunication line, whoever lays his line later, shall arrange to provide for
protective devices or guarding arrangements, in a manner laid down in the Code
of Practice or the guidelines prepared by the Power and Telecommunication
Coordination Committee and subject to the provisions of the following sub-rules:-
(2) When it is intended to erect a telecommunication line or an overhead line
which will cross or be in proximity to an overhead line or a telecommunication
line, as the case may be, the person proposing to erect such line shall give one
month’s notice of his intention so to do along with the relevant details of
protection and drawings to the owner of the existing line.
1[(3) Where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to another overhead
line, guarding arrangements shall be provided so as to guard against the
possibility of their coming into contact with each other.
Where an overhead line crosses another overhead line, clearances shall be as
under: -
2[Minimum clearances in metres between lines crossing each other.
Sl.
No.
Nominal System
Voltage
11-66 KV 110-132
KV
220 KV 400 KV 800 KV
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Low & Medium
11-66 KV
110-132 KV
220 KV
400 KV
800 KV
2.44
2.44
3.05
4.58
5.49
7.94
3.05
3.05
3.05
4.58
5.49
7.94
4.58
4.58
4.58
4.58
5.49
7.94
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
Provided that no guardings are required when an extra high voltage line crosses
over another extra-high voltage, high voltage, medium or low voltage line or a
road or a tram subject to the condition that adequate clearances are provided
between the lowest conductor of the extra-high voltage line and the top most
conductor of the overhead line crossing underneath the extra-high voltage line
and the clearances as stipulated in rule 77 from the topmost surface of the road
is maintained.]
(4) A person erecting or proposing to erect a line which may cross or be in
proximity with an existing line, may normally provide guarding arrangements on
his own line or require the owner of the other overhead line to provide guarding
arrangements as referred to in sub-rule, (3).
(5) In all cases referred to in the preceding sub-rules the expenses of
providing the guarding arrangements or protective devices shall be borne by the
person whose line was last erected.
(6) Where two lines cross, the crossing shall be made as nearly at right
angles the nature of the case admits and as near the support of the line as
practicable, and the support of the lower line shall not be erected below the
upper line.
(7) The guarding arrangements shall ordinarily be carried out by the owner of
the supports on which it is made and he shall be responsible for its efficient
Maintenance.
(8) All work required to be done by or under this rule shall be carried out to
the satisfaction of the Inspector.
1. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
88. Guarding-
(1) Where guarding is required under these rules the provisions of sub-rules
(2) to (4) shall apply.
(2) Every guard-wire shall be connected with earth at each point at which its
electrical continuity is broken.
(3) Every guard-wire shall have an actual breaking strength of not less than
635 kg and if made of iron or steel, shall be galvanised.
(5) Lines crossing trolley-wires- In the case of a crossing over a trolley-wire
the guarding shall fulfil the following conditions, namely:-
(a) Where there is only one trolley-wire, two guard-wires shall be erected as
in diagram A;
(b) Where there are two trolley-wires and the distance between them does not
exceed 40 cms, two guard-wires shall be erected as in diagram B;
(c) Where there are two trolley wires and the distance between them exceeds
40 cms but does not exceed 1.2 metres, three guard-wires shall be erected as in
diagram C;
(d) Where there are two trolley--wires and the distance between them
exceeds 1.2 metres, each trolley-wire shall be separately guarded as in diagram
D;
(e) The rise of the trolley boom shall be so limited that the trolley leaves the
trolley-wire, it shall not foul the guard-wires; and
(f) Where a telegraph-line is liable to fall or be blown down upon an arm,
stay-wire or span-wire and so slide down upon a trolley-wire, guard hooks shall
be provided to prevent such sliding.
20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0
min 60 Cms
0
DIAGRAM-A
20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0 0 0 0
min min min min
60 Cms 60 Cms 60Cms 60 Cms
up to 40 Cms Over 40 Cms &
up to 1.2 M
DIAGRAM B DIAGRAM C
20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0 0 0
MIN. MIN.
60 Cms 60 Cms
over 1.2 mts.
DIAGRAM D
89. Service-lines from Overhead lines- No Service-line or tapping shall be
taken off an overhead line except at a point of support.
1[Provided that the number of tappings per conductor shall not be more than four
in case of low and medium voltage connections.]
1. Added by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
90. Earthing-
(1) All metal supports and all reinforced and prestressed cement concrete
supports of overhead lines and metallic fittings attached thereto, shall be
permanently and efficiently earthed. For this purpose a continuous earth wire
shall be provided and securely fastened to each pole and connected with earth
ordinarily at three points in every km., the spacing between the points being as
nearly equidistance as possible. Alternatively, each support and the metallic
fitting attached thereto shall be efficiently earthed.
1[(IA) Metallic bearer wire used for supporting insulated wire of low and medium
voltage overhead service lines shall be efficiently earthed or insulated.]
(2) Each stay-wire shall be similarly earthed unless insulator has been placed
in it at a height not less than 3.0 metres from the ground.
1. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
91. Safety and protective devices-
(1) Every overhead line, (not being suspended from a dead bearer wire and
not being covered with insulating material and not being a trolley-wire) erected
over any part of street or other public place or in any factory or mine or on any
consumers’ premises shall be protected with a device approved by the Inspector
for rendering the line electrically harmless in case it breaks.
(2) An Inspector may by notice in writing require the owner of any such
overhead line wherever it may be erected to protect it in the manner specified in
sub-rule(l).
1[(3) The owner of every high and extra-high voltage overhead line shall make
adequate arrangements to the satisfaction of the Inspector to prevent
unauthorised persons from ascending any of the supports of such overhead lines
which can be easily climbed upon without the help of a ladder or special
appliances. Rails, reinforced cement concrete poles and pre-stressed cement
concrete poles without steps, tubular poles, wooden supports without steps, Isections
and channels shall be deemed as supports which cannot be easily
climbed upon for the purpose of this rule.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
92. Protection against lightning-
(1) The owner of every overhead line 1[,sub-station or generating station]
which is so exposed as to be liable to injury from lightning shall adopt efficient
means for diverting to earth any electrical surges due to lightning.
2[(2) The earthing lead for any lightning arrestor shall not pass through any iron
or steel pipe, but shall be taken as directly as possible from the lightning- arrestor
to a separate earth electrode and/or junction of the earth mat already provided
for the high and extra-high voltage sub-station subject to the avoidance of bends
wherever practicable.
Note- A vertical ground electrode shall be connected to this junction of the earth
mat.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs. by GSR 1050, dt. 9.11.1985.
93. Unused overhead lines-
(1) Where an overhead line ceases to be used as an electric supply line, the
owner shall maintain it in a safe mechanical condition in accordance with rule 76
or shall remove it.
(2) Where any overhead line ceases to be used as an electric supply line, an
Inspector may, by a notice in writing served on the owner, require him to maintain
it in a safe mechanical condition or to remove it within fifteen days of the receipt
of the notice.
CHAPTER IX
ELECTRIC TRACTION
94. Additional rules for electric traction-
(1) The rules in this Chapter apply only where energy is used for purposes of
traction.
Provided that nothing in this Chapter shall apply to energy used for the public
carriage of passengers, animals or goods on, or for the lighting or ventilation of
the rolling stock of any railway or tramway subject to the provisions of the Indian
Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890).
(2) In this Chapter the conductor used for transmitting energy to a vehicle is
referred to as the “line” and the other conductor as the “return”.
(3) The owner of the line, return, rails or trolley wire, as the case may be, shall
be responsible for the due observance of rules 95 to 108.
95. Voltage of supply to vehicle- No person shall supply energy at high or
extra-high voltage to any trolley-wire or other conductor used in direct electrical
and mechanical connection with any vehicle, except with the written approval of
the Central or the State Government, as the case may be, and subject to such
conditions as the State Government may think reasonable and proper in the
circumstances.
96. Insulation of lines- Every line shall be insulated throughout.
97. Insulation of returns-
(1) Where any rails on which cars run, or any conductors laid between or
within 0.9 metre of such rails, form any part of a return, such part may be
uninsulated. All other returns or parts of a return, shall be insulated, unless they
are of such conductivity as to secure the conditions required by sub-rules (2) and
(3) of rule 98.
(2) Where any part of a return is uninsulated, it shall be connected with the
negative or neutral of the system.
98. Proximity to metallic pipes, etc.-
(1) Where an uninsulated return is in proximity to any metallic pipe, structure
or substance not belonging to the owner of the return, he shall, if so required by
the owner of such pipe, structure or substance, connect his return therewith at
the latter’s expense.
(2) Where the return is partly or entirely uninsulated, the owner shall, in the
construction and maintenance of his system, adopt such means for reducing the
difference produced by the current between the potential of the uninsulated
return at any one point and the potential of the uninsulated return at any other
point as to ensue that the difference of potential between the uninsulated return
and any metallic pipe, structure or substance in the vicinity shall not exceed four
volts where the return is relatively positive, or one and one-third volts where the
return is relatively negative.
(3) The owner of any such pipe, structure or substance as is referred to in
sub-rule (2) may, in respect of it require the owner of the uninsulated return at
reasonable times and intervals to ascertain by test in his presence or in that of
his representative, whether the condition specified in sub-rule (2) is fulfilled, and,
if such condition is found to be fulfilled, all reasonable expenses of, and
incidental to, the carrying out of the test shall be borne by the owner of the pipe,
structure or substance.
99. Difference of potential on return- Where the return is partly or entirely
uninsulated, the owner shall keep a continuous record of the difference of
potential, during the working of his system, between every junction of an
insulated return With an uninsulated return and the point on the route most
distant from that junction, and the difference of potential shall not, under normal
running conditions, exceed a mean value of seven volts between the highest
momentary peak and the average for the hour of maximum load.
100. Leakage on conduit system- Where both the line and the return are placed
within a conduit, the following conditions shall be fulfilled in the construction and
maintenance of the system: -
(a) Where the rails are used to form any part of the return, they shall be
electrically connected (at distances not exceeding 30 metres apart), with the
conduit by means of copper strips having a cross-sectional area of at least 0.40
sq.cm. or by other means of equal conductivity. Where the return is wholly
insulated and contained with the conduit, the latter shall be connected with earth
at the generating station or sub-station through an instrument suitable for the
indication of any contact or partial contact of either the line or the return with the
conduit; and
(b) The leakage-current shall be ascertained daily, before or after the hours of
running, when the line is fully charged; and if at any time it is found to exceed 0.6
ampere per km. of single tramway track, the transmission and use of energy shall
be suspended unless the leakage is stopped within twenty-four hours.
101. Leakage on system other than conduit system- Where both the line and
the return are not placed within a conduit, the leakage current shall be
ascertained daily before or after the hours of running, when the line is fully
charges; and if at any time it is found to exceed 0.3 ampere per km. of single
tramway track, the transmission and use of energy shall be suspended unless
the leakage is stopped within twenty-four hours.
102. Passengers not to have access to electric circuit- Precautions to the
satisfaction of an Inspector shall be taken by the owner of every vehicle to
prevent: -
(a) The access of passengers to any portion of the electric circuit where there
is danger from electric shock,
(b) Any metal, hand-rail or other metallic substance liable to be handled by
passengers, becoming charged.
103. Current density in rails- Where rails on which cars run are used as a
return, the current density in such rails shall not under ordinary working
conditions, exceed 1.4 amperes per sq. cm. of cross-sectional area.
104. Isolation of sections- Every trolley-wire shall be constructed in sections not
exceeding 1.6 km. in length, and means shall be provided for isolating each
section.
105. Minimum size and strength of trolley-wire- No trolley-wire shall be of less
cross-sectional area than 0.5 sq.cm. or shall have an actual breaking load of less
than 2000 kg.
106. Height of trolley-wire and length of span- A trolley-wire or a traction feeder
on the same supports as a trolley-wire shall nowhere be at a height from the
surface of the street of less than 5.2 metres except, where it passes under a
bridge or other fixed structure, or through or along a tunnel or mineshaft or the
like in which case it shall be suspended to the satisfaction of an Inspector.
107. Earthing of guard wires- Every guard wire shall be connected with earth at
each point at which its electrical continuity is broken and shall also be connected
with the rails at intervals of not more than five spans.
1[107A. Proximity to magnetic observatories and laboratories- Traction works
shall not be carried out in the vicinity of geomagnetic observatories and
laboratories without the concurrence of the Central Government or of any officer
authorised by it in this behalf.]
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
108. Records-
(1) The owner shall, so far as is consistent with his system of working, keep
the following records, namely: -
(a) Daily records showing: -
(i) The maximum working current from the source of supply;
(ii) The maximum working voltage at the source of supply;
(iii) The difference of potential, as required by rule 99; and
(iv) The leakage current (if any), as required by rule 100 and rule 101, and;
(b) Occasional records showing: -
(i) Every test made under sub-rules (2) and (3) of rule 98;
(ii) Every stoppage of leakage, together with the time occupied; and
(iii) Particulars of any abnormal occurrence affecting the electrical working of
the system.
(2) Such records shall be open to examination by an Inspector or by any
person authorised in writing by an Inspector.
CHAPTER X
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE
ADOPTED IN MINES AND
OIL-FIELDS
109. Application of Chapter-
(1) The rules in this Chapter shall apply only where energy is used in mines
as defined in the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952).
(2) In mines, the rules in this Chapter do not apply to apparatus used above
ground, excepting such apparatus as may directly affect the safety of persons
below ground.
110. Responsibility for observance-
(1) It shall be the duty of the owner, agent, engineer or manager of a mine, or
of the agent, engineer of any company operating in an oil field, or of the owner,
engineer of one or more drilled wells situated in an oil field, to comply with and
enforce the following rules and it shall be duty of all persons employed to conduct
their work in accordance with such rules.
(2) Adequate number of authorised supervisors and electricians shall be on
duty in every mine or oil-field while energy is being used therein.
1[Explanation- For the purposes of this rule, the word “engineer” shall-
(a) In the case of a coal mine, have the same meaning as assigned to it in the
Coal Mines Regulations, 1957;
(b) In the case of a metalliferous mine, have the same meaning as assigned
to it in the Metalliferous Mines Regulations, 1961; and
(c) In the case of an oil mine, mean the ‘Installation Manager’ under the Oil
Mines Regulations, 1984.]
111. Notices-
(1) On or before the first day of February in every year, in respect of every
mine or oil-field, returns giving the size and type of apparatus, together with such
particulars in regard to circumstances of its use which may be required by the
Inspector, shall be sent to the Inspector by the persons specified in rule 110 in
the form set out in Annexure-X or XI, whichever is applicable.
(2) The persons specified in rule 110 shall also give to Inspector not less than
seven days notice in writing of the intention to bring into use any new installation
in a mine or oil-field giving details of apparatus installed and its location.
Provided that in case of any additions or alterations to an existing low and
medium voltage installation, immediate notice in writing shall be sent to the
Inspector before such additions or alterations are brought into use.
(3) This rule shall not apply to telecommunication or signalling apparatus.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
112. Plans-
(1) A correct plan, on the same scale as the plan kept at the mine in fulfilment
of the requirements of the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952), shall be available in the
office at the mine showing the position of all fixed apparatus and conductors
therein, other than lights, telecommunication or signalling apparatus, or cables
for the same.
(2) A similar plan on the scale not less than 25 cm. to a Km (1: 4000) shall be
kept by the manager or owner of one or more wells in any oil-field.
(3) A similar plant on such scale as the Central Government may direct,
showing the position of all electric supply lines, shall be kept in the office of any
licensee or other person transmitting or distributing energy in a mine or oil-field.
(4) The plans specified under the provisions of this rule shall be examined,
and corrected as often as necessary to keep them reasonably up-to-date. The
dates of such examinations shall be entered thereon by the manager or owner of
the mine or wells and such plans shall be available to the Inspector, or an
Inspector of Mines at any time.
113. Lighting, communications and fire precautions-
(1) In a time illuminated by electricity, one or more flame safety lamps, or
other lights approved by the Inspector of mines, shall be maintained in a state of
continuous illumination in all places where failure of the electric light at any time
would be prejudicial to safety.
(2) Efficient means of communication shall be provided in every mine
between the point where the switchgear provided under sub-rule (1) of rule 121 is
erected and the shaft bottom or other distributing centres in the mines.
(3) Fire extinguishing appliances of adequate capacity and of an approved
type shall be installed and properly maintained in every place in a mine
containing apparatus, other than cables, telecommunications and signalling
apparatus.
114. Isolation and fixing of transformer, switchgear, etc.-
(1) Where necessary to prevent danger of mechanical damage transformers
and switchgear shall be placed in a separate room, compartment or box.
(2) Unless the apparatus is so constructed, protected, and worked as to
obviate the risk of fire, no inflammable material shall be used in the construction
of any room, compartment or box containing apparatus, or in the construction of
any of the fittings therein. Each such room, compartment or box shall be
substantially constructed and shall be kept 1[dry and illuminated and efficient
ventilation] shall be provided for all apparatus installed therein.
(3) Adequate working space and means of access, clear of obstruction and
free from danger, shall, so far as circumstances permit, be provided for all
apparatus that has to be worked or attended to and all handles intended to be
operated shall be conveniently placed for that purpose.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
115. Method of earthing- Where earthing is necessary in a mine it shall be
carried out by connection to an earthing system at the surface of the mine, in a
manner approved by the Inspector.
116. Protective equipment-
(1) In the interest of safety, appropriate switchgear with necessary protective
equipment shall be suitably placed in the mine for automatically disconnecting
supply to any part of the system where a fault including an earth fault occurs.
(2) The operation of the switchgear and the relays shall be recorded daily at
the generating station, sub-station or switch station in a register kept for the
purpose.
(3) The effectiveness of the switchgear and the protective 1[system shall
always be kept and maintained in working order, shall be checked once every
three months] and the result thereof shall be recorded in a separate register kept
for the purpose.
117. Earthing metal, etc.-
(1) All metallic sheaths, coverings, handles, joint broxes, switchgear frames,
instrument covers, switch and fuse covers of boxes, all lampholders (unless
efficiently protected by an insulated covering made of fire resisting material), and
the frames and bedplates of generators, transformers and motors (including
portable motors), shall be earthed by connection to an earthing system in the
manner prescribed in rule 115.
(2) Where cables are provided with a metallic covering constructed and
installed in accordance with clause (d) of rule 122, such metallic covering may be
used as a means of connection to the earthing system.
(3) All conductors of an earthing system shall have conductivity, at all parts
and all joints, at least equal to 50 per cent of that of the largest conductor used
solely to supply the apparatus, a part of which it is desired to earth.
Provided that no conductor of an earthing system shall have a cross-sectional
area less than 0.15 sq. cm. except in the case of the earth conductor of a flexible
cable used with portable apparatus where the voltage does nor exceed 125 volts,
and the cross-sectional area and conductance of the earthcore is not less than
that of the largest of the live conductors in the cable.
(4) All joints in earth conductors and all joints in the metallic covering of
cables shall be properly soldered or otherwise efficiently made.
(5) No switch, fuse, or circuit-breaker shall be inserted in any earth conductor.
(6) This rule shall not apply (except in the case of portable apparatus) to any
system in a mine in which the voltage does not exceed 30 volts.
1[118. Voltage limits- Energy shall not be transmitted into a mine at a voltage
exceeding 11000 volts and shall not be used therein at a voltage exceeding 6600
volts.
Provided that:
(a) Where hand-held portable apparatus is used, the voltage shall not exceed
125 volts;
(b) Where electric lighting is used: -
(i) In underground mines, the lighting system shall have a mid or neutral
point connected with earth and the voltage shall not exceed 125 volts between
phases;
(ii) On the surface of a mine or in an open cast mine, the voltage may be
raised to 250 volts, if the neutral or the mid point of the system is connected with
earth and the voltage between the phases does not exceed 250 volts;
(c) Where portable hand-lamps are used in underground working of mine, the
voltage shall not exceed 30 volts;
(d) Where any circuit is used for the remote control or electric interlocking of
apparatus, the circuit voltage shall not exceed 30 volts;
Provided that in fixed plants, the said voltage may be permitted upto 650 volts, if
the bolted type plug is used.]
1. Subs. by GSR 361, dt. 19.3.1983, w.e.f. 7.5.1983.
1[119. Transformers- Where energy is transformed, suitable provision shall be
made to guard against danger by reason of the lower voltage apparatus
becoming accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage from or
contact with the higher voltage apparatus.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
120. Switchgear and terminals- Switchgear and all terminals, cable-ends,
cable-joints and connections to apparatus shall be totally enclosed and shall be
constructed, installed and maintained as to comply with the following
requirements: -
(a) All parts shall be of mechanical strength sufficient to resist rough usage;
(b) All conductors and contact areas shall be of adequate current-carrying
capacity and all joints in conductors shall be properly soldered or otherwise
efficiently made;
(c) The lodgement of any matter likely to diminish the insulation or affect the
working of any switchgear shall be prevented;
(d) All live parts shall be so protected or enclosed as to prevent persons
accidentally coming into contact with them and to prevent danger from arcs,
short-circuits, fire, water, gas or oil;
(e) Where there may be risk of igniting gas, coal-dust, oil or other inflammable
material, all parts shall be so protected as to prevent open sparking; and
(f) Every switch or circuit-breaker shall be constructed as to be capable of
opening the circuit, if controls and dealing with any short-circuit without danger.
121. Disconnection of supply-
(1) Properly constructed switchgear for disconnecting the supply of energy to
a mine or oil-field shall be provided 1[***] at a point approved by the Inspector.
During the time any cable supplying energy to the mine from the aforesaid
switchgear is live, a person authorised to operate the said switchgears shall be
available within easy reach thereof.
2[Provided that in the case of gassy coal seam of degree II and degree III, the
main mechanical ventilator operator by electricity shall be interlocked with the
switchgear so as to automatically disconnect the power supply in the event of
stoppage of main mechanical ventilator.]
(2) When necessary in the interest of safety, appropriate apparatus suitably
placed, shall be provided for disconnecting the supply from every part of a
system.
(3) Where considered necessary by the Inspector in the interests of safety,
the apparatus specified in sub-rule (2) shall be so arranged as to disconnect
automatically from the supply any section of the system subjected to a fault.
(4) Every motor shall be controlled by switchgear which shall be so arranged
as to disconnect the supply from the motor and from all apparatus connected
thereto. Such switchgears shall be so placed as to be easily operated by the
person authorised to operate the motor.
3[(5) Whenever required by the Inspector the motor shall be controlled by a
switchgear to disconnect automatically the supply in the event of conditions of
over-current, over-voltage and single phasing.]
1. Omitted by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 29.1.1983, w.e.f. 12.2.1983.
122. Cables- All cables, other than flexible cables for portable or transportable
apparatus, shall comply with the following requirements:-
(a) All such cables (other than the outer conductor of a concentric cable) shall
be covered with insulating material and shall be efficiently protected from
mechanical damage and supported at sufficiently frequent intervals and in such a
manner as to prevent damage to such cables;
(b) (i) Except as provided in clause (c), no cables other than concentric
cables or two-core or multicore cables protected by a metallic covering or single
core cables protected by a metallic covering and which contain all the conductors
of a circuit shall be used-
(1) Where the voltage exceeds 125 volts, or
(2) When an Inspector considers that there risk of igniting gas or coal-dust or
other inflammable material, and so directs;
(ii) The sheath of metal-sheated cables and the metallic armouring of
armoured cables shall be of a thickness not less than that recommended from
time to time in the appropriate standard of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards];
(c) Where a medium voltage direct current system is used, two single core
cables may be used for any circuit provided that their metallic coverings are
bounded together by earth conductors so placed that the distance between any
two consecutive bonds is not greater than 30 metres measured along either
cables;
(d) The metallic covering of every cable shall be-
(i) Electrically and mechanically continuous througout;
(ii) Earthed, if it is required by sub-rule (1) of rule 117 to be earthed by a
connection to the earthing system of conductivity not less than of the same
length of the said metallic covering;
(iii) Efficiently protected against corrosion where necessary;
(iv) Of a conductivity at all parts and at all joints at least equal to 50 per cent of
the conductivity of the largest conductor enclosed by the said metallic covering;
and
(v) Where there may be risk of igniting gas, coal-dust, or other inflammable
material, so constructed as to prevent, as far as practicable, the occurrence of
open sparking so as the result of any fault or leakage from live conductors;
(e) Cables and conductors where connected to motors, transformers, switchgear,
and other apparatus, shall be installed so that:-
(i) They are mechanically protected by securely attaching the metallic
covering to the apparatus; and
(ii) The insulating material at each cable end is efficiently sealed so as to
prevent the diminution of its insulating properties;
(f) Where necessary to prevent abrasion or to secure gas-tightness properly
constructed glands or bushes shall be provided;
(g) Unarmoured cables or conductors shall be conveyed either in metallic
pipes or metal casings or suspended from efficient insulators by means of nonconducting
materials which will not cut the covering and which will prevent
contact with any timbering or metal work. If separate insulated conductors are
used, they shall be installed at least 3.75 cm. apart and shall not be brought
together except at lamps, switches and fittings.
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
123. Flexible cables-
(1) Flexible cables for portable or transportable apparatus shall be two-core or
multi-core (unless required for electric welding), and shall be covered with
insulating material which shall be efficiently protected from mechanical injury If
flexible metallic covering is used either as the outer conductor of a concentric
cable or as a means of protection from mechanical injury, it shall not be used by
itself to form an earth conductor for such apparatus, but it may be used for that
purpose in conjunction with an earthing core.
(2) Every flexible cable intended for use with portable or transportable
apparatus shall be connected to the system and to such apparatus by properly
constructed connectors.
Provided that for high voltage machines a bolted type connector shall be used
and the trailing cable shall be suitably anchored at the machine end.
(3) At every point where flexible cables are joined to main cables, a 1[circuit
breaker] shall be provided which is capable of 1[automatically] disconnecting the
supply from such flexible cables.
(4) Every flexible cable attached to a portable or transportable machine shall
be examined periodically by the person authorised to operate the machine, and if
such cable is used underground, it shall be examined at least once in each shift
by such person. If such cable is found to be damaged or defective, it shall
forthwith be replaced by a cable in good condition.
(5) If the voltage of the circuit exceeds low voltage, all flexible cable attached
to any transportable apparatus shall be provided with flexible metallic screening
or pliable armouring.
2[Provided that this sub-rule shall not apply to flexible cables attached to any
transportable apparatus used in open cast mines where reeling and unreeling of
such cables is necessary as per design features of the equipment.]
(6) All flexible metallic screening or armouring specified in sub-rule (5) shall
comply with the provisions of rule 122 (d).
Provided that in the case of separately screened flexible cables the conductance
of each such screen shall not be less than 25 per cent of that the power
conductor and the combined conductance of all such screens shall in no case be
less than that of 0.15 sq. cm. copper conductor.
(7) Flexible cable exceeding 90 metres in length shall not be used with any
portable or transportable apparatus.
Provided that such flexible cable when used with coal-cutting machines for long
wall operation shall not exceed 180 metres in length.
Provided further that the aforesaid cable in case of an open cast mine, when
used with 1[electrically operated heavy earth moving machinery] shall not exceed
300 metres in length.
(8) Flexible cable, when installed in a mine, shall be efficiently supported and
protected from mechanical injury
(9) Flexible cables shall not be used with apparatus other than portable or
transportable apparatus.
(10) Where flexible cables are used they shall be detached or otherwise
isolated from the source of supply when not in use, and arrangements shall be
made to prevent the energising of such cables by unauthorised persons.
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
124. Portable and transportable machines- The person authorised to operate
an electrically driven coal-cutter, or other portable or transportable machine, shall
not leave the machine while it is in operation and shall, before leaving the area in
which such machine is operating, ensure that the supply is disconnected from the
flexible cable which supplies the machine. When any such machine is in
operation, step shall be taken to ensure that the flexible cable is not dragged
along by the machine.
1[Provided that all portable and transportable machines used in
underground mines shall operate on remote control from the concerned
switchgear with Pilot Core Protection.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
125. Sundry precautions-
(1) All apparatus shall be maintained reasonably free from dust, dirt and
moisture, and shall be kept clear of obstruction.
(2) All apparatus other than portable and transportable apparatus shall be
housed in a room, compartment or box so constructed as to protect the contents
from damage occasioned by falling material or passing traffic.
(3) Inflammable or explosive material shall not be stored in any room,
compartment or box containing apparatus, or in the vicinity of any apparatus.
(4) Should there be a fault in any circuit, the part affected shall be made dead
without delay and shall remain so until the fault has been remedied.
(5) While lamps are being changed the supply shall be disconnected.
(6) No lamp holder shall be in metallic connection with the guard or other
metal work of a portable hand lamp.
(7) The following notices, in Hindi and local language of the district, so
designed and protected as to be easily legible at all times, shall be exhibited: -
(a) At all places where electrical apparatus is in use, a notice forbidding
unauthorized person to operate or otherwise interfere with such apparatus;
(b) At those places in the interior or at the surface of the mine where a
telephone or other means of communication is provided, a notice giving full
instructions to persons authorized to effect the disconnection, at the surface of
the mine, of the supply of energy to the mine.
(8) All apparatus, including portable and transportable apparatus, shall be
operated only by those persons who are authorised for the purpose.
(9) Where a plug-and-socket-coupling other than of bolted type is used with
flexible cables, and electrical inter-lock or other approved device shall be
provided to prevent the opening of the coupling while the conductors are live.
1[126. Precautions where gas exists-
(1) In any part of a coal-seam of the first degree gassiness-
(a) All cables shall be constructed, installed, protected, operated and
maintained in such a manner as to prevent risk of open sparking;
(b) At any place which lies in-bye of the last ventilation connection, all
2[signalling or telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be so
constructed, installed, protected, operated and maintained as to be intrinsically
safe;
(c) All apparatus including portable and transportable apparatus including
lighting fittings used at any place which lies in bye of the last ventilation
connection shall be flame-proof.
(2) At any place which lies in any part of a coal-seam of second and third
degree gassiness-
(a) All 2[signalling, telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be so
constructed, installed, protected, operated and maintained as to be intrinsically
safe;
(b) All cables shall be constructed, installed, protected, operated and
maintained in such a manner as to prevent risk of open sparking;
(c) All apparatus, including portable and transportable apparatus used at any
place within 90 metres of any working face or goaf in case of a second degree
gassymine and within 270 metres of any working face or goaf in case of third
degree gassymine or at any place which lies in-bye of the last ventilation
connection or in ar-y return airways shall be flame-proof;
(d) All electric lamps shall be enclosed in flame-proof enclosures.
(3) In any oil mine or oil-field, at any place within the Danger Areas, -
(a) All 3[signalling and telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be
so constructed, installed, operated, protected and maintained as to be
instrinsically safe;
(b) All cables shall be so constructed, installed, operated and maintained as
to prevent risk of open sparking;
(c) All apparatus including portable and transportable apparatus shall be
flame-proof;
(d) All electric lamps shall be enclosed in flame-proof enclosures.
(4) In any coal-seam of degree second and degree third gassiness or the
danger zone of oil-mine the supply shall be discontinued, -
(a) Immediately, if open sparking occurs;
(b) During the period required for examination or adjustment of the apparatus,
which would necessitate the exposing of any part liable to open sparking;
(c) The supply shall not be reconnected until the apparatus has been
examined by the electrical supervisor or one of his duly appointed assistants until
the defect, if any, has been remedied or the necessary adjustment made;
(d) A flame safety lamp shall be provided and maintained in a state of
continuous illumination near an apparatus (including portable or transportable
apparatus) which remains energised and where the appearance of the flame of
such safety lamps indicates the presence of inflammable gas, the supply to all
apparatus in the vicinity shall be immediately disconnected and the incident
reported forthwith to an official of the mine; 4[and such apparatus shall be
interlocked with the controlling switch in such a manner as to disconnect power
supply automatically in the event of percentage of inflammable gas exceeding
one and one quarter in that particular district;]
Provided that where 5[apparatus] for automatic detection of the percentage of
inflammable gas or vapur are employed in addition to the flame safety lamps,
such 5[apparatus] shall be approved by the Inspector of Mines and maintained
perfect order.
(5) (i) In any part of a coal-seam of any degree of gassiness or in 6[any
hazardous] area of an oil-mine, if the presence of inflammable gas in the general
body of air is found any time to exceed one and one quarter 7[per cent], the
supply of energy shall be immediately disconnected from all cables and
apparatus in the area and the supply shall not be reconnected so long as the
percentage of inflammable gas remains in excess of one and one quarter 7[per
cent].
8[In an oil mine where concentration of inflammable gas exceed 20% of its lowest
explosive limit, the supply of electric energy shall be cutoff immediately from all
cables and apparatus lying within 30 metres of the installation and all sources of
ignition shall also be removed from the said area and normal work shall not be
resumed unless the area is made gas-free;]
9[Provided that such disconnection shall no apply to intrinsically safe
environmental monitoring scientific instruments.]
(ii) Any such disconnection or reconnection of the supply shall be noted in the
log sheet which shall be maintained -in the form set out in Annexure-XII and shall
be reported to the Inspector.
(6) The provisions of this rule shall apply to any metalliferous mine which may
be notified by the Inspector of Mines ii inflammable gas occurs or if the Inspector
of Mines is of the opinion that inflammable gas is likely to occur in such mine.
Explanation- For the purpose of this rule, -
(1) The expression coal-seam of first degree gassiness, coal-seam of second
degree gassiness’, ‘coal-seam of third degree gassiness’ and ‘flame-proof
apparatus’, shall have the meanings respectively assigned to them in the Coal
Mines Regulations, 1957.
(2) The following areas in an oil-mine or oil-field shall be known as
6[hazardous areas], namely:-
(a) An area of not less than 90 metres around an oil-well where a blow-out
has occurred or is likely to occur, as may be designated by the engineer-incharge
or the senior most official present at the site;
(b) An area within 90 metres of an oil-well which is being tested by open flow;
(c) An area within 15 metres of-
(i) A producing well-head or any point of open discharge of the crude
therefrom or other point where emission of 10[hazardous atmosphere] is normally
likely to arise, or
(ii) Any wildcat or exploration well-head being drilled in an area where
abnormal pressure conditions are known to exist, or
(iii) Any exploration or interspaced well-head being drilled in the area where
abnormal pressure conditions are known to exist; or
(d) Any area within 4.5 metres of-
(i) Any producing well-head where a closed system of production is
employed such as to prevent the emission accumulation in the area in normal
circumstances of a 10[hazardous atmosphere]; or
(ii) Exploration or interspaced well-head being drilled in an area where the
pressure conditions are normal and where the system of drilling employed
includes adequate measures for the prevention in normal circumstances of
emission or accumulation within the area of a 10[hazardous atmosphere]; or
(iii) An oil-well which is being tested other than by open flow.
Explanation- For the purposes of clause (d) 10[hazardous atmosphere] means an
atmosphere containing any inflammable gases or vapours in a concentration
capable of ignition.
11[(e) All appliances, equipments and machinery that are or may be used in
zone 0, zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas shall be of such type, standard and
make as approved by the Inspector by a general or special order in writing.
Explanation- (i) “Zone 0 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous
atmosphere is continuously present.”
(ii) “Zone 1 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous atmosphere
is likely to occur under normal operating conditions”.
(iii) “Zone 2 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous atmosphere
is likely to occur only under abnormal operating conditions”.]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
3. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Added by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993
5. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
6. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
7. Added by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
8. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
9.. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
10. Subs. by GSR 253, dt. 19.2.1981, w.e.f. 7.4.1981.
11. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991
127. Shot-firing-
(1) When shot-firing is in progress adequate precautions shall be taken to
protect apparatus and conductors other than those used for shot-firing from
injury.
(2) Current from lighting or power circuits shall not be used for firing shots.
(3) The provisions of rule 123 shall apply in regard to the covering and
protection of shot-firing cables, and adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent such cable touching other cables and apparatus.
128. Signalling- Where electrical signalling is used-
(a) Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent signal and telephone
wires coming into contact with other cables and apparatus;
(b) The voltage used in any one circuit shall not exceed 30 volts; and
(c) Contact-makers shall be so constructed as to prevent the accident closing
of the circuit.
1[(d) Bare conductors, where used shall be installed in suitable insulators.]
1. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
129. Haulage- Haulage by electric locomotives on the overhead trolley-wire
system, at medium or low voltage, and haulage by storage battery locomotives
may be used with the prior consent in writing of the Inspector, and subject to
such conditions as he may impose in the interests of safety
130. Earthing of neutral points- Where the voltage of an alternating current
system exceeds 30 volts, the neutral or mid-point shall be earthed by connection
to an earthing system in the manner prescribed in rule 115.
Provided that when the system concerned is required for blasting and signalling
purposes, the provisions of this rule shall not apply.
1[Provided further that in case of unearthed neutral system adequate protection
shall be provided with the approval of the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
1[131. Supervision-
1. Subs by GSR 253, dt. 19.2.1983, w.e.f. 7.3.1983.
(1) (i) One or more electrical supervisors as directed by the Inspector
shall be appointed in writing by the owner, agent or manager of a mine or by the
agent or the owner, of one or more wells in an oil field to supervise the
installation.
(ii) The electrical supervisor so appointed shall be the person holding a valid
Electrical Supervisor’s Certificate of Competency, covering mining installation
issued under sub-rule (1) of rule 45.
(iii) If the Inspector considers necessary for the compliance with the duties
specified in this rule, he may direct the owner or agent of the mine to appoint one
or more electricians who shall be persons holding licence under sub-rule (1) of
rule 45.
(2) Every person appointed to operate, supervise, examine or adjust any
apparatus shall be competent to undertake the work which he is required to
carryout as directed by the engineer.
(3) The electrical supervisor shall be responsible for the proper performance
of the following duties, by himself or by electrician appointed under sub-rule (1):-
(a) Through examination of all apparatus (including the testing of earth
conductors and metallic coverings for continuity) as often as may be necessary
to prevent danger;
(b) Examination and testing of all new apparatus, and of all apparatus, reerected
in the mine before it is put into service in a new position.
(4) In the absence of any electrical supervisor for more than three days, the
owner, agent or manager of the mine or the agent or owner of one or more oilwells
in an oil-field, shall appoint in writing a substitute electrical supervisor.
(5) (i) The electrical supervisor or the substitute electrical supervisor
appointed under sub-rule (4) to replace him shall be personally responsible for
the maintenance at the mine or oil-field, of a long book made up of the daily log
sheets prepared in the form set out in Annexure-XII.
(ii) The results of all tests carried out in accordance with the provisions of
sub-rule (3) shall be recorded in the log-sheets prepared in the form set out in
Annexure-XII.]
132. Exemptions- The provisions of rules 110 to 128 both inclusive and rule
131 shall not apply in any case, where, on grounds of emergency or special
circumstances, exemption is obtained from the Inspector. In granting any such
exemption the Inspector may prescribe such conditions as he thinks fit.
CHAPTER XI
MISCELLANEOUS
133. Relaxation by Government-
(1) The State Government, or where mine, oil-fields or railways or works
executed for or on behalf of the Central Government, are affected, the Central
Government, may by order in writing, direct that any of the provisions of rules in
Chapter IV other than rules 44A and 46, and all rules in Chapters V, VI, VII, VIII
and IX shall be relaxed generally or in particular case to such extent and subject
to such conditions as it may think fit.
(2) The Central Government may, by order in writing, direct that any of the
provisions of Chapter X of these rules shall be relaxed in any particular case to
such an extent and subject to such conditions as it may think fit.
134. Relaxation by Inspector- The Inspector, may, by order in writing, direct
that any of the provisions of rules 44, 1[50 (1)(a), (b) and (d), 50 A (2), 51 (1)], 61
(2), 63, 64(2), 65,71 to 73 (inclusive), 76 to 80 (inclusive), go, 2[118], 119(l)(a),
123(5), 123(17), 2[123(9) and 130], shall be relaxed in any case to such extent
and subject to suit conditions as he may think fit.
(2) Where the voltage of any system does not exceed 125 volts the Inspector
may, by order in writing, direct that any of the provisions of rules 29 to 34
(inclusive), 36 to 39 (inclusive), 83, 92, 94 to 107 (inclusive) shall, in addition to
the rules specified in Sub-rule (1), be relaxed as regards such systems to such
extent and subject to such conditions as he may think fit.
(3) Every relaxation so directed shall be reported forthwith to, and shall be
subject to disallowance or revision by, the State Government, or where the
relaxation affects mines, oil-fields or railways, by the Central Government.
1. Subs by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
135. Supply and use of energy by non-licensees and others- Where any person
other than a non-licensee is supplied with energy by a non-licensee or other
person or has his premises for the time being connected to the conductors or
plant of a non-licensee or other person, or himself generates energy and uses
such energy or part thereof, such person shall be deemed to be a consumer for
the purposes of rules 9, 10, 29 to 33 (inclusive), 45 to 70 (inclusive), 87 and 142
and non-licensee or other person shall be subject to all the liabilities imposed on
a licensee by these rules.
136. Responsibility of Agents and Managers- Where any person is responsible
for the observance of any of these rules, every agent and manager of such
person shall also be responsible for such observance in respect of matters under
their respective controls.
137. Mode of entry- All persons entering in pursuance of the Act or these rules,
any building which is used as a human dwelling or a place of worship shall, in
making such entry have due regard so far as may be compatible with the
exigencies of the purpose for which such entry is made, to the social and
religious usages or the occupant of the building entered.
138. Penalty for breaking seal- Where, in contravention of rule 56 any seal
referred to in that rule is broken-
(a) The person breaking the seal shall be punishable with fine which may
extend to two hundred rupees; and
(b) The consumer when he has not himself broken the seal shall be
punishable with fine which may extend to fifty rupees unless he proves that he
used all reasonable means in his power to ensure that the seal should not be
broken.
1[138A. Penality for breach of rule 44A- Where, in contravention of rule 44A, any
person responsible for the generation, transformation, transmission, conversion,
distribution, supply or use of energy fails to report to the Inspector and other
authorities concerned the occurrence of accidents, such person shall be
punishable with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
139. Penalty for breach of rule 45- Where any electrical installation work of the
nature specified in sub-rule (1) of rule 45 has been carried out otherwise than--
(a) Under the direct supervision of a person holding a certificate of
competency issued by the State Government under that rules; and
(b) In the absence of any applicable exemption under the proviso to sub-rule
of that rule, by an electrical contractor licensed by the State Government in this
behalf,
The consumer owner or occupier, the contractor (if any) or the person through
whom the work is being or was carried out and the person under whose
immediate supervision the work is being or was carried out, shall each be
punishable with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
1[140. Penalty for breach of rule 82-
(a) Where no notice is given under rule 82(l) or the amount of estimate as
demanded under rule 82(2) is not deposited, both the persons proposing and the
contractor engaged for erecting a new building or structure whether permanent or
temporary or for making in or upon an building or structure any permanent or
temporary additions or alterations, shall be deemed to have committed a breach
of rule 82(l) and shall be punishable with a fine which may extend to three
hundred rupees.
(b) If any person commences or continues any work in contravention of rule
82(3), in or upon any such building, structure, flood bank, road or carries out
addition or alteration thereto, the person contravening the same shall be
punishable with a fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
In addition to this the supplier shall, after obtaining the concurrence of the
Inspector discontinue the supply, if any, to such building, structure, flood bank, or
road etc. but only after giving forty-eight hours notice to the person concerned in
writing of disconnection of supply and shall not commence the supply until he
and the inspector are satisfied that the cause has been removed.]
1. Subs by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
1[140A. Penalty for breach of rule 77,79 or 80- Where a person is responsible for
any construction which is or which results in contravention of the provisions of
rule 77, 79 or 80 he and the contractor whom he employs shall be punishable
with a fine which may extend to three hundred rupees, and in the case of
continuing breach, with a further daily fine which may extend to fifty rupees.
1. Ins. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 31.12.1977.
141. Penalty for breach of rules- Any person other than an Inspector or any
officer appointed to assist the Inspector who being responsible for the
observance of any of these rules commits a breach thereof, shall be punishable
for every such breach with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees, and
in the case of a continuing breach with a further fine which may extend to fifty
rupees, for every day after first during which the breach has continued.
142. Application of rules- Subject to the provisions of sub-section (2) of section
58, these rules shall be binding on all persons, companies and undertakings to
whom licences have been granted or with whom agreements have been made by
or with the sanction of Government for the supply or use of electricity before the
commencement of the Act.
143. Repeal- The Indian Electricity Rules, 1937, are hereby repealed.
Provided that any order made, notification issued or anything done or any action
taken under any of the said rules shall be deemed to have been made, issued,
done or taken under the corresponding provisions of the rules.
ANNEXURE I
[SEE CLAUSE (C) OF SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 2]
SPECIFICATION RELATING TO THE DEPOSITION OF SILVER
The electrolyte shall consist of a solution of from 15 to 20 parts by weight of silver
nitrate in 100 parts of distilled water. The solution must only be used once and
only for so long that not more than 30 per cent of the silver in the solution is
deposited.
The anode shall be of silver, and the cathode of platinum. The current density at
the anode shall no exceed 1/5 ampere per square centimetre and at the cathode
1/50 ampere per square centimetre.
Not less than 100 cubic centimetres of electrolyte shall be used in a voltmeter.
Care must be taken that no particles which may become mechanically detached
from the anode shall reach the cathode.
Before the weighing, any traces of solution adhering to the cathode must be
removed and the cathode dried.
ANNEXURE II
[SEE SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 7]
SCALE OF FEES FOR COMPARISON WITH
THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIASTANDARDS
REFERRED TO IN SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 2
Rs.
For an instrument intended to be used as a sub-standard and submitted
for special examination and testing
80
If required to be kept under observation for a period longer than one
month, for each additional month or part of a month
40
For determining a resistance of standard form to highest accuracy
obtainable at one temperature
20
For determining the E.M.F. of a standard cell to highest accuracy
obtainable at one temperature
15
Note 1: - The instruments and apparatus under test are to be delivered and
removed from the Government Electrical Laboratory, Bhowanipore, Calcutta, free
of cost to Government.
Note 2: - In tests requiring the expenditure of a considerable amount of
power, a charge to cover the actual cost of the energy used may be made.
ANNEXURE III
[SEE RULE 14]
MODEL FORM OF DRAFT LICENCE UNDER THE INDIAN
ELECTRICITY ACT, 1910
[SEE SECTION 3]
Electric Licence 19…………
Draft Licence
The……… Electric Licence,……….. 19……..
Licence for the supply of energy granted by the Government………..of under the
Indian Electricity Act, 1910.
Licence is hereby granted to 1……………………… (carrying on business in partnership
under the name and style of)…………to supply electrical energy in the area2, with
the powers and upon the terms and conditions specified below:-
SHORT TITLE
1. This licence may be cited as “The 3Electrical Licence 19…………….”.
INTERPRETATION
2. In this licence-
(1) “The Act” shall mean the Indian Electricity Act, 1910.
(2) The expression “the licensee” shall mean and read the said4, and their (or
his) assigns; and
(3) The expression “deposited maps” shall mean the plans of the area of
supply hereinafter specified which has been deposited with Government in
pursuance of the rules under the Act, which plans are signed for the purpose of
identification by the Secretary to the Government of in the .........................
Department and by the applicants under the name and style of………..
(4) Other words and expressions have the same meanings as are assigned to
them in the Act or the rules made there under.
SECURITY5
3. (1) The period within which, under Clause l (a) of the Schedule to the
Act, the licensee shall show that he is in a position fully and efficiently to
discharge the duties and obligations imposed on him shall be
(2) The period within which, under Clause l (b) of the Schedule to the Act, the
licensee shall deposit or secure such sum as therein mentioned, and the sum so
to be deposited or secured, shall unless otherwise ordered by the Government
under that clause be……… and Rupees………….respectively.
AREA OF SUPPLY6
4. The area within which the supply of energy is authorized by the licence
(the area of supply) under the Act is the whole of the area bounded as follows: -
North - By
East - By
South - By
West - By
The boundaries whereof are delineated in the deposit maps.
Power to lay mains outside area of Supply7.
5. The licensee may lay down or place electric supply-lines for the
conveyance and transmission of energy from a generating station situated or to
be situated at outside the area of supply to the boundary or the area of supply.
Limits within which the supply of energy is to be compulsory8
6. (1) The works to be executed to the satisfaction of the Government
under Clause IV of the Schedule to the Act are the following namely:-’
(2) If the licensee fails to comply with the provisions of sub-clause (1), the
licence may be revoked. *
NATURE OF SUPPLY9
7. (l) The nature of supply shall be................ or such other as the State
Government may allow.
Breaking up of streets, railways and tramways10.
8. The licensee is specially authorised to open and break up the soil and
pavement of the following streets or parts of streets which are not repairable by
the Government or by a local authority, and of the following railways and
tramways or part of railways and tramways, namely: -
(a) Streets.
(b) Railways11.
(c) Tramways11.
APPOINTMENT OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
9. The licensee shall employ a Resident Electrical Engineer degree or
diploma in electrical engineering from a recognised University or College or
Qualifications equivalent to such degree or diploma and such practical
experience as the State Government may specify in this behalf.
PURCHASE OF UNDERTAKINGS
10. (1) The option of purchase given by sub-section (1) of section 6 of the
Act shall be exercisable on the expiry of a period of 20 years, i.e. from the date of
notification of this licence and on the expiry of every subsequent period of 10
years12. The terms of such purchase shall be13. The percentage of the value to
be determined in accordance with and for the purpose of sub-sections (1) and (2)
of section 7A of the Act of the lands, buildings, works, materials and plant of the
licensee therein mentioned to be added under the proviso to sub-section (4) of
section 7A to such value on account of compulsory purchase shall be ................
per cent.
(2) In accordance with clause (d) (ii) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act,
it is hereby declared that the generating station to be used in connection with the
undertaking shall/shall not form part of the undertaking for the purpose of
purchase under section 5 or section 6. 14
ADDITIONS TO VARIATIONS FROM, AND EXCEPTIONS
FROM THE SCHEDULE TO THE ACT15
11. (1) In pursuance of clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act,
it is hereby expressly declared that the provisions contained in the Schedule to
the Act shall for the purposes of this licence be supplemented by the addition of
the following clauses, namely:-
(2) In pursuance of clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act it is
hereby expressly declared that the clause/clauses of the schedule to the Act
mentioned below shall be varied in the manner hereinafter indicated, namely 16:
(3) In pursuance of clause (o or sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act, it is
hereby expressly declared that the clause/clauses 16 of the Schedule to the Act
shall be excepted from incorporation in this licence.
Note- In the preparation of a draft licence the above model form may be varied,
or added to, by the applicant so far as the Act and rules admit.
Rules Nos. 11 to 15 (inclusive) as to applications for licences should be
consulted. In drawing up a draft licences the attention of the applicant is more
particularly directed to the following sections of the Act viz. 3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 12, 21,
22, 22A, 22B, 23, 27, 51 and 57; the powers under section 51 can only be
conferred after the grant of the licence.
In the case of licences for bulk supply, see Clause ix of the Schedule to the Act
and the proviso to Clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act, also
clause (b) of section 10 of the Act.
Signature of Applicant or his agent (if any)
Address of Applicant.
1. The licensee may be any local authority, company or individual. In case of
firm, give names of all the directors or partners.
2. See clause 4.
3. Short title to agree with heading.
4. Name of all directors or partners as in the preamble in the case of a firm.
5. See section 4(l)(c) of the Act and Clause I of the Schedule to the Act.
6. The area for which each local authority is constituted should be distinctly
marked or coloured. See rule 11(l)(b).
7. This clause should be retained only where the licensee is to supply energy
from a generating station outside the area of supply. Where power to cross an
intervening area is sought under section 3(l) of the Act, enter details here.
8. Set, section 3(2)(ci) of the Act.
9. It is open to the licensee to propose a “Compulsory area” or the State
Government to make provision for such an area. Ordinarily it will be sufficient to
enter here the names of “compulsory street” in which the licensee will lay
distributing mains. If no compulsory works are specified in the licence, the State
Government may subsequently direct that works are to be executed; see Clause
IV of the Schedule to the Act.
* See note to sub-clause (1) of this Clause.
10. This clause to be omitted if no such powers are required in the licence.
See section 12(5) of the Act and proviso to the same. Powers can be obtained
subsequently; see rule 23.
11. In ordinary cases the level-crossings or points at which interference is
proposed must be specified.
12. The period after which an option to purchase arises may be less than 20
and 10 years, respectively
13. The terms must not differ from those laid down in the Act unless the
powers of section 10 are invoked to modify or cancel them.
14. The generating station or stations belonging to the licensee should
ordinarily be included except where they form part of a traction undertaking
previously authorised.
15. To be omitted if not required in any draft licence.
16. The letter part of the clause may require modification according to the
circumstance.
ANNEXURE IV
[See Rule 26(3)]
SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL AND FINANCIAL
PARTICULARS FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH 19...
Figures of the Previous year: -
TECHNICAL
1. Year of working.
2. Area of supply in square km.
3. Approximate population in the area of supply.
4. Installed capacity:
(a) Generating plant (excluding retired plant):
(i) Hydraulic kW
(ii) Steam kW
(iii) Internal combustion kW
TOTAL kW
(b) Receiving Station:
Transformers
5. Normal maximum demand on the system kVA
6. kWh generated:
(i) Hydraulic kWh
(ii) Steam kWh
(iii) Internal combustion kWh
TOTAL kWh
7. kWh used for Generating Station Auxiliaries.
8. KWh purchased from other agencies.
9. kWh available for sale (6-7) + 8
10. KWh supplied free (if any) to officers & staff.
11. KWh supplied free (if any) to office, canteen etc.
12. KWh sold.
13. KWh unaccounted for 9-(10+11+12).
14. Fuel:
(a) (i) Coal and/or furnace oil consumed in tonnes
(ii) Average calorific value per kg of coal and/or furnace oil consumed
(iii) Average cost of coal and/or furnace oil per tonnes
(b) (i) Oil consumed in tonnes
(ii) Average calorific value per kg. of oil consumed
(iii) Average cost of oil per tonne.
15. Lubricating oil:
(a) Quantity consumed Litres.
(b) Average cost per litre
16. Consumers: No. Connected load kW
(a) Domestic or Residential
(b) Commercial
(c) Industrial:
(i) Low and medium voltage
(ii) High and/or extra-high voltage
TOTAL
17. Segregation of kWh sold-
(i) Domestic or Residential:
(a) Lights* and Fans.
(b) Heating and small power.
(ii) Commercial:
(a) Lights* and Fans.
(b) Heating and small power.
(iii) Industrial Power:
(a) Low and medium voltage.
(b) High voltage.
(iv) Public Lighting.
(v) Traction.
(vi) Irrigation.
(vii) Public Water-works and Sewage Pumping.
(viii) Supplies in bulk to Distributing Licensees.
18. Number of persons employed on regular basis;
(i) Technical-
1. Supervisory.
2. Others.
(ii) Administrative-
1. Supervisory
2. Others.
19. Length of Main Lines erected during the year-
(i) Length of transmission lines at different voltages-
(a) Overhead...................................
(b) Underground.............................
(ii) Length of distribution lines
FINANCIAL-
1. Share Capital (paid up)
2. Loan Capital (other than loans advanced by the State Electricity Board)
3. Licensee’s Capital (1+2)
4. Total Capital Expenditure
5. Capital base [vide Paragraph XVII (1) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
6. Reasonable Return [vide Paragraph XVII (9) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948].
7. Clear Profit [vide Paragraph XVII (2) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
8. Maximum sum permissible for distribution to share and debenture holders
[vide Paragraph II (1) of the Sixth Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
9. Actual sum available for distribution to share and debenture holders
10. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (3)
11. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (4)
12. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (5)
13. Dividend declared for the year
(a) On ordinary shares
(b) on preference shares
14. Market Price of shares:
(a) Ordinary shares
(b) Preference shares
15. Operating Revenues (vide Statement III-Annexure V)
16. Operating Expenses including depreciation (vide Statement IV Annexure
V)
17. Depreciation set apart for the year (vide Statement V-Annexure V)
18. Revenue per kWh sold (overall) (Item 15-kWh sold)
19. Revenue per kWh sold-
(i) Domestic or Residential:
(a) Lights* and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
(ii) Commercial:
(a) Lights* and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
(iii) Industrial Power:
(a) Low and medium voltage
(b) High voltage
(iv) Public Lighting
(v) Traction
(vi) Irrigation
(vii) Public Water-works and Sewage Pumping
(viii) Supplies in bulk of Distributing Licensees
20. Cost per kWh sold (overall) (Item 16-kWh sold)
* Including unmetered supply
ANNEXURE V
MODEL FORM OF ACCOUNTS
[SEE SECTION 11 OF INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT, 1910 AND
RULES 26(3)]
ELECTRIC LICENCE, 19......
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF LICENCE
Name of Undertaking Year of Operation
NO. I - STATEMENT OF SHARE AND LOAN CAPITAL FOR THE YEAR ENDED
31ST MARCH, 19.....
(APPLICABLE TO LICENSEES OTHER THAN LOCAL AUTHORITY
LICENSEES)
Description
of Capital
Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Receipt
during the
year
Redeemed
during the
year
Balance at
the end of
the year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
A. Share Capital Authorised Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of………….. Rs each.
.......... % Preference shares of Rs…….. each
Issued Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs……………… each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs…………each
Subscribed capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs…………each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……….each
Called up capital:
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs……….each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……………each
Less calls in arrears
Paid-up Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs………..each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……….each
TOTAL PAID TO CAPITAL
B. Capital Reserve
Share Forfeiture a/c
Share Premium a/c
Other items (to be specified)
TOTAL CAPITAL RESERVE
C. Loan Capital-Loans from State Electricity Boards per cent debentures of
Rs……………… each.
Other Loans-
(i) Secured
(ii) Unsecured
TOTAL LOANS CAPITAL
D. Other Capital
Contribution from consumer including local authorities for service-lines and public
lighting after the commencement of the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
TOTAL OTHER CAPITAL
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED AND APPROPRIATED
(A+B+C+D)
Note: Capital invested by proprietor, partnership, co-operative society, company
etc. licensee which is interest bearing should be shown under ‘C-Unsecured
loans and advances’ and that which is interest-free should be shown under ‘DSpecial
items (to be specified)’.
ELECTRIC LICENCE, 19........
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF LICENCE
Name of Local Authority Year of Operation
NO. I (AL)- STATEMENT OF LOANS RAISED AND REDEEMED
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19..
(APPLICABLE TO LOCAL AUTHORITY LICENSEES)
Description
of loans
raised from
time to time
Amount
sanctioned
Rate % Period of
Payment
Amount of
Annual
instalment
From To
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amount of
loan
redeemed
upto the
beginning
of the year
Amount of
loan
redeemed
during the
year
Total loan
redeemed upto
the end of the
year
Balance of
loan
outstanding
at the end
of the year
Remarks
7 8 9 10 11
Total loans raised for the electrification scheme……………………………
NO. I (A2) -STATEMENT OF LOAN AND OTHER CAPITAL FOR
THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19.......
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning of
the year
Received
during the
year
Redeemed
during the
year
Balance at
the end of
the year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
A. Capital Raised
Amount of loans outstanding [as per col. 10 of statement I-A(I)]
Grants and advances made from the general funds of the local authority Grantsin-
aid from Government
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED
B. Capital Reserve
Loan redemption account [as per col. 9 of statement IA(l)] Other items (to be
specified)
TOTAL CAPITAL RESERVE
C. Other Capital
Consumer’s contributions for service lines after the commencement of the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
Special items (to be specified)
TOTAL OTHER CAPITAL
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED AND APPROPRIATED
(A+B+C)
NO.II - STATEMENT OF CAPITAL EXPENDITURE FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19........
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Additions
during the
year
Requirements
during the
year vide col.
3 Statement
II-A
Balance at
he end of
the year
Remarks
A. Intangible Assets:
1. Preliminary & Promotional expenses
2. Cost of Licence
3. Other expenses e.g., expenses incidental to conversion from DC to AC
change of frequency etc.
TOTAL INTANGIBLE ASSETS
B. Hydraulic Power Plant:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and civil engineering works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Hydraulic works forming part of a hydroelectric system including
(i) Dams, spillways, weirs, canals, reinforced concrete flumes and cyphons,
(ii) reinforced concrete pipe lines and search tanks, steel pipe lines, sluice gates,
steel surge tanks, hydraulic control valves and other hydraulic works
4. Water wheels, Generators and ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Switchgear including cable connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL HYDRAULIC POWER PLANT
C. Steam Power Plant:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and civil engineering works containing generating plant &
equipment
3. Boiler plant and equipment including plant foundations
4. Engines, Turbines, generators and ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Water cooling system comprising cooling towers and circulating water
systems
6. Switchgear including cable connections
7. Miscellaneous power plant and equipment
8. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL STEAM POWER PLANT
D. Internal Combustion Power Plant:
1. Land and Rights
2. Building and civil engineering works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Engines, generators, and ancillary equipment including plant foundations
4. Water cooling system comprising cooling towers and circulating water
systems
5. Switchgear including cable connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL INTERNAL COMBUSTION POWER PLANT
E. Transmission Plant (High or Extra-High Voltage):
1. Land and Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-section equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations:-
(i) Transformers, including foundations having rating of ‘100 kilovolt amperes
and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, poles, fixures, overhead conductors and devices:-
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified)
TOTAL TRANSMISSION PLANT
F. Distribution Plant-High Voltage:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations-
(i) Transformers including foundations having a rating of 100 kilovolt
amperes and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, Poles, Fixtures, Overhead conductors and devices:
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages, higher than 13.2 Kilo Volts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Service lines
8. Metering equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified):
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION PLANT (HV)
G. Distribution Plant-Medium and low voltage:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations having a rating of 100 kilo volt
amperes and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, Poles, Fixtures, Overhead conductors and devices:
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(ii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Service lines
8. Metering equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (M&LV)
H. Public Lighting:
Street and Signal lighting system
1. General Equipment:
(Not allocated to other sub-heads)
1. Land and Rights
2. Buildings and structures
3. Office furniture and equipment
4. Transportation equipment
5. Laboratory and meter testing equipment
6. Workshop plant and equipment
7. Tools and work equipment
8. Communication equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipment
TOTAL GENERAL EQUIPMENT
TOTAL CAPITAL ASSETS IN USE
Note- (1) Capital expenditure on items F7 and G7 should include
contributions made by consumers towards service line charges,
(2) Where it is not possible to give segregation of capital expenditure in
respect of certain items and where high, medium or low voltage distribution lines
are carried on same supports, the combined figures for such items may be given.
(3) Retirements during the year referred to in Col. 4 in respect of: (i) intangible
assets relate to amounts written off during the year, (ii) tangible assets relate to
the original cost of assets transferred to the special account under paragraph VII
of the with Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. II-A - STATEMENT SHOWING THE WRITTEN DOWN COST
OF FIXED ASSETS RETIRED ON ACCOUNT OF OBSOLESCENCE
INADEQUACY, SUPERFLUITY, ETC.
Particulars
of the
assets
Written
down
cost of
assets at
the
beginning
of he
year
Written
down cost
of assets
retired
during the
year vide
Col. 4 St.
II less
Col. 8
Statement
V
Written
down
cost of
assets
sold
during
the
year
Amount
realised
during
the
year
Excess of
sale
proceeds
over written
down cost
transferred to
contingencies
Reserve
Account vide
Col. 4 of
Statement VI
Amount
written off
during
the year
vide col.
6
statement
VI
Balance
of
written
down
cost at
the end
of the
year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO. III STATEMENT OF OPERATING REVENUES FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19.........
Particulars of revenue Corresponding
amount for the
previous year
of account
Amount
for the
year of
account
Remarks
1 2 3 4
A. Net Revenue by sale of electricity
for cash & credit:
1. Domestic or residential
(a) Lights and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
2. Commercial
(a) Lights and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
3. Industrial
(a) Low and Medium voltage
(b) High voltage
4. Public Lighting
5. Public Water works and Sewage
pumping
6. Irrigation
7. Traction
8. Supplies in bulk to distributing
licences
TOTAL REVENUES BY SALE OF
ELECTRICITY
B. Miscellaneous Revenue from
Consumers:
1. Rentals from
(a) Meters
(b) Electric motors, fittings, appliances
& other apparatus hired to consumers
2. Service connection fees
3. Public Lighting Maintenance.
TOTAL MISCELLANEOUS REVENUE
FROM CONSUMERS
C. Other Revenues:
1. Sale of Stores
2. Repairs of lamps and other
apparatus
3. Commission for the collection of
electricity duty
4. Other miscellaneous items (to be
specified)
TOTAL OTHER REVENUES
TOTAL OPERATING REVENUES
Deduct-
Total Operating expenses as per St. IV
Net surplus or deficit carried to the Net
Revenue and
Appropriations account-St. X
NO. IV - STATEMENT OF OPERATING EXPENSES FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars of expenses Corresponding
amount for the
previous year
of account
Amount
for the
year of
account
Remarks
1 2 3 4
A. HYDRAULIC POWER
GENERATION
(a) Operation
1. Water for power
2. Lubricants and other consumable
stores
3. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
4. Proportion of salaries, allowances
gratuities, etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, Supervisory and
the staff
5. Wages and gratuities to labour
6. Contribution to Provident Fund, staff
pension & apprentice & other training
schemes
7. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b) Maintenance
1. Salaries for Supervisory staff
2. Buildings and civil engineering
works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Hydraulic works forming part of a
hydro electric system, including-
(i) Dams, spillways, weirs, canals
reinforced concrete flumes and syphons
(ii) Reinforced concrete pipelines and
surge tanks, steel pipelines, sluice gates,
steel surge tanks, hydraulic control valves
and other hydraulic works
4. Water wheels, generators and
ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
7. Other Civil works (to be specified)
8. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
9. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation
Depreciation to Hydraulic Power
Generating Plant and Equipment (From
Statement V)
TOTAL HYDRAULIC POWER
GENERATION EXPENSES
B. STEAM POWER GENERATION
(a) Operation
1. Fuel (excluding sale proceeds of
steam ashes, etc.)
2. Lubricants and other consumable
stores
3. Water (if purchased separately)
4. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
5. Proportion of salaries, allowances
gratuities, etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, Supervisory and
the staff
6. Wages and gratuities to labour
7. Contribution to Provident Fund, staff
pension & apprentice & other training
schemes
8. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b) Maintenance
1. Salaries for Supervisory staff
2. Building and civil engineering works
containing generating plant and equipment
3. Boiler plant and equipment
including plant foundations
4. Engines, turbines, generators and
ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Water cooling system comprising
cooling towers and circulating water
systems
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
8. Other Civil works (to be specified)
9. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
10. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation
Depreciation on Steam Power Generating
Plant and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL STEAM POWER GENERATION
EXPENSES
C. INTERNAL COMBUSTION POWER
GENERATION:
(a) Operation
1. Fuel
2. Lubricants and other consumble
stores
3. Water (if purchased separately)
4. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
5. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, supervisory and
other staff
6. Wages and gratuities to labour
7. Contributions to Provident Fund,
Staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
8. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b)Maintenance
1. Salaries for supervisory staff.
2. Buildings and civil engineering
works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Engines, generators and ancillary
equipment including plant foundations
4. Water cooling system comprising
cooling towers and circulating water
system
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
8. Contributions to provident fund, staff
pension and apprentice and other training
schemes
9. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation:
Depreciation on Internal Combustion
Power Generating Plant and Equipment
(from Statement V)
TOTAL INTERNAL COMBUSTION
POWER GENERATION EXPENSES
D. POWER PURCHASED:
TOTAL PRODUCTION EXPENSES
(A+B+C+D)
E. TRANSMISSION (HIGH OR
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGE):
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers,
superintendents officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wages and gratuities to sub-station
labour
3. Wages and gratuities to labour on
lines
4. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
5. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having rating of 100 kilovolt amperes and
over
(ii) Others
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports.
8. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnecting
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
9. Contribution to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension
(b) Depreciation on Transmission Plant
and equipment (from Statement V).
TOTAL TRANSMISSION EXPENSES
F. DISTRIBUTION (HIGH VOLTAGE):
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc., of engineers,
superintendents, officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wages and gratuities of sub-station
labour
3. Wages and gratuities to labour for
mains
4. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
5. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having a rating of 100 Kilovolt amperes
and over
(ii) Others
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
8. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnection
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
9. Service Lines
10. Metering Equipment
11. Contributions to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension.
(b) Depreciation on Distribution Plant
and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (H.V) EXPENSES
G. DISTRIBUTION MEDIUM AND
LOW VOLTAGE:
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers,
superintendents, officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wage and Gratuities to labour
3. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
4. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having rating of 100 kilovolt amperes and
over
(ii) Others
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(ii) Lines and wood supports
7. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnecting
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
8. Service lines
9. Metering equipment
10.Contributions to Provident Fund or staff
person
(b) Depreciation on Distribution Plant
and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (M.&L.V)
EXPENSES
H. PUBLIC LIGHTING:
(a) Operation and maintenance
1. Operation and maintenance
2. Renewal of lamps
(b) Depreciation PL. System and
Equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL PUBLIC LIGHTING EXPENSES
CONSUMERS’ SERVICING, METER
READING, BILLING,COLLECTING,
ACCOUNTING, SALES PROMOTING,
ETC.
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers, secretary,
accountants, other officers etc.
2. Meter reading and inspection
3. Billing, collecting and accounting
4. Exhibition, demonstrations and
advertisements
5. Merchandising, servicing and
contract work
6. Miscellaneous expenses
7. Contributions to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension
8. Depreciation on general assets and
equipment, which are not allocated to
other sub-heads (from Statement V)
TOTAL CONSUMERS’ SERVICING,
METER READING, ETC. EXPENSES
K. GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT
CHARGES:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of general officers,
executive, etc.
2. Salaries, wages, gratuities, etc. of
general office staff
3. Contribution to local authority
administration for supervision (applicable
to local authority licensee only)
4. Travelling and other expenses of
officers and staff
5. Rents and Way leaves
6. Rates and Taxes
7. General Office expenses and
showroom maintenance and supplies
8. Repairs to office buildings, staff
quarters, furniture and fixtures, office
equipment etc., and maintenance
9. Depreciation on office and general
buildings, furniture, etc. not allocated to
other sub-heads (from Statement V)
10. Audit Services:
(a) Auditor of company
(b) Auditor appointed under the
provisions of the Act
11. Legal services
12. Insurance expenses.
13. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
14. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking.
TOTAL GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT
CHARGES
L. OTHER CHARGES:
1. Interest paid and accrued on:
(a) Loans advanced by the State
Electricity Board
(b) Depreciation fund
(c) Consumer’s Security deposit
2. Bad debts written off
3. Other items (to be specified)
TOTAL OTHER CHARGES
M. MANAGEMENT EXPENSES
1. Director’s fees and expenses and
debenture Trustees’ fees; if any
2. Other Expenses
TOTAL MANAGEMENT EXPENSES
TOTAL OPERATING EXPENSES
TRANSFERRED TO STATEMENT-III
Note- (1) No appointment of expenses under sub-head ‘M’ be made to any of
the salary items under A(a), 4, B-(a)5, C-(a)5, E-8(a)l, F(a)l, G(a)l, J-1 and K-1,
which shall include the proportion of salaries and allowances of persons solely
employed for the purpose of the undertaking and of the engineering staff
employed by the Managing Agents under the provision of sub-para (3) of Para
XIII of the Sixth Schedule to the E(S) Act, 1948.
(2) Managing agent in this context refers to the managerial personnel as
given in the explanation under Paragraph XIII of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. V - STATEMENT FOR PROVISION FOR DEPRECIATION FOR
THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19
Balance of
accured
depreciation
brought
forward
Balance of
arrear of
depreciation
brought
forward
Additions during the year Withdrawals
during
the year
vide col.3
Balance of
accrued
depreciation
carried over
to next
Balance of
arrears of
depreciation
carried over
to next
from last
account
from last
account
statement
II-A
account account
Interest
@ 4%
per
annum
on the
balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
under
para VI(I)
of the
Sixth
Schedule
to the
E(S) Act
1948
Depreciation
provide for
the year
Arrears of
deprecition
written off
during the
year
Total
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
aulic Power Plant:
m Power-Plant:
nal Combustion Plant:
smission Plants High or Extra-High Voltage:
ibution Plant High Voltage:
ibution Plant Medium and Low Voltage:
ic Lighting:
eral Equipment:
……………………….
Note- 1. Withdrawals from the depreciation account are permissible only to
the extent of past provisions made in respect of asset withdrawn from use and
transferred during the year to the special account under Para VIII of the sixth
Schedule to the E(S) Act, 1948.
2. A sum of Rs...........................................................from the accruals in the
depreciation account has been invested in securities in persuance of the
provisions of paragraphs XVIII (i) (d) of the Sixth Schedule to the E (S) Act, 1948.
NO. VI - STATEMENT OF CONTINGENCIES RESERVE FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19
Particulars Balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
Additions during the year Withdrawls during the year Balance
at he
end of
the year
Remarks
Appropriations
during the
year
Additions
under
paragraph
IX of the
sixth
schedule
to the
E(S) Act,
1948,
vide Col.
6 of
statement
II-A
Total Amount
written off
under
sub-para
(2) of
para VII
of the
Sixth
Schedule
to the
E(s) Act,
1948 vide
Col. 7 of
Statement
II-A
Expenses
and/or
compensation
under para V,
sixth
schedule of
the E(S) Act,
1948
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note- A sum of Rs.........................................................from the balance of the
Contingencies Reserve has been invested under the provisions of paragraph
IV(2) of the Sixth Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. VII - STATEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT RESERVE ACCOUNT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19………
ce
the
ning
the
Development
rebate for
the year
permissible
under the
Indian
Development
reserve
permissible
for the year
under the
para VA(1)
Actual
appropriation
made under
the proviso
to para VA
(1) of the
Unabsorbed development reserve to be
appropriated in future years under paragraph
VA (2) of the sixth schedule to the Electricity
(Supply) Act, 1948
Balance
at he
end of
the year
Col.
(1+2+8)
Re
Income Tax
Act, 1961
(As per
details
attached)
of the sixth
schedule to
the E(S) Act,
1948 being
the amount
of relief on
Income Tax
& super Tax
on the
amount of
development
rebate
sixth
schedule to
the E(S) Act,
1948
Balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
Current
years
balance
Col. (3-
)
Total Instalment
appropriated
during the
year
Balance
awaited
adjustment
Col. (7-8)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO. VIII - STATEMENT OF TARIFFS AND DIVIDENDS CONTROL RESERVE
ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Distributed to
consumers
during the year
under
paragraph II(I)
of the sixth
schedule to the
E(S) Act, 1948
Appropriated
during the
year
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. IX STATEMENT CONSUMER’S REBATE RESERVE ACCOUNT FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning of
the year
Distributed to
consumers
during the year
under
paragraph II(I)
of the sixth
schedule to the
E(S) Act, 1948
Appropriated
during the
year
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. X - STATEMENT OF SPECIAL APPROPRIATIONS PERMITTED BY
STATE GOVERNMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars
giving
reference to
the sanction
of the State
Government
permitting
the
appropriation
Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Additions by
may of
appropriation
during the
year
Transfer by
way of reappropriation
during the
year (details
to be given
in the
remarks
column)
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. XI - STATEMENT OF NET REVENUE AND APPROPRIATIONS
ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. To Balance of loss brought
forward from last account.
2. To net operating deficit as per
Statement III.
3. To appropriations (applicable to
local
Authority Licensee only):-
(a) Interest on loan capital
(b) Instalment of redemption of loan
capital, as per (col 8 of St. 1.(A) (1).
(c) General Rates.
1. By Balance of profit brought forward
from last account.
2. By net operating surplus as per
Statement-III.
3. By interest on securities
investments.
4. By other receipts (non-operating
rents) outgoing not other
provided for transfer fee etc. specified.)
5. Adjustment in respect of excess
provision of income-tax.
4. (a) Provision for taxes on
Income and profit for the year
Rs………….
6. By Balance of loss carried over.
(b) Additional short provision in
respect of year 19... . ............
5. To instalment of write-down in
respect of intangible assets.
6. To instalment of contribution
towards arrears of Depreciation as per
Statement V-Column 6.
7. To contribution towards
Contingencies Reserve as per
Statement VI-Column 3.
8. To appropriation towards
development Reserve as per
Statement VII- Column 4 or 8 or 4+8.
9. To appropriation to Tariffs and
Dividends Controls Reserve, as per
Statement VIII-Column 3.
10. To appropriation to Consumers’
Rebate Reserve, as per Statement IX
column 4.
11. To other special appropriation
permitted
No by the State Government, as per
Statement X- Column 3.
12. To appropriation towards
interest paid and accrued and
dividends paid and payable:-
(a) Interest on debentures.
(b) Interest on loans borrowed from
Organisation or Institution approved by
the State Government.
(c) Interest on other secured loans.
(d) Interest on unsecured loans,
advances, deposits, bank over-drafts,
etc
(e) Dividends on preference share
capital.
(f) Dividends on ordinary share
capital. To balance of profit carried
over.
NO. XII - GENERAL BALANCE SHEET AS ON 31ST MARCH, 19
Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Capital raised and
appropriated vide Statement-I or
I-A
Reserve and Surplus.
1. Capital amount expended on
works in use-Statement-II.
Less-Accumulated provisions for
depreciation-Statement V
Net Block.
2. Non-statutory Reserve.
2. Balance of written down cost of
obsolete, inadequate etc. assets-
Statement IIA. Current Assets.
(a)
3. Contingencies Reserve Fund as per
Statement No. VI.
3. Capital Works in progress.
4. Development Reserve as per
Statement VII.
4. Stores and materials in hand-
(b) Fuel-Coal and/or etc. at cost.
(c) General stores at or below cost.
Note: - Contingent liabilities and outstanding commitments, if any, to be
stated on the face of this balance sheet.
5. Tariffs & Dividends Control
Reserve as per Statement VIII.
5. Debtors for amounts paid in
advance on account of contracts.
6. Consumers’ Rebate Reserve as
per Statement IX.
6. Sundry debtors for electricity
supplied.
7. Special appropriations (as
permitted by the State Government)
reserve as per Statement X.
7. Other debtors (as per the
Schedule attached).
8. Balance of Net Revenue and
Appropriations Account as per
Statement XI.
Current Liabilities and Provisions.
8. Accounts receivable (to be
specified).
9. Balances due on construction of
Plant, Machinery, etc.
9. Investments in statutory
securities of
cost.
(a) Contingencies Reserve Fund
Investment. (Market value on closing
date).
(b) Depreciation Reserve Fund
Investment. (Market value on closing
date).
(c) Other investments.
(Market value on closing date).
10. Creditors of open accounts (as
per schedule attached).
10. Special investments.
(a) In respect of taxation.
(b) Others (to be specified).
11. Consumers’ Security deposits:
(i) In Cash Rs............................
(ii) In Securities Rs............................
11. Balance at Bank:
(a) Deposit account.
(b) Current account and at call.
12. Accounts payable (to be
specified).
12. Cash in hand Debits Balances.
13. Temporary accommodations,
Bank overdrafts and other finances.
13. Net Revenue and Appropriations
Account balance at debit thereof
Statement XI.
14. Other current and accrued
liabilities (to be specified).
14. Deferred payments.
ANNUXURE VI
(See Rule 27)
MODEL FORM OF DRAFF CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY
Name of undertaking.............................................................................
PART - I
1. General-
(a) “The Act” means the Indian Electricity Act, 1910 as in force from time to
time.
(b) “Licensee” means................
(c) “Consumer” means any person who is supplied with energy by the
incensee or whose premises are for the time being connected for the purpose of
supply of energy with the works of the licensee.
(d) “Date of presentation” means the second day after the date of any bill
rendered by the licensee.
2. Application and agreement for supply-
(a) Application and agreement for supply of electrical energy shall be made in
the form attached hereto (Appendix ‘A:) obtainable free of cost at the local office
of the licensee. The application shall be signed by the owner or occupier of the
premises for which supply is required. Any assistance and information required
for filling up the form will be given to the applicant at the local office of licensee.
(b) If the supply is required for motors the applicant shall state the purpose for
which the motors are required.
3. Notice before connection- The intending consumer must give at least one
month’s notice before the supply is required.
4. Notice for fixing the position of service, meter, etc.- Upon receipt of the
requisition for supply seven clear days’ notice shall be sent by the licensee, to
the applicant for supply or to the contractor action on his behalf, for his
representative to meet the engineer of the licensee for the purpose of inspecting
the premises and fixing the point of entry of supply mains and the position of the
mains, cut-outs or circuit breakers and meters. The licensee will, in no case, fix
meters and main cut-out, nor allow the same to remain in any position which
entails entry of his employees into purdah or religious quarters.
5. Quotations, etc., for laying-Service lines-
(a) The position for the service having been agreed upon as provided for in
condition No. 4 above, the licensee shall thereafter submit to the applicant a
quotation of the estimate of the cost of carrying out the work. The quotation
having been accepted, the applicant shall be required to deposit the amount of
the estimate with the licensee before the service is laid. The deposit having been
duly paid, orders shall be issued for the work to be put in hand and the amount
so deposited shall be subsequently adjusted, if necessary, or compilation of the
figures of the actual cost of the service line. Other conditions being equal,
service lines shall as far as possible be laid in the order of the dates or receipt of
the deposit money.
Note- The service line, notwithstanding that a portion of the cost has been paid
for by the consumer, shall remain the property of the licensee by whom it is to be
maintained.
(b) If a consumer desires to have the position of the existing service line
altered the licensee shall carry out the work and charge the consumer the cost of
the additional material used and the labour employed plus 15 percent of the later
as supervision charges
(c) Service lines for temporary illumination shall be laid by the licensee where
possible and the cost incurred in laying and removing such service lines as
determined in the manner laid down in clause (b) above shall be paid by the
consumer.
(d) Where any difference or dispute arises as to the cost of fixing of the
position of service lines, the matter shall be referred to the Electrical Inspector for
and shall be decided by him.
(e) A consumer requiring high voltage supply must provide and maintain at
his expense a locked and weather proof enclosure of agreed design, for the
purposes of housing the licensees metering equipment. Such an enclosure may
be used by the consumer for his own similar metering equipment but for no other
purposes.
6. Service Lines- The licensee shall lay free of charge 30 metres of service
line from his nearest distribution main outside the limits of the property in respect
of which the requisition is made. Any length in excess of 30 metres, as defined
above and the whole of the service line within the limits of the property in respect
of which application is made shall be paid for by the applicant. The cost
mentioned above however, shall be exclusive of the proportionate cost of the first
pole and fittings beyond 30 mts. aforesaid. The proportionate cost of such poles
and fitting shall be in the same ratio as 30 metres is to the length of the line
beyond 30 metres from the point of tap-off of the service and the second support
of the service line.
The main cut-outs or fuses shall be inserted and sealed by the licensee free of
cost to the consumer.
7. Consumer not to interfere with the supply mains or apparatus- The meter
boards, main cut-outs, etc. must on no account be handled or removed by any
one who is not in the employ of the licensee. The seals which are fixed on the
meters and the licensee’s apparatus must on no account be broken.
8. Writing on consumer’s premises- For the protection of the consumer and
the public generally, it is necessary that the wiring on the consumer’s premises
should conferm to the I.E. Rules and the Rules of the Fire Insurance Company in
term of which the building is insured and be carried out by a licensed electrical
contractor. The material used for wiring shall comply with the standards laid
down in that behalf by the Indian Standards Institution or equivalent. As soon as
the consumer’s installation is completed in all respects and tested by the
consumer’s contractor, the consumer should submit to the licensee the wiring
contractor’s completion and test report. A form for this purpose shall be supplied
by the licensee. It is important that the conditions named herein are fully
complied with as otherwise there will be delay in obtaining the supply.
As required by rule 45 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, no electrical
installation work (including additions, alterations, repairs and adjustments to
existing installations), except such replacement of lamps, fans, fuses, switches,
low voltage domestic appliances and fittings as in no way alter the capacity and
the character of the installation, shall be carried out upon the premises on behalf
of any consumer or owner for the purposes of supply of energy to such consumer
or owner, except by an electrical contractor licensed by the in this behalf and
under the direct supervision of a person holding a certificate of competency
issued or recognised by the ... Any person committing a breach of rule 45 shall
render himself liable to punishment under rule 139 of the said rules.
9. Apparatus on consumer’s premises(
a) All transformers, switch gear and other electrical equipment belonging to
the consumer and connected to the mains of the licensee shall be maintained to
the reasonable satisfaction of the licensee.
(b) In the case of high voltage consumers, suitable protective devices
approved by the licensee shall be used so as to afford full protection to the
licensee’s apparatus placed on the consumer’s premises.
10. Procedure for testing installation by licensee and fee-
(a) Upon receipt of the test report the licensee shall notify to the applicant the
time and the day when the licensee’s representative proposes to inspect and test
the installation. It will then be the duty of the applicant to arrange that
representative of the wiring contractor employed by him is present at the
inspection to give the licensee’s representative any information that may be
required by him concerning the installation.
(b) No connection shall be made until the consumer’s installation has been
inspected and tested by the licensee and found satisfactory No charge shall be
made for the first test made by the licensee but subsequent tests due to faults
disclosed at the initial test shall be charged for in accordance with part III of these
conditions. Periodical tests of the installation will also be undertaken by the
licensee at rates that may be ascertained from his local office.
(c) Before taking the insulation test of the installation the wiring must be
completed in all respects. All fittings, whether incandescent lamps, fans, motors,
heating, cooking or other apparatus, must be connected to the conductors and all
fuses must be in place and all switches switched in the ‘on’ position before the
tests are carried out. Temporary wires or fittings or dead ends should not be
included in the installation and no part of the work should be left incomplete.
(d) A pressure of 500 volts will be applied between installation and “earth” and
the insulation resistance to earth after one minute’s electrification shall be such
as will not cause a leakage from the installation exceeding one five thousand part
of the maximum current demanded.
(e) The test between the poles should give at least half the result of that to
“earth”. (o Manufacturer’s test certificates in respect of all high voltage apparatus
shall be produced if required by the licensee.
11. Extensions and alterations- Should the consumer, at any time after the
supply of energy has been commenced increase the number or size of lights,
fans or motors, etc. on his premises or in any way alter the position of his writing
therein, notice thereof must be sent in writing to the licensee whose
representative will call and inspect the alteration and, if necessary, change the
meters and fuses and alter the service line. Failure to give such notice may
derange the supply system and render the supply liable to be summarily
discontinued. During such time as alterations, additions or repairs are being
executed, the supply to the circuit which is being altered, added to or repaired
must be entirely disconnected and it shall remain disconnected until the
alterations, additions or repairs have been tested and passed by the licensee.
12. Failure of supply-
(a) Should at any time the licensee’s service fuse or fuses fail, notice thereof
should be sent to the licensee’s local office or if there are sub-stations, to the
nearest sub-station. Only authorised employees bearing the badge of the
licensee are permitted to replace these fuses in the licensee’s cut-outs.
Consumers are not allowed to replace these fuses and they will render
themselves liable to a heavy penalty if the licensee’s seals placed to protect his
apparatus are broken. The licensee does not allow his employees to carry out
any repair except replacement of fuses in the consumer’s installation.
(b) The licensee shall not be liable for any claims for loss, damage or
compensation whatsoever arising out of failure of supply when such failure is due
either directly or indirectly to war, mutiny, civil commotion, riot, strike, lock-out,
fire, tempest lightning,
13. Access to premises and apparatus- The licensee’s servant possessing a
written authority signed by the engineer or manager or the licensee are entitled at
all reasonable time and on informing the occupier to enter the premises to which
the energy is supplied for the purpose of inspecting meters and for other
purposes connected with the apparatus belonging to the licensee.
14. Security Deposit- The licensee may require any consumer to deposit
security for the payment of his monthly bills for energy supplied and for the value
of the meter and other apparatus installed in his premises. No interest will be
allowed in deposits upto Rs. 25. Interest at the rate of............. per cent per
annum will be paid by the licensee oil deposits exceeding Rs. 25.
The licensee shall be at liberty at any time to apply any security deposited
towards payment or satisfaction of any money which shall become due or owing
by the consumer. The licensee shall also be at liberty to demand enhanced
security deposit from consumers at any time during the life of the contract. The
balance of the security deposit will be returned to the consumer on the
termination of the contract.
The consumer may at any time, with the previous consent of the licensee transfer
the contract and its liabilities to any other person approved by the licensee.
15. Method of charging for current(
a) The prince and method of charging for current supplied shall be such as
may be fixed by the licensee from time to time subject to the provisions of the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
(b) Unless specified otherwise all rates refer to one point supply
16. Payment of bills-
(a) Bills should be paid at the licensees local office within 15 days from the
date of their presentation.
(b) Any complaints with regard to the accuracy of the bills shall be made in
writing to the licensee and the amounts of such bills shall be paid under protest
within the said period of 15 days. The amounts of bills paid under protest will be
regarded as advance to the credit of the consumer’s account until such time as
the bills in dispute have been fully settled.
(c) If the consumer fails to pay any bills presented to him within the said
period of 15 days, the licensee shall be at liberty to take action under sub-section
(1) of section 24 of the Act and to cut-off the supply after giving such consumer
not less than 7 clear days’ notice in writing without prejudice to his right to
recover the amount of the bill by suit. Where, however, any difference or dispute
has been referred under the Act to the Electrical Inspector for... before notice
aforesaid has been given by the licensee, the licensee shall not be at liberty to
cut-off the supply for failure to pay the bill except where the licensee has made a
request in writing to the consumer that the amount in dispute should be
deposited with the said Electrical Inspector and the consumer has failed to
comply with such request.
17. Notice of removal-
(a) Consumers about to vacate or sublet their premises should give to the
licensee a seven clear days’ notice in writing, together with an opportunity for
disconnecting the premises, otherwise the licensee cannot guarantee that the
meter readings will be taken on the required date. Failing such notice, the
consumer will be held responsible for energy consumed on the premises in
respect of which the licensee holds agreement for the supply of energy until the
expiration of seven days from the day on which the notice of removal in writing
has been received at his office.
(b) Consumers leaving the station for a period exceeding two months and
closing their houses while away, or those houses remain closed and unoccupied
owing to non-tenancy for the same period are requested to inform the licensee
before-hand so that the meters installed at the premises may be read,
installations disconnected and the licensee’s property removed if agreed to
between the licensee and the consumer or otherwise to notify the licensee where
the key can be obtained to enable the licensee’s engineer to remove, the fuses
whenever it is desired to test the distribution mains in the consumer’s district. In
such cases consumers will not be charged the monthly minimum provided that: -
(i) The rental of meter or meters of the licensee shall be paid so long as they
remain on the consumer’s premises if the meters are removed, the charges as
provided for in Part III will be payable for removing and re-fixing the meters;
(ii) The consumer agrees to the extension of the term of the agreement by the
period by which the monthly minimum charge has been waived if the period, of
his contract had not expired;
(iii) A reconnection fee as provided in part III is paid before reconnection.
Should the consumer require reconnection before the expiry of two months, both
the reconnection fee and the monthly minimum charge will have, to be paid by
the consumer. The life of the contract will not be extended in such cases.
(c) When a consumer, leaves his installation connected to the licensee’s
mains, but locks up the meter or otherwise makes it inaccessible for reading by
the employees of the licensee, for the first month of such inaccessibility the
consumer will be charged the monthly minimum. If in the next month the meter is
accessible for reading, the consumer will be charged the actual consumption less
the above minimum, but subject to the monthly minimum. If on the other hand
the meter remains inaccessible in the second month also the consumer will be
served with 24 hours’ notice (section 20 of the Act) to open his premises for the
reading of the meter by any employee of the licensee at a fixed time and date;
the meter is now made available for reading, the consumer will be charged the
actual consumption less the minimum charged or paid for the first month of
inaccessibility subject to monthly minimum. If the meter remains inaccessible
even after 24 hours’ notice, the premises will be disconnected. For that month
also the monthly minimum charge will be charged to the consumer. If the meter
is made accessible subsequent to the disconnection for purposes of reading the
meter and settling accounts or for reconnection of the service, as the case may
be the consumer will be charged the actual consumption less the two minima or
paid for the two months of inaccessibility subject to the proportionate minimum
for the period of inaccessibility of the meter upto the time of disconnection. If the
consumer applies for reconnection, fees under clause B.I of part III of these
conditions will be collected before reconnection
18. Accuracy of meters- Should the consumer dispute the accuracy of any
meter which is not his own property, he may, upon giving notice and paying the
prescribed fee, have the meter tested by the licensee or the Electrical Inspector,
in accordance with section 26 of the Act. In the event of the meter being tested
by the licensee and found to be beyond the limits of accuracy as prescribed in
the Indian Electricity Rules, in force from time to time, the testing fee shall be
returned and the amount of the bill adjusted in accordance with the result of the
test taken with respect to the meter readings of the three months prior to the
month in which the dispute has arisen, due regard being paid to conditions of
occupancy during the months. In the event of the test being undertaken by the
Electrical Inspector for.….and the meter being found to be incorrect, the period
during which the meter shall be deemed to have been incorrect, and the amount
of energy supplied to the consumer during this period shall be decided by the
Electrical Inspector for................where................ decision shall be final. Rent for
the meter for the period it is found inaccurate will not be charged by the licensee.
19. Discontinuance of Supply-
(a) If any consumer adopts any electrical appliance which is likely to affect
injuriously the supply to other consumers or uses the energy supplied or deals
with it in any manner so as to unduly or improperly to interfere with the efficient
supply of energy to any other person by the licensee or fails to keep in proper
order any meter belonging to him by which the supply is registered, the licensee
may discontinue the supply so long as such an appliance is so adopted or the
energy is so used or dealt with or the meter is not kept in proper order, and as
the case may be.
(b) The licensee shall not be bound to give or continue the supply if the
Electrical Inspector for................ or other competent person appointed by
the................ Government is satisfied that the electric supply-lines, fittings, works
or any other apparatus within the said premises are not in good order and
condition and are likely to effect injuriously the use of energy by the licensee or
by other persons.
(c) Any consumer who after having been duly notified, refuses to permit or
fails to give an authorised representative of the licensee, reasonable facilities to
enter any premises to which energy is, or has been supplied for the purpose of
testing or inspecting the installation of the consumer, shall be liable to have the
electricity supply discontinued after the expiry of 24 hours’ notice in writing in
accordance with section 20 of the Act.
20. System of supply- Supply of energy shall be given by the licensee on the
following systems, namely: -
(i) Low voltage Direct current
two wire or Alternating current single
phase
50 cycles;
(ii) Medium voltage- Direct current
three wire
or Alternating current
three phase
50 cycles;
(iii) High voltage- Alternating current
three phase
50 cycles.
21. Classification of installations- A.C. System-
(a) Two wire single phase, 230 volts-
(i) General supply not exceeding 10 amperes.
(ii) Motive power installations upto I BHP in aggregate.
(b) Four-wire, three phase, 230 volts between phase wires and neutral
general supply exceeding 10 amperes.
(c) Three-wire, three phase, 400 volts between phases- Motive general
supply exceeding 10 amperes.
D.C. system-
(a) Two-wire 130 volts-
(i) General supply not exceeding 10 amperes.
(ii) Motive power installations upto I BHP in aggregate.
(b) Three-wire 460 volts between outers- Motive power installations of over 1
BHP.
22. General Wiring Conditions-
(a) Mains- The consumer’s mains shall in all cases be brought back to the
licensee’s point of supply and sufficient cable shall be provided for connecting up
with the licensee’s apparatus.
(b) Switches and Fuses- The consumer shall provide linked quick break main
switches and a single pole fuse on each conductor except the neutral conductor
which shall be fixed as near as possible to the licensee’ meter board.
(c) Balance of installation- If the connected load of any installation exceeds
10 amperes at 230 volts, the installation shall be wired on the group system
separate neutral wires being brought back in each case to the licensee’s point of
supply An approved type of double pole linked switch shall control each main
circuit. The lamps, fans or any other apparatus of which the installation consists
shall be so grouped that under normal working conditions the current will be
balanced and no current will be following in the neutral wire.
(d) Medium voltage supply- With medium voltage supply, i.e., above 250 volts
and upto 650 volts, the licensee’s meter and service cut-outs shall be enclosed in
a strong teakwood box suitably ventilated and provided with a hasp staple and
lock. All wires between which a difference of potential of over 250 volts exists
shall be made inaccessible to unauthorised persons or enclosed in an earthed
metallic casing or conduit. A “Caution” Board printed in Hindi and the local
language of the district shall be fixed thereto.
(e) Overhead Mains- In order to save the expense of a long underground
service on private property, a consumer may, with the licensee’s approval erect a
pillar on that portion of his property which is nearest to the licensee’s supply
mains into which the service shall be laid and from which the consumer shall run
overhead mains to his premises. These overhead mains shall constitute a
portion of his installation and shall be laid in compliance with the Indian Electricity
Rules in force from time to time. An efficient chocking coil and lightning arrestor
maybe fixed at the commencement of the overhead line at the consumer’s cost
should be desire the same, as an additional protection for his installation.
(f) Earthing- Gas pipes shall on no account be used for earthing purposes.
(g) Domestic heating and cooking- A special circuit for heating and cooking
shall be run from the licensee’s point of supply Wall plugs used on these circuits
shall be of the three pin type, the third pin being an earth connection. Two pin
plugs or lighting sockets shall not be allowed. All appliances used in the
bathroom for heating or washing purposes or in any damp location must be
effectively earthed.
(h) Plugs- All plugs shall be switched on the live wire and not on the neutral.
(i) Wiring- Single leads shall not be allowed to be run separately in iron
conduit.
(j) A.C. Motor installation- Motors shall be provide with control gear so as to
prevent satisfactorily the maximum current demand from the consumer’s
installation exceeding the limits given in the following schedule at any time under
all possible conditions. Failure to comply with these regulations will render the
consumer liable to disconnection from the supply on account of interference with
the supply to other consumers: -
Nature of
supply
Size of installation Limit of maximum current
demanded
Single phase
Three Phase
Size of installation Upto and
including 1 BHP
Above 1 BHP and upto and
including 10 BHP
Above 10 BHP and upto and
including 15 BHP
Above 15 BHP
Six times full load current.
Three times full load current.
Twice full load current.
One and a half time full load
current.
Motor circuits shall be controlled by a triple pole linked switch protected by a no
volt release and T.P fuses (or over load releases). It is important that the release
should be maintained in thorough working order. Wiring for motors shall be run
with all three phase wires bunched in a single metallic conduit, which shall be
efficiently earthed throughout and connected to the frame of the motor from
which two separate earth wires shall be run. The minimum size of the earth-wire
permitted is No. 14 S.W.G. All motors shall comply in every respect with the
Indian Electricity Rules, in force from time to time.
Motors above 1 BHP shall be wound for three-phase, 400 volts between phases.
(k) Power Factor of Apparatus- The apparatus shall have a power factor of
not less than 85 per cent at normal working load.
Intending consumers are advised to consult the Engineer of the licensee before
ordering their motors, as in some cases it may be practicable to relax the starting
current limit dependent on the location and conditions of working.
23. Saving rights- Nothing in these conditions shall abridge or prejudice the
rights of the licensee and the consumer under the Indian Electricity Act, 1910, or
any rules thereunder and Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
PART - II
SCHEDULE OF RULES
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE LICENSEE)
PART - III
SCHEDULE OF SERVICE & MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES
A. Charges for service line- 30 metres of service line from distributing mains,
but not on the property for which a requisition for supply of electrical energy is
received shall be laid free of charge. The charges for the rest of the service line
shall be recovered on the basis of the actual cost in accordance with condition
No.6 of the conditions of supply plus 14 per centum of the labour charges to
cover supervision charges.
Extension for additions to service lines to meet increased maximum demand will
be charged for on the same basis.
B. Miscellaneous Charges: -
Item No. Name of charges Amount of charges
1 2 3
1. Re-connection fees(
a) For installations upto 11 KW-
(i) At cut outs,
(ii) At overhead mains,
(iii) At underground mains.
(b) For installations over 10 KW 25 per cent added to the charges under item
A above.
(c) If the same consumer is reconnected within 12 months of the date of last
reconnection, 50 per cent will be added to the charges under items (a) and (b)
above.
2. Meters-
(a) Hire of meter, where it is the property of licensee, per meter per-mensem-
(i) A.C. Single phase meter
(ii) A.C. Polyphase meter
(iii) Demand for special type meter.
(b) Removing of meter at consumer’s request.
(c) Re-fixing of meter at consumer’s request.
(d) Changing meter for one of higher capacity only at the request of the
consumer.
3. Testing-
(a) Installations-
(i) The first test and inspection will be carried out free of charge but should
any further test or inspection be necessitated by faults in the installation or by
non-compliance with the conditions of supply per extra test or inspection.
(ii) Periodical testing at consumer’s request, per test.
(b) Meters-
(i) A.C. Single phase meter
(ii) A.C. polyphase meter
(iii) Demand or special type meter.
4. Replacements of-
(i) Licensees’s fuse.
(ii) Consumer’s fuse.
Note- For the first month of service connection or on re-connection the meter
rent will be 50 per cent only if the period is 15 days or less, and full if more than
15 days. For the month in which meter is removed the rent will be calculated on
similar basis.
Note- (i) All charges except those under items 2(a) and 4 are payable in
advance.
(ii) The dispute between the consumer and the licensee regarding accuracy
of meter or any other indicator maybe referred by either party to the Electrical
Inspector for settlement.
APPENDIX A
APPLICATION AND AGREEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
FOR DOMESTIC/INDUSTRIAL PURPOSE
Application No………. Connection No……..
To
The Electrical Engineer/Secretary/Manager,
.................... Electric Supply Co. Ltd……..
I/We hereby agree to take from the…….. Electric Supply Co. Ltd. at the premises
stated below a supply of electrical energy not exceeding the connected load of
my/our installation as stated below for a period of not less than two years from
the date of commencement of supply and, I/We hereby further agree to pay for
the said supply at the tariff rates and on the conditions of supply in force, from
time to time and also to pay for all such other proper charges as become due by
me/us from time to time at rates as prescribed in part III of the conditions of
supply. I/We further agree that I/We lodge with you a deposit calculated as
prescribed in the licensees’ Conditions of Supply and I/We hereby declare that
the said Conditions of Supply have been perused by/read to me/us and I/We
agree to be bound by the provisions of Clause VI of the Schedule to the Indian
Electricity Act, 1910 and……. Electric Licence, 19………… I /We hereby request
you to supply the required energy within one month or such longer period as the
Electrical Inspector for ... may allow from the date of the requisition.
I/We further require you to supply me/us with the necessary meter/meters on hire
in terms of section 26 of the Indian Electricity Act, 1910. I/We agree to give you
such security as may be required for the price of the meter/meters whenever
called upon to do so.
The necessary requisition form duly filled in is attached herewith.
Signature of applicant
Present address
Dated……….
Signature & address of witness.
Accepted on behalf of…………. Electric Supply Co. Ltd.
Signature
Electrical Engineer/Secretary/Manager
Dated ……….
ANNEXURE VII
(SEE RULE 28)
FORM OF REQUISITION UNDER CLAUSE V (4) OF THE
SCHEDULE TO THE ACT
*1We, the undersigned being owners or occupiers of premises situated in or upon
.................. street, within the “area of supply” specified in the Licence, 19…… do
2The Government of……… the3 ……..of……… being charged with public lighting
of street, within the area of supply specified in the licence, 19……… do hereby
require you, in pursuance of Clause V of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity
Act, 1910, to provide, within six months of the date of this requisition distributing
main throughout the said street.4
Date at…………..
The…………. day of………. 19…………..
*1. In the case of two or more owners or occupiers.
2. In the case of State Government or a local authority.
3. The local authority’s name will have to be inserted.
4. Or such part of the street as may be specified.
ANNEXURE VIII
(SEE RULE 28)
FORM OF REQUISITION FOR SUPPLY OF ENERGY UNDER
CLAUSE VI (5) OF THE SCHEDULE TO THE ACT
To
Sir, (Name of Licensee)
I/We hereby require you, in accordance with Clause VI of the Schedule to the
Indian Electricity Act, 1910 within one month or within such longer period as the
Electrical Inspector may allow from the date of this requisition to supply energy
for the premises owned/occupied by me/us, and situated within the area of
supply specified in the ..................... Licence 19………….
I/We further require you to supply me/us with the necessary meter/meters on hire
in terms of section 26 of the Indian Electricity Act, 1910. I/We agree to give you
such security as may be required for the price of the meter/meters whenever
called upon to do so.
2. Applicant’s Name.
Occupation/Designation.
Class/Premises.
House No. and/or
Name of the Premises.
Street Town Village or Taluka
Locality
Owned/Tenanted by
3. The following are my/our requirements:
A. Domestic or Residential: No. of points Wattage Total Wattage.
(a) Lights and Fans.
(b) Heating and Small Power.
B. Commercial.
(a) Lights and Fans.
(b) Heating and Small Power.
C. Industrial Power.
Motor and/or apparatus No. of points H.P. & K.W. Total H.P. & K.W
Purpose
(a) Low Voltage
(b) Medium Voltage
(c) High Voltage
D. Other purposes.
4. Total connected load applied for ... Watt/Kilowatt.
5. This requisition is for:
(1) Anew service.
(2) A sub-service from one existing service.
The name and address of the consumer whose service is to be tapped:
His Service No. is
(3) An extension to my existing installation from Service No.
(4) A re-connection of Service No.
(5) A change of name from
Service No………….
(6) The system of wiring will be
1[(7) The wiring work has been/will be carried by:
Name of Contractor:
Address:
Licence No.:
Class:
Validity:]
Applicant’s signature
Dated the …….day of…….. 19……… Present address:
2. Under Clause VI(l) 1st proviso of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity Act,
1910, the licensee shall not be bound to comply with any such requisition unless
and until the person making it-
(a) Within fourteen’ days after the service on him by the licensee of a notice in
writing in this behalf, tenders to the licensee a written contract in the form,
approved by the State Government duly executed and with sufficient security
binding himself to take the supply of energy for not less than two years to such
amount as will assure to the licensee at the current rates charged by him, an
annual revenue not exceeding 15 percentum of the cost of the service line
required to comply with the requisition; and
(b) If required by the licensee so to do, pays to the licensee the cost of so
much of any service line as may be laid down or placed for the purposes of the
supply upon the property in respect of which the requisition is made, and of so
much of any service line as it may be necessary for the 6 said purposes to lay
down or place beyond 30 metres from the licensee’s distributing mains, although
not on that property.
3. In lieu of the contract referred to in Note 2(a) above, the licensee is
prepared to accept a declaration in the following form, subject to deposit of any
required securities by the applicant:
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
DECLARATION
I/We hereby declare that I/we desire to have and agree with the licensee to take
a supply of energy for the above mentioned purposes for a period of not less
than two years from the date of commencement of the supply and to be bound by
the provisions of Clause VI of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity Act, 1910 and
by the licensee’s charge appropriate tariffs applicable to me/us conditions of
supply as are from time to time in force.
Applicant’s signature.
Note- The applicant is requested to complete the clause referring to this
requisition and to strike out the clauses which are inapplicable.
ANNEXURE IX
One rupee stamp
FORM OF ORDER UNDER SUB-RULE (4) OF RULES 5, SUB-RULE (2) OF
RULE 46
To
Supplier, consumer owner, or occupier
1. Whereas the installation was inspected on ………and whereas it appears
to me that you have not complied with rule 5………of the Indian Electricity Rules,
1956, in the following respect* namely……… you are hereby called upon to
comply with the said rule (s) on or before……….day of 19 ... .... and to report
compliance in writing to me.
2. An appeal may be filed against this order under sub-rule (4) of rule 5 of
the Indian Electricity Rules, within three months of the date on which this order is
served or delivered or is deemed to have been delivered but this order must be
complied with, notwithstanding such appeal, unless the appellate authority on or
before the date specified in paragraph above, suspends its operation.
Dated at………….
The ……..day of………. 19………. Signature
Electrical Inspector,
Officer appointed under sub-rule (4) of rule 5
* Particulars to be given where necessary
ANNEXURE IX A
(SEE RULE 46)
MODEL FORMS OF INSPECTION REPORT
FORM I
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under Rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956) Low Voltage Installation of
Consumer
Report No…………………… Date of Inspection…………..
Challan No………………….. Dated……………..
Inspection Fee Rs…………… Date of Last inspection……………
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts………………………….
(ii) No. of Phases…………………
(iii) AC/DC……………………….
3. Type of wiring* …………………….
4. Name of the consumer/owner……………………
5. Address of the consumer/owner…………….
6. Location of the premises………………………..
7. Particulars of the installations:……………………………
I. Leakage on premises: Number ……Connected Load in KW
(1) Light Points……………………….
(2) Fan Points…………………
(3) Plug Points…………………
II. Other equipments (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………
(2)……………
Total Connected load in KW
Maximum current demand in Amps…………………………..
(on the basis of total connected load)
III. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)…………………………….
(2)…………………………….
8. General condition of the installation:
* Here state casing capping, lead covered of teak wood batten, concealed,
conduit, Tough, Rubber Sheathed and such other types.
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirement Report
1 2 3
29. (i) Is/Are there any sign(s) of overloading in respect of any apparatus
wiring?
(ii) Condition of flexible cords, sockets, switches, plug-pins, cut-outs and
lamp holders and such other fittings.
(iii) General condition of wiring.
(iv) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exists.
(v) State if sockets are controlled by individual switches.
(vi) Any other defect or condition which may be a source of danger.
30. Give report on condition of service lines, cables, wires, apparatus and
such other fittings placed by the supplier/owner of the premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cut-outs within consumer’s premises,
within enclosed fire proof receptacle?
32. (i) State if switches are provided on live conductors.
(ii) State if indication of a permanent nature is provided as per this rule so as
to distinguish neutral conductor from the live conductor.
(iii) Whether a direct line is provided on the neutral in the case of single
phase double pole iron clad switches instead of fuse?
33. (i) State if earthed terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Have three pin plugs been provided for plug points?
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
49. Leakage on premises:
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in megaohms.
50. (i) State if linked switches of requisite capacity are provided near the point
of commencement of supply
(ii) State if the wiring is divided in suitable number of circuits and each such
circuit is protected by suitable cut-out.
(iii) State if supply to each motor or apparatus is controlled by suitable linked
switch.
(iv) Has it been ensured that no live part is so accessible as to cause
danger?
61. (i) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor and so far as
practicable portable motor and the metallic parts (not intended as conductors)
of all other apparatus used for regulating** or controlling energy been earthed
by two separate and distinct connections with earth?
(ii) Is the earth wire free from any mechanical damage?
(iii) In the case of conduit/lead covered wiring, has the conduit or lead cover
been efficiently earthed?
(iv) If the consumer has him own earth-electrode, state if it is properly
executed and has been tested with satisfactory results.
Overhead lines:
74. (i) State if the consumer has any overhead line and if so their condition
with
TO
specific reference to relevant rule.
93. (ii) Is there any other overhead line near the premises of the consumer
which does not comply with rule 79 or 80?
(iii) Is guarding provided for overhead lines, if it is inside the factory, for road
crossings and busy localities?
(iv) Any other remarks.
Inspecting Officer’s Signature
Name………………………
Designation………………..
File No……………………
Dated:…………….
Copy for-warded to the Electrical Inspector for……... in accordance with rule
46(l)
(b) of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
Signature……………
Name…………….
** Not applicable to isolated wall tubes or to brackets, electroliers, switches,
ceiling fans and such other fittings (other than portable hand lamps and
transportable apparatus) unless provided with earth terminal.
FORM II
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956)
(Medium voltage installations of a consumer)
Report No…………….. Date of Inspection……………
Challan No……………. Dated……………………….
Inspection Fee Rs……... Date of Last inspection…………….
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts…………………………
(ii) No. of phases…………………..
(iii) AC/DC………………………..
3. Name of the consumer/owner…………….
4. Address of the consumer/owner………….
5. Location of the premises………………….
6. Particulars of the Installation:
I. Motors:
Make No. H.P Amps. Voltage
(1)………………………
(2)………………………
(3)……………………...
(4)………………………
(5)……………………...
II. Other equipment (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………………….
(2)……………………….
(3)………………………..
Total connected load h.p/k va……………………
III. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)………………………..
(2)………………………..
(3)………………………..
7. General condition of the installation:
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirements Reports
1 2 3
3. Is the list of authorised persons properly made and kept up to date duly
attested?
29. (i) Is/Are there any sign(s) of over loading?
(ii) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exist.
(iii) Are the electric supply lines and apparatus so installed, protected, worked
and maintained as to prevent danger?
(iv) Any other general remarks.
30. Service line and apparatus of the supplier on consumer’s premises.
Give report on condition of service lines, cables, wires and apparatus and such
other fittings placed by the supplier/owner on the premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cut-outs within consumer’s premises, in
an accessible position? Are they contained within an adequately enclosed fire
proof receptacle?
32. (i) State if switches are provided on live conductors.
(ii) State if indication of a permanent nature is provided as per this rule so as
to distinguish neutral conductor from live conductor.
(iii) Whether a direct link is provided on the neutral in the case of single phase
double pole iron-clad switches instead of fuse?
33. (i) State if earthed terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Is the Consumer’s separate earth efficient?
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
34. (i) Are bare conductors in building inaccessible?
(ii) Whether readily accessible switches have been provided for rendering
them dead?
(iii) Whether any other safety measures are considered necessary?
35. State if “Danger Notice” in Hindi and the local language of the district and
the type approved by the Electrical Inspector is affixed permanently in
conspicuous position as per this rule.
38. State if flexible cables used for portable or transportable equipment
covered under this rule, are heavily insulated and adequately protected from
mechanical injury.
44. (i) State if instructions in 1[English or Hindi and the local language of the
district
and where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi,] for the restoration of
persons suffering from electric shock have been affixed in a “conspicuous place.”
(ii) Are the authorised persons able to apply instructions for resuscitation of
persons suffering from electric shock?
49. Leakage on premises:,
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in Megaohms.
50.(i) Whether a suitable linked switch/circuit breaker is placed near the point of
commencement of supply so as to be readily accessible and capable of being
easily operated to completely isolate the supply?
(ii) Whether every distinct circuit is protected against excess energy by
means of a suitable circuit breaker or cut-out?
(iii) State if a suitable linked switch or circuit breaker is provided near each
motor or apparatus for controlling supply to the motor or apparatus.
(iv) State if adequate precautions are taken to ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
51. (i) State the condition of metallic coverings provided for various conductors.
(ii) (a) State whether clear space of 90 cm is provided in front of the main
switch board.
(b) State whether the space behind the switch board exceeds 75 cm in width
or is less than 23 cm.
(c) In case the clear space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm. state
whether a passage way from either end of the switch-board to a height of 1.80
metres is provided.
61. (i) Has the neutral conductor at the transformer been earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with earth.
(ii) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor and so far as
practicable portable motor and the metallic parts (not intended as conductors) of
all transformers and any other apparatus used for regulating or controlling energy
and all medium voltage energy consuming apparatus been earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with earth?
(iii) Have the metal casings or metallic coverings containing or protecting any
electric supply line or apparatus been properly earthed and so joined and
connected across all junction boxes as to make good mechanical and electrical
connection’
(iv) State if the consumer’s earth electrode is properly executed and has been
tested with satisfactory results.
(v) Is the earth wire free from any mechanical damage?
Overhead Lines:
74. (i) State if the consumer has any overhead lines and if so their condition to
with specific reference to relevant rules.
93. (ii) Is there any other overhead line near the premises of the consumer
which does not comply with rule 79 or 80?
(iii) Is guarding provided for overhead lines if it is inside the factory, for road
crossings and busy localities?
(iv) Any other remarks.
Inspecting Officer’s Signature
Name:………………..
Designation:………….
File No……………..
Dated: ……………….
1. Ins. by Notification No. G.S.R. 735, dated 4th September, 1982.
FORM III
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956)
High and Extra-high Voltage Installation of a Consumer
Report No…………………… Date of Inspection
Challan No…………………… Dated
Inspection Fee Rs……………. Date of Last inspection
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts…………………….
(ii) No. of phases……………
(iii) AC/DC…………..
3. Name of the consumer/owner…………………….
4. Address of the consumer/owner……………………
5. Location of the premises……………………………
6. Particulars of the installation
I. Motors:
Make No. H.P. Amps. Voltage
(1)………………
(2)……………….
(3)………………..
II. Transformers:
Make No. KVA Power Voltage
H.V L.V.
(1)…………………..
(2)…………………..
(3)………………….
III. Other equipment (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………………
(2)……………………
(3)……………………….
IV Total capacity in h.p./KVA…………………………………..
V. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)……………………..
(2)…………………….
(3)…………………….
7. General condition of the installations:
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirement Report
1 2 3
3. (i) Is the list of authorised persons properly made and kept upto date
duly attested?
(ii) Whether the authorised persons are competent for the work
assigned to them?
29. (i) Is/are there any sign(s) of over-loading in respect of any
apparatus?
(ii) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exists.
(iii) Whether the H.V motors and controlling equipment are being over
hauled periodically and record kept of the same in a register?
(iv) Whether the transformer oil samples are being tested periodically
and results recorded in a register?
(v) Whether suitable lightning arrestors have been provided near the
transformers for protection against lightning?
(vi) Whether earth resistance is being measured periodically and results
recorded in a register?
(vii) Any other defect or condition which may be source of danger.
(viii) Any other general remarks.
30. Service line and apparatus of the supplier on consumer’s
premises:
Give report on the condition of service lines, cables, wires, circuit
breaker, isolating switches, protective recording and integrating
apparatus and such other fittings placed by the supplier/owner on the
premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cutouts, within consumer’s
premises, in an accessible position? Are they within an adequately
enclosed fire proof receptacle?
33. (i) State if earth terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Is the consumer’s separate earth efficient? (State the earth
resistance, if measured).
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
34. (i) Are bare conductors (if any) in building inaccessible?
(ii) Whether readily accessible switches have been provided for
rendering them dead?
(iii) Whether any other safety measures are considered necessary?
35. State if “Danger Notices” in Hindi and the local language of the
district and of the type approved by the Electrical Inspector are affixed
permanently in conspicuous position as per this rule.
36. Whether the practice of working on live lines and apparatus is
adopted? If so, have the safety measure been approved by the
Electrical Inspector?
41. State if the circuits or apparatus intended for operating at different
voltage (s) are distinguishable by means of indications) of permanent
nature.
42. Whether all circuits and apparatus are so arranged that there is no
danger of any part(s) becoming accidentally charged to any voltage
beyond the limits of voltage for which it/they is/fire intended?
43. (i) In the case of generating and enclosed stations have fire-buckets,
filled with clean dry sand, been conspicuously marked and kept in
convenient situations in addition to fire-extinguishers suitable for dealing
with electric fires?
(ii) State if First Aid Boxes or Cupboards conspicuously marked and
properly equipped are provided and maintained.
(iii)Is some staff trained in First Aid Treatment?
44. (i) State if instructions in 1[English or Hindi and the local language of
the district and where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi,]
for the restoration of persons suffering from electric shock have been
affixed in a conspicuous place.
(ii) Are the authorised persons able to apply instructions for
resuscitation of persons suffering from electric shock?
1. Ins. by GSR 735, dt. 4.9.1982.
49. Leakage on premises:
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in Megaohms.
50. (i) Whether a suitable linked switch/circuit breaker is placed near
the point of commencement of supply so as to be readily accessible and
capable of being easily operated to completely isolate the supply?
(ii) Is there a suitable linked switch or a circuit breaker to carry and
break the full load current on the secondary side of a transformer?
(iii) Whether every distinct circuit is protected against excess energy
by means of a suitable circuit breaker or cut-outs?
(iv) State if a suitable linked switch or circuit breaker is provided near
the High Voltage motor or other apparatus for controlling supply to the
motor or apparatus.
(v) State if adequate precautions are taken to ensure that no live
parts are so exposed as to cause danger.
51. (i) State the condition of metallic coverings provided for various
conductors.
(iii) (a) State whether clear space of 90 cm is provided in front of the
main switch-board.
(b) State whether the space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm.
in width or is less than 23 cm.
(c) In case the clear space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm
state whether a passage way from either end of the switch board to a
height of 1.80 meters is provided.
64. (i) State if all conductors and apparatus including live parts thereof
are inaccessible.
(ii) State if all windings of motors or other apparatus are suitably
protected.
(iii) State the method adopted to guard lower voltage circuits in
transformers becoming accidentally charged above its/their normal
voltage.
(iv) State in case of transformers or switches or static condensers
involving the use of more than 2,275 litres of oil in one chamber, if
suitable oil soak pits are provided.
(v) Where 9,000 litres or more of oil is used in any one oil tank, has
provision been made for draining away or removal of oil which may leak
or escape from such tank(s)?
(vi) State if trenches inside sub-station containing cables are filled
with noninflammable material or completely covered with noninflammable
slabs.
(vii) Are conductors and apparatus so arranged that they may be
made dead in sections for carrying out work thereon?
66. In case of metal sheathed electric supply lines, are the metal
sheaths connected with earth properly?
67. (i) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor, and so far
as
practicable portable motor and metallic parts not intended as conductors
of all transformers and an other apparatus used for regulating or
controlling energy and all high voltage energy consuming apparatus
been earthed by two separate and distinct connections with earth?
(ii) Is the earth-wire free from any mechanical damage?
(iii) Have two separate and distinct connections with earth, each
having its own electrode, been provided for the earth neutral point?
(iv) Have the metal casings or’ metallic coverings containing or
protecting any electric supply line or apparatus been properly earthed
and so joined and connected across all junctions boxes as to make good
mechanical and electrical connections throughout their whole length?
68. Is the outdoor (except poletype) sub-station efficiently protected
by fencing not less than [1.8]1 metres in height?
69. (i) Where platform type construction is used for pole type
substation, has sufficient space for a man to stand on the platform been
provided?
(ii) Has hand-rail been provided and connected with earth (if metallic
and if sub-station has not been erected on wooden supports)?
70. Has suitable provision been made for immediate and automatic
discharge of every static condenser on disconnection of supply?
Overhead lines:
74. What is the minimum size of the conductors of overhead lines
used? State the type of conductors.
77. Are clearances above ground of the lowest conductor of overhead
lines, including services lines, as per this rule?
80. (i) On the basis of maximum sag, are verticle clearances where the
high or extra-high voltage line passes above or adjacent to any building
or part of a building as per this rule?
(ii) On the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, are
horizontal clearances between the nearest conductor and any part of
such building as per this rule?
81. Where conductors forming parts of system at different voltages
are erected on the same supports, has adequate provision been made to
guard against danger to linemen and others from the lower voltage
system being charged above its normal working voltage by leakage from
or contact with the higher voltage system?
87. Where overhead lines cross or are in proximity to each other have
they been suitably protected to guard against possibility of their coming
in contact with each other.
88.(i) Has every guard wire, been properly earthed at each point at
which its electrical continuity is broken?
(ii) What is the type and size of guard wire?
90.(i) Are the metal supports of overhead lines and metallic fittings
attached thereto permanently and efficiently earthed?
(ii) Has each stay-wire (except in case where an insulator has been
placed in it at a height not less than 3 metres from the ground) been
similarly earthed?
91. (i) Has the overhead line been suitably protected with a device for
rendering the line electrically ]Harmless in case it breaks? Whit type of
device is used?
(ii) Whether anticlimbing devices have been provided for each of the
high voltage and extra high voltage supports?
92. (i) Has the owner of overhead lines adopted efficient means for
diverting to earth any electrical surges due to lightning in every overhead
line which is so exposed as to be liable to injury from lightning? What
type of means are used?
(ii) Has earthing lead from the lightning arrestors been connected to a
separate earth electrode?
93. Are unused overhead lines being maintained in a safe mechanical
condition?
Any other remarks.
Dated:…….. Inspecting Officer’s Signiture…………
Name…………
Designation…………..
File No…………..
1. Subs. by GSR 735, for “2.45”, dt. 4.9.1982.
ANNUXURE X
FORM OF ANNUAL RETURN FOR MINES
(SEE RULE 111)
This form must be correctly filled up by the owner, agent, 1[manager or engineer]
and sent to the Inspector not later than the first day of February every year.
Part A
Year ending ……………….19...
Name of Mine
Situation of Mine
State
District
Postal address of mine
Name and address of owner
Name of agent
Name of Manager.
2[Name of Engineer]
3[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
1. Amended by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
2. Added by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
3. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
Part B
1. System of supply (whether direct current or alternating current) Voltage of
supply
Periodicity (if alternating current)
Source of supply.
2. Voltage at which electricity is used for: -
Lighting
Power
3. Particulars of Motors etc.
POWER
(a) On Surface
Type H.P/K.W. of
Motor/apparatus
and voltage
Type of control
Gear
Location Purpose for which
used
(b) In Mine
Type H.P/K.W. of
Motor/apparatus
and voltage
Type of control
Gear
Location Purpose
for
which
used
Ventilation
percentage
LIGHTING
Type of light fitting Wattage Location Percentage of
Inflammable gas or
vapour
ANNEXURE XI
FORM OF ANNUAL RETURN FOR OIL-FIELDS
(SEE RULE 111)
This form must be correctly filled up by the owner, agent, 1[manager or engineer]
and sent to the Inspector not later than the first day of February every year.
Part A
Year ending..................... 19......
Situation of Oil-field
Name of Oil-field
State
District
Postal address of Oil-field
Name and address of Owner
Name of Agent
Name of Manager
2[Name of Engineer]
3[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
1. Subs. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
2. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
3. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
Part B
1. System of Supply (whether direct current or alternating current) Voltage of
supply
Periodicity (if alternating current)
Source of Supply
2. Voltage at which electricity is used for: -
Lighting
Power
3. Particulars of Motors, etc. in use on the field: -
(a) On wells
No. of other
identifying
mark of well
Drilling or
pumping
Type and H.P.
of motor
No. of lamps
& type
Other
electrical
appliances
(b) Not on wells
Type and H.P. of motors Purpose for which used Identifying
mark on map
4. Other electrical appliances, not included in item 3, in use on the field.
Appliances Type and size
in K.W.
Purpose for
which used
Identifying
mark on map
ANNEXURE XII
LOG SHEET FOR MINES AND OIL-FIELDS
[SEE SUB-RULE (5) OF RULE 131]
Daily Log sheet for
1. 1[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
2. Report as to: -
(a) Condition of the insulation of the system.
(b) Specified defects of insulation (particulars of each failure of apparatus
should be given).
(c) Accidents or dangerous occurrence (including any cases of electric shock
and any cases of open sparking in apparatus in use in places where rule 126
applies).
2[(d) Disconnection and reconnection of the supply as required by rule 126 5(i)
and (ii).]
(e) Examination of earth fault detectors or recorders as provided by rule
116(3). Examinations of apparatus as provided by rule 131: -
(i) Routine examinations as required by clause (a) of sub-rule (3) of rule 131.
(ii) [Special examination]* as required by clause (b) of sub-rule (3) of rule 131.
3. Remarks--
Signed
Examined by
1[Electrical Supervisor…………..
Electrician…………………
Manager……………………]
*State which apparatus has been examined or tested and result.
Note: This log sheet should be filled in as completely as possible. If, for
instance, there are no defects of insulation of report, the word ‘non’ should be
written in the vacant space.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
1[ANNEXURE XIII]
FORM FOR REPORTING ELECTRICAL ACCIDENTS
(See rule 44-A)
1. Subs. by GSR 425, dt. 27.4.1985.
1. Date and time of accident.
2. Place of accident (Village/Town, Tehsil/Thana, District and State).
3. System and voltage of supply, (Whether EHV/HV/LV Line, substation/
generating station/consumer’s installations/service lines/other
installations).
4. Designation of the Officer-in-charge of the supplier in whose jurisdiction
the accident occurred.
5. Name of owner/user of energy in whose premises the accident occurred.
6. Details of victim(s): -
(a) Human:
Sl.
No.
Name Father’s Sex of
victim
Full Postal
Address
Approximate
age
Fatal/nonfatal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(b) Animal
Sl.
No.
Discription Number(s) Name(s)
of
Address(es)
of owner(s)
Fatal/non-fatal
owner(s)
7. In case the victim(s) is/are employee(s) of supplier:-
(a) Designation of such person(s).
(b) Brief description of the job undertaken, if any
(c) Whether such person/persons was/were allowed to work on the job.
8. In case the victim(s) is/are employees) of a licensed contractor:-
(a) Did the victim(s) possess any electric workman’s permit(s), supervisor’s
certificate of competency issued under rule 45? If yes give number and date of
issue and the name of issuing authority.
(b) Name and designation of the person who assigned the duties of the
victim(s).
9. In case of accident in the supplier’s system, was the permit to work (PTW)
taken?
10. (a) Describe fully the nature and extent of injuries, e.g.
fatal/disablement (permanent or temporary) of any portion of the body or bums or
other injuries.
(b) In case of fatal accident, was the post mortem performed?
11. Detailed causes leading to the accident.
(To be given in a separate sheet annexed to this form).
12. Action taken regarding first-aid, medical attendance etc. immediately after
the occurrence of the accident (give details).
13. Whether the District Magistrate and Police Station concerned have been
notified of the accident (if so, give details).
14. Steps taken to preserve the evidence in connection with the accident to
extent possible.
15. Name and designations of the person(s) assisting, supervising the
person(s) killed or injured.
16. What safety equipments were given to and used by the person(s) who met
with this accident (e.g. rubber gloves, rubber mats, safety belts and ladders
etc.)?
17. Whether isolating switches and other sectionalising devices were
employed to deaden the sections for working on the same? Whether working
section was earthed at the site of work?
18. Whether the work on the live lines was undertaken by authorised
person(s)? If so, the name and the designation of such person(s) may be given.
19. Whether artificial resuscitation treatment was given to the person(s) who
met with the electric accident? If yes, how long was it continued before its
abandonment?
20. Names and designations of persons present at and witnessed the
accident.
21. Any other information remarks.
Place:……………..
Time:……………..
Date:……………..
Signature ……………..
Name ………………
Designation………………
Address of the person reporting…….
1[ANNEXURE XIV]
[See rate 3(2A)]
GUIDELINES FOR PROVIDING TRAINING AS REQUIRED UNDER
RULE 3(2A)
1. Ins. GSR 461, dt. 9.5.1981 .
1. The owner of every generating station of capacity of 100MW and above
shall arrange for training of personnel, engaged in the operation and
maintenance of his generating station, in the manner specified below: -
(1) (a) The training may be arranged in his own institute or any other
institute established for this purpose.
(b) Any institute where such training is arranged shall have been recognised
by the Central Electricity Authority.
(2) There shall be separate training courses for the persons to be engaged in
operation and maintenance of thermal power stations and hydro power stations
together with associated sub-stations. In respect of thermal stations, separate
course may be arranged for the operating and supervisory staff and other skilled
persons who are to assist them.
(3) Refresher courses shall be arranged periodically for the persons who have
already undergone training under para (2) above and those who have already
sufficient experience in the operation and maintenance of a generating station
and are engaged in its operation and maintenance under clause (b) of sub-rule
2(A) of rule 3 to familiarise with modern practices of operation and maintenance.
2. Duration and content of training shall be as specified below: -
(1) Thermal Power Stations- The duration of the training courses for the
operating supervisory staff (both electrical and mechanical) shall not be less than
12 months. This shall include 186 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-I to
this Annexure followed by specialised lectures as specified in Appendix-II to this
Annexure for the mechanical and electrical fields. The lectures may be arranged
during the half day and the other half day shall be spent on observation by the
trainees in the power stations to get familiarised with different sections of the
power station- After the lecture course is completed the trainees should be taken
on visits to a few modern power stations and factories manufacturing turbines,
generators, switchgear, instrumentation and auxiliary equipments. The
remaining period will be spent on in-plant training where the candidates will be
given an opportunity to operate or maintain the machinery by themselves under
close supervision of the regular operating staff as well as the training
supervisors. Arrangements shall be made for familiarising the trainees with the
operation of power stations, through simulator facilities.
(2) The duration of the training course for the skilled person to assist the
operators and supervisory staff in a thermal power stations shall not be less than
nine months. This shall include 82 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-Ill
to this Annexure followed by specialised lectures as specified in Appendix IV.
The lectures may be arranged during the half day and the other half day being
spent on observation by the trainees in the power stations so that they get
familiarized with different sections of the power station. After the later course is
completed; the trainee shall be taken on visits to study a few modern power
stations and factories manufacturing turbines, Generators, switch gear,
instrumentation and auxiliary equipments. The remaining period will be spent on
in-plant training under close supervision.
(3) The duration of the training course for the operation and supervisory staff
to work in hydro power stations shall not be less than nine months. This shall
include 124 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-V to this Annexure. The
procedure for familiarization visits and in-plant training shall be similar to that
which has been specified in respect of thermal power stations.
(4) Those who are expected to be engaged in the operation and maintenance
of the sub-station associated with the generating station shall be given a training
of duration of not less than six months as specified in Appendix-VI to this
Annexure. This shall be followed by visits and in-plant training.
(5) The duration and contents of the refresher course shall be determined
jointly by the owner of the generating station and the training institute.
3. Qualifications
The minimum qualification for the operating and supervisory staff shall preferably
be a high second class diploma in mechanical or electrical engineering or a
degree from a recognized institute or university The minimum qualifications for
the persons to assist the operating and supervisory staff shall be certificate from
a recognised Industrial Training Institute in appropriate trade.
4. Creation of the Institute
(1) Every training institute shall be established adjacent to a power station so
as to facilitate familiarization and provide in-plant training.
(2) The training institute shall preferably be of residential type and shall have
a full me Principal and adequate number of teaching staff. The training institute
shall have facilities for demonstrations by models, simulators and for exhibition of
slides and movies.
(3) The institute shall have a systematised scheme of evaluation and
assessment of performance of the candidates by conducting oral and written
tests at adequate intervals. The assessment forms shall be specified in
Appendix-VII to this Annexure.
(4) The number of trainees in any one batch shall not normally exceed 25 so
as to maintain a good-teacher-trainees relationship.
(5) The institute shall have facilities to arrange refresher courses for those
personnel have already experience in the operation and maintenance of a
generating station. The staff of the training institute shall be properly qualified
and preferably undergone a specialised training course in the art of imparting
training.
APPENDIX I
SYLLABUS FOR THE OPERATING AND
SUPERVISORY STAFF ENGAGED IN THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE
THERMAL POWER STATIONS
(General course for Electrical and Mechanical)
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I Concept of modern Thermal Station: Central Station and utility
systems, base load and peaking stations, concept of unit system,
typical thermal cycles, parameters, heat rates, fuel rates, steam rates,
typical heat balance of boiler, turbine and generator
4
II Choice of location of large thermal station Site availability, water
requirements, fuel, load, centres, transport facilities, air pollution,
topography, choice of size of generating units
3
III Plant lay out in large central station including machine
arrangements, equipment layout and auxiliary arrangements
3
IV Constructional details of large pulverised fuel boilers and
auxiliaries
(i) Water and steam drums, heaters and tubes.
(ii) Types of furnace and firing arrangements, burner details.
(iii) Economisers, primary, secondary, superheaters, re-heaters and
attemperators.
(iv) Forced drough, Induced draught, Primary Air exhauster and gas
recirculation fans, compressors.
(v) Types of coal mills (balls/recess, balltube, bowl roller) stoker,
coal feeders.
(vi) Air preheaters, Lunstorm, tubes, steam.
(vii) Dust extraction plant-electrostatic, mechanical.
(viii) Soot blowers: steam/compressed air operated.
(ix) Station compressed air system-reciprocating and rotary
compressors.
(x) Oil handling and firing equipment.
(xi) Boiler mountings, gauge glasses, safety valves, stop valves,
startup devices, stampling, chemical dosing, continuous blow down.
(xii) Refractories and laggings as used in modern power stations.
16
V Turbine and auxiliaries, constructional details
(i) Principle of operation, heat conversion cycles, types of turbines.
(ii) Casing, steam chests, ‘Wheel blading, nozzles, diaphragms,
glands, flanges and bolt heating, bearings.
(iii) Condenser and vacuum extraction plant, ejectors.
(iv) Lubrication system, pumps, coolers, filters, shaft turbines and
lifting gear
(v) Feed water booster and extraction and colling water pump.
(vi) Low pressure and high pressure feed water heaters, deaerators
and evaporators.
(vii) High and low power by pass systems.
(viii) Oil purifications unit.
9
VI Alternators and excitation systems
(i) Constructional details of alternators, methods of cooling
(Hydrogen/air cooling).
(ii) Main and pilot excitors, voltage regulators, types and
characteristics, amplidyne and magnetic amplifier.
(iii) Methods of grounding.
6
VII Coal handling plant: Tipples, hoppers, vibratory feeders and
conveyors,
crushers, magnetic separators and pulleys
6
VIII Ash and slag handling plant: Electrostatic precipitators,
methods of conveying pneumatic, vacuumatic, hydraulic; bucket
elevators conveyors, screw extractors
2
IX Water sources, treatment: Raw water pumping station,
domestic, circulating and boiler make up water treatment, river salinity,
local water conditions, their variations in different seasons and effects
on power station operation
7
X (i) Fuels: Solid, liquid and gaseous fuels-analysis
(ii) Coal-types and suitability for different kinds of boilersalterations
in firing methods due to change of coal composition
6
XI Basic flow diagrams in power station practice
(i) Coal and fuel oil cycle
(ii) Air and gas cycle
(iii) Fly ash and slag handling arrangements
(iv) Condensate and feed heating cycle (from condenser hotwell
upto economiser)
(v) Steam and water cycle (from economiser to turbine inlet).
(vi) Circulating water cycle
(vii) Hydrogen filling in generator and hydrogen gland sealing of
generator.
(viii) Bearing cooling system.
8
XII Direct and closed cooling circuits, cooling towers, types and
characteristics
2
XIII D.C. & A.C. power supply for auxiliaries arrangements of units
and station boards, station lighting and automatic changeover
4
XIV Transformers: main transformers, interconnecting transformer,
station/ unit transformers, voltage grounding transformers, types of
connections paralleling, tapchanger gear
5
XV Out-door switchyard single line diagrams, busbars, circuit
breakers, isolators, current transformers, potential transformers,
lightning arrestors, grounding
5
XVI Indoor and outdoor switchgear: types bulk oil, minimum oil, air
blast, air break-constructional details
3
XVII Instrumentation and measurements: constructional details of
measuring instruments for pressure, flow temperature, level, draught,
vibration eccentricity, conductivity, pH value, differential expansion,
oxygen analyser, current, power, reactive power, frequency, energy,
winding temperature.
Auto-controllers, hydrogen purity meter. Axial shift indicator and
recorder, flue gas analysers, Megger-its use for primary
detection of faults
16
XVIII Operation, control and supervision
(i) General boiler start-up procedure.
(ii) Operation of boilers under different loading conditions, soot
blowing.
(iii) Banking and preservation of boilers.
(iv) Demonstration wherever possible through simulators of various
operating conditions.
(v) Handling of boiler under emergency conditions such as tripping
of turbo-alternator set, high/low drum levels, flame failure, failure of
supply to auxiliaries.
(vi) General start-up procedure for high pressure multicy under
reheat type turbines froth cold, warm and hot conditions.
(vii) Handling of turbine, generator and auxiliary plant under
emergency conditions, such as vaccum failure, low feed water,
condenser levels, excitation failure, circulating water failure, feed water
heater high levels, excessive vibration, water or oil ingress in
generator, failure of lubricating, sealing oil circuits.
(viii) Alternator-synchronising, loading, parallel operations, MW &
MVAR sharing.
15
XIX Controls and Protection-sequential operation and interlocks:
(i) Boiler and auxiliaries
(ii) Turbines and auxiliaries.
(iii) Combustion control-pressure, fuel, air and feed heating
cycle
(iv) Analysis of feed and boiler water, fuel gas at station laboratory
(v) Feed water and feed heating cycle controls
(vi) Turbine governing, speed setting, speed drop setting and
control circuits
(vii) Generator protection, under-voltage, over-voltage, differential,
reverse power, under excitation, negative phase sequence, earth fault
with types of the relays used
(viii) Importance of sequential inter-locks
(ix) Transformer protection-differential, overload, earth faults, high
(x) Types of motors and variable speed-drive and speed controls
(xi) Various types of pumps and their starting and control.
(xii) Steam temperature control
(xiii) Furnace purging
2
2
2
4
2
3
4
2
4
4
3
3
3
XX Fire fighting and mulsifier type protection 3
XXI General safety precautions, treatment of electrical or acid alkali
burn, permit to work, first aid
2
XXII Indian Boiler Rules, Factory Act, Indian Electricity Act, 1910,
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948, Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 and other
statutory regulation concerning Power Stations (General outline)
4
XXIII General plant maintenance procedure, PERT/CPM Methods,
Power Station records and calculation of efficiency
10
XXIV Various type of valves, traps, their constructional details and
application
2
XXV Cranes, hoists, characteristics and control 3
XXVI Personnel management, duties and responsibilities, Labour
Laws and Labour Welfare
6
XXVII Broad principles of material management and inventory control
4
TOTAL 186
APPENDIX II
1. SPECIALISED MECHANICAL COURSE FOR OPERATING &
SUPERVISORY STAFF WHO WILL BE ENGAGED ON THE
MECHANICAL SIDE OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I Corrosion of boiler and auxiliaries, condenser and feed water
heating plant: Scale formation in boiler in relation to water conditions
7
II Acid cleaning and preservation of boilers. Mechanical removal
of scale and deposits from boilers where acid cleaning is not
advisable. High pressure water jet equipment
14
III Annual boiler and auxiliaries overhaul hydraulic test, floating of
safety valves, preventive and breakdown maintenance of boiler
auxiliaries
10
IV Efficient operation of boilers -interpretation of gas analysis for
proper combustion controls and methods of reducing of other losses.
8
V Constructional details of hydraulic and other types of couplings
torque convertors, servo-motor
5
VI Constructional details of various types of pumps, their drives
and automatic starting, air-conditioning. Constructional details of
various types of drought fans, their drives and automatic starting.
Types of wear on fans and pumps and their effects, detection of
unbalance in fans and pumps, instruments for measuring vibrations,
methods of primary balancing-balancing instruments and their use
9
VII Coal handling plant
(i) Sequential operation, (ii) conveyor and conveyor drives, (iii)
tensioning arrangements, (iv) maintenance of guide rollers, (v) sway
switches/slip switches, (vi) beatle chargers for wagon marshalling, (vii)
wagon tipplers and coal crushers, weighing of coal, different types of
weighing bridges and weight meters, storage problems and prevention
of spontaneous combustion. Sampling of coal/British Standards
Specification/Indian Standards Specification, procedure and proximate
analysis.
8
VIII Water treatment-hardness, pH value clarifiers, treatment,
phosphate and hydrazine dosing, base exchangers.
6
IX Annual overhaul and inspection of turbine and auxiliary plant,
condenser tube cleaning, maintenance of pumps, lubrication system,
recycling of lubricating oil and selection of lubricant, condenser tube
materials wear and tear and effect of local water conditions, types of
failure, detection, preventive maintenance and retubing of condensers
10
X Maintenance practice valve grinding methods, high pressure
joints, heat insulation me,-hods, pipe-work, alignments, beating,
scraping & matching practice, radiography and stress relieving
methods
6
XI Indian Boiler Regulations and other statutory regulations 4
XII Workshop, fabrication of spares, repairs and maintenance of
mechanical equipments such as vehicles, tractors, dozers, shunters,
cranes and hoists, welding-modern techniques and their applications
in maintenance of boilers, turbine & associated plant
10
XIII Compositions, properties and behaviours of engineering 8
materials used
in power stations
105
Common course for mechanical and electrical 186
Supplementary course for mechanical 105
Total Hours 291
2. SPECIALISED ELECTRICAL COURSE FOR OPERATING
AND SUPERVISORY STAFF WHO WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE
ELECTRICAL SIDE OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
I Generators protection-earth fault, rotor and stator, negative
phase sequence, loss of excitation, differential protection, back up
protection, reverse power-protection, under voltage protection,
constructional details of the relays used, method of setting and their
testing, overload protection and over heating of rotors.
15
II Transformers protection, Buchholz relay, over current, differential
and earth fault protection, types of relays used, their construction,
testing and settings
6
III Transformers, commissioning-dielectric strength of oil,
insulation resistance, tap changers, filtration of oil, pre commissioning
testing.
Tano resistivity of oil and preventive maintenance of
transformers
6
IV Circuit breakers, commissioning and maintenance, isolators,
disconnectors, busbar arrangements, charging, synchronising with the
grid, disconnecting for repairs, maintenance of switchgear contractors
8
V Maintenance of equipments in the outdoor switchyard, current
transformers, potential transformer and lightning arrestors, operation
and maintenance bus differential protection
6
VI Cables, control, high voltage and extra-high voltage types,
layouts, testing and maintenance
8
VII Principle of electronic controls and transistorised circuits 5
VII Pneumatic and di-electric transmitters and receivers,
servomotors
6
IX Interlocking sequential control circuits, details of components
used
7
X Calibration and testing of various types of instruments,
indicating, measuring instruments, recorders and analyser
8
XI Statutory Electricity Acts and rules, permit procedure 4
XII Starting and control equipments of various types of motors
Station Battery-care & maintenance, trickle charging and extended
charging, operation and maintenance of rectifiers and battery charges
8
XIII Economic load despatch, power system control and operation,
MVARcontrol,
voltage regulation and frequency control, carrier current
equipments, telephones, telemetering
5
XIV Station emergency lighting arrangements
1
93
Common Course for electrical and mechanical 186
Supplementary course for electrical 93
Total Hours 279
APPENDIX III
SYLLABUS FOR SKILLED PERSONS FOR ASSISTING THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THERMAL POWER
STATIONS
(General course for Electrical and Mechanical)
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I General description of thermal power stations and outline of
power station operation
5
II Fundamental units and their conversion (mechanical, electrical,
thermodynamics
2
III Fuels and combustion types of fuels-their properties and testing
1
IV Boilers and boiler house plant and auxiliaries
1. General description.
2. Arrangement of boilers.
3. Boiler auxiliaries.
4. Boiler instrumentation.
5. Fabrication and assembly of different parts of boiler and its
accessories.
6. High pressure welding in boilers.
7. Arrangement of pulverised fuel boiler in a modern thermal
power station.
10
V. Water conditioning, pretreatment and demineralisation 4
VI Ash handling-electrostatic precipitation and mechanical dust
collector-Function and description of two types
2
VII Turbine and turbine house auxiliaries
1. Fundamental principle of steam turbine.
2. Theory and operation of steam turbine.
3. Governing and protection of turbine.
5
VIII Handling of turbines and boilers under emergency conditions 4
IX Condensor and vaccum extraction plant
1. Purpose and function.
2. Construction of surface Condensor and vacuum pumps.
3
X Regenerative feed water heating-constructional details of low
pressure and high pressure feed water heaters, deaerators and
2
evaporators
XI Cooling water systems and cooling towers 1
XII Flow diagrams of basic cycles:
1. Coal handling.
2. Steam and condensate.
3. Ash and slag handling.
4. Station services, domestic water, airconditioning, ventilation,
lifts.
5. Air services, air compressors, switchgear.
6. Bearing cooling and general service water systems.
7. Circulating water systems.
8. Feed water and reheating plant.
9. Fuel oil system.
10. Station batteries and battery charging equipment.
11. Station lighting, power supply and distribution Boards.
12
XIII Station instrumentation and controls 8
XIV Fire fighting installations in a thermal power station 2
XV Electric shocks, acid burn, alkali, wounds, chlorine gas
poisoning and their treatment
3
XVI Duties and responsibilities of operators and plant attendants,
carrying out instructions, reporting to supervisors, recording readings,
unusual’ occurrences, expected behaviour, discipline, sincerity,
cleanliness and love for machines
3
XVII Personnel safety equipment, cleanliness, caution and care in
power station working
3
XVIII How electricity is generated, transmitted and distributed i.e.,
generator to consumer service board
2
XIX Fundamental units, conversion and measurement of electrical
quantities
1
XX Principle and working of alternating current and direct current
generators and their parallel operation
2
XXI Principle and working of transformers and their parallel
operation
2
XXII Principle and working of alternating current and direct current
motors, their speed characteristics, controls
2
XXIII Storage battery-principle, construct-on and charging 1
XXIV Alternator cooling, different systems of cooling, advantages of
hydrogen cooling over others, hydrogen plant
2
82
APPENDIX IV
1. SPECIALISED ELECTRICAL COUITSE FOR SKILLED
PERSONS WHO WILL BE ENGAGED ON THE ELECTRICAL SIDE
OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of
hours
1 2 3
I. Alarm systems-Visual and audible 2
II. Isolators, circuit breakers and contractors 3
III. Earthing and neutral grounding necessity of methods for safety
rules while handling electrical equipments
4
IV Motor winding and repairs 4
V Maintenance of internal telephones and primary air systems 3
VI. Meggering and testing of wiring and cable faults. 3
VII. Maintenance of electrical motors 6
VIII. Maintenance of electrical switchgear 8
IX. Fuses-rewirable type-catridges type high rupturing capacity
fuse, constructional features of fuse and fuse sockets, knife type high
rupturing capacity fuses-use of pullers for insertion and removal, colour
code for fuse rating.
8
X. Motor starters and their applications direction line, star-delta,
rotor resistance
5
XI. Meggers, avometers, voltmeters, ammeters, wattmeters, energy
meters general information about their use
6
XII. Maintenance of transformers & Tap changer 6
XIII. Joint-Ing of low & medium voltage cables
XIV Connections, earthing, principles of operation of all small
distribution transformers
2
XV Current & potential transformers, purpose, connection and use
2
XVI. Various types of drive 2
XVII. Elementary knowledge of Engineering material & their
properties
2
XVIII. Lubrication & cooling system 4
74
Common course for electrical and mechanical 82
Supplementary course for electrical 74
Total Hours 156
2. SPECIALISED MECHANICAL COURSE FOR SKILLED
PERSONS WHO WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE MECHANICAL SIDE
OF THE POWER STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
hours
1 2 3
I. Type of bearing and their uses 2
II. Types of valves-safety valve, suction valve, delivery valve, nonreturn
valve, bypass valve, drain valve, air release valve, control valve,
float operated valve, solenoid operated and pneumatically operated
valves and their applications
III. Pressure gauges-Bolirden type gauge, manometer, vacuum
gauge, barometer, principles of operation, absolute pressure, gauge
and vaccum
pressure and their inter relationship
5
IV Temperature indicators, merctry thermometers, resistance
thermometers, thermocouples, pyrometers, gas thermometers,
temperature alarm
5
V. Level gauges-different types-Level Alarm 4
VI. Flow meters-steam and water-general principles 3
VII. Couplings-different types, rigid, flexible, magnetic and fluid
couplings
3
VIII. Clutches-different types and uses 2
IX. Maintenance of pneumatic measuring instruments, servometers,
power cylinders and other thermostats, monostats
2
X. Maintenance of instruments, recorders, clocks 4
XI. Vibration-general knowledge of their causes, effects, remedies,
misalignment, wornout bearings, vibration, fed to foundations, cracking,
eccentricity and differential expansion, their causes, remedies
5
40
Common course for electrical & mechanical 82
Specialized course for mechanical 44
Total Hours 122
APPENDIX V
SYLLABUS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF WHO
WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF
HYDRO-ELECTRIC GENERATING STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
Hours
1 2 3
I. Concept of a modem hydro station: Type of stations, its role in
the power systems, base load, peak load operation, plant layout,
capacity; underground power station, hydraulic and electrical design,
features, interconnection with other stations
3
II. Hydraulic system; reservoirs-type of reservoirs, storage
capacity, operation of reservoirs, intake tower, surge tank, tunnels, fore
bays and penstocks, protection against water hammer and negative
pressure in penstocks, provision for draining penstocks
3
111. Types of valves-Butterfly valve, spherical valve, needle valve,
their operation and control
3
IV Water turbines-types of turbines; their characteristics, ratings,
specifications, constructional details
2
V. Governing system; control circuit for governing, types of
governors, pendulum, hydraulic, electronic
3
VI. Generator: type and rating, cooling and ventilation system,
bearing cooling arrangements, lubrication system, construction and
characteristics of generators, split-phase double layer winding,
synchronising, loading, grounding of generators neutral
3
VII. Excitation system, types of excitors, voltage, control, automatic
voltage control, amplidyne control, magnetic amplifier
5
VIII. Generator protection: earth fault (rotor and stator), negative
phase sequence, differential protection, backup protection, reverse
power protection, under voltage protection, constructional details of the
relays used, method of settling and their testing
10
IX. Hydraulic and electrical protective devices, load frequency
control
3
X. Starting, shutting down and operation procedure. 3
XI. Power transformer connections, parallel operation, three single
phase unit versus three phase unit, regulation, voltage control, tap
changing, weights and size, grounding
5
XII. Transformer protection: Buchholz relay, over current, differential
and earth fault protection, types of relays used, their construction,
testing and settings
5
XIII. Transformers-commissioning: Dielectric strength of oil,
insulation, resistance tap changer, filtration of oil, precommissioning
testing
3
XIV Cooling system for transformers 2
XV. Circuits breakers, isolators, disconnectors, busbar
arrangements, charging and synchronising with the grid, disconnecting
for repairs, maintenance of switchgear contractors
4
XVI. Maintenance of equipments in the outdoor switchyard current
transformers, potential transformers and lightning arrestors, erection,
operation and maintenance
4
XVII. Cables-high voltage, oil filled cable, types of cables used, rating
of cables, layout, testing
4
XVIII. Principle of electronic controls and transistorised circuits 3
XIX. Pneumatic and electric transmitters and receivers, servomotors 3
XX. Control Board-layout, indicating and recording instruments for
monitoring and supervision, remote control of various equipments,
signalling and interlocking, automatic reclosure of breakers on outgoing
lines and enunciation system
3
XXI. Interlocking sequential control circuits, details of components
used
4
XXII. Calibration and testing of various types of instruments,
indicating, recording and analysers
4
XXIII. Study of communication/system 1
XXIV House turbine set-its functions and use 1
XXV. Station transformers, alternating current, auxiliary supply,
essential auxiliaries, auxiliaries in emergency, study of single line
diagrams
3
XXVI. Station Direct Current system-storage battery, rectifiers, motor
generator set etc. their control and operation, standby source of station
power, automatic change over to standby source of supply
3
XXVII. Records- (hourly, daily, monthly, annually) of operations 2
XXVIII. Flow diagram and single line diagram for hydraulic and
electrical system in the station
5
XXIX. Air conditioning and ventilation plant, compressors 2
XXX. Operation under emergency conditions 2
XXXI. General plant maintenance procedures. 3
XXXII. Cranes, hoists-characteristics and controls 2
XXXIII. Statutory Electricity Acts and Rules, permit procedure 2
XXXIV Fire fighting 6
XXXV. General safety precautions, first-aid 6
XXXVI. Personnel management, duties and responsibilities, labour
laws & labour welfare
4
Total hours 124
APPENDIX VI
SYLLABUS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF IN
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGE SUB-STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
Hours
1 2 3
I. Layout and location of 220/132/66/33 K.V sub-station 4
II. Main equipments used together with their specifications 3
III. Construction of high voltage lines, types of towers, types of
insulators and their electrical and mechanical characteristics
3
IV Hightension feeders, their load carrying capacities 1
V (i) Alternating and direct currents, relation between voltage,
current, power, reactive power & common units in use. Power factor,
Ohm’s Law, resistance, reactance, impedance, percentage impedance.
Three phase vectors phase, displacement between current and
voltage
(ii) Basic principle of transformation, magnetisation, hysteresis,
reluctance, retentivity, electromagnets Flux density, ampereturns,
equation for transformation etc.
(iii) Two winding, three winding and auto transformers, grounding
transformers, salient features of shell type and core type transformers,
hot rolled and cold rolled steel cores, Stampings and their assembly
Different vector groups and terminal connections.
(iv) Transformer fixtures e.g. Buchholz relay, on-load and off-load
tap changer, breathers, conservators, bushings of different types,
thermometers, indicators, alarms
(v) Cooling of transformer and oil, different methods of cooling,
importance of oil filtering and drying-out of tranfromers, dielectric
strength of oil, different varieties of filters and their comparison, types
of radiators
(vi) Transformer tests-failures and causes, maintenance and repairs
(vii) Parallel operation, regulation, voltage control, tap, changing,
commissioning test
3
4
4
4
4
3
5
VI. Breakers:
(i) Functions of breakers, their action
(ii) Different types of outdoor and indoor breakers e.g. bulk oil,
minimum oil and air blast, principles and their applications.
(iii) Operating mechanism, manual, spring, hydraulic, pneumatic,
motor 8 (iv) Current rating rupturing capacity, clearance time.
(v) Breaker maintenance, failures and their causes, commissioning
procedure
8
VII. Busbars:
(i) Indoor busbars, their capacity, forces on them during short
circuit, busbar mountings and their clearances
(ii) Strung and tabular type busbars, their current ratings, supports,
jumpers, clearances
(iii) Busbars fittings and connectors
(iv) High Voltage and Extra-high voltage cables, types, their
maintenance and testing
6
VIII. Current and potential transformers:
(i) Types of current and potential tranformers, their working
principles, ratings, accuracies
(ii) Functions of current and potential transformers
(iii) Failures of current and potential transformers, their causes
3
IX. Isolators:
(i) Tilting and rotating isolators, with and without arcing horns,
earthing blades, current ratings, breaking of circuits by isolator,
interlocking with circuit breaker
(ii) Maintenance of isolators
3
X. Lightning arrestors:
(i) Simple description of lightning phenomena and surges
(ii) Construction of lightning arrestors and the principles of their
working
(iii) Different type of lightning arrestors and ratings
(iv) Earthing and location of lightning arrestors
XI. Control Room:
(i) Necessity and function of a control board, types of boards,
instruments on the board
(ii) Functions of the various relays and indicators, Mimic diagram
indicators, annunciator and alarm characteristics of relays, testing and
setting of relays
(iii) Remote control of breakers, isolators, tap changers, indicators
on the control board
(iv) Control and power cables
10
XII. Auxiliary supply:
(i) Current and ampere-hour ratings of batteries, battery charging
equipment, checking of specific gravity of electrolyte, maintenance of
batteries
(ii) Importance of direct current supply and its functions
(iii) Auxiliary direct current supply
3
XIII. Clearance and Compliance of I.E. Rules, 1956:
(i) Minimum clearance for different voltages between phases and
phase to ground
(ii) Indian Electricity Rules pertaining to sub-stations
3
XIV Earthing:
(i) Safety earthing and system earthing, the method of earthing e.g.
solid earthing, resistance earthing, peterson coil earthing, earthing
of lightning arrestor, importance and advantages of each type
(ii) Different types of earth electrodes, earthing mats,
recommended values of earth resistance, measurement of earth
resistances
3
XV Maintenance:
Maintenance of log sheet and other records
The importance of maintenance of good records
3
XVI. Safety:
(i) Safety procedures and procedures for giving line clear and
taking it back, Maintenance of records of line clear
(ii) First-aid, artificial respiration and shock treatment
10
XVII. Interlocking and sequential operation of different equipments 1
XVIII. Synchronising, charging and discharging of high voltage lines.
Live line testing
3
XIX. Calibration and testing of various types of equipments indicating
and measuring equipments, recorders, analysers
4
XX. Handling emergency conditions 3
XXI. Diagnosing troubles in the plant from instruments and
annunciation
3
XXII. Study of carrier system 2
XXIII. Auxiliary equipments such as compressors, Station lighting etc.
1
XXIV Fire fighting equipment-their operation, maintenance and
refilling
1
XXV Personnel managements, duties and responsibilities, labour
welfare and labour laws
4
Total Hours 115
APPENDIX VII
(1) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR OPERATING AND SUPERVISORY
STAFF
Name of the Trainee………………..
Period: From……….. to……………………….(extended period)
Working in……………………..
Section……………………….
Department…………………..
Sl. No. Particulars Marks allotted Marks
given
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
1. (a) Punctuality and attendance
(b) Is he reluctant to continue on overtime
(c) Is he in the habit of taking leaves at the eleventh hour
(d) Does he insist on compensatory off
+(5)
- (1)
- (1)
- (1)
2. Intelligence and grasp:
(a) Does he have full knowledge of the plant and
equipment on which he is working and follows the instructions
given to him and can execute them properly
(b) Is he industrious, hard working and painstaking
(c) Has he shown any special skill of operation in saving
plant & equipment in trouble or emergency?
+(10)
+(5)
+(10)
3. Temperament and behaviour:
(a) Behaviour with superiors/colleagues and
subordinates
(b) Capacity to take quick and correct decisions
(c) Capacity to handle independent responsibility
+(5)
+(5)
+(10)
4. Any special qualifications-capacity to execute a
particular or difficult job economically, intelligently,
resourcefully with special skill
+(10)
5. Judgment of the candidate by taking viva-voce test or
by asking questions verbally
+(40)
Total Marks +100
The Marks may be given as below:-
Excellent Very good Good Average Below
average
100-91% 90-71% 70-61% 60-51% Below
51%
Special Remarks if any:-
Station Superitendent Section-in-
Charge
(II) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR OPERATING AND
SUPERVISORY STAFF
(For use of the Training Department)
1. Name of the Trainee……………………………
2. Date of birth/age…………………………….
3. Training period: From………………….. (Months)……………….
4. Technical qualification…………………
5. Specialisation if any ………………………
6. Practical experience…………………….
7. Marks secured in periodical tests:………….
Test Date Written
(75)
Viva
(25
Total
I Test
II Test
III Test
Final Test
8. Percentage of marks secured in all the tests:………………..
9. Gradation: (A,B,C, etc.)………………………
10. General Remarks and Recommendations: Director of the
Institute
(III) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR SKILLED PERSONS TO ASSIST
OPERATORS AND SUPERVISORS
Name of the Trainee:……………………..
Period: From……………………… to ……………………
(extended period), Working in:……………………..
Section………………………………………………………………….Department.
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
Allotted
Marks
given
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
1. Punctuality and Attendance:
(a) Does he attend the duty punctually or remain
absent without prior intimation frequently
(b) Is he reluctant to continue on overtime
(c) Is he in the habit of taking leave at the
eleventh hour
(d) Is he even prepared to take leave without
wages
(e) Whether he availed medical leave often
+(5)
-(1)
-(1)
-(4)
-(1)
2. Intelligence and Grasp:
(a) Does he have full knowledge of the plant
and equipment on which he is working and follows
the instructions given to him and can execute them
properly
+(10)
(b) Is he industrious, hard working and
painstaking
+(5)
(c) (i) Has he shown any special skill of operation in
saving plants and equipment in trouble or
emergency
OR
(ii) Has he shown any special skill or innovation
in any maintenance job
+(10)
3. Temperament and Behaviour
(a) Behaviour with superiors and colleagues
+(5)
(b) Capacity to take quick and correct decisions
by himself or to point out the discrepancies to
superiors promptly while attending auxiliary plant
and equipment
+(5)
(c) Capacity to take independent charge as
auxiliary plant attendants (Name of the auxiliary
plant)
+(10)
4. Any Special Qualifications:
(a) Is he suitable for any other plant other than
the one mentioned above at 3(c)
(b) Can he record the readings correctly
(c) Is he suitable for any particular skilled
maintenance job, as an artisan
(d) Has he specialised in any particular trade
such as winder, high pressure welding, etc.
+(10)
5. Judgment of the candidate by taking vivavoce
test or by asking questions verbally about
power plant and equipment
+(40)
Total Marks +100
The Marks may be given as below:-
Excellent Very good Good Average Below
average
100-91% 90-71% 70-61% 60-51% Below
51%
Special Remarks if any: -
Station Superintendent
(IV) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR SKILLED PERSONS TO ASSIST
OPEITATORS AND SUPERVISORS
(For the use of Training Department)
1. Name of the Trainee…………………
2. Date of birth/age…………………….
3. Training period: from …………….to……….. (months)………….
4. Highest technical qualifications…………………
5. Specialisation, if any………………….
6. Practical experience………………….
7. Marks secured in periodical tests: -
Test Date Written Viva Total
(60) (40)
I Test
II Test
III Test
8. Job test (100 Marks)……………….
9. Percentage of Marks secured in all the tests:…………….
10. Gradation: (A, B, C, etc.)…………….
11. General remarks & recommendations:…………………….
Director of Institute
THE INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 1956
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
PRELIMINARY
1. Short title and commencement
2. Definitions
3. Authorisation
CHAPTER II
INSPECTORS
4. Qualification of Inspectors
4A. Appointment of officers to assist the Inspectors
4B. Qualification of officers appointed to assist the Inspectors
5. Entry and inspection
6. Appeals
7. Amount of fees
8. Incidence of fees recoverable in the cases of dispute
9. Submission of records
10. List of consumers
CHAPTER III
LICENCE
11. Application for licence
12. Copies of maps and draft licence for public inspection
13. Contents of draft licence
14. Form of draft licence
15. Advertisement of application and contents thereof
16. Amendment of draft licence
17. Local enquiries
18. Approval of draft licence
19. Notification of grant of licence
20. Date of commencement of licence
21. Deposit of maps
22. Deposit of printed copies
23. Application for written consent of State Government in certain cases
24. Amendment of licence
25. Sale of Plans
26. Preparations and submission of accounts
27. Model conditions of supply
28. Forms of requisitions
CHAPTER IV
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
29. Construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric
supply lines and apparatus
30. Service lines and apparatus on consumer’s premises
31. Cut-out on consumer’s premises
32. Identification of earthed and earthed neutral conductors and position of
switches and cut-outs therein
33. Earthed terminal on consumer’s premises
34. Accessibility of bare conductors
35. Danger Notices
36. Handling of electric supply lines and apparatus
37. Supply to vehicles, cranes, etc.
38. Cables for portable or transportable apparatus
39. Cables protected by bituminous materials
40. Street boxes
41. Distinction of different circuits
41A. Distinction of the installations having more than one feed
42. Accidental charge
43. Provisions applicable to protective equipment
44. Instructions for restoration of persons suffering from electric shock
44A. Intimation of Accident
45. Precautions to be adopted by consumers, owner’s occupiers, electrical
contractors, electrical workmen and suppliers
46. Periodical inspection and testing of consumer’s installation
CHAPTER V
GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATING
TO SUPPLY AND USE OF ENERGY
47. Testing of consumer’s installation
47A. Installation and Testing of Generating Units
48. Precautions against leakage before connection
49. Leakage on consumer’s premises
50. Supply and use of energy
50A. Additional provisions for supply and use of energy in multi-storeyed building
(more than 15 metres in height)
51. Provisions applicable to medium, high or extra-high voltage installations
52. Appeal to Inspector in regard to defects
53. Cost of inspection and test of consumer’s installation
54. Declared voltage of supply to consumer
55. Declared frequency of supply to consumer
56. Sealing of meters, and cut-outs
57. Meters, maximum demand indicators and other apparatus on consumer’s
premises
58. Point of commencement of supply
59. Precautions against failure of supply: Notice of failures
CHAPTER VI
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR LOW AND
MEDIUM VOLTAGES
60. Test for resistance of insulation
61. Connection with earth
61A. Earth leakage protective device
62. Systems at medium voltage
CHAPTER VII
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH AND
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGES
63. Approval by Inspector
64. Use of energy at high and extra-high voltage
64A. Additional provisions for use of energy at high and extra-high voltage
65. Testing, Operation and Maintenance
66. Metal sheathed electric supply lines. Precautions against excess leakage
67. Connection with earth
68. General conditions as to transformation and control of energy
69. Pole type sub-stations
70. Condensers
71. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage luminous tube sign
installation
72. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage electrode boilers
73. Supply to X-ray and high frequency installation
CHAPTER VIII
OVERHEAD LINES, UNDER GROUND CABLES AND GENERATING
STATIONS
74. Material and strength
75. Joints
76. Maximum stresses: Factors of safety
77. Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor
78. Clearance between conductors and trolley wires
79. Clearances from buildings of low and medium voltage lines and service
lines
80. Clearances from buildings of high and extra-high voltage lines
81. Conductors at different voltages on same supports
82. Erection of or alternation to buildings, structures, flood banks and elevation
of roads
82A. Transporting and Storing of material near overhead lines
83. Clearances: General
84. Routes: Proximity to aerodromes
85. Maximum interval between supports
86. Conditions to apply where telecommunication lines and power lines
are carried on same supports
87. Lines crossing or approaching each other
88. Guarding
89. Service-lines from Overhead lines
90. Earthing
91. Safety and protective devices
92. Protection against lightning
93. Unused overhead lines
CHAPTER IX
ELECTRIC TRACTION
94. Additional rules for electric traction
95. Voltage of supply to vehicle
96. Insulation of lines
97. Insulation of returns
98. Proximity to metallic pipes, etc.
99. Difference of potential on return
100. Leakage on conduit system
101. Leakage on system other than conduit system
102. Passengers not to have access to electric circuit
103. Current density in rails
104. Isolation of sections
105. Minimum size and strength of trolley-wire
106. Height of trolley-wire and length of span
107. Earthing of guard wires
107A. Proximity to magnetic observatories and laboratories
108. Records
CHAPTER X
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE
ADOPTED IN MINES AND OIL-FIELDS
109. Application of Chapter
110. Responsibility for observance
111. Notices
112. Plans
113. Lighting, communications and fire precautions
114. Isolation and fixing of transformer, switchgear, etc.
115. Method of earthing
116. Protective equipment
117. Earthing metal, etc.
118. Voltage limits
119. Transformers
120. Switchgear and terminals
121. Disconnection of supply
122. Cables
123. Flexible cables
124. Portable and transportable machines
125. Sundry precautions
126. Precautions where gas exists
127. Shot-firing
128. Signalling
129. Haulage
130. Earthing of neutral points
131. Supervision
132. Exemptions
CHAPTER XI
MISCELLANEOUS
133. Relaxation by Government
134. Relaxation by Inspector
135. Supply and use of energy by non-licensees and others
136. Responsibility of Agents and Managers
137. Mode of entry
138. Penalty for breaking seal
138A. Penality for breach of rule 44A
139. Penalty for breach of rule 45
140. Penalty for breach of rule 82
140A. Penalty for breach of rule 77, 79 or 80
141. Penalty for breach of rules
142. Application of rules
143. Repeal
ANNEXURE I
Specification relating to the deposition of silver
ANNEXURE II
Scale of fees for comparison with the Government of India standards referred to in
sub-rule (1) of rule 2
ANNEXURE III
Model form of draft licence under the Indian Electricity Act, 1910
ANNEXURE IV
Summary of technical and financial particulars for the year ended 31st March 19...
ANNEXURE V
Model form of Accounts
ANNUXURE VI
Model form of draft conditions of supply
ANNEXURE VII
Form of requisition under clause V (4) of the schedule to the Act
ANNEXURE VIII
Form of requisition for supply of energy under clause VI (5) of the schedule to the
Act
ANNEXURE IX
Form of order under sub-rule (4) of rules 5, sub-rule (2) of rule 46
ANNEXURE IX A
Model forms of inspection report
ANNUXURE X
Form of annual return for mines
ANNEXURE XI
Form of annual return for oil-fields
ANNEXURE XII
Log sheet for mines and oil-fields
ANNEXURE XIII
Form for reporting electric al accidents
ANNEXURE XIV
Guidelines for providing training as required under rule 3(2A)
APPENDIX I
Syllabus for the operating and supervisory staff engaged in the
operation and maintenance of the thermal power stations
APPENDIX II
1. Specialised mechanical course for operating & supervisory staff who will be
engaged on the mechanical side of the power plant
2. Specialised electrical course for operating and supervisory staff who will be
engaged in the electrical side of the power plant
APPENDIX III
Syllabus for skilled persons for assisting the operation and maintenance of thermal
power stations
APPENDIX IV
1. Specialised electrical course for skilled persons who will be engaged on the
electrical side of the power plant
2. Specialised mechanical course for skilled persons who will be engaged in
the mechanical side of the power station
APPENDIX V
Syllabus for operation and maintenance staff who will be engaged in the operation
and maintenance of hydroelectric generating station
APPENDIX VI
Syllabus for operation and maintenance staff in extra-high voltage sub-station
APPENDIX VII
(I) Assessment form for operating and supervisory staff
(II) Assessment form for operating and supervisory staff (for the use of Training
Department)
(III) Assessment form for skilled persons to assist operators and supervisors
(IV) Assessment form for skilled persons to assistant operators and supervisors
(for the use of Training Department)
MINISTRY OF IRRIGATION AND POWER
NOTIFICATION
NEW DELHI, THE 26TH JUNE 1956
THE INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 19561
SRO 1455- In exercise of the powers conferred by Section 37 of the Indian
Electricity Act, 1910 (IX of 1910), the Central Electricity Board hereby makes the
following rules, the same having been previously published as required by
subsection (1) of Section 38 of the said Act, namely: -
1. As published in Gazette of India, Pt. II (3), dt. 26.6.1956.
CHAPTER I
PRELIMINARY
1. Short title and commencement-
(1) These rules may be called the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
(2) They shall come into force at once.
2. Definitions-
(1) In these rules, unless the context otherwise requires, -
(a) “The Act” means the Indian Electricity Act, 1910;
(b) “Accessible” means within physical reach without the use of any appliance
or special effort;
(c) “Ampere” means a unit of electric current and is the unvarying electric
current which when passed through a solution of nitrate of silver in water, in
accordance with the specification set out in Annexure I, deposits silver at the rate
of 0.001118 of a gramme per second; the aforesaid unit is equivalent to the
current which, in passing through the suspended coil of wire forming part of the
instrument marked “Government of India Ampere Standard Verified” when the
suspended coil is in its sighted position, exerts a force which is exactly balanced
by the force exerted by gravity in Calcutta on the counter balancing iridio-platinum
weight of the said instrument;
(d) “Annexure” means an Annexure to these rules;
(e) “Apparatus” means electrical apparatus and includes all machines, fittings,
accessories and appliances in which conductors are used;
1[(ee) “Authorised person” means a person authorised under rule 3;]
(f) “Bare” means not covered with insulating materials;
(g) “Cable” means a length of insulated single conductor (solid or stranded or
of two or more such conductors, each provided with its own insulation, which are
laid up together. Such insulated conductor or conductors may or may not be
provided with an overall mechanical protective covering;
(gg) “Flexible cable” means a cable consisting of one or more cores each
formed of a group of wires, the diameter and the physical properties of the wires
and the insulating materials being such as to afford flexibility;
(h) “Circuit” means an arrangement of conductor or conductors for the purpose
of conveying energy and forming a system or a branch of a system;
(i) “Circuit breaker” means a device, capable of making and breaking the
circuit under all conditions, and unless otherwise specified, so designed as to
break the current automatically under abnormal conditions;
(j) “Concentric cable” means a composite cable comprising an inner conductor
which is insulated and one or more outer conductors which are insulated from one
another and are disposed over the insulation of, and more or less around, the
inner conductor;
(k) “Conductor” means any wire, cable, bar, tube, rail or plate used for
conducting energy and so arranged as to be electrically connected to a system;
(1) “Conduit” means rigid or flexible metallic tubing or mechanically strong and
fire resisting non-metallic tubing into which a cable or cables may be drawn for the
purpose of affording it or them mechanical protection;
(m) “Covered with insulating material” means adequately covered with
insulating material of such quality and thickness as to prevent danger;
(n) “Cut-out” means any appliance for automatically interrupting the
transmission of energy through any conductor when the current rises above a predetermined
amount, and shall also include fusible cutout;
(o) “Danger” means danger to health or danger to life or any part of body from
shock, burn or other injury to persons, or property, or from fire or explosion,
attendant upon the generation, transmission, transformation, conversion,
distribution or use of energy;
(p) “Dead” means at or about earth potential and disconnected from any live
system;
Provided that apparatus separated from a live conductor by a spark gap shall not
be deemed to be “dead”;
NOTE- The term “dead” is used only with reference to current carrying parts when
these parts are not live.
(q) “Earthed” or “connected with earth” means connected with the general
mass of earth in such manner as to ensure at all times an immediate discharge of
energy without danger;
(r) “Earthing system” means an electrical system in which all the conductors
are earthed;
2[(s) * * * * *]
(t) “Enclosed sub-station” means any premises or enclosure or part thereof,
being large enough to admit the entrance of a person after the apparatus therein is
in position, containing apparatus for transforming or converting energy to or from a
voltage at or above medium voltage (other than transforming or converting solely
for the operation of switchgear or instruments) with or without any other apparatus
for switching, controlling or otherwise regulating the energy, and includes the
apparatus therein;
(u) “Enclosed switch-station” means any premises or enclosure or part thereof,
being large enough to admit the entrance of a person after the apparatus therein is
in position, containing apparatus for switching, controlling or otherwise regulating
energy at or above medium voltage but not for transforming or converting energy
(other than for transforming or converting solely for the operation of switchgear or
instruments), and includes the apparatus therein;
3[(uu) “Flameproof enclosure” means an enclosure for electrical machinery or
apparatus that will withstand, when the covers or other access doors are properly
secured, an internal explosion of the inflammable gas or vapour which may enter
or originate inside the enclosure, without suffering damage and without
communicating the internal flammation (or explosion) to the external inflammable
gas or vapour in which it is designed to be used, through any joints or other
structural openings in the closure;]
(v) “Guarded” means covered, shielded, fenced or otherwise protected by
means of suitable casings, barrier, rails or metal screens to remove the possibility
of dangerous contact or approach by persons or objects to a point of danger;
4[(vv) “Hand-held portable apparatus” means an apparatus which is so designed
as to be capable of being held in the hands and moved while connected to a
supply of electricity;]
(w) “Inspector” means an Electrical Inspector appointed under section 36;
(x) “Inspector of Mines” means an Inspector appointed under the Mines Act,
1952 (35 of 1952);
(y) “Installation” means any composite electrical unit used for the purpose of
generating, transforming, transmitting, converting, distributing or utilizing energy;
(z) “Intrinsically safe” as applied to apparatus or associated circuits shall
denote that any sparking that may occur in normal working is incapable of causing
explosion of inflammable gas or vapour;
(aa) “Lighting arrestor” means a device which has the property of diverting to
earth any electrical surge of excessively high amplitude applied to its terminals
and is capable of interrupting follow current if present and restoring itself thereafter
to its original operating conditions;
5[(aaa) “Linked switch” means a switch with all the poles mechanically linked
so as to operate simultaneously;]
(ab) “Live” means electrically charged;
(ac) “Metallic covering” means mechanically strong metal covering surrounding
one or more conductors;
6[(ad) “Neutral conductor” means that conductor of a multi-wire system, the
voltage of which is normally intermediate between the voltages of the other
conductors of the system and shall also include return wire of the single phase
system;]
(ae) “Non-licensee” means a person generating, supplying, transmitting or using
energy to whom any of the provisions of Part III of the Act apply;
(af) “Occupier” means the owner or person in occupation of the premises where
energy is used or proposed to be used;
7[(aff) “Officer appointed to assist the Inspector” means an officer appointed under
rule 4A;]
(ag) “Ohm” means a unit of electric resistance and is the resistance offered to an
unvarying electric current by a column of mercury at the temperature of melting ice
14.4521 grammes in mass of an uniform cross-sectional area and of a length of
106.3 centimetres; the aforesaid unit is represented by the resistance between the
terminals of the instrument marked “Government of India Ohm Standard Verified”
to the passage of an electric current when the coil of wire, forming part of the
aforesaid instrument and connected to the aforesaid terminals is in all parts at a
temperature of 30OC;
(ah) “Open sparking” means sparking which owing to the lack of adequate
provisions for preventing the ignition of inflammable gas external to the apparatus
would ignite such inflammable gas;
(ai) “Overhead line” means any electric supplying, which is placed above
ground and in the open air but excluding live rails of a traction system;
(aj) “Owner”, “agent” and “manager” of a mine have the same meanings as are
assigned to them in the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952);
8[(ak) “Portable apparatus” means an apparatus which is so designed as to be
capable of being moved while in operation;]
(al) “Portable hand lamp” means a portable light-fitting provided with suitable
handle, guard and flexible cord connected to a plug;
(am) “Section” means a section of the Act;
(an) “Span” means the horizontal distance between two adjacent supporting
points of an overhead conductor;
(ao) “Street box” means a totally enclosed structure, either above or below
ground containing apparatus for transforming, switching, controlling or otherwise
regulating energy;
(ap) “Supplier” means a licensee, a non-licensee or any other supplier of energy,
9[including the Government];
(aq) “Switch” means a manually operated device for opening and closing or for
changing the connection of a circuit;
10[(aqa) “Switchboard” means an assembly including the switchgear for the
control of electrical circuits, electric connections and the supporting frame;]
(ar) “Switchgear” shall denote switches, circuit breakers, cut-outs and other
apparatus used for the operation, regulation and control of circuits;
(as) “System” means an electrical system in which all the conductors and
apparatus are electrically connected to a common source of electric supply;
(at) “Transportable apparatus” means apparatus which is operated in a fixed
position but which is so designed as to be capable of being moved readily from
one place to another;
(au) “Volt” means a unit of electromotive force and is the electric pressure,
which, when steadily applied to a conductor, the resistance of which is one ohm,
will produce a current of one amphere;
(av) “Voltage” means the difference of electric potential measured in volts
between any two conductors or between any part of either conductor and the earth
as measured by a suitable voltmeter and is said to be;
“Low” where the voltage does not exceed 250 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“Medium” where the voltage does not exceed 650 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“High” where the voltage does not exceed 33,000 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules;
“Extra high” where the voltage exceeds 33,000 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by these rules.
(2) All other words and expressions used herein and not defined shall have the
meanings respectively assigned to them in the Act.
1. Ins. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 31.12.1977.
2. Clause (s) omitted by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
3. Ins. by G.S.R. 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
4. Ins. by GSR 225, dt. 10.2.1961, w.e.f. 25.2.1961.
5. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
6. Subs. by GSR 522, dt. 17.3.1970, w.e.f. 4.4.1970.
7. Ins. by G.S.R. 336, dt, 28.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
8. Subs. by GSR 225, dt. 10.2.1961.
9. Ins. by GSR 1640, dt. 26.9.1963, w.e.f. 12.10.1963.
10. Ins. by GSR 170, dt. 15.1.1979, w.e.f. 3.2.1979.
3. Authorisation-
(1) A supplier or a consumer, or the owner, agent or manager of a mine, or the
agent of any company operating in an oil-field or the owner of a drilled well in an
oil-field or a contractor for the time being under contract with a supplier or a
consumer to carry out duties incidental to the generation, transformation,
transmission, conversion, distribution or use of energy may authorise any person
for the purpose of any or all of the following, namely:-
Sub-rule (2) of rule 36, clause (a) sub-rule (1) of rule 51, clause (a) of sub-rule (1)
and 1[clauses (e) 2[and (f)] of sub-rule (2)] of rule 64, sub rule (2) of rule 110, subrules
(1) and (4) of rule 121, sub-rule (4) of rule 123, rule 124 and sub-rule (8) of
rule 125.
3[(2) No person shall be authorised under sub-rule (1) unless he is competent to
perform the duties assigned to him and possesses either an appropriate certificate
of competency or permit to work.]
4[(2A) (a) No person shall be authorised to operate or undertake maintenance
of any part or whole of a generating station of capacity 100 MW and above
together with the associated sub-station unless he is adequately qualified and has
successfully undergone the type of training specified in Annexure XIV;
Provided that the provisions contained in this sub-rule shall have effect in respect
of the persons already authorised to operate or undertake maintenance of any part
or whole of a generating station as aforesaid from the date to be specified by the
appropriate Government, but such a date shall not be later than a period of 5[6
years, 2 months] from the date this rule comes into force.
(b) The appropriate Government may, on the recommendations of the owner of
such generating station, relax the conditions stipulated in clause (a) of this subrule
for any engineer and such other person who have already sufficient
experience in the operation and maintenance of a generating station.
(c) The owner of a generating station, in consultation with Central Electricity
Authority may alter the duration and manner of training in respect of those persons
who have been already engaged in the operation and maintenance of a generating
station or a sub-station.]
6[(2B) The provisions contained in rule 3(2A) will also be applicable in respect of
other sub-stations of 132 KV and above from a date to be specified by the
appropriate Government but such a date shall not be later than 3 years from which
this rule comes into force.]
(3) No person shall be deemed to be authorised under sub-rule (1) unless his
name has been entered in a list maintained at the office or premises of the person
authorizing him, and giving the purpose for which such person is authorised and
the entry has been attested by the authorised person and the person authorising
him.
(4) Every list maintained under sub-rule (3) shall be produced before an
Inspector 7[or any officer of a specified rank and class appointed to assist the
Inspector] when required.
8[(5) An Inspector may cancel or amend, in such manner as he considers
necessary, any authorisation, made under sub-rule (1).
9[(6) In every registered factory, where more than 250 KW of electrical load is
connected, there shall be a person authorised by the management of the factory
for ensuring the observance of the safety provisions laid under the Act and the
rules made thereunder, who shall periodically inspect such installation, get them
tested and keep a record thereof and such records shall be made available to the
Inspector 2[or any officer of a specified rank and class appointed to assist the
Inspector], if and when required.]
1. Ins. by GSR 1640, dt. 26.9.1963, w.e.f, 12.10.1963.
2. Ins. by G.S.R. 256, dt. 26.3.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
3. Subs. by G.S.R. 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
4. Ins. by G.S.R. 461, dt. 24.4.1981, w.e.f. 9.5.1981.
5. Subs. by G.S.R. 481, dt. 10.6.1987, w.e.f. 20.6.1987.
6. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
7. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
8. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
9. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
CHAPTER II
INSPECTORS
1[4. Qualification of Inspectors- No person shall be appointed to be an
Inspector, unless-
(a) He possesses a degree in electrical engineering or its equivalent from
recognised University or Institution; and
(b) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least eight years in the
practice of electrical engineering of which not less than two years have been spent
in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity, or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility;
Provided that the appropriate Government may, for a period of seven years
commencing on the date the Indian Electricity (Amendment) Rules, 1986 are
brought into force, also appoint a person possessing recognised Diploma in
Electrical Engineering and having prescribed experience to be an Inspector in
respect of low and medium voltage installations only]
1. Subs. by GSR 772, dt. 5.9.1986, w.e.f. 20.9.1986.
1[4A. Appointment of officers to assist the Inspectors-
(1) The appropriate Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
appoint as many officers as it thinks fit to assist an Inspector.
2[(2) The appropriate Government may, by a separate notification in the Official
Gazette, authorise certain officers appointed under sub-rule (1) for the purposes of
3[sub-rule (4) and sub-rule (6) of rule 3,] sub-rule (3) and sub-rule (4) of the rule 5,
rule 9, rule 10, clauses (c) of sub-rule (1) of the rule 32, clause (b) of sub-rule (1)
and clause (c) of sub-rule (2) of rule 46, sub-rule (1) of rule 49, 3[sub-rule (3) of
rule 51, sub-rule (3) of rule 59,] sub-rule (6) of rule 61 4[and clause (b) of sub-rule
(5) of rule 671.]
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
2. Subs. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 13.12.1977.
3. Ins. by G.S.R. 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Subs. by G.S.R. 29, dt. 24.12.1983, w.e.f. 24.1.1984.
1[4B. Qualification of officers appointed to assist the Inspectors. -
2[(1) No person shall be appointed as an officer to assist an Inspector, unless-
7[(a) (i) He possesses a Degree in Electrical Engineering or its equivalent
from a recognised University or Institution; and
(ii) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least three years in the
practice of electrical engineering, of which not less than one year has been spent
in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity, or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility;
Provided that the appropriate Government may relax the requirements of
experience in case of officers otherwise well qualified.]
Or
3[(b) (i) He possesses a diploma in electrical engineering or its equivalent
from a recognised institution; and
(ii) He has been regularly engaged for a period of at least six years in the
practice of electrical engineering, of which not less than two years have been
spent in an electrical or mechanical engineering workshop or in generation or
transmission or distribution of electricity or in the administration of the Act and
these rules, in a position of responsibility.]
4[(2) The persons appointed under rule 4A shall undergo such training as the
appropriate Government may consider it necessary for the purpose and such
training shall be completed to the satisfaction of the appropriate Government.]
5[(3) The appropriate Government may relax requirements of practical
experience in case of officers otherwise found suitable but a notification under
sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in case of such officers shall be issued only after they have
acquired the experience as required by sub-rule (1).]
1. Subs. by G.S.R. 722, dt. 5.9.1986, w.e.f. 20.9.1986.
2. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
3. Clauses (a) and (b) renumbered as clauses (a) and (b) of sub-rule (1) by
GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
4. Clause (c) ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987, renumbered as
sub-rule (2) by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
5. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
5. Entry and inspection-
(1) Any Inspector or any officer appointed to assist an Inspector may enter,
inspect and examine any place, carriage or vessel in which he has reason to
believe that there is any appliance or apparatus used in the generation,
transmission, transformation, conversion, distribution or use of energy and may
carry out tests therein.
(2) Every supplier, consumer, owner and occupier shall afford at all times all
reasonable facilities to any such Inspector or officer to make such examinations
and tests as may be necessary to satisfy himself as to the due observance of the
provisions of the Act, the terms of the licence (if any) and these rules.
(3) Every supplier and every owner of a generating station or of a high/extra
high voltage installation shall, if required so to do by in Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A
provide reasonable means for carrying out all tests, prescribed by or under the
Act, of the appliances or apparatus used for the supply or use of energy by him as
the case may be.
(4) An Inspector, or any officer appointed to assist an Inspector and authorised
under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A, may serve an order in the form set out in Annexure
IX, upon any supplier, consumer, owner or occupier, calling upon him to comply
with any specified rule and the person so served shall thereupon comply with the
order within the period named therein, and shall report in writing to the Inspector or
the officer serving the order, as the case may be, when the order is complied with.
Provided that, if within the period specified in the aforesaid order an appeal is filed
against the order, the appellate authority may suspend its operation pending the
decision of the appeal.
6. Appeals-
(1) An appeal against an order served under these rules shall lie(
a) If the order is served by an officer appointed to assist an Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A, to the Inspector;
(b) If the order is served by an Inspector, to the Central Government or the
State Government, as the case may be.
(2) In the case of an order of an Inspector on an appeal preferred to him under
clause (a) of sub-rule (1), a further appeal shall lie to the Central Government or
the State Government, as the case may be.
(3) Every appeal made under sub-rule (1) shall be in writing, shall be
accompanied by a copy of the order appealed against and shall be presented
within 3 months of the date on which such order has been served or delivered or is
deemed to have been served or delivered as the case may be.
7. Amount of fees-
(1) The fees set out in Annexure-II shall be payable in respect of the services
therein mentioned where the tests are carried out by comparison with the
Government of India Standards referred to in sub-rule (1) of rule 2.
(2) The Central Government or the State Government as the case may be,
may levy such fees for testing and inspection and generally for the services of
Inspectors or any officers appointed to assist the Inspector as it may from time to
time by general or special order, direct; and may, if it thinks fit, remit any fee or any
portion thereof.
8. Incidence of fees recoverable in the cases of dispute- Where an Inspector
is called in to decide any difference or dispute and where a fee for such service is
recoverable, the Inspector shall decide by whom such fees shall be payable.
9. Submission of records- An Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A may require a supplier or an
owner to submit to him for examination any records of tests made in connection
with his works and he shall comply with such requisition. Similarly, a supplier or
an owner may require the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector
and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A to submit to him for examination any
records of tests made by the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in connection with his works
and the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised
under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A shall comply with such requisition.
10. List of consumers- An inspector or any officer appointed to assist the
Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A may require a supplier to
submit to him a list of all persons supplied with energy by him, the addresses at
which such energy is supplied, the month of connecting services, the voltage of
supply, the connected load, the purpose of supply and the name of contractor
carrying out the installation work and the supplier shall comply with such
requisition.
CHAPTER III
LICENCE
11. Application for licence-
(1) Every application for a licence shall be signed by or on behalf of the
applicant and addressed to such officer as the State Government may designate
in this behalf and it shall be accompanied by-
(a) Six copies, in print, of the draft licence as proposed by the applicant, with,
he name and address of the applicant and of his agent (if any), printed on the
outside of the draft;
(b) Three copies, each signed by the applicant, of maps of the proposed area
of supply and of the streets or roads in which the supply of energy is to be
compulsory, which shall be so marked or coloured as to define any portion of such
area and streets or roads which are under the administrative control of any local
authority and shall be on a scale-
(i) Of not less than 10 centimetres to a kilometre, or
(ii) If no such maps are available, of not less than that of the largest scale
ordinance maps available, or
(iii) On such other scales as may be approved by State Government;
(c) A list of any local authorities vested with the administration of any portion of
the area of supply;
(d) An approximate statement describing any lands which the applicant
proposes to acquire for the purpose of the licence under the provisions of the Land
Acquisition Act, 1894 (1 of 1894);
(e) An approximate statement of the capital proposed to be expended in
connection with the undertaking and such other particulars as the State
Government may require;
(f) If the applicant is a Company which is registered under any of the
enactments relating to Companies for the time being in force in India or is a
Corporation by an Act of the Parliament, a copy of the Memorandum and Articles
of Association; and
(g) A treasury receipt for such fee not exceeding fifteen hundred rupees, as the
State Government may require, paid into a Government treasury in the State
concerned, unless such fee is remitted, wholly or in part, by general or special
order of the State Government.
(2) If the application for a licence is rejected or if a licence is revoked under
sub-section (2) of section 4 as to the whole or any part of the area of supply, the
State Government may at its discretion refund, wholly or in part, the fee referred to
in clause (g) of sub-rule (1).
12. Copies of maps and draft licence for public inspection- The applicant shall
deposit at his own office and of his agents (if any) and at the office of every local
authority invested with the administration of any portion of the proposed area of
supply-
(a) Copies of the maps referred to in clause (b) of sub-rule (1) of rule 11 for
public inspection; and
(b) A sufficient number of copies of the draft licence to be furnished to all
persons applying for them at a price not exceeding twenty-five 1[* * *] paise per
copy.
1. The word “naye” omitted by GSR 256, dt. 26.3.1983.
13. Contents of draft licence- The draft licence shall contain the following
particulars:
(a) A short title descriptive of the proposed undertaking together with the
address and description of the applicant, or in the case of a firm, the names of all
the directors or partners of the firm;
(b) A Statement of the boundaries of the proposed area of supply;
(c) If the generating station is situated or is to be situated outside the area of
supply or if any intervening area not included in the area of supply is to be
crossed, a list of the streets not included in the area of supply along or across
which electric supply lines are to be laid down or placed;
(d) The proposed limits within which and the conditions under which the supply
of energy is to be compulsory or permissive, the nature and amount of the supply
(if limited) and the like;
(e) A list of the streets (if any) which are repairable neither by the Central or the
State Government nor by a local authority and of the railways and tramways (if
any), the soil or pavement of which the applicant seeks powers to open or break
up, and the names of the persons or designations of authorities by whom such
streets are repairable or who are for the time being entitled to work such railways
or tramways;
(f) The proposed periods after which the right to purchase is to take effect;
(g) A statement of any special terms of purchase or orders proposed to be
made under section 10; and
(h) Any proposed modification of the Schedule to the Act to be made under
clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3.
14. Form of draft licence- The form of draft licence contained in Annexure III
may, with such variation as the circumstances of each case require, be used for
the purposes of rules 11 and 13 and if used, shall be sufficient.
15. Advertisement of application and contents thereof-
(1) The applicant shall, within fourteen days from the submission of the
application under rule 11, publish notice of his application by public advertisement
and such advertisement shall publish such particulars as the State Government
may specify.
(2) The advertisement shall be headed by a short title corresponding to that
given at the head of the draft licence and shall give the addresses of the offices at
which, under rule 12, copies of maps therein referred to may be inspected and the
copies of draft licence perused or purchased and shall state that every local
authority, company or person, desirous of making any representation with
reference to the application to the State Government, may do so by letter
addressed to such officer as the State Government may designate in this behalf
within three months of the date of issue of the first advertisement.
(3) The advertisement shall be inserted by the applicant in at least two
successive issues of such newspapers as the State Government, having regard to
its circulation among persons likely to be interested, may direct, and in the
absence of any such direction, in at least two successive issues of any
newspaper, in any newspaper, published within the State.
(4) The applicant shall send a copy of each of the two successive issues of the
newspaper containing the advertisement to such officer as the State Government
may designate in this behalf as soon as the second issue has appeared and the
State Government shall publish the advertisement at least once in the Official
Gazette within six weeks from the date of the first advertisement published under
sub-rule (3).
Provided that any failure or delay on the part of the State Government in
publishing the advertisement shall not of itself preclude the grant of a licence.
16. Amendment of draft licence- Any person who desires to have any
amendment made in the draft licence shall deliver a statement of the amendment
to the applicant and to such officer as the State Government may designate in this
behalf within the time allowed under sub-rule (2) of rule 15 for the submission of
representations referring to the application.
17. Local enquiries- If any person locally interested objects to the grant of a
licence applied for under the Act, the State Government shall, if either the
applicant or the objector so desires, cause a local enquiry to be held of which the
notice in writing shall be given to both the applicant and the objector.
Provided that the State Government may refuse such an enquiry if in its opinion
the objection is of a trifling or vexatious nature.
18. Approval of draft licence- When the State Government has approved a draft
licence, either in its original form or in a modified form, such officer as the State
Government may designate in this behalf shall inform the applicant of such
approval and of the form in which it is proposed to grant the licence.
19. Notification of grant of licence- On receiving an intimation in writing from the
applicant that he is willing to accept a licence in the form approved by the State
Government, the State Government shall publish the licence within two months by
a notification in the Official Gazette, together with a statement that it has been
granted.
20. Date of commencement of licence- The date of a notification under rule 19
shall be deemed to be the date of commencement of the licence.
21. Deposit of maps- When a licence has been granted, three sets of maps
showing, as regards such licence, the particulars specified in clause (b) of sub-rule
(1) of rule 11 shall be signed and dated to correspond with the date of the
notification of the grant of the licence by such officer as the State Government may
designate in this behalf. One set of such maps shall be retained as the deposited
maps by the said officer and of the remaining two sets, one shall be furnished to
the State Electricity Board constituted under section 5 of the Electricity (Supply)
Act, 1948, and the other to the licensee.
22. Deposit of printed copies-
(1) Every person who is granted a licence, shall within thirty days of the grant
thereof-
(a) Have adequate number of copies of the licence printed;
(b) Have adequate number of maps prepared showing the area of supply and
the compulsory areas specified in the licence;
(c) Arrange to exhibit a copy of such licence and maps for public inspection at
all reasonable times at his head office, his local offices (if any), and at the office of
every authority within the area of supply.
(2) Every such licence shall, within the aforesaid period of thirty days supply
free of charge one copy of the licence and the relevant maps to every local
authority within the area of supply and shall also make necessary arrangements
for the sale of printed copies of the licence to all persons applying for the same, at
a price no’, exceeding twenty-five 1[***] paise per copy.
1. The word “naye” omitted by GSR 256, dt. 26.3.1983.
23. Application for written consent of State Government in certain cases. -If a
licensee desires the written consent of the State Government under sub-section
(5) of section 12 to enable him to open or break up the soil or pavement of any
street (which is repairable neither by the Central or the State Government nor by a
local authority), or any railway or tramway, he shall apply for such consent in
writing to such officer as the State Government may designate in this behalf and
shall describe accurately the street, railway or tramway, which he seeks power to
open or break up and the names of the persons or designations of the authorities
by the whom such street is repairable or who are for the time being entitled to work
such railway or tramway; and the extent to which he purposes to open or break up
the same.
24. Amendment of licence-
(1) If a licensee desires that any alterations or amendments should be made in
the terms and conditions of his licence under subsection (1) of section 4A, he shall
submit a written application to the officer designated by the State Government
under rule 11 and shall within fourteen days from the submission of the application
publish notice of his application by public advertisement; and the provisions of
sub-rules (2), (3) and (4) of rule 15 shall apply to such publication.
(2) The State Government shall within six months of the date of submission of
the application either approve of the alterations or amendments in the form
proposed by the licensee or in any other modified form which he accepts or rejects
them. When the State Government has approved of the alterations or
amendments either in the form proposed by the licensee or in any other modified
form which he accepts, it shall notify the alterations or amendments so approved,
in the Official Gazette.
25. Sale of Plans- Copies of plans or sections such as are referred to in Clause
XVI of the Schedule to the Act shall be supplied by the licensee to every applicant
at a price not exceeding one rupee per 1000 square centimetres.
26. Preparations and submission of accounts-
(1) Every licensee, unless exempted under section 11, shall cause the
accounts of his undertaking to be made upto the thirty-first day of March each
year.
(2) Such licensee shall prepare and render an annual statement of his
accounts in accordance with the provisions of section 11 within a period of six
months from the aforesaid date, or such extended period as the State Government
may authorise after it is satisfied that the time allowed is insufficient owing to any
cause beyond the control of the licensee; and the statement shall be rendered in
quadruplicate if the State Government so desires.
(3) The accounts shall be made up in the prescribed forms set out in
Annexures IV and V and shall be rendered in Indian currency. All the forms shall
be signed by the licensee or his accredited agent or manager.
(4) The State Government may, by special or general order, direct that in
addition to the Submission of the annual statements of accounts in the forms
prescribed in sub-rule (3), a licensee shall submit to the State Government or such
other authority as it may appoint in this behalf such additional information as it may
require for the purpose.
27. Model conditions of supply-
(1) Without prejudice to the powers conferred by section 21 on the State
Government in this behalf, the model conditions of supply contained in Annexure
VI may, with such variations as the circumstances of each case require, be
adopted by the licensee for the purpose of sub-section (2) of that section with the
previous sanction of the State Government.
(2) The licensee shall always keep in his office an adequate number of printed
copies of the sanctioned conditions of supply and shall, on demand, sell such
copies to any applicant at a price not exceeding fifty paise per copy.
28. Forms of requisitions- Requisitions under sub-clause (4) of Clause V or
sub-clause (5) of Clause VI, as the case may be, of the Schedule to the Act shall
be made in the form set out in Annexure VII or Annexure VIII.
CHAPTER IV
1[GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS]
29. Construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric
supply lines and apparatus-
1[(1) All electric supply lines and apparatus shall be of sufficient ratings for
power, insulation and estimated fault current and of sufficient mechanical strength,
for the duty which they may be required to perform under the environmental
conditions of installation, and shall be constructed, installed, protected, worked
and maintained in such a manner as to ensure safety of 2[human beings, animals
and property].]
(2) Save as otherwise provided in these rules, the relevant code of practice of
the 3[Bureau of Indian Standards] 4[including National Electrical Code] if any may
be followed to carry out the purposes of this rule and in the event of any
inconsistency, the provision of these rules shall prevail.
(3) The material and apparatus used shall conform to the relevant
specifications of the 3[Bureau of Indian Standards] where such specifications have
already been laid down.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
2. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Subs. by GR. 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 5.9.1987.
30. Service lines and apparatus on consumer’s premises-
(1) The supplier shall ensure that all electric supply lines, wires, fittings and
apparatus belonging to him or under his control, which are on a consumer’s
premises, are in a safe condition and in all respects fit for supplying energy and
the supplier shall take due precautions to avoid danger arising on such premises
from such supply lines, wires, fittings and apparatus.
(2) Service-lines placed by the supplier on the premises of a consumer which
are underground or which are accessible shall be so insulated and protected by
the supplier as to be secured under all ordinary conditions against electrical,
mechanical, chemical or other injury to the insulation.
(3) The consumer shall, as far as circumstances permit, take precautions for
the safe custody of the equipment on his premises belonging to the supplier.
(4) The consumer shall also ensure that the installation under his control is
maintained in a safe condition.
31. Cut-out on consumer’s premises(
1) The supplier shall provide a suitable cut-out in each conductor of every
service-line other than an earthed or earthed neutral conductor or the earthed
external conductor of a concentric cable within a consumer’s premises, in an
accessible position. Such cut-out shall be contained within an adequately
enclosed fireproof receptacle.
Where more than one consumer is supplied through a common service-line, each
such consumer shall be provided with an independent cut-out at the point of
junction to the common service.
(2) Every electric supply line other than the earth or earthed neutral conductor
of any system or the earthed external conductor of a concentric cable shall be
protected by a suitable cut-out by its owner.
1[(3) * * * * *]
1. Sub-rule (3) omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 5.9.1987.
32. Identification of earthed and earthed neutral conductors and position of
switches and cut-outs therein- Where the conductors include an earthed conductor
of a two-wire system or an earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected thereto, the following conditions shall be
complied with--
(1) An indication of a permanent nature shall be provided by the owner of the
earthed or earthed neutral conductor, or the conductor which is to be connected
thereto, to enable such conductor to be distinguished from any live conductor.
Such indication shall be provided-
(a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral conductor is the property of the
supplier, at or near the point of commencement of supply;
(b) Where a conductor forming part of a consumer’s system is to be connected
to the supplier’s earthed or earthed neutral conductor, at the point where such
connection is to be made;
(c) In all other cases, at a point corresponding to the point of commencement
of supply or at such other points as may be approved by an Inspector or any
officer appointed to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule
4A.
(2) No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked switch arranged to operate
simultaneously on the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and live conductors
shall be inserted or remain inserted in any earthed or earthed neutral conductor of
a two wire-system or in any earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire
system or in any conductor connected thereto with the following exceptions: -
(a) A link for testing purposes, or
(b) A switch for use in controlling a generator or transformer.
33. Earthed terminal on consumer’s premises-
(1) The supplier shall provide and maintain on the consumer’s premises for the
consumer’s use a suitable earthed terminal in an accessible position at or near the
point of commencement of supply as defined under rule 58.
Provided that in the case of medium, high or extra-high voltage installation the
consumer shall, in addition to the afore mentioned earthing arrangement, provide
his own earthing system with an independent electrode.
Provided further that the supplier may not provide any earthed terminal in the case
of installations already connected to his system on or before the date to be
specified by the State Government in this behalf if he is satisfied that the
consumer’s earthing arrangement is efficient.
(2) The consumer shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent mechanical
damage to the earthed terminal and its lead belonging to the supplier.
1[(3) The supplier may recover from the consumer the cost of installation on the
basis of schedule of charges notified in advance and where such schedule of
charges is not notified, the procedure prescribed, in sub-rule (5) of rule 82 will
apply]
1. Subs. by GSR 1074, dt. 5.11.1985, w.e.f. 16.11.1985.
34. Accessibility of bare conductors- Where bare conductors are used in a
building, the owner of such conductors shall-
(a) Ensure that they are inaccessible;
(b) Provide in readily accessible position switches for rendering them dead
whenever necessary; and
(c) Take such other safety measures as are considered necessary by the
Inspector.
35. Danger Notices- The owner of every medium, high and extra-high voltage
installation shall affix permanently in a conspicuous position a danger notice in
Hindi or English and the local language of the district, with a sign of skull and
bones 1[of a design as per the relevant ISS No. 2551] on(
a) Every motor, generator, transformer and other electrical plant and
equipment together with apparatus used for controlling or regulating the same;
(b) All supports of high and extra-high voltage overhead lines which can be
easily climb-upon without the aid of ladder or special appliances;
Explanation-- Rails, tubular poles, wooden supports, reinforced cement concrete
poles without steps, I-sections and channels, shall be deemed as supports which
cannot be easily climbed upon for the purposes of this clause.
(c) Luminous tube sign requiring high voltage supply, X-ray and similar highfrequency
installations;
Provided that where it is not possible to affix such notices on any generator, motor
transformer of other apparatus, they shall be affixed as near as possible thereto;
or the word ‘danger’ and the voltage of the apparatus concerned shall be
permanently painted on it.
Provided further that where the generator, motor, transformer of other apparatus is
within an enclosure one notice affixed to the said enclosure shall be sufficient for
the purposes of this rule.
1. Added by GSR 512, dt. 29.6.1983, w.e.f. 16.7.1983.
36. Handling of electric supply lines and apparatus-
(1) Before any conductor or apparatus is handled adequate precautions shall
be taken, by earthing or other suitable means, to discharge electrically such
conductor or apparatus, and any adjacent conductor or apparatus if there is
danger therefrom, and to prevent any conductor or apparatus from being
accidentally or inadvertently electrically charged when persons are working
thereon.
Every person who is working on an electric supply line or apparatus or both shall
be provided with tools and devices such as gloves, rubber shoes, safety belts,
ladders, earthing devices, helmets, line testers, hand lines and the like for
protecting him from mechanical and electrical injury. Such tools and devices shall
always be maintained in sound and efficient working conditions:
(2) No person shall work on any live electric supply line or apparatus and no
person shall assist such person on such work, unless he is authorised in that
behalf, and takes the safety measures approved by the Inspector.
1[* * *]
(3) Every telecommunication line on supports carrying a high or extra-high
voltage line shall, for the purpose of working thereon, be deemed to be a high
voltage line.
1. Proviso omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
37. Supply to vehicles, cranes, etc.- Every person owning a vehicle, travelling
crane or the like to which energy is supplied from an external source shall ensure
that it is efficiently controlled by a suitable switch enabling all voltage to be cut off
in one operation and, where such vehicle, travelling crane or the like runs on metal
rails, the owner shall ensure that the rails are electrically continuous and earthed.
38. Cables for portable or transportable apparatus-
(1) Flexible cables shall not be used for portable or transportable motors,
generators, transformer rectifiers, electric drills, electric sprayers, welding sets or
any other portable or transportable apparatus unless they are heavily insulated
and adequately protected from mechanical injury.
(2) Where the protection is by means of metallic covering, the covering shall be
in metallic connection with the frame of any such apparatus and earth.
(3) The cables shall be three core type and four-core type for portable and
transportable apparatus working on single phase and three phases supply
respectively and the wire meant to be used for ground connection shall be easily
identifiable.
39. Cables protected by bituminous materials-
(a) Where the supplier or the owner has brought into use an electric supply line
(other than an overhead line) which is not completely enclosed in a continuous
metallic covering connected with earth and is insulated or protected in situ by
composition or material of a bituminous character-
(i) Any pipe, conduit or the like into which such electric supply line may have
been drawn or placed shall, unless other arrangements are approved by the
Inspector in any particular case, be effectively sealed at its point of entry into any
street box so as to prevent any flow of gas to or from the street box; and
(ii) Such electric supply line shall be periodically inspected and tested where
accessible, and the result of each such inspection and test shall be duly recorded
by the supplier or the owner.
(2) It shall not be permissible for the supplier or the owner after the coming into
force of these rules, to bring into use any further electric supply line as aforesaid
which is insulated or protected in situ by any composition or material known to be
liable to produce noxious or explosive gases on excessive heating.
40. Street boxes-
(1) Street boxes shall not contain gas pipes, and precautions shall be taken to
prevent, as far as reasonably possible, any influx of water or gas.
(2) Where electric supply lines forming part of different systems pass through
the same street box, they shall be readily distinguishable from one another and all
electric supply lines at high or extra-high voltage in street boxes shall be
adequately supported and protected to as to prevent risk of damage to or danger
from adjacent electric supply lines.
(3) All street boxes shall be regularly inspected for the purpose of detecting the
presence of gas and if any influx or accumulation is discovered, the owner shall
give immediate notice to any authority or company who have gas mains in the
neighbourhood of the street box and in cases where a street box is large enough
to admit the entrance of a person after the electric supply lines or apparatus
therein have been placed in position, ample provision shall be made-
(a) To ensure that any gas which may by accident have obtained access to the
box shall escape before a person is allowed to enter; and
(b) For the prevention of danger from sparking.
(4) The owners of all street boxes or pillars containing circuits or apparatus
shall ensure that their covers and doors are so provided that they can be opened
only by means of a key or a special appliance.
41. Distinction of different circuits- The owner of every generating station, substation,
junction-box or pillar in which there are any circuits or apparatus, whether
intended for operation at different voltages or at the same voltage, shall ensure by
means of indication of a permanent nature that the respective circuits are readily
distinguishable from one another.
1[41A. Distinction of the installations having more than one feed- The owner of the
every installation including sub-station, double pole structure, four pole structure or
any other structure having more than one feed, shall ensure by means of
indication of a permanent nature, that the installation is readily distinguishable
from other installations.]
1. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
42. Accidental charge- The owners of all circuits and apparatus shall so
arrange them that there shall be no danger of any part thereof becoming
accidentally charged to any voltage beyond the limits of voltage for which they are
intended.
Where A.C. and D.C. circuits are installed on the same support they shall be so
arranged and protected that they shall not come into contact with each other when
live.
43. Provisions applicable to protective equipment-
(1) Fire buckets filled with clean dry sand and ready for immediate use for
extinguishing fires, in addition to fire extinguishers suitable for dealing with electric
fires, shall be conspicuously marked and kept in all generating stations, enclosed
sub-stations and switch stations in convenient situation.
The fire extinguishes shall be tested for satisfactory operation at least once a year
and record of such tests shall be maintained.
(2) First-aid boxes or cupboards, conspicuously marked and equipped with
such contents as the State Government may specify, shall be provided and
maintained in every generating station, enclosed sub-station and enclosed switch
station so as to be readily accessible during all working hours. All such boxes and
cupboards shall, except in the case of unattended sub-stations and switch
stations, be kept in charge of responsible persons who are trained in first-aid
treatment and one of such person shall be available during working hours.
1[(3) Two or more gas masks shall be provided conspicuously and installed and
maintained at accessible places in every generating station with capacity of 5 MW
and above and enclosed sub-station with transformation capacity of 5 MVA and
above for use in the event of fire or smoke.
Provide that where more than one generator with capacity of 5 MW and above is
installed in a power station, each generator would be provided with at least two
separate gas masks in accessible and conspicuous position.
Provided further that adequate number of gas masks would be provided by the
owner of every generating station and enclosed sub-station with capacity less than
5MW and 5MVA respectively, if so desired by the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
44. Instructions for restoration of persons suffering from electric shock-
(1) Instructions, in English or Hindi and the local language of the district and
where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi for the restoration of
persons suffering from electric shock, shall be affixed by the owner in a
conspicuous place in every generating station, enclosed sub-station, enclosed
switch-station and in every factory as defined in clause (m) of section 2 of the
Factories Act, 1948 (63 of 1948) in which electricity is used and in such other
premises where electricity is used as the Inspector or any officer appointed to
assist the Inspector may, by notice in writing served on the owner, direct.
(2) Copies of the instructions shall be supplied on demand by an officer or
officers appointed by the Central or the State Government in this behalf at a price
to be fixed by the Central or the State Government.
(3) The owner of every generating station, enclosed sub-station, enclosed
switch-station and every factory or other premises to which this rule applies, shall
ensure that all authorised persons employed by him are acquainted with and are
competent to apply the instructions referred to in sub-rule (1).
(4) In every manned high voltage or extra-high voltage generating station, substation
or switch station, an artificial respirator shall be provided and kept in good
working condition.
1[44A. Intimation of Accident- If any accident occurs in connection with the
generation, transmission, supply or use of energy in or in connection with, any part
of the electric supply lines or other works of any person and the accident results in
or is likely to have resulted in loss of human or animal life or in any injury to a
human being or an animal, such person or any authorised person of the State
Electricity Board/Supplier, not below the rank of a Junior Engineer or equivalent
shall send to the Inspector a telegraphic report within 24 hours of the knowledge of
the occurrence of the fatal accident and a written report in the form set out in
Annexure XIII within 48 hours of the knowledge of occurrence of fatal and all other
accidents. Where practicable a telephonic message should also be given to the
Inspector immediately the accident comes to the knowledge of the authorised
officer of the State Electricity Board/ Supplier or other person concerned.]
1. Subs. by GSR 1049, dt. 17.10.1985, w.e.f. 9.11.1985.
45. Precautions to be adopted by consumers 1[owners occupiers], electrical
contractors, electrical workmen and suppliers-
(1) No electrical installation work, including additions, alterations, repairs and
adjustments to existing installations, except such replacement of lamps, fans,
fuses, switches, low voltage domestic appliances and fittings as in no way alters
its capacity or character, shall be carried out upon the premises of or on behalf of
any 2[consumer, supplier, owner or occupier] for the purpose of supply to such
2[consumer, supplier, owner or occupier] except by an electrical contractor
licensed in this behalf by the State Government and under the direct supervision of
a person holding a certificate of competency and by a person holding a permit
issued or recognised by the State Government.
Provided that in the case of works executed for or on behalf of the Central
Government and in the case of installations in mines, oil fields and railways, the
Central Government and in other cases the State Government may, by notification
in the Official Gazette, exempt, on such conditions as it may impose, any such
work described therein either generally or in the case of any specified class of
2[consumers, suppliers, owners or occupiers] from so much of this sub-rule as
requires such work to be carried out by an electrical contractor licensed by the
State Government in this behalf.
3[(2) No electrical installation work which has been carried out in contravention of
sub-rule (1) shall either be energised or connected to the works of any supplier.]
4[(3) * *]
1. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
4. Sub-rule (3) omitted by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
46. Periodical inspection and testing of consumer’s installation. -
(1) (a) Where an installation is already connected to the supply system of
the supplier, every such installation shall be periodically inspected and tested at
intervals not exceeding five years either by the Inspector or any officer appointed
to assist the Inspector or by the supplier as may be directed by the State
Government in this behalf or in the case of installations belonging to, or under the
control of the Central Government, and in the case of installation in mines, oilfields
and railways by the Central Government.
(b) Where the supplier is directed by the Central or the State Government as
the case may be to inspect and test the installation he shall report on the condition
of the installation to the consumer concerned in a form approved by the Inspector
and shall submit a copy of such report to the Inspector or to any officer appointed
to assist the Inspector and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A.
(c) Subject to the approval of the Inspector, the forms of inspection report
contained in Annexure IX-A may, with such variations as the circumstances of
each case require, be used for the purposes of this sub-rule.
(2) (a) The fees for such inspection and test shall be determined by the
Central or the State Government, as the case may be, in the case of each class of
consumers and shall be payable by the consumer in advance.
(b) In the even it of the failure of any consumer to pay the fees on or before the
date specified in the fee-notice, supply to the installation of such consumer shall
be liable to be disconnected under the direction of the Inspector. Such
disconnection, however, shall not be made by the supplier without giving to the
consumer seven clear days’ notice in writing of his intention so to do.
(c) In the event of the failure of the owner of any installation to rectify the
defects in his installation pointed out by the Inspector or by any officer appointed
to assist him and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A in the form set out in
Annexure IX and within the time indicated therein, such installation shall be liable
to be disconnected 1[under the directions of the Inspector] after serving the owner
of such installation with a notice.
Provided that the installation shall not be disconnected in case an appeal in made
under rule 6 and the appellate authority has stayed the orders of disconnection.
Provided further that the time indicated in the notice shall not be less than 48
hours in any case.
Provided also that nothing contained in this clause shall have any effect on the
application of rule 49.
(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of this rule, the consumer shall at all times
be solely responsible for the maintenance of his installation in such condition as to
be free from danger.
1. Subs. by GSR 29, dr. 24.12.1983, w.e.f. 14.1.1984.
CHAPTER V
GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATING
TO SUPPLY AND USE OF ENERGY
47. Testing of consumer’s installation-
(1) Upon receipt of an application for a new or additional supply of energy and
before connecting the supply or reconnecting the same after a period of six
months, the supplier shall inspect and test the applicants’ installation.
The supplier shall maintain a record of test results obtained at each supply point to
a consumer, in a form to be approved by the Inspector.
(2) If as a result of such inspection and test, the supplier is satisfied that the
installation is likely to constitute danger, he shall serve on the applicant a notice in
writing requiring him to make such modifications as are necessary to render the
installation safe. The supplier may refuse to connect or reconnect the supply until
the required modifications have been completed and he has been notified by the
applicant.
1[47A. Installation and Testing of Generating Units- Where any consumer or
occupier installs a generating plant, he shall give a thirty days’ notice of his
intention to commission the plant to the supplier as well as the Inspector.
Provided that no consumer or occupier shall commission his generating plant of a
capacity exceeding 10KW without the approval in writing of the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
48. Precautions against leakage before connection-
1[(l) The supplier shall not connect with his works the installation or apparatus
on the premises of any applicant for supply unless he is reasonably satisfied that
the connection will not at the time of making the connection cause a leakage from
that installation or apparatus of a magnitude detrimental to safety. Compliance
with this rule shall be checked by measuring the insulation resistance as provided
below:
(i) High Voltage Equipments installations-
(a) High Voltage equipments shall have the IR value as stipulated in the
relevant Indian Standard.
(b) At a pressure of 1000 V applied between each live conductor and earth for
a period of one minute the insulation resistance of HV installations shall be at least
1 Mega ohm or as specified by the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards] from time to
time.
(ii) Medium and Low Voltage Installations- At a pressure of 500 V applied
between each live conductor and earth for a period of one minute, the insulation
resistance of medium and low voltage installations shall be at least 1 Mega ohm or
as specified by the 2[Bureau of Indian Standards] from time to time.]
(2) If the supplier declines to make a connection under the provisions of subrule
(1), he shall serve upon the applicant a notice in writing stating his reason for
so declining.
1. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
49. Leakage on consumer’s premises-
(1) If the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A or the supplier had reason to believe that
there is in the system of a consumer leakage which is likely to affect injuriously the
use of energy by the supplier or by other persons, or which is likely to cause
danger, he may give the consumer reasonable notice in writing that he desires to
inspect and test the consumer’s installation.
(2) If on such notice being given-
(a) The consumer does not give all reasonable facilities for inspection and
testing of his installation, or
1[(b) When an insulation resistance at the consumer’s installation is so low as to
prevent safe use of energy.]
The supplier may, and if directed so to do by the Inspector shall discontinue the
supply of energy to the installation but only after giving to the consumer 48 hours
notice in writing of disconnection of supply and shall not recommence the supply
until he or the Inspector is satisfied that the cause of the leakage has been
removed.]
1. Subs. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
1[50. Supply and use of energy-
(1) The energy shall not be supplied, transformed, converted or used or
continued to be supplied, transformed, converted or used unless provisions as set
out below are observed:-
(a) The following controls of requisite capacity to carry and break the current
2[are placed] after the point of commencement of supply as defined in rule 58 so
as to be readily accessible and capable of being easily operated to completely
isolate the supply to the installation such equipment being in addition to any
equipment installed for controlling individual circuits or apparatus: -
(i) A linked switch with fuse(s) or a circuit breaker by low and medium voltage
consumers.
(ii) A linked switch with fuse(s) or a circuit breaker by HV consumers having
aggregate installed transformer/apparatus capacity up to 1000 KVA to be supplied
at voltage upto 11 KV and 2500 KVA at higher -voltages (above 11 KV and not
exceeding 33 KV).
(iii) A circuit breaker by HV consumers having an aggregate installed
transformer/apparatus capacity above 1000 KVA and supplied at 11 KV and above
2500 KVA supplied at higher voltages (above 11 KV and not exceeding 33 KV).
(iv) A circuit breaker by EHV consumer;
Provided that where the point of commencement of supply and the consumer
apparatus are near each other one linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit breaker
near the point of commencement of supply as required by this clause shall be
considered sufficient for the purpose of this rule;
(b) In case of every transformer the following shall be provided: -
(i) On primary side for transformers a linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit
breaker of adequate capacity:
Provided that the linked switch on the primary side of the transformer may be of
such capacity as to carry the full load current and to break only the magnetising
current of the transformer:
Provided further that for transformers of capacity 5000 KVA and above a circuit
breaker shall be provided:
Provided further that the provision of linked switch on the primary side of the
transformer shall not apply to the unit auxiliary transformer of the generator.
(ii) On the secondary side of transformers of capacity 100 KVA and above
transforming HV to MV or LV, a linked switch with fuse(s) or circuit breaker of
adequate capacity capable of carrying and breaking full load current and for
transformers transforming HV to EHV as the case may be, a circuit breaker:
Provided that where the transformer capacity exceeds 630 KVA a circuit breaker
of adequate capacity shall be installed on the secondary side;
(c) Except in the case of composite control gear designed as a unit distinct
circuit is protected against excess energy by means of suitable cut-out or a circuit
breaker of adequate breaking capacity suitably located and, so constructed as to
prevent danger from overheating, arcing or scattering of hot metal when it comes
into operation and to permit for ready renewal of the fusible metal of the cut-out
without danger;
(d) The supply of energy of each motor or a group of motors or other apparatus
meant for operating one particular machine is controlled by a suitable linked switch
or a circuit breaker or an emergency tripping device with manual reset of requisite
capacity placed in such a position as to be adjacent to the motor or a group of
motors or other apparatus readily accessible to and easily operated by the person
incharge and so connected in the circuit that by its means all supply of energy can
be cut off from the motor or group of motors or apparatus from any regulating
switch, resistance of other device associated therewith;
(e) All insulating materials are chosen with special regard to the circumstances
of its proposed use and their mechanical strength is sufficient for its purpose and
so far as is practicable of such a character or so protected as to maintain
adequately its insulating property under all working conditions in respect of
Temperature and moisture; and
(f) Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
(2) Where energy is being supplied, transformed, converted or used the
3[consumer, supplier or the owner] of the concerned installation shall be
responsible for the continuous observance of the provisions of sub-rule (1) in
respect of his installations.
(3) Every consumer shall use all reasonable mean to ensure that where energy
is supplied by a supplier no person other than the supplier shall interfere with the
service lines and apparatus placed by the supplier on the premises of the
consumer.]
1. Subs. by GSR 11”, dt. 21.1.1986, w.e.f. 8.2.1986.
2. Subs. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
3. Subs. by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
1[50A. Additional provisions for supply and use of energy in multi-storeyed
building (more than 15 metres in height)-
(1) Before making an application for commencement of supply or
recommencement of supply after an installation has been disconnected for a
period of six months or more the owner/occupier of a multi-storeyed building shall
give not less than 30 days’ notice in writing to the Inspector together with
particulars. The supply of energy shall not be commenced or recommenced within
this period, without the approval or otherwise in writing of the Inspector.
(2) The supplier/owner of the installation shall provide at the point of
commencement of supply a suitable isolating device with cut out or breaker to
operate on all phases except neutral in the 3 phase 4 wire circuit and fixed in a
conspicuous position at not more than 2.75 metres above the ground so as to
completely isolate the supply to the building in case of emergency.
(3) The owner/occupier of a multi-storeyed building shall ensure that electrical
installations/works inside the building are carried out and maintained in such a
manner as to prevent danger due to shock and fire hazards’ and the installation is
carried out in accordance with the relevant codes of practices.
(4) No other service pipes shall be taken along the ducts provided for laying
power cables. All ducts provided for power cables and other services shall be
provided with fire-barrier at each floor crossing.]
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
51. Provisions applicable to medium, high or extra-high voltage installations-
The following provisions shall be observed where energy at medium, high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or used
(1) (a) All conductors (other than those of overhead lines) shall be
completely enclosed in mechanically strong metal casting or metallic covering
which is electrically and mechanically continuous and adequately protected
against mechanical damage unless the said conductors are accessible only to an
authorised person or are installed and protected to the satisfaction of the Inspector
so as to prevent danger;
1[Provided that non-metallic conduits conforming to the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications may be used for medium voltage installations, subject to such
conditions as the Inspector or Officer appointed to assist an Inspector may think fit
to impose.]
2[(b) All metal works, enclosing, supporting or associated with the installation,
other than that designed to serve as a conductor shall be connected with an
earthing system as per standards laid down in the Indian Standards in this regard
and in also accordance with rule 61(4).]
(c) Every switchboard shall comply with the following provisions, namely: -
(i) A clear space of not less than 1 metre in width shall be provided in front of
the switchboard;
(ii) If there are any attachments or bare connections at the back of the
switchboard, the space (if any) behind the switchboard shall be either less than 20
centimetres or more than 75 centimetres in width, measured from the farthest
outstanding part of any attachment or conductor;
(iii) If the space behind the switchboard exceeds 75 centimetres in width, there
shall be a passage-way from either end of the switchboard clear to a height of 1.8
metres.
3[(d) In case of installations provided in premises where inflammable materials
including gases and/or chemicals are produced, handled or stored, the electrical
installations, equipment and apparatus shall comply with the requirements of flame
proof, dust tight, totally enclosed or any other suitable type of electrical fittings
depending upon the hazardous zones as per relevant Indian Standard
Specification.]
4[(2) Where an application has been made to a supplier for supply of energy to
any installation, he shall not commence the supply or where the supply has been
discontinued for a period of one year and above, recommence the supply unless
he is satisfied that the consumer has complied with, in all respects the conditions
of supply set out in sub-rule (1), of this rule, rules 50, 63 and 64.]
(3) Where a supplier proposes to supply or use energy at a medium voltage or
to recommence supply after it has been discontinued for a period of six months,
he, shall, before connecting or reconnecting the supply, give notice in writing of
such intention to the Inspector 5[or any officer of specified rank and class
appointed to assist the Inspector].
6[(4) If at any time after connecting the supply, the supplier is satisfied that any
provision of the sub-rule (1) of this rule or of rules 50 and 64, is not being observed
he shall give notice of the same in writing to the consumer and the inspector,
specifying how the provisions has not been observed and to rectify such defects in
a reasonable time and if the consumer fails to rectify such defects pointed out, he
may discontinue the supply after giving the consumer a reasonable opportunity of
being heard and recording reasons in writing, unless the inspector directs
otherwise. The supply shall be discontinued only on written orders of an officer
duly notified by the supplier in this behalf. The supply shall be restored with all
possible speed after such defects are rectified by the consumer to the satisfaction
of the supplier.]
1. Subs. by GSR 336, dt. 28.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
2. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
3. Ins. by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
4. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2-1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983
5. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
6. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
52. Appeal to Inspector in regard to defects-
(1) If any applicant for a supply or a consumer is dissatisfied with the action of
the supplier in declining to commence, to continue or to recommence the supply of
energy to his premises on the grounds that the installation is defective or is likely
to constitute danger, he may appeal to the Inspector to test the installation and the
supplies shall not, if the Inspector or under his orders, any other officer appointed
to assist the Inspector, is satisfied that the installation is free from the defect or
danger complained of, be entitled to refuse supply to the consumer on the grounds
aforesaid, and shall, within twenty-four hours after the receipt of such intimation
from the Inspector, commence, continue or recommence the supply of energy.
(2) Any test for which application has been made under the provision of subrule
(1) shall be carried out within seven days after the receipt of such application.
(3) This rule shall be endorsed on every notice given under the provisions of
rules 47, 48, and 49.
53. Cost of inspection and test of consumer’s installation-
(1) The cost of the first inspection and test of consumer’s installation carried
out in pursuance of the provisions of rule 47 shall be borne by the supplier and the
cost of every subsequent inspection and test shall be borne by the consumer,
unless in the appeal under rule 52, the Inspector directs otherwise.
(2) The cost of any inspection and test made by the Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector, at the request of the consumer or other
interested party, shall be borne by the consumer or other interested party, unless
the Inspector directs otherwise.
(3) The cost of each and every such inspection and test by whomsoever borne
shall be calculated in accordance with the scale specified by the Central or the
State Government as the case may be in this behalf.
54. Declared voltage of supply to consumer. - Except with the written consent
of the consumer or with the previous sanction of the State Government a supplier
shall not permit the voltage at the point of commencement of supply as defined
under rule 58 to vary from the declared voltage-
(i) In the case of low or medium voltage, by more than 6 per cent, or;
(ii) In the case of high voltage, by more than 6 per cent on the higher side or by
more than 9 per cent on the lower side, or;
(iii) In the case of extra-high voltage, by more than 10 per cent on the higher
side or by more than 12.5 per cent on the lower side.
55. Declared frequency of supply to consumer- Except with the written consent
of the consumer or with the previous sanction of the State Government a supplier
shall not permit the frequency of an alternating current supply to vary from the
declared frequency by more than 3 per cent.
56. Sealing of meters, and cut-outs-
(1) A supplier may affix one or more seals to any cut-out and to any meter,
maximum demand indicator, or other apparatus placed upon a consumer’s
premises in accordance with section 26, and no person other than the supplier
shall break any such seal.
(2) The consumer shall use all reasonable means in his power to ensure that
no such seal is broken otherwise than by the supplier.
(3) The word ‘supplier’ shall for the purpose of this rule include a State
Government when any meter, maximum demand indicator or other apparatus is
placed upon a consumer’s premises by such Government.
57. Meters, maximum demand indicators and other apparatus on consumer’s
premises-
(1) Any meter or maximum demand indicator or other apparatus placed upon a
consumer’s premises in accordance with section 26 shall be of appropriate
capacity and shall be deemed to be correct if its limits of error are within the limits
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specification and where no such
specification exists, the limits of error do not exceed 3 per cent above or below
absolute accuracy at all loads in excess of one tenth of full load and up to full load.
1[Provided that for extra high voltage consumers the limit of error shall be 1 per
cent.]
(2) No meter shall register at no load.
(3) Every supplier shall provide and maintain in proper condition such suitable
apparatus as may be prescribed or approved by the Inspector for the examination,
testing and regulation of meters used or intended to be used in connection with the
supply of energy.
Provided that the supplier may with the approval of the Inspector and shall, if
required by the Inspector, enter into a joint arrangement with any other supplier for
the purpose aforesaid.
(4) Every supplier shall examine, test and regulate all meters, maximum
demand indicators and other apparatus for ascertaining the amount of energy
supplied before their first installation at the consumer’s premises and at such other
intervals as may be directed by the State Government in this behalf.
(5) Every supplier shall maintain a register of meters showing the date of the
last test, the error recorded at the time of the test, the limit of accuracy after
adjustment and final test, the date of installation, withdrawal, reinstallation, etc., for
the examination of the Inspector or his authorised representative.
2[(6) Where the supplier has failed to examine, test and regulate the meters and
keep records thereof as aforesaid, the Inspector may cause such meters to be
tested and sealed at the cost of the owner of the meters in case these are found
defective.]
1. Added by GSR 218, dt. 18.4.1995, w.e.f. 29.4.1995.
2. Added by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
1[58. Point of commencement of supply- The point of commencement of supply of
energy to a consumer shall be deemed to be the point at the incoming terminal of
the cut-outs installed by the consumer under rule 50.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f 23.1.1993.
59. Precautions against failure of supply: Notice of failures-
(1) The layout of the electric supply lines of the supplier for the supply of
energy throughout his area of supply shall under normal working conditions be
sectionalised and so arranged, and provided with cut-outs or circuit-breakers so
located, as to restrict within reasonable limits the extent of the portion of the
system affected by any failure of supply.
(2) The, supplier shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid any accidental
interruptions of supply, and also to avoid danger to the public or to any employee
or authorised person when engaged on any operation during and in connection
with the installation, extension, replacement, repair and maintenance of any works.
(3) The supplier shall send to the Inspector 1[or any officer of a specified rank
and class appointed to assist the Inspector] notice of failure of supply of such kind
as the Inspector 1[or any officer of specified rank and class to assist the Inspector]
may from time to time require to be notified to him, and such notice shall be sent
by the earliest practicable post after the failure occurs or after the failure becomes
known to the supplier and shall be in such form and contain such particulars as
Inspector may from time to time specify
2[(4) For the purpose of testing or for any other purpose connected with the
efficient working of the undertaking, the supply of energy may be discontinued by
the supplier for such period as may be necessary, subject (except in cases of
emergency) to not less than 24 hours notice being given by the supplier to all
consumers likely to be affected by such discontinuance:
Provided that the supply of energy shall be discontinued during such hours as are
likely to interfere the least with the use of energy by consumers and the energy
shall not be discontinued if the Inspector so directs.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
CHAPTER VI
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR LOW AND
MEDIUM VOLTAGES
60. Test for resistance of insulation-
(1) Where any electric supply line for use at low or medium voltage has been
disconnected from a system for the purpose of addition, alteration or repair, such
electric supply line shall not be reconnected to the system until the supplier or the
owner has applied the test prescribed under rule 48.
(2) The provision of sub-rule (1) shall not apply to overhead lines except,
overhead insulated cables unless the Inspector otherwise directs in any particular
case.
61. Connection with earth-
(1) The following provisions shall apply to the connection with earth of systems
at low voltage in cases where the voltage normally exceeds 125 volts and of
systems at medium voltage: -
1[(a) Neutral conductor of a phase, 4 wire system and the middle conductor of a
2 phase, 3-wire system shall be earthed by not less than two separate and distinct
connections with a minimum of two different earth electrodes of such large number
as may be necessary to bring the earth resistance to a satisfactory value both at
the generating station and at the sub-station. The earth electrodes so provided,
may be interconnected to reduce earth resistance. It may also be earthed at one
or more points along the distribution system or service line in addition to any
connection with earth which may be at the consumer’s premises.]
(b) In the case of a system comprising electric supply lines having concentric
cables, the external conductor of such cables shall be earthed by two separate
and distinct connections with earth.
(c) The connection with earth may include a link by means of which the
connection may be temporarily interrupted for the purpose of testing or for locating
a fault.
(d) (i) In a direct current three wire system the middle conductor shall be
earthed at the generating station only, and the current from the middle conductor
to earth shall be continuously recorded by means of a recording ammeter, and if
any time the current exceeds one-thousandth part of the maximum supply-current
immediate steps shall be taken to improve the insulation of the system.
(ii) Where the middle conductor is earthed by means of a circuit breaker with a
resistance connected in parallel, the resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms and on
the opening of the circuit breaker, immediate steps shall be taken to improve the
insulation of the system, and the circuit-breaker shall be reclosed as soon as
possible.
(iii) The resistance shall be used only as a protection for the ammeter in case of
earths on the system and until such earths are removed. Immediate steps shall be
taken to locate and remove the earth.
(e) In the case of an alternating current system, there shall not be inserted in
the connected with earth any impedance (other than that required solely for the
operation of switch-gear of instruments), cut-out or circuit-breaker, and the result
of any test made to ascertain whether the current (if any) passing through the
connection with earth is normal shall be duly recorded by the supplier.
(f) No person shall make connection with earth by the aid of, nor shall be keep
it in contact with, any water main not belonging to him except with the consent of
the owner thereof and of the Inspector.
(g) Alternating current systems which are connected with earth as aforesaid
may be electrically interconnected.
Provided that each connection with earth is bonded to the metal sheathing and
metallic armouring (if any) of the electric supply lines concerned.
(2) The frame of every generator, stationary motor, portable motor, and the
metallic parts (not intended as conductors) of all transformers and any other
apparatus used for regulating or controlling energy and all medium voltage energy
consuming apparatus shall be earthed by the owner by two separate and distinct
connections with earth.
2[(3) All metal castings or metallic coverings containing or protecting any electric
supply-line or apparatus shall be connected with earth and shall be so joined and
connected across all junction boxes and other openings as to make good
mechanical and electrical connection throughout their whole length.
Provided that where the supply is at low voltage, this sub-rule shall not apply to
isolated wall tubes or to brackets, electroliers, switches, ceiling fans or other
fittings (other than portable hand lamps and portable and transportable apparatus)
unless provided with earth terminal and to class-II apparatus/ appliances.
Provided further that where the supply is at low voltage and where the installations
are either new or renovated all plug sockets shall be of the three-pin type, and the
third pin shall be permanently and efficiently earthed.
Explanation- The words “Class-II apparatus/appliance” will have the same
meaning as assigned to these words in the relevant ISS.]
3[(4) All earthing systems shall(
a) Consist of equipotential bonding conductors capable of carrying the
prospective earth fault current and a group of pipe/rod/plate electrodes for
dissipating the current to the general mass of earth without exceeding the
allowable temperature limits as per relevant Indian Standards in order to maintain
all non-current carrying metal works reasonably at earth potential and to avoid
dangerous contact potentials being developed on such metal works;
(b) Limit earth resistance sufficiently low to permit adequate fault current for the
operation of protective devices in time and to reduce neutral shifting;
(c) Be mechanically strong, withstand corrosion and retain electrical continuity
during the life of the installation. All earthing systems shall be tested to ensure
efficient earthing, before the electric supply lines or apparatus are energised.]
(5) All earthing systems belonging to the supplier shall in addition, be tested for
resistance on dry day during the dry season not less than once every two years.
(6) A record of every earth test made and the result thereof shall be kept by the
supplier for a period of not less than two years after the day of testing and shall be
available to the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A when required.
1. Subs. by GSR 1051, dt. 25.10.1985, w.e.f. 9.11.1985.
2. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f 26.3.1983.
3. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.7.1987.
1[61A. Earth leakage protective device- The supply of Energy to every electrical
installation other than low voltage installation below 5 KW and those low voltage
installations which do not attract provisions of section 30 of the Indian Electricity
Act, 1910, shall be controlled by an earth leakage protective device so as to
disconnect the supply instantly on the occurrence of earth fault or leakage of
current.
Provided that the above shall not apply to overhead supply lines having protective
devices which are effectively bonded to the neutral of supply transformers and
conforming to rule 91 of 1,E. Rules, 1956.]
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
62. Systems at medium voltage- Where a medium voltage supply system is
employed, the voltage between earth and any conductor forming part of the same
system shall not, under normal conditions, exceed low voltage.
CHAPTER VII
ELECTRIC SUPPLY LINES, SYSTEMS
AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH AND
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGES
63. Approval by Inspector-
(1) Before making an application to the Inspector for permission 1[to commence
or recommence supply after an installation has been disconnected for one year
and above] at high or extra-high voltage to any person, the supplier shall ensure
that the high or extra-high voltage electric supply lines or apparatus belonging to
him are placed in position, properly joined and duly completed and examined. The
supply of energy shall not be commenced by the supplier unless and until the
Inspector is satisfied that the provisions of rules 65 to 69 both inclusive have been
complied with and the approval in writing of the Inspector have been obtained by
him.
Provided that the supplier may exercise the aforesaid electric supply lines or
apparatus for the purpose of tests specified in rule 65.
(2) The owner of any high or extra-high voltage installation shall, before making
application to the Inspector for approval of his installation or additions thereto, test
every high or ext.-a-high voltage circuit or additions thereto, other than an
overhead line, and satisfy himself that they withstand the application of the testing
voltage set out in sub-rule (1) of rule 65 and shall duly record the results of such
tests and forward them to the Inspector.
Provided that an Inspector may direct such owner to carry out such tests as he
deems necessary or, if he thinks fit, accept the manufacturer’s certified tests in
respect of any particular apparatus in place of the tests required by this sub-rule.
(3) The owner of any high or extra-high voltage installation who makes any
additions or alterations to his installation shall not connect to the supply his
apparatus or electric supply lines, comprising the said alterations or additions
unless and until such alterations or additions have been approved in writing by the
Inspector.
1. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
64. Use of energy at high and extra-high voltage-
1[(1) The Inspector shall not authorise the supplier to commence supply or where
the supply has been discontinued for a period of one year and above, to
commence the supply at high or extra-high voltage to any consumer unless,]
(a) All conductors and apparatus situated on the premises of the consumer are
so placed as to be inaccessible except to an authorised person and all operations
in connection with the said conductors and apparatus are carried out by an
authorised person;
(b) The consumer has provided and agrees to maintain a separate building or a
locked weather-proof and fire-proof enclosure of agreed design and location, to
which the supplier at all times have access for the purpose of housing his
apparatus and metering equipment, or where the provision for a separate building
or enclosure is impracticable, the consumer has segregated the aforesaid
apparatus of the supplier from any other part of his own apparatus;
Provided that such segregation shall be by the provision of fire proof walls, if the
Inspector considers it to be necessary;
Provided further that in the case of an out-door installation consumer shall suitably
segregate the aforesaid apparatus belonging to the supplier from his own to the
satisfaction of the Inspector;
(c) All pole type sub-stations are constructed and maintained in accordance
with rule 69.
(2) The following provisions shall be observed where energy at high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or used: -
2[(a) (i) Clearances as per Indian Standard Code shall be provided for
electrical apparatus so that sufficient space is available for easy operation and
maintenance without any hazard to the operating and maintenance personnel
working near the equipment and for ensuring adequate ventilation.
(ii) The following minimum clearances shall be maintained for bare conductors
or live parts of any apparatus in out-door substations, excluding overhead lines, of
HV and EHV installations: -
Voltage Class Ground clearance
(Metres)
Sectional
clearance (Metres)
Not exceeding
-do-
-do-
-do-
-do-
-do-
11KV
33KV
66KV
132KV
22OKV
40OKV
2.75
3.7
4.0
4.6
5.5
8.0
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.5
4.3
6.5]
(b) The windings of motors or other apparatus within reach from any position in
which a person may require to be shall be suitably protected so as to prevent
danger.
(c) Where transformer or transformers are used, suitable provision shall be
made, either by connecting with earth a point of the circuit at the lower voltage or
otherwise, to guard against danger by reason of the said circuit becoming
accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage from or contact with the
circuit at the higher voltage.
(d) A sub-station or a switch station with apparatus having more than 2000
litres of oil shall not 3[***] be located in the basement where proper oil draining
arrangement cannot be provided.
(e) Where a sub-station or a switch station with apparatus having more than
2000 litres of oil is installed, whether indoor or out-doors, the following measures
shall be taken, namely: -
(i) The baffle walls 4[of 4 hour fire rating] shall be provided between the
apparatus in the following cases: -
(A) Single phase banks in the switch-yards of generating stations and substations;
(B) On the consumer premises;
(C) Where adequate clearance between the units is not available.
(ii) Provisions shall be made for suitable oil soakpit and where use of more
than 9000 litres of oil in any one oil tank, receptacle or chamber is involved,
provision shall be made for the draining away or removal of any oil which may leak
or escape from the tanks receptacles or chambers containing the same, special
precautions shall be taken to prevent the spread of any fire resulting from the
ignition of the oil from any cause and adequate provision shall be made for
extinguishing any fire which may occur. Spare oil shall not be stored in an such
sub-station or switch station.
5[(f) (i) Without prejudice to the above measures, adequate fire protection
arrangement shall be provided for quenching the fire in the apparatus;
(ii) Where it is necessary to locate the sub-station/switch station in the
basement following measures shall be taken:-
(a) The room shall necessarily be in the first basement at the periphery of the
basement;
(b) The entrances to the room shall be provided with fire resisting doors of 2
hours fire rating. A curb (sill) of a suitable height shall be provided at the entrance
in order to prevent the flow of oil from a ruptured transformer into other parts of the
basement. Direct access to the transformer room shall be provided from outside.
(c) The transformer shall be protected by an automatic high velocity water
spray system or by carbon dioxide or BCF (Bromochlorodifeuromethane) or BTM
(Bromotrifluromethane) fixed installation system; and
(iii) Oil filled transformers installed indoors shall not be on any floor above the
ground or below the first basement.]
(g) Cable trenches inside the sub-stations and switch stations containing
cables shall be filled with sand, pebbles or similar non-inflammable materials or
completely cover with non-inflammable slabs.
(h) Unless the conditions are such that all the conductors and apparatus may
be made dead at the same time for the purpose of cleaning or for other work, the
said conductors and apparatus shall be so arranged that these may be made dead
in sections, and that work on any such section may be carried on by an authorised
person without danger.
(i) Only persons authorised under sub-rule (1) of rule 3, shall carry out the
work on live lines and apparatus.]
6[(3) All EHV apparatus shall be protected against lightning as well as against
switching over voltages. The equipment used for protection and switching shall be
adequately coordinated with the protected apparatus to ensure safe operation as
well as to maintain the stability of the inter-connected units of the power system.]
1. Subs. by CSR 843, dt. 23.7.1983, w.e.f. 7.9.1985
2. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
3. The word ‘ordinarily’ omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
4. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
5. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
6. Ins. by GSR 336, dt. 20.3.1988, w.e.f. 23.4.1988.
1[64A. Additional provisions for use of energy at high and extra-high voltage- The
following additional provisions shall be observed where energy at high or extrahigh
voltage is supplied, converted, transferred or used, namely: -
(1) Inter-locks- Suitable inter-locks shall be provided in the following cases: -
(a) Isolators and the controlling circuit breakers shall be interlocked so that the
isolators cannot be operated unless the corresponding breaker is in open position;
(b) Isolators and the corresponding earthing switches shall be interlocked so
that no earthing switch can be closed unless and until the corresponding isolator is
in open position;
(c) Where two or more supplies are not intended to be operated in parallel, the
respective circuit breakers or linked switches controlling the supplies shall be interlocked
to prevent possibility of any inadvertent paralleling or feedback;
(d) When two or more transformers are operated in parallel, the system shall
be so arranged as to trip the secondary breaker of a transformer in case the
primary breaker of that transformer trips;
(e) All gates or doors which give access to live parts of an installation shall be
inter-locked in such a way that these cannot be opened unless the live parts are
made dead. Proper discharging and earthing of these parts should be ensured
before any person comes in close proximity of such parts;
(f) Where two or more generators operate in parallel and neutral switching is
adopted, inter-lock shall be provided to ensure that generator breaker cannot be
closed unless one of the neutrals is connected to the earthing system.
(2) Protection- All systems and circuits shall be so protected as to automatically
disconnect the supply under abnormal conditions. The following protection shall
be provided, namely: -
(a) Over current protection to disconnect the supply automatically if the rated
current of the equipment, cable or supply line is exceeded for a time which the
equipment, cable or supply line is not designed to withstand;
(b) Earth-fault/earth leakage protection to disconnect the supply automatically if
the earth fault current exceeds the limit of current for keeping the contact potential
within the reasonable values;
(c) Gas pressure type protection to given alarm and tripping shall be provided
on all transformers of ratings 1000 KVA and above;
(d) Transformers of capacity 10 MVA and above shall be protected against
incipient faults by differential protection; and
(e) All generators with rating of 100 KVA and above shall be protected against
earth fault/leakage. All generators of rating 1000KVA and above shall be
protected against faults within the generator winding using restricted earth fault
protection or differential protection or by both.]
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
65. Testing, Operation and Maintenance-
(1) Before approval is accorded by the Inspector under rule 63, the
manufacturer’s test certificates shall, if required, be produced for all the routine
tests as required under the relevant Indian Standard.
(2) No new HV or EHV apparatus, cable or supply line shall be commissioned
unless such apparatus, cable or supply line are subjected to site tests as per
relevant code of practice of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards].
(3) No HV of EHV apparatus, cable or supply line which has been kept
disconnected, for a period of 6 months or more, from the system for alterations or
repair shall be corrected to the system until such apparatus, cable or supply line
are subjected to the relevant tests as per code of practice of 1[Bureau of Indian
Standards.]
(4) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-rules (1) to (3) (both inclusive) the
Inspector may require certain additional tests to be carried out before charging the
installations or subsequently.
(5) All apparatus, cables and supply lines shall be maintained in healthy
conditions and tests shall be carried out periodically as per the relevant codes of
practice of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards].
(6) Records of all tests, trappings, maintenance works and repairs of all
equipments, cables and supply lines shall be duly kept in such a way that these
records can be compared with earlier ones.
(7) It shall be the responsibility of the owner of all HV and EHV installations to
maintain and operate the installations in a condition free from danger and as
recommended by the manufacturer and/or by the relevant codes of practice of the
1[Bureau of Indian Standards] and/or by the Inspector.]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
66. Metal sheathed electric supply lines. Precautions against excess leakage-
(1) The following provisions shall apply to electric supply lines (other than
overhead lines 1[***] for use at high or extra-high voltage: -
(a) The conductors shall be enclosed in metal sheathing which shall be
electrically continuous and connected with earth, and the conductivity of the metal
sheathing shall be maintained and reasonable precautions taken where necessary
to avoid corrosion of the sheathing;
Provided that in the case of thermoplastic insulated and sheathed cables with
metallic armour the metallic wire or tape armour shall be considered as metal
sheathing for the purpose of this rule;
Provided further that this rule shall not apply to cable with thermoplastic insulation
without any metallic screen or armour.
2[(b) The resistance of the earth connection with metallic sheath shall be kept
low enough to permit the controlling circuit breaker or cut-out to operate in the
event of any failure of insulation between the metallic sheath and the conductor.]
(c) Where an electric supply-line as aforesaid has concentric cables and the
external conductor is insulated from an outer metal sheathing and connected with
earth, the external conductor may be regarded as the metal sheathing for the
purposes of this rule provided that the foregoing provisions as to conductivity are
complied with.
(2) Nothing in the provisions of sub-rule (1) shall preclude the employment in
generating stations, sub-stations and switch-stations (including outdoor
substations and outdoor switch-stations) of conductors for use at high or extrahigh
voltages which are not enclosed in metal sheathing or preclude the use of
electric supply lines laid before the prescribed date to which the provisions of
these rules apply
1. The words “of a supplier” omitted by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f.
9.5.1987.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
67. Connection with earth-
1[(1) All non-current carrying metal parts associated with HV/EHV installation
shall be effectively earthed to a grounding system or mat which will: -
(a) Limit the touch and step potential to tolerable values;
(b) Limit the ground potential rise to tolerable values so as to prevent danger
due to transfer of potential through ground, earth wires, cables sheath fences, pipe
lines, etc.;
(c) Maintain the resistance of the earth connection to such a value as to make
operation of the protective device effective.
(lA) In the case of star-connected system with earthed neutrals or delta
connected system with earthed artificial neutral point: -
(a) The neutral point of every generator and transformer shall be earthed by
connecting it to the earthing system as defined in rule 61(4) and hereinabove by
not less than two separate and distinct connections;
Provided that the neutral point of a generator may be connected to the earthing
system through an impedance to limit the fault current to the earth;
Provided further that in the case of multi-machine system neutral switching may be
resorted to, for limiting the injurious effect of harmonic current circulation in the
system;
(b) In the event of an appreciable harmonic current flowing in the neutral
connection so as to cause interference, with communication circuits, the generator
or transformer neutral, shall be earthed through a suitable impedance;
(c) In case of the delta connected system the neutral point shall be obtained by
the insertion of a grounding transformer and current limiting resistance or
impedance wherever considered necessary at the commencement of such a
system.]
(2) Single-phase high or extra-high voltage systems shall be earthed in a
manner approved by the Inspector.
(3) In the case of a system comprising electric supply lines having concentric
cables, the external conductor shall be the one to be connected with earth.
(4) Where a supplier proposes to connected with earth an existing system for
use at high or extra-high voltage which has not hitherto been so connected with
earth he shall give not less than fourteen days’ notice in writing together with
particulars to the telegraph-authority of the proposed connection with earth.
(5) (a) Where the earthing lead and earth connection are used only in
connection with earthing guards erected under high or extra-high voltage overhead
lines where they cross a telecommunication line or a railway line, and where such
lines are equipped with earth leakage relays of a type and setting approved by the
Inspector, the resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms.
(b) Every earthing system belonging to either the supplier or the consumer
shall be tested for its resistance to earth on a dry day during dry season not less
than once a year. Records of such tests shall be maintained and shall be
produced, if required before the Inspector or any officer appointed to assist him
and authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A.
(6) In so far as the provisions of rule 61 are consistent with the provisions of
this rule, all connections with earth shall also comply with the provisions of that
rule.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
68. General conditions as to transformation and control of energy-
(1) Where energy at high or extra-high voltage is transformed, converted,
regulated or otherwise controlled in sub-stations or switch-stations (including
outdoor substations and out-door switch-stations) or in street boxes constructed
underground, the following provisions shall have effect: -
1[(a) Sub-stations and switch-stations shall preferably be erected above ground,
but where necessarily constructed underground due provisions for ventilation and
drainage shall be made and any space housing switchgear shall not be used for
storage of any materials especially inflammable and combustible materials or
refuse.]
(b) Outdoor sub-station is except pole type sub-stations and. outdoor switchstations
shall (unless the apparatus is completely enclosed in a metal covering
connected with earth, the said apparatus also being connected with the system by
armoured cables) be efficiently protected by fencing not less than 1.8 metres in
height or other means so as to prevent access to the electric-supply lines and
apparatus therein by an unauthorised person.
(c) Underground street boxes (other than sub-stations) which contain
transformers shall not contain switches or other apparatus, and switches, cut-outs
or other apparatus required for controlling or other purposes shall be fixed in
separate receptacles above ground wherever practicable.
(2) Where energy is transformed, suitable provisions shall be made either by
connecting with earth a point of the system at the lower voltage or otherwise to
guard against danger by reason of the said system becoming accidentally charged
above its normal voltage by leakage from a contact with the system at the higher
voltage.
1. Subs. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
69. Pole type sub-stations- Where platform type construction is used for a pole
type sub-station and sufficient space for a person to stand on the platform is
provided a substantial hand rail shall be built around the said platform and if the
hand rail is of metal, it shall be connected with earth;
Provided that in the case of pole type sub-station on wooden supports and
wooden platform the metal hand-rail shall not be connected with earth.
70. Condensers- Suitable provision shall be made for immediate and automatic
discharge of every static condenser on disconnection of supply.
71. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage luminous tube sign
installation-
(1) Any person who proposes to use or who is using energy for the purpose of
operating a luminous tube sign installation, or who proposes to transform or who is
transforming energy to a high voltage for any such purpose shall comply with the
following conditions: -
(a) All live parts of the installation (including all apparatus and live conductors
in the secondary circuit, but excluding tubes except in the neighbourhood of their
terminals) shall be inaccessible to unauthorised persons and such parts shall be
effectively screened.
(b) Irrespective of the method of obtaining the voltage of the circuit which feeds
the luminous discharge tube sign, no part of any conductor of such circuit shall be
in metallic connection (except in respect of its connection with earth) with any
conductor of the supply system or with the primary winding of the transformer.
(c) All live parts of an exterior installation shall be so disposed as to protect
them against the effects of the weather and such installation shall be so arranged
and separated from the surroundings as to limit, as far as possible, the spreading
of fire.
(d) The secondary circuit shall be permanently earthed at the transformer and
the core of every transformer shall be earthed.
(e) Where the conductors of the primary circuit are not in metallic connection
with the supply conductors, (e.g., where a motor-generator or a double-wound
convertor is used), one phase of such primary circuit shall be permanently earthed
at the motor generator or convertor, or at the transformer.
1[(ee) An earth leakage circuit breaker of sufficient rating shall be provided on the
low voltage side to detect the leakage in such luminous tube sign installations.]
(f) A final sub-circuit which forms the primary circuit of a fixed luminous
discharge tube sign installation shall be reserved solely for such purpose.
(g) A separate primary final sub-circuit shall be provided for each transformer
or each group of transformers having an aggregate input not exceeding 1,000 volt
amperes, of a fixed luminous-discharge tube sign installation.
(h) An interior installation shall be provided with suitable adjacent means for
disconnecting all phases of the supply except the “neutral” in a three-phase four
wire circuit.
(i) For installations on the exterior of a building a suitable emergency fire-proof
linked switch to operate on all phases except the neutral in a three phase four wire
circuit shall be provided and fixed in a conspicuous position at not more than 2.75
metres above the ground.
(j) A special “caution” notice shall be affixed in a conspicuous place on the
door of every high voltage enclosure to the effect that the low voltage supply must
be cut off before the enclosure is opened.
(k) Where static condensers are used, they shall be installed on the load side
of the fuses and the primary (low voltage) side of the transformers.
(1) Where static condensers are used on primary side, means shall be
provided for automatically discharging the condensers when the supply is cut off;
Provided that static condensers or any circuit interrupting devices on the high or
extra-high voltage side shall not be used without the approval in writing of the
Inspector.
(2) The owner or user of any luminous tube sign or similar high voltage
installation shall not bring the same into use without giving to the Inspector not
less than 14 days notice in writing of his intention so to do.
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
72. Additional provisions for supply to high voltage electrode boilers-
(1) Where a system having a point connected with earth is used for supply of
energy at high or extra-high voltage to an electrode boiler which is also connected
with earth, the following conditions shall apply: -
(a) The metal work of the electrode boiler shall be efficiently connected to the
metal sheathing and metallic armouring (if any) of the high voltage electric supply
line whereby energy is supplied to the electrode boiler.
(b) The supply of energy at high or extra-high voltage to the electrode boiler
shall be controlled by a suitable circuit-breaker so set as to operate in the event of
the phase currents becoming unbalanced to the extent of 10 per cent of the rated
current consumption of the electrode boiler under normal conditions of operation;
Provided that if in any case a higher setting is essential to ensure stability of
operation of the electrode boiler, the setting may be increased so as not to exceed
15 per cent of the rated current consumption of the electrode boiler under normal
conditions of operation.
(c) An inverse time element device may be used in conjunction with the
aforesaid circuit breaker to prevent the operation thereof unnecessarily on the
occurrence of unbalanced phase currents of momentary or short duration.
(d) The supplier shall serve a notice in writing on the telegraph-authority at
least seven days prior to the date on which such supply of energy is to be afforded
specifying the location of every point (including the earth connection of the
electrode boiler) at which the system is connected with earth.
(2) The owner or user of any high or extra-high voltage electrode boiler shall
not bring the same into use without giving the Inspector not less than 14 days’
notice in writing of his intention so to do.
73. Supply to X-ray and high frequency installation-
(1) Any person who proposes to employ or who is employing energy for the
purpose of operating an X-ray or similar high-frequency installation, shall comply
with the following conditions:-
(a) Mechanical barriers shall be provided to prevent too close an approach to
any high-voltage parts of the X-ray apparatus, except the X-ray tube and its leads,
unless such high-voltage parts have been rendered shock-proof by being shielded
by earthed metal or adequate insulating material.
(b) Where extra-high voltage generators operating at 300 peak KV or more are
used, such generators shall be installed in rooms separate from those containing
the other equipment and any step-up transformer employed shall be so installed
and protected as to prevent danger.
(c) A suitable switch shall be provided to control the circuit supplying a
generator, and shall be so arranged as to be open except while the door of the
room housing the generator is locked from the outside.
(d) X-ray tubes used in therapy shall be mounted in an earthed metal
enclosure.
(e) Every X-ray machine shall be provided with a millimeter or other suitable
measuring instrument, readily visible from the control position and connected, if
practicable, in the earthed lead, but guarded if connected in the high-voltage lead.
1[(ee) Notwithstanding the provisions of clause (e), earth. leakage circuit breaker
of sufficient rating shall be provided on the low voltage side to detect the leakage
in such X-ray installations.]
(f) This sub-rule shall not apply to shock-proof portable units or shockproof self
contained and stationary units.
Note: - The expression “shock-proof”, as applied to X-ray and high-frequency
equipment, shall mean that such equipment is guarded with earthed metal so that
no person may come into contact with any live part.
(2) (a) In the case of non-shock-proof equipment, overhead high-voltage
conductors, unless suitably guarded against personal contact, shall be adequately
spaced and high-voltage leads on tilting tables and fluroscopes shall be
adequately insulated or so surrounded by barriers as to prevent inadvertent
contact.
(b) The low voltage circuit of the step up transformer shall contain a manually
operated control device having overload protection, in addition to the over-current
device for circuit protection, and these devices shall have no exposed live parts
and for diagnostic work there shall be an additional switch in the said circuit, which
shall be of one of the following types:
(i) A switch with a spring or other mechanism that will open automatically
except while held close by the operator, or
(ii) A time switch which will open automatically after a definite period of time for
which it has been set.
(c) If more than one piece of apparatus be operated from the same high or
extra-high voltage source each shall be provided with a high or extra-high voltage
switch to give independent control.
(d) Low frequency current-carrying parts of a machine of the quenched gap or
open gap type shall be so insulated or guarded that they cannot be touched during
operation, the high frequency circuit proper which delivers high-frequency current
normally for the therapeutic purposes, being exempted.
(e) All X-ray generators having capacitors shall have suitable means for
discharging the capacitors manually.
(f) Except in the case of self-contained units, all 200 peak KV or higher, X-ray
generators shall have a sphere gap installed in the high-voltage system adjusted
so that it will break down on over-voltage surges.
(3) (a) All non-current carrying metal parts of tube stands, fluroscopes and
other apparatus shall be properly earthed and insulating floors, mats or platforms
shall be provided for operator in proximity to high or extra-high voltage parts
unless such parts have been rendered shock proof.
(b) Where short wave therapy machines are used, the treatment tables and
examining chairs shall be wholly non-metallic.
(4) The owner of any X-ray installations or similar high frequency apparatus
shall not bring the same into use without giving to the Inspector not less than 14
days’ notice in writing of his intention to do so.
Provided that the aforesaid notice shall not be necessary in the case of shockproof
portable X-ray and high-frequency equipment which have been inspected before
the commencement of their use and periodically, thereafter.
1. Ins. by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
CHAPTER VIII
1[OVERHEAD LINES, UNDER GROUND
CABLES AND GENERATING STATIONS]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f 17.8.1991.
74. Material and strength-
(1) All conductors of overhead lines other than those specified in sub-rule (1) of
rule 86 shall have a breaking strength of not less than 350 kg.
(2) Where the voltage is low and the span is of less than 15 metres and is on
the owner’s or consumer’s premises, a conductor having an actual breaking
strength of not less than 150 kg may be used.
75. Joints-Joints between conductors of overhead lines shall be mechanically
and electrically secure under the conditions of operation. The ultimate strength of
the joint shall not be less than 95 per cent of that of the conductor, and the
electrical conductivity not less than that of the conductor.
1[Provided that no conductor of an overhead line shall have more than two joints in
a span.]
1. Ins. by GSR 730, dt. 7.9.1989, w.e.f. 30.9.1989.
76. Maximum stresses: Factors of safety-
(1) (a) The owner of every overhead line shall ensure that it has the
following minimum factors of safety:-
(i) For metal supports 1.5
(ii) For mechanically processed concrete supports 2.0
(iii) For hand-moulded concrete supports 2.5
(iv) For wood supports 3.0.
The minimum factors of safety shall be based on such load as would cause failure
of the support to perform its function (assuming that the foundation and other
components of the structure are intact).
The aforesaid load shall be-
(i) Equivalent to the yield point stress or the modulus of rupture, as the case
may be, for supports subject to bending and vertical loads,
(ii) The crippling load for supports used struts.
The said owner shall also ensure that the strength of the supports in the direction
of the line is not less than one-fourth of the strength required in the direction
transverse to the line.
Provided that in the case of latticed steel or other compound structures, factors of
safety shall not be less than 1.5 under such broken wire conditions as may be
specified by the State Government in this behalf.
(b) The minimum factor of safety for stay-wires, guard-wires or bearer wires
shall be 2.5 based on the ultimate tensile strength of the wire.
(c) The minimum factor of safety for conductors shall be 2, based on their
ultimate tensile strength. In addition, the conductors tension at 320C, without
external load, shall not exceed the following percentages of the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor: -
Initial unloaded tension 35 per cent
Final unloaded tension 25 per cent.
Provided that in the case of conductors having a cross section of a generally
triangular shape, such as conductors composed of 3-wires, the final unloaded
tension at 32’C shall not exceed 30 per cent of the ultimate tensile strength of such
conductor.
(2) For the purpose of calculating the factors of safety prescribed in sub-rule (l)-
(a) The maximum wind pressure shall be such as the State Government may
specify in each case;
(b) For cylindrical bodies the effective area shall be taken as two-thirds of the
projected area exposed to wind pressure;
(c) For latticed steel or other compound structures the wind pressure on the lee
side members shall be taken as one-half of the wind pressure on the windward
side members and the factors of safety shall be calculated on the crippling load of
struts and upon the elastic limit of tension members;
(d) The maximum and minimum temperatures shall be such as the State
Government may specify in each case.
(3) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-rules (1) and (2), in localities
where overhead lines are liable to accumulations of ice or snow the State
Government may, by order in writing, specify the loading conditions for the
purpose of calculating the factor of safety.
77. Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor-
(1) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected across a
street shall at any part thereof be at a height of less than-
(a) For low and medium voltage lines 5.8 metres
(b) For high voltage lines 6.1 metres
(2) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected along
any street shall at any part thereof be at a height less than-
(a) For low and medium voltage lines 5.5 metres
(b) For high voltage lines 5.8 metres
(3) No conductor of in overhead line including service lines, erected
elsewhere than along or across any street shall be at a height less than-
(a) For low, medium and high voltages lines
upto and including 11,000 volts, if bare 4.6
metres
(b) For low, medium and high voltage
lines upto and including 11,000 volts, if insulated
4.0 metres
(c) For high voltage lines above 11,000 volts
5.2 metres
(4) For extra-high voltage lines the clearance above ground shall not be less
than 5.2 metres plus 0.3 metre for every 33,000 volts or part thereof by which the
voltage of the line exceeds 33,000 volts.
Provided that the minimum clearance along or across any street shall not be less
than 6.1 metres.
78. Clearance between conductors and trolley wires-
1[(l)] No conductor of an overhead line crossing a tramway or trolley bus route
using trolley wires shall have less than the following clearances above and trolley
wire-
(a) Low and medium voltage lines 1.2 metres.
Provided that where an insulated conductor suspended from a bearer
wire crosses over a trolley wire the minimum clearance for such insulated
conductor shall be 0.6 metre.
(b) High voltage lines up to and including 11,000 volts
1.8 metres
(c) High voltage lines above 11,000 volts
2.5 metres
(d) Extra-high voltage lines 3.0
metres
2[(2) In any case of a crossing referred to in sub-rule (1), whoever lays his line
later in time, shall provide the clearance between his own line and the line which
will be crossed in accordance with the provisions of said sub-rule.
Provided that if the later entrant is the owner of the lower line and is not able to
provide adequate clearance, he should bear the cost of modification of the upper
line so as to comply with this rule.]
1. Rule 78 renumbered as sub-rule (1) by GSR 528, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f.
19.7.1986.
2. Sub-rule (2) ins. by GSR 528, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
79. Clearances from buildings of low and medium voltage lines and service
lines-
(1) Where a low or medium voltage, overhead line passes above or adjacent
to or terminates on any building, the following minimum clearances from any
accessible point, on the basis of maximum sag, shall be observed: -
(a) For any flat roof, open balcony, verandah roof and lean-to-roof-
(i) When the line passes above the building a vertical clearance of 2.5
metres from the highest point, and
(ii) When the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2
metres from the nearest point, and
(b) For pitched roof-
(i) When the line passes above the building a vertical clearance of 2.5
metres immediately under the lines, and
(ii) When the line passes adjacent to the building a horizontal clearance of 1.2
metres.
(2) Any conductor so situated as to have a clearance less than that specified
in sub-rule (1) shall be adequately insulated and shall be attached at suitable
intervals to a bare earthed bearer wire having a breaking strength of not less
than 350 kg.
(3) The horizontal clearance shall be measured when the line is at a
maximum deflection from the vertical due to wind pressure.
1[Explanation- For the purpose of this rule, expression “building” shall be deemed
to include any structure, whether permanent or temporary]
1. Added by GSR 844, dt. 31.7.1985, w.e.f. 7.9.1985.
80. Clearances from buildings of high and extra-high voltage lines-
(1) Where a high or extra-high voltage overhead line passes above or
adjacent to any building or part of a building it shall have on the basis of
maximum sag a vertical clearance above the highest part of the building
immediately under such line, of not less than-
(a) For high voltage lines upto and
including 33,000 volts
3.7 metres
(b) For extra-high voltage lines
3.7 metres plus 0.30 metre
for every additional 33,000
volts or part thereof.
(2) The horizontal clearance between the nearest conductor and any part of
such building shall, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, be
not less than-
(a) For high voltage lines upto and
including 11,000 volts
1.2 metres
(b) For high voltage lines above
11,000 volts and up to and
including 33,000 volts
2.0 metres
(c) For extra-high voltage lines
2.0 metres plus 0.3
metre
for every additional
33,000 volts for part
thereof.
1[Explanation- For the purpose of this rule expression “building” shall be deemed
to include any structure, whether permanent or temporary]
1. Added by GSR 844, di. 31.7.1985. w.e.f- 7.9.1985.
81. Conductors at different voltages on same supports- Where conductors
forming parts of systems at different voltages are erected on the same supports,
the owner shall make adequate provision to guard against danger to linesman
and others from the lower voltage system being charged above its normal
working voltage by leakage from or contact with the higher voltage system and
the methods of construction and the clearances between the conductors of the
two systems shall be subject to the prior approval of the Inspector.
82. Erection of or alternation to buildings, structures, flood banks and
elevation of roads-
(1) If at any time subsequent to the erection of an overhead line (whether
covered with insulating material or bare), any person proposes to erect a new
building or structure or flood bank or to raise any road level or to carry out any
other type of work whether permanent or temporary or to make in or upon any
building or structure of flood bank or road, any permanent or temporary addition
or alternation, he and the contractor whom he employs to carry out the erection,
addition or alteration, shall if such work, building, structure, flood bank, road or
additions and alterations thereto, would, during or after the construction result in
contravention of any of the provisions of rule 77, 79 or 80, give notice in writing of
his intention to the supplier and to the Inspector and shall furnish therewith a
scale drawing showing the proposed building, structure, flood bank road, any
addition or alteration and scaffolding required during the construction.
(2) (a) On receipt of the notice referred to in sub-rule (1) or otherwise, the
supplier shall examine whether the line under reference was lawfully laid and
whether the person was liable to pay the cost of alteration and if so, send a
notice without undue delay, to such person together with an estimate of the cost
of the expenditure likely to be incurred to so after the overhead line and require
him to deposit, within 30 days of the receipt of the notice with the supplier, the
amount of the estimated cost.
(b) If the person referred to in sub-rule (1) disputes the suppliers estimated
cost of alteration of the overhead line or even the responsibility to pay such cost
the dispute may be referred to the Inspector by either of the parties whereupon
the same shall be decided by the Inspector.
(3) No work upon such building, structure, flood bank, road and addition or
alternation thereto shall be commenced or continued until the Inspector has
certified that the provisions of rule 77, 79 or 80 are not likely to be contravened
either during or after the aforesaid construction.
Provided that the Inspector may, if he is satisfied that the overhead line has been
so guarded as to secure the protection of persons or property from injury, or risk
of injury, permit the work to be executed prior to the alteration of the
overhead line or in the case of temporary addition or alteration, without
alteration of the overhead line.
(4) On receipt of the deposit, the supplier shall after the overhead line within
one month of the date of deposit or within such longer period as the Inspector
may allow and ensure that it shall not contravene the provisions of rule 77, 79 or
80 either during or after such construction.
(5) In the absence of an agreement to the contrary between the parties
concerned, the cost of such alteration of the overhead line laid down shall be
estimated on the following basis, namely: -
(a) The cost of additional material used on the alteration giving due credit for
the depreciated cost of the material which would be available from the existing
line;
(b) The wages of Labour employed in affecting the alteration;
(c) Supervision charges to the extent of 15 per cent of the wages mentioned
in clause (b); and
(d) Any charges incurred by the supplier in complying with the provisions of
section 16 of the Act in respect of such alterations.
(6) Where the estimated cost of the alteration of the overhead line is not
deposited the supplier shall be considered as an aggrieved party for the purpose
of this rule.
1[82A. Transporting and Storing of material near overhead lines-
(1) No rods, pipes or similar materials shall be taken below or in the vicinity of
any bare overhead conductors or lines if they are likely to infringe the provisions
for clearances under rules 79 and 80, unless such materials are transported
under the direct supervision of a competent person authorised in this behalf by
the owner of such overhead conductors or lines.
(2) Under no circumstances rods, pipes or other similar materials shall be
brought within the flash over distance of bare live conductors or lines; and
(3) No material or earth work or agricultural produce shall be dumped or
stored or trees grown below or in the vicinity of bare overhead conductors lines
so as to reduce the requisite safety clearances specified under rules 79 and 80.]
83. Clearances: General- For the purpose of computing the vertical clearance
of an overhead line, the maximum sag of any conductor shall be calculated on
the basis of the maximum sag in still air and the maximum temperature as
specified by the State Government under rule 76(2)(d). Similarly, for the purpose
of computing any horizontal clearance of an overhead line the maximum
deflection of any conductor shall be calculated on the basis of the wind pressure
specified by the State Government under rule 76(2)(a) or may be taken as 350,
whichever is greater.
1. Ins. by GSR 358, dt. 30.4.1987, w.e.f. 9.5.1987.
84. Routes: Proximity to aerodromes- Overhead lines shall not be erected in
the vicinity of aerodromes until the aerodrome authorities have approved in
writing the route of the proposed lines.
85. Maximum interval between supports- All conductors shall be attached to
supports at intervals not exceeding the safe limits based on the ultimate tensile
strength of the conductor and the factor of safety prescribed in rule 76.
Provided that in the case of overhead lines carrying low or medium voltage
conductors, when erected in, over, along or across any street, the interval shall
not, without the consent in writing of the Inspector, exceed 65 metres.
86. Conditions to apply where telecommunication lines and power lines are
carried on same supports-
(1) Every overhead telecommunication line erected on supports carrying a
power line shall consist of conductors each having a breaking strength of not less
than 270 kg.
(2) Every telephone used on a telecommunication line erected on supports
carrying a power line shall be suitably guarded against lightning and shall be
protected by cutouts.
(3) Where a telecommunication line is erected on supports carrying a high or
extra-high voltage power line arrangement shall be made to safeguard any
person using the telephone against injury resulting from contact, leakage or
induction between such power and telecommunication lines.
87. Lines crossing or approaching each other-
(1) Where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to any
telecommunication line, either the owner of the overhead line or the
telecommunication line, whoever lays his line later, shall arrange to provide for
protective devices or guarding arrangements, in a manner laid down in the Code
of Practice or the guidelines prepared by the Power and Telecommunication
Coordination Committee and subject to the provisions of the following sub-rules:-
(2) When it is intended to erect a telecommunication line or an overhead line
which will cross or be in proximity to an overhead line or a telecommunication
line, as the case may be, the person proposing to erect such line shall give one
month’s notice of his intention so to do along with the relevant details of
protection and drawings to the owner of the existing line.
1[(3) Where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to another overhead
line, guarding arrangements shall be provided so as to guard against the
possibility of their coming into contact with each other.
Where an overhead line crosses another overhead line, clearances shall be as
under: -
2[Minimum clearances in metres between lines crossing each other.
Sl.
No.
Nominal System
Voltage
11-66 KV 110-132
KV
220 KV 400 KV 800 KV
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Low & Medium
11-66 KV
110-132 KV
220 KV
400 KV
800 KV
2.44
2.44
3.05
4.58
5.49
7.94
3.05
3.05
3.05
4.58
5.49
7.94
4.58
4.58
4.58
4.58
5.49
7.94
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
Provided that no guardings are required when an extra high voltage line crosses
over another extra-high voltage, high voltage, medium or low voltage line or a
road or a tram subject to the condition that adequate clearances are provided
between the lowest conductor of the extra-high voltage line and the top most
conductor of the overhead line crossing underneath the extra-high voltage line
and the clearances as stipulated in rule 77 from the topmost surface of the road
is maintained.]
(4) A person erecting or proposing to erect a line which may cross or be in
proximity with an existing line, may normally provide guarding arrangements on
his own line or require the owner of the other overhead line to provide guarding
arrangements as referred to in sub-rule, (3).
(5) In all cases referred to in the preceding sub-rules the expenses of
providing the guarding arrangements or protective devices shall be borne by the
person whose line was last erected.
(6) Where two lines cross, the crossing shall be made as nearly at right
angles the nature of the case admits and as near the support of the line as
practicable, and the support of the lower line shall not be erected below the
upper line.
(7) The guarding arrangements shall ordinarily be carried out by the owner of
the supports on which it is made and he shall be responsible for its efficient
Maintenance.
(8) All work required to be done by or under this rule shall be carried out to
the satisfaction of the Inspector.
1. Subs. by GSR 256, dt. 28.2.1983, w.e.f. 26.3.1983.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
88. Guarding-
(1) Where guarding is required under these rules the provisions of sub-rules
(2) to (4) shall apply.
(2) Every guard-wire shall be connected with earth at each point at which its
electrical continuity is broken.
(3) Every guard-wire shall have an actual breaking strength of not less than
635 kg and if made of iron or steel, shall be galvanised.
(5) Lines crossing trolley-wires- In the case of a crossing over a trolley-wire
the guarding shall fulfil the following conditions, namely:-
(a) Where there is only one trolley-wire, two guard-wires shall be erected as
in diagram A;
(b) Where there are two trolley-wires and the distance between them does not
exceed 40 cms, two guard-wires shall be erected as in diagram B;
(c) Where there are two trolley wires and the distance between them exceeds
40 cms but does not exceed 1.2 metres, three guard-wires shall be erected as in
diagram C;
(d) Where there are two trolley--wires and the distance between them
exceeds 1.2 metres, each trolley-wire shall be separately guarded as in diagram
D;
(e) The rise of the trolley boom shall be so limited that the trolley leaves the
trolley-wire, it shall not foul the guard-wires; and
(f) Where a telegraph-line is liable to fall or be blown down upon an arm,
stay-wire or span-wire and so slide down upon a trolley-wire, guard hooks shall
be provided to prevent such sliding.
20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0
min 60 Cms
0
DIAGRAM-A
20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0 0 0 0
min min min min
60 Cms 60 Cms 60Cms 60 Cms
up to 40 Cms Over 40 Cms &
up to 1.2 M
DIAGRAM B DIAGRAM C
20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms 20 Cms
0 0 0 0
MIN. MIN.
60 Cms 60 Cms
over 1.2 mts.
DIAGRAM D
89. Service-lines from Overhead lines- No Service-line or tapping shall be
taken off an overhead line except at a point of support.
1[Provided that the number of tappings per conductor shall not be more than four
in case of low and medium voltage connections.]
1. Added by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
90. Earthing-
(1) All metal supports and all reinforced and prestressed cement concrete
supports of overhead lines and metallic fittings attached thereto, shall be
permanently and efficiently earthed. For this purpose a continuous earth wire
shall be provided and securely fastened to each pole and connected with earth
ordinarily at three points in every km., the spacing between the points being as
nearly equidistance as possible. Alternatively, each support and the metallic
fitting attached thereto shall be efficiently earthed.
1[(IA) Metallic bearer wire used for supporting insulated wire of low and medium
voltage overhead service lines shall be efficiently earthed or insulated.]
(2) Each stay-wire shall be similarly earthed unless insulator has been placed
in it at a height not less than 3.0 metres from the ground.
1. Subs. by GSR 732, dt. 18.6.1985, w.e.f. 3.8.1985.
91. Safety and protective devices-
(1) Every overhead line, (not being suspended from a dead bearer wire and
not being covered with insulating material and not being a trolley-wire) erected
over any part of street or other public place or in any factory or mine or on any
consumers’ premises shall be protected with a device approved by the Inspector
for rendering the line electrically harmless in case it breaks.
(2) An Inspector may by notice in writing require the owner of any such
overhead line wherever it may be erected to protect it in the manner specified in
sub-rule(l).
1[(3) The owner of every high and extra-high voltage overhead line shall make
adequate arrangements to the satisfaction of the Inspector to prevent
unauthorised persons from ascending any of the supports of such overhead lines
which can be easily climbed upon without the help of a ladder or special
appliances. Rails, reinforced cement concrete poles and pre-stressed cement
concrete poles without steps, tubular poles, wooden supports without steps, Isections
and channels shall be deemed as supports which cannot be easily
climbed upon for the purpose of this rule.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
92. Protection against lightning-
(1) The owner of every overhead line 1[,sub-station or generating station]
which is so exposed as to be liable to injury from lightning shall adopt efficient
means for diverting to earth any electrical surges due to lightning.
2[(2) The earthing lead for any lightning arrestor shall not pass through any iron
or steel pipe, but shall be taken as directly as possible from the lightning- arrestor
to a separate earth electrode and/or junction of the earth mat already provided
for the high and extra-high voltage sub-station subject to the avoidance of bends
wherever practicable.
Note- A vertical ground electrode shall be connected to this junction of the earth
mat.]
1. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs. by GSR 1050, dt. 9.11.1985.
93. Unused overhead lines-
(1) Where an overhead line ceases to be used as an electric supply line, the
owner shall maintain it in a safe mechanical condition in accordance with rule 76
or shall remove it.
(2) Where any overhead line ceases to be used as an electric supply line, an
Inspector may, by a notice in writing served on the owner, require him to maintain
it in a safe mechanical condition or to remove it within fifteen days of the receipt
of the notice.
CHAPTER IX
ELECTRIC TRACTION
94. Additional rules for electric traction-
(1) The rules in this Chapter apply only where energy is used for purposes of
traction.
Provided that nothing in this Chapter shall apply to energy used for the public
carriage of passengers, animals or goods on, or for the lighting or ventilation of
the rolling stock of any railway or tramway subject to the provisions of the Indian
Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890).
(2) In this Chapter the conductor used for transmitting energy to a vehicle is
referred to as the “line” and the other conductor as the “return”.
(3) The owner of the line, return, rails or trolley wire, as the case may be, shall
be responsible for the due observance of rules 95 to 108.
95. Voltage of supply to vehicle- No person shall supply energy at high or
extra-high voltage to any trolley-wire or other conductor used in direct electrical
and mechanical connection with any vehicle, except with the written approval of
the Central or the State Government, as the case may be, and subject to such
conditions as the State Government may think reasonable and proper in the
circumstances.
96. Insulation of lines- Every line shall be insulated throughout.
97. Insulation of returns-
(1) Where any rails on which cars run, or any conductors laid between or
within 0.9 metre of such rails, form any part of a return, such part may be
uninsulated. All other returns or parts of a return, shall be insulated, unless they
are of such conductivity as to secure the conditions required by sub-rules (2) and
(3) of rule 98.
(2) Where any part of a return is uninsulated, it shall be connected with the
negative or neutral of the system.
98. Proximity to metallic pipes, etc.-
(1) Where an uninsulated return is in proximity to any metallic pipe, structure
or substance not belonging to the owner of the return, he shall, if so required by
the owner of such pipe, structure or substance, connect his return therewith at
the latter’s expense.
(2) Where the return is partly or entirely uninsulated, the owner shall, in the
construction and maintenance of his system, adopt such means for reducing the
difference produced by the current between the potential of the uninsulated
return at any one point and the potential of the uninsulated return at any other
point as to ensue that the difference of potential between the uninsulated return
and any metallic pipe, structure or substance in the vicinity shall not exceed four
volts where the return is relatively positive, or one and one-third volts where the
return is relatively negative.
(3) The owner of any such pipe, structure or substance as is referred to in
sub-rule (2) may, in respect of it require the owner of the uninsulated return at
reasonable times and intervals to ascertain by test in his presence or in that of
his representative, whether the condition specified in sub-rule (2) is fulfilled, and,
if such condition is found to be fulfilled, all reasonable expenses of, and
incidental to, the carrying out of the test shall be borne by the owner of the pipe,
structure or substance.
99. Difference of potential on return- Where the return is partly or entirely
uninsulated, the owner shall keep a continuous record of the difference of
potential, during the working of his system, between every junction of an
insulated return With an uninsulated return and the point on the route most
distant from that junction, and the difference of potential shall not, under normal
running conditions, exceed a mean value of seven volts between the highest
momentary peak and the average for the hour of maximum load.
100. Leakage on conduit system- Where both the line and the return are placed
within a conduit, the following conditions shall be fulfilled in the construction and
maintenance of the system: -
(a) Where the rails are used to form any part of the return, they shall be
electrically connected (at distances not exceeding 30 metres apart), with the
conduit by means of copper strips having a cross-sectional area of at least 0.40
sq.cm. or by other means of equal conductivity. Where the return is wholly
insulated and contained with the conduit, the latter shall be connected with earth
at the generating station or sub-station through an instrument suitable for the
indication of any contact or partial contact of either the line or the return with the
conduit; and
(b) The leakage-current shall be ascertained daily, before or after the hours of
running, when the line is fully charged; and if at any time it is found to exceed 0.6
ampere per km. of single tramway track, the transmission and use of energy shall
be suspended unless the leakage is stopped within twenty-four hours.
101. Leakage on system other than conduit system- Where both the line and
the return are not placed within a conduit, the leakage current shall be
ascertained daily before or after the hours of running, when the line is fully
charges; and if at any time it is found to exceed 0.3 ampere per km. of single
tramway track, the transmission and use of energy shall be suspended unless
the leakage is stopped within twenty-four hours.
102. Passengers not to have access to electric circuit- Precautions to the
satisfaction of an Inspector shall be taken by the owner of every vehicle to
prevent: -
(a) The access of passengers to any portion of the electric circuit where there
is danger from electric shock,
(b) Any metal, hand-rail or other metallic substance liable to be handled by
passengers, becoming charged.
103. Current density in rails- Where rails on which cars run are used as a
return, the current density in such rails shall not under ordinary working
conditions, exceed 1.4 amperes per sq. cm. of cross-sectional area.
104. Isolation of sections- Every trolley-wire shall be constructed in sections not
exceeding 1.6 km. in length, and means shall be provided for isolating each
section.
105. Minimum size and strength of trolley-wire- No trolley-wire shall be of less
cross-sectional area than 0.5 sq.cm. or shall have an actual breaking load of less
than 2000 kg.
106. Height of trolley-wire and length of span- A trolley-wire or a traction feeder
on the same supports as a trolley-wire shall nowhere be at a height from the
surface of the street of less than 5.2 metres except, where it passes under a
bridge or other fixed structure, or through or along a tunnel or mineshaft or the
like in which case it shall be suspended to the satisfaction of an Inspector.
107. Earthing of guard wires- Every guard wire shall be connected with earth at
each point at which its electrical continuity is broken and shall also be connected
with the rails at intervals of not more than five spans.
1[107A. Proximity to magnetic observatories and laboratories- Traction works
shall not be carried out in the vicinity of geomagnetic observatories and
laboratories without the concurrence of the Central Government or of any officer
authorised by it in this behalf.]
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
108. Records-
(1) The owner shall, so far as is consistent with his system of working, keep
the following records, namely: -
(a) Daily records showing: -
(i) The maximum working current from the source of supply;
(ii) The maximum working voltage at the source of supply;
(iii) The difference of potential, as required by rule 99; and
(iv) The leakage current (if any), as required by rule 100 and rule 101, and;
(b) Occasional records showing: -
(i) Every test made under sub-rules (2) and (3) of rule 98;
(ii) Every stoppage of leakage, together with the time occupied; and
(iii) Particulars of any abnormal occurrence affecting the electrical working of
the system.
(2) Such records shall be open to examination by an Inspector or by any
person authorised in writing by an Inspector.
CHAPTER X
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE
ADOPTED IN MINES AND
OIL-FIELDS
109. Application of Chapter-
(1) The rules in this Chapter shall apply only where energy is used in mines
as defined in the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952).
(2) In mines, the rules in this Chapter do not apply to apparatus used above
ground, excepting such apparatus as may directly affect the safety of persons
below ground.
110. Responsibility for observance-
(1) It shall be the duty of the owner, agent, engineer or manager of a mine, or
of the agent, engineer of any company operating in an oil field, or of the owner,
engineer of one or more drilled wells situated in an oil field, to comply with and
enforce the following rules and it shall be duty of all persons employed to conduct
their work in accordance with such rules.
(2) Adequate number of authorised supervisors and electricians shall be on
duty in every mine or oil-field while energy is being used therein.
1[Explanation- For the purposes of this rule, the word “engineer” shall-
(a) In the case of a coal mine, have the same meaning as assigned to it in the
Coal Mines Regulations, 1957;
(b) In the case of a metalliferous mine, have the same meaning as assigned
to it in the Metalliferous Mines Regulations, 1961; and
(c) In the case of an oil mine, mean the ‘Installation Manager’ under the Oil
Mines Regulations, 1984.]
111. Notices-
(1) On or before the first day of February in every year, in respect of every
mine or oil-field, returns giving the size and type of apparatus, together with such
particulars in regard to circumstances of its use which may be required by the
Inspector, shall be sent to the Inspector by the persons specified in rule 110 in
the form set out in Annexure-X or XI, whichever is applicable.
(2) The persons specified in rule 110 shall also give to Inspector not less than
seven days notice in writing of the intention to bring into use any new installation
in a mine or oil-field giving details of apparatus installed and its location.
Provided that in case of any additions or alterations to an existing low and
medium voltage installation, immediate notice in writing shall be sent to the
Inspector before such additions or alterations are brought into use.
(3) This rule shall not apply to telecommunication or signalling apparatus.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
112. Plans-
(1) A correct plan, on the same scale as the plan kept at the mine in fulfilment
of the requirements of the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952), shall be available in the
office at the mine showing the position of all fixed apparatus and conductors
therein, other than lights, telecommunication or signalling apparatus, or cables
for the same.
(2) A similar plan on the scale not less than 25 cm. to a Km (1: 4000) shall be
kept by the manager or owner of one or more wells in any oil-field.
(3) A similar plant on such scale as the Central Government may direct,
showing the position of all electric supply lines, shall be kept in the office of any
licensee or other person transmitting or distributing energy in a mine or oil-field.
(4) The plans specified under the provisions of this rule shall be examined,
and corrected as often as necessary to keep them reasonably up-to-date. The
dates of such examinations shall be entered thereon by the manager or owner of
the mine or wells and such plans shall be available to the Inspector, or an
Inspector of Mines at any time.
113. Lighting, communications and fire precautions-
(1) In a time illuminated by electricity, one or more flame safety lamps, or
other lights approved by the Inspector of mines, shall be maintained in a state of
continuous illumination in all places where failure of the electric light at any time
would be prejudicial to safety.
(2) Efficient means of communication shall be provided in every mine
between the point where the switchgear provided under sub-rule (1) of rule 121 is
erected and the shaft bottom or other distributing centres in the mines.
(3) Fire extinguishing appliances of adequate capacity and of an approved
type shall be installed and properly maintained in every place in a mine
containing apparatus, other than cables, telecommunications and signalling
apparatus.
114. Isolation and fixing of transformer, switchgear, etc.-
(1) Where necessary to prevent danger of mechanical damage transformers
and switchgear shall be placed in a separate room, compartment or box.
(2) Unless the apparatus is so constructed, protected, and worked as to
obviate the risk of fire, no inflammable material shall be used in the construction
of any room, compartment or box containing apparatus, or in the construction of
any of the fittings therein. Each such room, compartment or box shall be
substantially constructed and shall be kept 1[dry and illuminated and efficient
ventilation] shall be provided for all apparatus installed therein.
(3) Adequate working space and means of access, clear of obstruction and
free from danger, shall, so far as circumstances permit, be provided for all
apparatus that has to be worked or attended to and all handles intended to be
operated shall be conveniently placed for that purpose.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
115. Method of earthing- Where earthing is necessary in a mine it shall be
carried out by connection to an earthing system at the surface of the mine, in a
manner approved by the Inspector.
116. Protective equipment-
(1) In the interest of safety, appropriate switchgear with necessary protective
equipment shall be suitably placed in the mine for automatically disconnecting
supply to any part of the system where a fault including an earth fault occurs.
(2) The operation of the switchgear and the relays shall be recorded daily at
the generating station, sub-station or switch station in a register kept for the
purpose.
(3) The effectiveness of the switchgear and the protective 1[system shall
always be kept and maintained in working order, shall be checked once every
three months] and the result thereof shall be recorded in a separate register kept
for the purpose.
117. Earthing metal, etc.-
(1) All metallic sheaths, coverings, handles, joint broxes, switchgear frames,
instrument covers, switch and fuse covers of boxes, all lampholders (unless
efficiently protected by an insulated covering made of fire resisting material), and
the frames and bedplates of generators, transformers and motors (including
portable motors), shall be earthed by connection to an earthing system in the
manner prescribed in rule 115.
(2) Where cables are provided with a metallic covering constructed and
installed in accordance with clause (d) of rule 122, such metallic covering may be
used as a means of connection to the earthing system.
(3) All conductors of an earthing system shall have conductivity, at all parts
and all joints, at least equal to 50 per cent of that of the largest conductor used
solely to supply the apparatus, a part of which it is desired to earth.
Provided that no conductor of an earthing system shall have a cross-sectional
area less than 0.15 sq. cm. except in the case of the earth conductor of a flexible
cable used with portable apparatus where the voltage does nor exceed 125 volts,
and the cross-sectional area and conductance of the earthcore is not less than
that of the largest of the live conductors in the cable.
(4) All joints in earth conductors and all joints in the metallic covering of
cables shall be properly soldered or otherwise efficiently made.
(5) No switch, fuse, or circuit-breaker shall be inserted in any earth conductor.
(6) This rule shall not apply (except in the case of portable apparatus) to any
system in a mine in which the voltage does not exceed 30 volts.
1[118. Voltage limits- Energy shall not be transmitted into a mine at a voltage
exceeding 11000 volts and shall not be used therein at a voltage exceeding 6600
volts.
Provided that:
(a) Where hand-held portable apparatus is used, the voltage shall not exceed
125 volts;
(b) Where electric lighting is used: -
(i) In underground mines, the lighting system shall have a mid or neutral
point connected with earth and the voltage shall not exceed 125 volts between
phases;
(ii) On the surface of a mine or in an open cast mine, the voltage may be
raised to 250 volts, if the neutral or the mid point of the system is connected with
earth and the voltage between the phases does not exceed 250 volts;
(c) Where portable hand-lamps are used in underground working of mine, the
voltage shall not exceed 30 volts;
(d) Where any circuit is used for the remote control or electric interlocking of
apparatus, the circuit voltage shall not exceed 30 volts;
Provided that in fixed plants, the said voltage may be permitted upto 650 volts, if
the bolted type plug is used.]
1. Subs. by GSR 361, dt. 19.3.1983, w.e.f. 7.5.1983.
1[119. Transformers- Where energy is transformed, suitable provision shall be
made to guard against danger by reason of the lower voltage apparatus
becoming accidentally charged above its normal voltage by leakage from or
contact with the higher voltage apparatus.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
120. Switchgear and terminals- Switchgear and all terminals, cable-ends,
cable-joints and connections to apparatus shall be totally enclosed and shall be
constructed, installed and maintained as to comply with the following
requirements: -
(a) All parts shall be of mechanical strength sufficient to resist rough usage;
(b) All conductors and contact areas shall be of adequate current-carrying
capacity and all joints in conductors shall be properly soldered or otherwise
efficiently made;
(c) The lodgement of any matter likely to diminish the insulation or affect the
working of any switchgear shall be prevented;
(d) All live parts shall be so protected or enclosed as to prevent persons
accidentally coming into contact with them and to prevent danger from arcs,
short-circuits, fire, water, gas or oil;
(e) Where there may be risk of igniting gas, coal-dust, oil or other inflammable
material, all parts shall be so protected as to prevent open sparking; and
(f) Every switch or circuit-breaker shall be constructed as to be capable of
opening the circuit, if controls and dealing with any short-circuit without danger.
121. Disconnection of supply-
(1) Properly constructed switchgear for disconnecting the supply of energy to
a mine or oil-field shall be provided 1[***] at a point approved by the Inspector.
During the time any cable supplying energy to the mine from the aforesaid
switchgear is live, a person authorised to operate the said switchgears shall be
available within easy reach thereof.
2[Provided that in the case of gassy coal seam of degree II and degree III, the
main mechanical ventilator operator by electricity shall be interlocked with the
switchgear so as to automatically disconnect the power supply in the event of
stoppage of main mechanical ventilator.]
(2) When necessary in the interest of safety, appropriate apparatus suitably
placed, shall be provided for disconnecting the supply from every part of a
system.
(3) Where considered necessary by the Inspector in the interests of safety,
the apparatus specified in sub-rule (2) shall be so arranged as to disconnect
automatically from the supply any section of the system subjected to a fault.
(4) Every motor shall be controlled by switchgear which shall be so arranged
as to disconnect the supply from the motor and from all apparatus connected
thereto. Such switchgears shall be so placed as to be easily operated by the
person authorised to operate the motor.
3[(5) Whenever required by the Inspector the motor shall be controlled by a
switchgear to disconnect automatically the supply in the event of conditions of
over-current, over-voltage and single phasing.]
1. Omitted by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
3. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 29.1.1983, w.e.f. 12.2.1983.
122. Cables- All cables, other than flexible cables for portable or transportable
apparatus, shall comply with the following requirements:-
(a) All such cables (other than the outer conductor of a concentric cable) shall
be covered with insulating material and shall be efficiently protected from
mechanical damage and supported at sufficiently frequent intervals and in such a
manner as to prevent damage to such cables;
(b) (i) Except as provided in clause (c), no cables other than concentric
cables or two-core or multicore cables protected by a metallic covering or single
core cables protected by a metallic covering and which contain all the conductors
of a circuit shall be used-
(1) Where the voltage exceeds 125 volts, or
(2) When an Inspector considers that there risk of igniting gas or coal-dust or
other inflammable material, and so directs;
(ii) The sheath of metal-sheated cables and the metallic armouring of
armoured cables shall be of a thickness not less than that recommended from
time to time in the appropriate standard of the 1[Bureau of Indian Standards];
(c) Where a medium voltage direct current system is used, two single core
cables may be used for any circuit provided that their metallic coverings are
bounded together by earth conductors so placed that the distance between any
two consecutive bonds is not greater than 30 metres measured along either
cables;
(d) The metallic covering of every cable shall be-
(i) Electrically and mechanically continuous througout;
(ii) Earthed, if it is required by sub-rule (1) of rule 117 to be earthed by a
connection to the earthing system of conductivity not less than of the same
length of the said metallic covering;
(iii) Efficiently protected against corrosion where necessary;
(iv) Of a conductivity at all parts and at all joints at least equal to 50 per cent of
the conductivity of the largest conductor enclosed by the said metallic covering;
and
(v) Where there may be risk of igniting gas, coal-dust, or other inflammable
material, so constructed as to prevent, as far as practicable, the occurrence of
open sparking so as the result of any fault or leakage from live conductors;
(e) Cables and conductors where connected to motors, transformers, switchgear,
and other apparatus, shall be installed so that:-
(i) They are mechanically protected by securely attaching the metallic
covering to the apparatus; and
(ii) The insulating material at each cable end is efficiently sealed so as to
prevent the diminution of its insulating properties;
(f) Where necessary to prevent abrasion or to secure gas-tightness properly
constructed glands or bushes shall be provided;
(g) Unarmoured cables or conductors shall be conveyed either in metallic
pipes or metal casings or suspended from efficient insulators by means of nonconducting
materials which will not cut the covering and which will prevent
contact with any timbering or metal work. If separate insulated conductors are
used, they shall be installed at least 3.75 cm. apart and shall not be brought
together except at lamps, switches and fittings.
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
123. Flexible cables-
(1) Flexible cables for portable or transportable apparatus shall be two-core or
multi-core (unless required for electric welding), and shall be covered with
insulating material which shall be efficiently protected from mechanical injury If
flexible metallic covering is used either as the outer conductor of a concentric
cable or as a means of protection from mechanical injury, it shall not be used by
itself to form an earth conductor for such apparatus, but it may be used for that
purpose in conjunction with an earthing core.
(2) Every flexible cable intended for use with portable or transportable
apparatus shall be connected to the system and to such apparatus by properly
constructed connectors.
Provided that for high voltage machines a bolted type connector shall be used
and the trailing cable shall be suitably anchored at the machine end.
(3) At every point where flexible cables are joined to main cables, a 1[circuit
breaker] shall be provided which is capable of 1[automatically] disconnecting the
supply from such flexible cables.
(4) Every flexible cable attached to a portable or transportable machine shall
be examined periodically by the person authorised to operate the machine, and if
such cable is used underground, it shall be examined at least once in each shift
by such person. If such cable is found to be damaged or defective, it shall
forthwith be replaced by a cable in good condition.
(5) If the voltage of the circuit exceeds low voltage, all flexible cable attached
to any transportable apparatus shall be provided with flexible metallic screening
or pliable armouring.
2[Provided that this sub-rule shall not apply to flexible cables attached to any
transportable apparatus used in open cast mines where reeling and unreeling of
such cables is necessary as per design features of the equipment.]
(6) All flexible metallic screening or armouring specified in sub-rule (5) shall
comply with the provisions of rule 122 (d).
Provided that in the case of separately screened flexible cables the conductance
of each such screen shall not be less than 25 per cent of that the power
conductor and the combined conductance of all such screens shall in no case be
less than that of 0.15 sq. cm. copper conductor.
(7) Flexible cable exceeding 90 metres in length shall not be used with any
portable or transportable apparatus.
Provided that such flexible cable when used with coal-cutting machines for long
wall operation shall not exceed 180 metres in length.
Provided further that the aforesaid cable in case of an open cast mine, when
used with 1[electrically operated heavy earth moving machinery] shall not exceed
300 metres in length.
(8) Flexible cable, when installed in a mine, shall be efficiently supported and
protected from mechanical injury
(9) Flexible cables shall not be used with apparatus other than portable or
transportable apparatus.
(10) Where flexible cables are used they shall be detached or otherwise
isolated from the source of supply when not in use, and arrangements shall be
made to prevent the energising of such cables by unauthorised persons.
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
124. Portable and transportable machines- The person authorised to operate
an electrically driven coal-cutter, or other portable or transportable machine, shall
not leave the machine while it is in operation and shall, before leaving the area in
which such machine is operating, ensure that the supply is disconnected from the
flexible cable which supplies the machine. When any such machine is in
operation, step shall be taken to ensure that the flexible cable is not dragged
along by the machine.
1[Provided that all portable and transportable machines used in
underground mines shall operate on remote control from the concerned
switchgear with Pilot Core Protection.]
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
125. Sundry precautions-
(1) All apparatus shall be maintained reasonably free from dust, dirt and
moisture, and shall be kept clear of obstruction.
(2) All apparatus other than portable and transportable apparatus shall be
housed in a room, compartment or box so constructed as to protect the contents
from damage occasioned by falling material or passing traffic.
(3) Inflammable or explosive material shall not be stored in any room,
compartment or box containing apparatus, or in the vicinity of any apparatus.
(4) Should there be a fault in any circuit, the part affected shall be made dead
without delay and shall remain so until the fault has been remedied.
(5) While lamps are being changed the supply shall be disconnected.
(6) No lamp holder shall be in metallic connection with the guard or other
metal work of a portable hand lamp.
(7) The following notices, in Hindi and local language of the district, so
designed and protected as to be easily legible at all times, shall be exhibited: -
(a) At all places where electrical apparatus is in use, a notice forbidding
unauthorized person to operate or otherwise interfere with such apparatus;
(b) At those places in the interior or at the surface of the mine where a
telephone or other means of communication is provided, a notice giving full
instructions to persons authorized to effect the disconnection, at the surface of
the mine, of the supply of energy to the mine.
(8) All apparatus, including portable and transportable apparatus, shall be
operated only by those persons who are authorised for the purpose.
(9) Where a plug-and-socket-coupling other than of bolted type is used with
flexible cables, and electrical inter-lock or other approved device shall be
provided to prevent the opening of the coupling while the conductors are live.
1[126. Precautions where gas exists-
(1) In any part of a coal-seam of the first degree gassiness-
(a) All cables shall be constructed, installed, protected, operated and
maintained in such a manner as to prevent risk of open sparking;
(b) At any place which lies in-bye of the last ventilation connection, all
2[signalling or telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be so
constructed, installed, protected, operated and maintained as to be intrinsically
safe;
(c) All apparatus including portable and transportable apparatus including
lighting fittings used at any place which lies in bye of the last ventilation
connection shall be flame-proof.
(2) At any place which lies in any part of a coal-seam of second and third
degree gassiness-
(a) All 2[signalling, telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be so
constructed, installed, protected, operated and maintained as to be intrinsically
safe;
(b) All cables shall be constructed, installed, protected, operated and
maintained in such a manner as to prevent risk of open sparking;
(c) All apparatus, including portable and transportable apparatus used at any
place within 90 metres of any working face or goaf in case of a second degree
gassymine and within 270 metres of any working face or goaf in case of third
degree gassymine or at any place which lies in-bye of the last ventilation
connection or in ar-y return airways shall be flame-proof;
(d) All electric lamps shall be enclosed in flame-proof enclosures.
(3) In any oil mine or oil-field, at any place within the Danger Areas, -
(a) All 3[signalling and telecommunication and remote control] circuits shall be
so constructed, installed, operated, protected and maintained as to be
instrinsically safe;
(b) All cables shall be so constructed, installed, operated and maintained as
to prevent risk of open sparking;
(c) All apparatus including portable and transportable apparatus shall be
flame-proof;
(d) All electric lamps shall be enclosed in flame-proof enclosures.
(4) In any coal-seam of degree second and degree third gassiness or the
danger zone of oil-mine the supply shall be discontinued, -
(a) Immediately, if open sparking occurs;
(b) During the period required for examination or adjustment of the apparatus,
which would necessitate the exposing of any part liable to open sparking;
(c) The supply shall not be reconnected until the apparatus has been
examined by the electrical supervisor or one of his duly appointed assistants until
the defect, if any, has been remedied or the necessary adjustment made;
(d) A flame safety lamp shall be provided and maintained in a state of
continuous illumination near an apparatus (including portable or transportable
apparatus) which remains energised and where the appearance of the flame of
such safety lamps indicates the presence of inflammable gas, the supply to all
apparatus in the vicinity shall be immediately disconnected and the incident
reported forthwith to an official of the mine; 4[and such apparatus shall be
interlocked with the controlling switch in such a manner as to disconnect power
supply automatically in the event of percentage of inflammable gas exceeding
one and one quarter in that particular district;]
Provided that where 5[apparatus] for automatic detection of the percentage of
inflammable gas or vapur are employed in addition to the flame safety lamps,
such 5[apparatus] shall be approved by the Inspector of Mines and maintained
perfect order.
(5) (i) In any part of a coal-seam of any degree of gassiness or in 6[any
hazardous] area of an oil-mine, if the presence of inflammable gas in the general
body of air is found any time to exceed one and one quarter 7[per cent], the
supply of energy shall be immediately disconnected from all cables and
apparatus in the area and the supply shall not be reconnected so long as the
percentage of inflammable gas remains in excess of one and one quarter 7[per
cent].
8[In an oil mine where concentration of inflammable gas exceed 20% of its lowest
explosive limit, the supply of electric energy shall be cutoff immediately from all
cables and apparatus lying within 30 metres of the installation and all sources of
ignition shall also be removed from the said area and normal work shall not be
resumed unless the area is made gas-free;]
9[Provided that such disconnection shall no apply to intrinsically safe
environmental monitoring scientific instruments.]
(ii) Any such disconnection or reconnection of the supply shall be noted in the
log sheet which shall be maintained -in the form set out in Annexure-XII and shall
be reported to the Inspector.
(6) The provisions of this rule shall apply to any metalliferous mine which may
be notified by the Inspector of Mines ii inflammable gas occurs or if the Inspector
of Mines is of the opinion that inflammable gas is likely to occur in such mine.
Explanation- For the purpose of this rule, -
(1) The expression coal-seam of first degree gassiness, coal-seam of second
degree gassiness’, ‘coal-seam of third degree gassiness’ and ‘flame-proof
apparatus’, shall have the meanings respectively assigned to them in the Coal
Mines Regulations, 1957.
(2) The following areas in an oil-mine or oil-field shall be known as
6[hazardous areas], namely:-
(a) An area of not less than 90 metres around an oil-well where a blow-out
has occurred or is likely to occur, as may be designated by the engineer-incharge
or the senior most official present at the site;
(b) An area within 90 metres of an oil-well which is being tested by open flow;
(c) An area within 15 metres of-
(i) A producing well-head or any point of open discharge of the crude
therefrom or other point where emission of 10[hazardous atmosphere] is normally
likely to arise, or
(ii) Any wildcat or exploration well-head being drilled in an area where
abnormal pressure conditions are known to exist, or
(iii) Any exploration or interspaced well-head being drilled in the area where
abnormal pressure conditions are known to exist; or
(d) Any area within 4.5 metres of-
(i) Any producing well-head where a closed system of production is
employed such as to prevent the emission accumulation in the area in normal
circumstances of a 10[hazardous atmosphere]; or
(ii) Exploration or interspaced well-head being drilled in an area where the
pressure conditions are normal and where the system of drilling employed
includes adequate measures for the prevention in normal circumstances of
emission or accumulation within the area of a 10[hazardous atmosphere]; or
(iii) An oil-well which is being tested other than by open flow.
Explanation- For the purposes of clause (d) 10[hazardous atmosphere] means an
atmosphere containing any inflammable gases or vapours in a concentration
capable of ignition.
11[(e) All appliances, equipments and machinery that are or may be used in
zone 0, zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas shall be of such type, standard and
make as approved by the Inspector by a general or special order in writing.
Explanation- (i) “Zone 0 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous
atmosphere is continuously present.”
(ii) “Zone 1 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous atmosphere
is likely to occur under normal operating conditions”.
(iii) “Zone 2 hazardous area” means “an area in which hazardous atmosphere
is likely to occur only under abnormal operating conditions”.]
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
2. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
3. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
4. Added by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993
5. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
6. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
7. Added by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
8. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
9.. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
10. Subs. by GSR 253, dt. 19.2.1981, w.e.f. 7.4.1981.
11. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991
127. Shot-firing-
(1) When shot-firing is in progress adequate precautions shall be taken to
protect apparatus and conductors other than those used for shot-firing from
injury.
(2) Current from lighting or power circuits shall not be used for firing shots.
(3) The provisions of rule 123 shall apply in regard to the covering and
protection of shot-firing cables, and adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent such cable touching other cables and apparatus.
128. Signalling- Where electrical signalling is used-
(a) Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent signal and telephone
wires coming into contact with other cables and apparatus;
(b) The voltage used in any one circuit shall not exceed 30 volts; and
(c) Contact-makers shall be so constructed as to prevent the accident closing
of the circuit.
1[(d) Bare conductors, where used shall be installed in suitable insulators.]
1. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
129. Haulage- Haulage by electric locomotives on the overhead trolley-wire
system, at medium or low voltage, and haulage by storage battery locomotives
may be used with the prior consent in writing of the Inspector, and subject to
such conditions as he may impose in the interests of safety
130. Earthing of neutral points- Where the voltage of an alternating current
system exceeds 30 volts, the neutral or mid-point shall be earthed by connection
to an earthing system in the manner prescribed in rule 115.
Provided that when the system concerned is required for blasting and signalling
purposes, the provisions of this rule shall not apply.
1[Provided further that in case of unearthed neutral system adequate protection
shall be provided with the approval of the Inspector.]
1. Ins. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
1[131. Supervision-
1. Subs by GSR 253, dt. 19.2.1983, w.e.f. 7.3.1983.
(1) (i) One or more electrical supervisors as directed by the Inspector
shall be appointed in writing by the owner, agent or manager of a mine or by the
agent or the owner, of one or more wells in an oil field to supervise the
installation.
(ii) The electrical supervisor so appointed shall be the person holding a valid
Electrical Supervisor’s Certificate of Competency, covering mining installation
issued under sub-rule (1) of rule 45.
(iii) If the Inspector considers necessary for the compliance with the duties
specified in this rule, he may direct the owner or agent of the mine to appoint one
or more electricians who shall be persons holding licence under sub-rule (1) of
rule 45.
(2) Every person appointed to operate, supervise, examine or adjust any
apparatus shall be competent to undertake the work which he is required to
carryout as directed by the engineer.
(3) The electrical supervisor shall be responsible for the proper performance
of the following duties, by himself or by electrician appointed under sub-rule (1):-
(a) Through examination of all apparatus (including the testing of earth
conductors and metallic coverings for continuity) as often as may be necessary
to prevent danger;
(b) Examination and testing of all new apparatus, and of all apparatus, reerected
in the mine before it is put into service in a new position.
(4) In the absence of any electrical supervisor for more than three days, the
owner, agent or manager of the mine or the agent or owner of one or more oilwells
in an oil-field, shall appoint in writing a substitute electrical supervisor.
(5) (i) The electrical supervisor or the substitute electrical supervisor
appointed under sub-rule (4) to replace him shall be personally responsible for
the maintenance at the mine or oil-field, of a long book made up of the daily log
sheets prepared in the form set out in Annexure-XII.
(ii) The results of all tests carried out in accordance with the provisions of
sub-rule (3) shall be recorded in the log-sheets prepared in the form set out in
Annexure-XII.]
132. Exemptions- The provisions of rules 110 to 128 both inclusive and rule
131 shall not apply in any case, where, on grounds of emergency or special
circumstances, exemption is obtained from the Inspector. In granting any such
exemption the Inspector may prescribe such conditions as he thinks fit.
CHAPTER XI
MISCELLANEOUS
133. Relaxation by Government-
(1) The State Government, or where mine, oil-fields or railways or works
executed for or on behalf of the Central Government, are affected, the Central
Government, may by order in writing, direct that any of the provisions of rules in
Chapter IV other than rules 44A and 46, and all rules in Chapters V, VI, VII, VIII
and IX shall be relaxed generally or in particular case to such extent and subject
to such conditions as it may think fit.
(2) The Central Government may, by order in writing, direct that any of the
provisions of Chapter X of these rules shall be relaxed in any particular case to
such an extent and subject to such conditions as it may think fit.
134. Relaxation by Inspector- The Inspector, may, by order in writing, direct
that any of the provisions of rules 44, 1[50 (1)(a), (b) and (d), 50 A (2), 51 (1)], 61
(2), 63, 64(2), 65,71 to 73 (inclusive), 76 to 80 (inclusive), go, 2[118], 119(l)(a),
123(5), 123(17), 2[123(9) and 130], shall be relaxed in any case to such extent
and subject to suit conditions as he may think fit.
(2) Where the voltage of any system does not exceed 125 volts the Inspector
may, by order in writing, direct that any of the provisions of rules 29 to 34
(inclusive), 36 to 39 (inclusive), 83, 92, 94 to 107 (inclusive) shall, in addition to
the rules specified in Sub-rule (1), be relaxed as regards such systems to such
extent and subject to such conditions as he may think fit.
(3) Every relaxation so directed shall be reported forthwith to, and shall be
subject to disallowance or revision by, the State Government, or where the
relaxation affects mines, oil-fields or railways, by the Central Government.
1. Subs by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Subs by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
135. Supply and use of energy by non-licensees and others- Where any person
other than a non-licensee is supplied with energy by a non-licensee or other
person or has his premises for the time being connected to the conductors or
plant of a non-licensee or other person, or himself generates energy and uses
such energy or part thereof, such person shall be deemed to be a consumer for
the purposes of rules 9, 10, 29 to 33 (inclusive), 45 to 70 (inclusive), 87 and 142
and non-licensee or other person shall be subject to all the liabilities imposed on
a licensee by these rules.
136. Responsibility of Agents and Managers- Where any person is responsible
for the observance of any of these rules, every agent and manager of such
person shall also be responsible for such observance in respect of matters under
their respective controls.
137. Mode of entry- All persons entering in pursuance of the Act or these rules,
any building which is used as a human dwelling or a place of worship shall, in
making such entry have due regard so far as may be compatible with the
exigencies of the purpose for which such entry is made, to the social and
religious usages or the occupant of the building entered.
138. Penalty for breaking seal- Where, in contravention of rule 56 any seal
referred to in that rule is broken-
(a) The person breaking the seal shall be punishable with fine which may
extend to two hundred rupees; and
(b) The consumer when he has not himself broken the seal shall be
punishable with fine which may extend to fifty rupees unless he proves that he
used all reasonable means in his power to ensure that the seal should not be
broken.
1[138A. Penality for breach of rule 44A- Where, in contravention of rule 44A, any
person responsible for the generation, transformation, transmission, conversion,
distribution, supply or use of energy fails to report to the Inspector and other
authorities concerned the occurrence of accidents, such person shall be
punishable with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
1. Ins. by GSR 523, dt. 28.3.1966, w.e.f. 9.4.1966.
139. Penalty for breach of rule 45- Where any electrical installation work of the
nature specified in sub-rule (1) of rule 45 has been carried out otherwise than--
(a) Under the direct supervision of a person holding a certificate of
competency issued by the State Government under that rules; and
(b) In the absence of any applicable exemption under the proviso to sub-rule
of that rule, by an electrical contractor licensed by the State Government in this
behalf,
The consumer owner or occupier, the contractor (if any) or the person through
whom the work is being or was carried out and the person under whose
immediate supervision the work is being or was carried out, shall each be
punishable with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
1[140. Penalty for breach of rule 82-
(a) Where no notice is given under rule 82(l) or the amount of estimate as
demanded under rule 82(2) is not deposited, both the persons proposing and the
contractor engaged for erecting a new building or structure whether permanent or
temporary or for making in or upon an building or structure any permanent or
temporary additions or alterations, shall be deemed to have committed a breach
of rule 82(l) and shall be punishable with a fine which may extend to three
hundred rupees.
(b) If any person commences or continues any work in contravention of rule
82(3), in or upon any such building, structure, flood bank, road or carries out
addition or alteration thereto, the person contravening the same shall be
punishable with a fine which may extend to three hundred rupees.
In addition to this the supplier shall, after obtaining the concurrence of the
Inspector discontinue the supply, if any, to such building, structure, flood bank, or
road etc. but only after giving forty-eight hours notice to the person concerned in
writing of disconnection of supply and shall not commence the supply until he
and the inspector are satisfied that the cause has been removed.]
1. Subs by GSR 529, dt. 11.7.1986, w.e.f. 19.7.1986.
1[140A. Penalty for breach of rule 77,79 or 80- Where a person is responsible for
any construction which is or which results in contravention of the provisions of
rule 77, 79 or 80 he and the contractor whom he employs shall be punishable
with a fine which may extend to three hundred rupees, and in the case of
continuing breach, with a further daily fine which may extend to fifty rupees.
1. Ins. by GSR 1723, dt. 21.11.1977, w.e.f. 31.12.1977.
141. Penalty for breach of rules- Any person other than an Inspector or any
officer appointed to assist the Inspector who being responsible for the
observance of any of these rules commits a breach thereof, shall be punishable
for every such breach with fine which may extend to three hundred rupees, and
in the case of a continuing breach with a further fine which may extend to fifty
rupees, for every day after first during which the breach has continued.
142. Application of rules- Subject to the provisions of sub-section (2) of section
58, these rules shall be binding on all persons, companies and undertakings to
whom licences have been granted or with whom agreements have been made by
or with the sanction of Government for the supply or use of electricity before the
commencement of the Act.
143. Repeal- The Indian Electricity Rules, 1937, are hereby repealed.
Provided that any order made, notification issued or anything done or any action
taken under any of the said rules shall be deemed to have been made, issued,
done or taken under the corresponding provisions of the rules.
ANNEXURE I
[SEE CLAUSE (C) OF SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 2]
SPECIFICATION RELATING TO THE DEPOSITION OF SILVER
The electrolyte shall consist of a solution of from 15 to 20 parts by weight of silver
nitrate in 100 parts of distilled water. The solution must only be used once and
only for so long that not more than 30 per cent of the silver in the solution is
deposited.
The anode shall be of silver, and the cathode of platinum. The current density at
the anode shall no exceed 1/5 ampere per square centimetre and at the cathode
1/50 ampere per square centimetre.
Not less than 100 cubic centimetres of electrolyte shall be used in a voltmeter.
Care must be taken that no particles which may become mechanically detached
from the anode shall reach the cathode.
Before the weighing, any traces of solution adhering to the cathode must be
removed and the cathode dried.
ANNEXURE II
[SEE SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 7]
SCALE OF FEES FOR COMPARISON WITH
THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIASTANDARDS
REFERRED TO IN SUB-RULE (1) OF RULE 2
Rs.
For an instrument intended to be used as a sub-standard and submitted
for special examination and testing
80
If required to be kept under observation for a period longer than one
month, for each additional month or part of a month
40
For determining a resistance of standard form to highest accuracy
obtainable at one temperature
20
For determining the E.M.F. of a standard cell to highest accuracy
obtainable at one temperature
15
Note 1: - The instruments and apparatus under test are to be delivered and
removed from the Government Electrical Laboratory, Bhowanipore, Calcutta, free
of cost to Government.
Note 2: - In tests requiring the expenditure of a considerable amount of
power, a charge to cover the actual cost of the energy used may be made.
ANNEXURE III
[SEE RULE 14]
MODEL FORM OF DRAFT LICENCE UNDER THE INDIAN
ELECTRICITY ACT, 1910
[SEE SECTION 3]
Electric Licence 19…………
Draft Licence
The……… Electric Licence,……….. 19……..
Licence for the supply of energy granted by the Government………..of under the
Indian Electricity Act, 1910.
Licence is hereby granted to 1……………………… (carrying on business in partnership
under the name and style of)…………to supply electrical energy in the area2, with
the powers and upon the terms and conditions specified below:-
SHORT TITLE
1. This licence may be cited as “The 3Electrical Licence 19…………….”.
INTERPRETATION
2. In this licence-
(1) “The Act” shall mean the Indian Electricity Act, 1910.
(2) The expression “the licensee” shall mean and read the said4, and their (or
his) assigns; and
(3) The expression “deposited maps” shall mean the plans of the area of
supply hereinafter specified which has been deposited with Government in
pursuance of the rules under the Act, which plans are signed for the purpose of
identification by the Secretary to the Government of in the .........................
Department and by the applicants under the name and style of………..
(4) Other words and expressions have the same meanings as are assigned to
them in the Act or the rules made there under.
SECURITY5
3. (1) The period within which, under Clause l (a) of the Schedule to the
Act, the licensee shall show that he is in a position fully and efficiently to
discharge the duties and obligations imposed on him shall be
(2) The period within which, under Clause l (b) of the Schedule to the Act, the
licensee shall deposit or secure such sum as therein mentioned, and the sum so
to be deposited or secured, shall unless otherwise ordered by the Government
under that clause be……… and Rupees………….respectively.
AREA OF SUPPLY6
4. The area within which the supply of energy is authorized by the licence
(the area of supply) under the Act is the whole of the area bounded as follows: -
North - By
East - By
South - By
West - By
The boundaries whereof are delineated in the deposit maps.
Power to lay mains outside area of Supply7.
5. The licensee may lay down or place electric supply-lines for the
conveyance and transmission of energy from a generating station situated or to
be situated at outside the area of supply to the boundary or the area of supply.
Limits within which the supply of energy is to be compulsory8
6. (1) The works to be executed to the satisfaction of the Government
under Clause IV of the Schedule to the Act are the following namely:-’
(2) If the licensee fails to comply with the provisions of sub-clause (1), the
licence may be revoked. *
NATURE OF SUPPLY9
7. (l) The nature of supply shall be................ or such other as the State
Government may allow.
Breaking up of streets, railways and tramways10.
8. The licensee is specially authorised to open and break up the soil and
pavement of the following streets or parts of streets which are not repairable by
the Government or by a local authority, and of the following railways and
tramways or part of railways and tramways, namely: -
(a) Streets.
(b) Railways11.
(c) Tramways11.
APPOINTMENT OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
9. The licensee shall employ a Resident Electrical Engineer degree or
diploma in electrical engineering from a recognised University or College or
Qualifications equivalent to such degree or diploma and such practical
experience as the State Government may specify in this behalf.
PURCHASE OF UNDERTAKINGS
10. (1) The option of purchase given by sub-section (1) of section 6 of the
Act shall be exercisable on the expiry of a period of 20 years, i.e. from the date of
notification of this licence and on the expiry of every subsequent period of 10
years12. The terms of such purchase shall be13. The percentage of the value to
be determined in accordance with and for the purpose of sub-sections (1) and (2)
of section 7A of the Act of the lands, buildings, works, materials and plant of the
licensee therein mentioned to be added under the proviso to sub-section (4) of
section 7A to such value on account of compulsory purchase shall be ................
per cent.
(2) In accordance with clause (d) (ii) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act,
it is hereby declared that the generating station to be used in connection with the
undertaking shall/shall not form part of the undertaking for the purpose of
purchase under section 5 or section 6. 14
ADDITIONS TO VARIATIONS FROM, AND EXCEPTIONS
FROM THE SCHEDULE TO THE ACT15
11. (1) In pursuance of clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act,
it is hereby expressly declared that the provisions contained in the Schedule to
the Act shall for the purposes of this licence be supplemented by the addition of
the following clauses, namely:-
(2) In pursuance of clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act it is
hereby expressly declared that the clause/clauses of the schedule to the Act
mentioned below shall be varied in the manner hereinafter indicated, namely 16:
(3) In pursuance of clause (o or sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act, it is
hereby expressly declared that the clause/clauses 16 of the Schedule to the Act
shall be excepted from incorporation in this licence.
Note- In the preparation of a draft licence the above model form may be varied,
or added to, by the applicant so far as the Act and rules admit.
Rules Nos. 11 to 15 (inclusive) as to applications for licences should be
consulted. In drawing up a draft licences the attention of the applicant is more
particularly directed to the following sections of the Act viz. 3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 12, 21,
22, 22A, 22B, 23, 27, 51 and 57; the powers under section 51 can only be
conferred after the grant of the licence.
In the case of licences for bulk supply, see Clause ix of the Schedule to the Act
and the proviso to Clause (f) of sub-section (2) of section 3 of the Act, also
clause (b) of section 10 of the Act.
Signature of Applicant or his agent (if any)
Address of Applicant.
1. The licensee may be any local authority, company or individual. In case of
firm, give names of all the directors or partners.
2. See clause 4.
3. Short title to agree with heading.
4. Name of all directors or partners as in the preamble in the case of a firm.
5. See section 4(l)(c) of the Act and Clause I of the Schedule to the Act.
6. The area for which each local authority is constituted should be distinctly
marked or coloured. See rule 11(l)(b).
7. This clause should be retained only where the licensee is to supply energy
from a generating station outside the area of supply. Where power to cross an
intervening area is sought under section 3(l) of the Act, enter details here.
8. Set, section 3(2)(ci) of the Act.
9. It is open to the licensee to propose a “Compulsory area” or the State
Government to make provision for such an area. Ordinarily it will be sufficient to
enter here the names of “compulsory street” in which the licensee will lay
distributing mains. If no compulsory works are specified in the licence, the State
Government may subsequently direct that works are to be executed; see Clause
IV of the Schedule to the Act.
* See note to sub-clause (1) of this Clause.
10. This clause to be omitted if no such powers are required in the licence.
See section 12(5) of the Act and proviso to the same. Powers can be obtained
subsequently; see rule 23.
11. In ordinary cases the level-crossings or points at which interference is
proposed must be specified.
12. The period after which an option to purchase arises may be less than 20
and 10 years, respectively
13. The terms must not differ from those laid down in the Act unless the
powers of section 10 are invoked to modify or cancel them.
14. The generating station or stations belonging to the licensee should
ordinarily be included except where they form part of a traction undertaking
previously authorised.
15. To be omitted if not required in any draft licence.
16. The letter part of the clause may require modification according to the
circumstance.
ANNEXURE IV
[See Rule 26(3)]
SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL AND FINANCIAL
PARTICULARS FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH 19...
Figures of the Previous year: -
TECHNICAL
1. Year of working.
2. Area of supply in square km.
3. Approximate population in the area of supply.
4. Installed capacity:
(a) Generating plant (excluding retired plant):
(i) Hydraulic kW
(ii) Steam kW
(iii) Internal combustion kW
TOTAL kW
(b) Receiving Station:
Transformers
5. Normal maximum demand on the system kVA
6. kWh generated:
(i) Hydraulic kWh
(ii) Steam kWh
(iii) Internal combustion kWh
TOTAL kWh
7. kWh used for Generating Station Auxiliaries.
8. KWh purchased from other agencies.
9. kWh available for sale (6-7) + 8
10. KWh supplied free (if any) to officers & staff.
11. KWh supplied free (if any) to office, canteen etc.
12. KWh sold.
13. KWh unaccounted for 9-(10+11+12).
14. Fuel:
(a) (i) Coal and/or furnace oil consumed in tonnes
(ii) Average calorific value per kg of coal and/or furnace oil consumed
(iii) Average cost of coal and/or furnace oil per tonnes
(b) (i) Oil consumed in tonnes
(ii) Average calorific value per kg. of oil consumed
(iii) Average cost of oil per tonne.
15. Lubricating oil:
(a) Quantity consumed Litres.
(b) Average cost per litre
16. Consumers: No. Connected load kW
(a) Domestic or Residential
(b) Commercial
(c) Industrial:
(i) Low and medium voltage
(ii) High and/or extra-high voltage
TOTAL
17. Segregation of kWh sold-
(i) Domestic or Residential:
(a) Lights* and Fans.
(b) Heating and small power.
(ii) Commercial:
(a) Lights* and Fans.
(b) Heating and small power.
(iii) Industrial Power:
(a) Low and medium voltage.
(b) High voltage.
(iv) Public Lighting.
(v) Traction.
(vi) Irrigation.
(vii) Public Water-works and Sewage Pumping.
(viii) Supplies in bulk to Distributing Licensees.
18. Number of persons employed on regular basis;
(i) Technical-
1. Supervisory.
2. Others.
(ii) Administrative-
1. Supervisory
2. Others.
19. Length of Main Lines erected during the year-
(i) Length of transmission lines at different voltages-
(a) Overhead...................................
(b) Underground.............................
(ii) Length of distribution lines
FINANCIAL-
1. Share Capital (paid up)
2. Loan Capital (other than loans advanced by the State Electricity Board)
3. Licensee’s Capital (1+2)
4. Total Capital Expenditure
5. Capital base [vide Paragraph XVII (1) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
6. Reasonable Return [vide Paragraph XVII (9) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948].
7. Clear Profit [vide Paragraph XVII (2) of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
8. Maximum sum permissible for distribution to share and debenture holders
[vide Paragraph II (1) of the Sixth Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948]
9. Actual sum available for distribution to share and debenture holders
10. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (3)
11. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (4)
12. Item (9) expressed as a % of item (5)
13. Dividend declared for the year
(a) On ordinary shares
(b) on preference shares
14. Market Price of shares:
(a) Ordinary shares
(b) Preference shares
15. Operating Revenues (vide Statement III-Annexure V)
16. Operating Expenses including depreciation (vide Statement IV Annexure
V)
17. Depreciation set apart for the year (vide Statement V-Annexure V)
18. Revenue per kWh sold (overall) (Item 15-kWh sold)
19. Revenue per kWh sold-
(i) Domestic or Residential:
(a) Lights* and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
(ii) Commercial:
(a) Lights* and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
(iii) Industrial Power:
(a) Low and medium voltage
(b) High voltage
(iv) Public Lighting
(v) Traction
(vi) Irrigation
(vii) Public Water-works and Sewage Pumping
(viii) Supplies in bulk of Distributing Licensees
20. Cost per kWh sold (overall) (Item 16-kWh sold)
* Including unmetered supply
ANNEXURE V
MODEL FORM OF ACCOUNTS
[SEE SECTION 11 OF INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT, 1910 AND
RULES 26(3)]
ELECTRIC LICENCE, 19......
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF LICENCE
Name of Undertaking Year of Operation
NO. I - STATEMENT OF SHARE AND LOAN CAPITAL FOR THE YEAR ENDED
31ST MARCH, 19.....
(APPLICABLE TO LICENSEES OTHER THAN LOCAL AUTHORITY
LICENSEES)
Description
of Capital
Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Receipt
during the
year
Redeemed
during the
year
Balance at
the end of
the year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
A. Share Capital Authorised Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of………….. Rs each.
.......... % Preference shares of Rs…….. each
Issued Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs……………… each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs…………each
Subscribed capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs…………each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……….each
Called up capital:
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs……….each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……………each
Less calls in arrears
Paid-up Capital
.......... Ordinary Shares of Rs………..each
.......... % Preference shares of Rs……….each
TOTAL PAID TO CAPITAL
B. Capital Reserve
Share Forfeiture a/c
Share Premium a/c
Other items (to be specified)
TOTAL CAPITAL RESERVE
C. Loan Capital-Loans from State Electricity Boards per cent debentures of
Rs……………… each.
Other Loans-
(i) Secured
(ii) Unsecured
TOTAL LOANS CAPITAL
D. Other Capital
Contribution from consumer including local authorities for service-lines and public
lighting after the commencement of the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
TOTAL OTHER CAPITAL
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED AND APPROPRIATED
(A+B+C+D)
Note: Capital invested by proprietor, partnership, co-operative society, company
etc. licensee which is interest bearing should be shown under ‘C-Unsecured
loans and advances’ and that which is interest-free should be shown under ‘DSpecial
items (to be specified)’.
ELECTRIC LICENCE, 19........
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF LICENCE
Name of Local Authority Year of Operation
NO. I (AL)- STATEMENT OF LOANS RAISED AND REDEEMED
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19..
(APPLICABLE TO LOCAL AUTHORITY LICENSEES)
Description
of loans
raised from
time to time
Amount
sanctioned
Rate % Period of
Payment
Amount of
Annual
instalment
From To
1 2 3 4 5 6
Amount of
loan
redeemed
upto the
beginning
of the year
Amount of
loan
redeemed
during the
year
Total loan
redeemed upto
the end of the
year
Balance of
loan
outstanding
at the end
of the year
Remarks
7 8 9 10 11
Total loans raised for the electrification scheme……………………………
NO. I (A2) -STATEMENT OF LOAN AND OTHER CAPITAL FOR
THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19.......
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning of
the year
Received
during the
year
Redeemed
during the
year
Balance at
the end of
the year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
A. Capital Raised
Amount of loans outstanding [as per col. 10 of statement I-A(I)]
Grants and advances made from the general funds of the local authority Grantsin-
aid from Government
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED
B. Capital Reserve
Loan redemption account [as per col. 9 of statement IA(l)] Other items (to be
specified)
TOTAL CAPITAL RESERVE
C. Other Capital
Consumer’s contributions for service lines after the commencement of the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
Special items (to be specified)
TOTAL OTHER CAPITAL
TOTAL CAPITAL RAISED AND APPROPRIATED
(A+B+C)
NO.II - STATEMENT OF CAPITAL EXPENDITURE FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19........
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Additions
during the
year
Requirements
during the
year vide col.
3 Statement
II-A
Balance at
he end of
the year
Remarks
A. Intangible Assets:
1. Preliminary & Promotional expenses
2. Cost of Licence
3. Other expenses e.g., expenses incidental to conversion from DC to AC
change of frequency etc.
TOTAL INTANGIBLE ASSETS
B. Hydraulic Power Plant:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and civil engineering works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Hydraulic works forming part of a hydroelectric system including
(i) Dams, spillways, weirs, canals, reinforced concrete flumes and cyphons,
(ii) reinforced concrete pipe lines and search tanks, steel pipe lines, sluice gates,
steel surge tanks, hydraulic control valves and other hydraulic works
4. Water wheels, Generators and ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Switchgear including cable connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL HYDRAULIC POWER PLANT
C. Steam Power Plant:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and civil engineering works containing generating plant &
equipment
3. Boiler plant and equipment including plant foundations
4. Engines, Turbines, generators and ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Water cooling system comprising cooling towers and circulating water
systems
6. Switchgear including cable connections
7. Miscellaneous power plant and equipment
8. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL STEAM POWER PLANT
D. Internal Combustion Power Plant:
1. Land and Rights
2. Building and civil engineering works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Engines, generators, and ancillary equipment including plant foundations
4. Water cooling system comprising cooling towers and circulating water
systems
5. Switchgear including cable connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
TOTAL INTERNAL COMBUSTION POWER PLANT
E. Transmission Plant (High or Extra-High Voltage):
1. Land and Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-section equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations:-
(i) Transformers, including foundations having rating of ‘100 kilovolt amperes
and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, poles, fixures, overhead conductors and devices:-
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified)
TOTAL TRANSMISSION PLANT
F. Distribution Plant-High Voltage:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations-
(i) Transformers including foundations having a rating of 100 kilovolt
amperes and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, Poles, Fixtures, Overhead conductors and devices:
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages, higher than 13.2 Kilo Volts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Service lines
8. Metering equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified):
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION PLANT (HV)
G. Distribution Plant-Medium and low voltage:
1. Land & Rights
2. Buildings and structures including civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
3. Sub-station transformers, transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment and
other fixed apparatus including plant foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations having a rating of 100 kilo volt
amperes and over
(ii) Others
4. Switchgear including cable connections
5. Towers, Poles, Fixtures, Overhead conductors and devices:
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced concrete supports
(ii) Lines on wood supports
6. (i) Underground cables and devices including joint boxes and
disconnecting boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
7. Service lines
8. Metering equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipments (to be specified)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (M&LV)
H. Public Lighting:
Street and Signal lighting system
1. General Equipment:
(Not allocated to other sub-heads)
1. Land and Rights
2. Buildings and structures
3. Office furniture and equipment
4. Transportation equipment
5. Laboratory and meter testing equipment
6. Workshop plant and equipment
7. Tools and work equipment
8. Communication equipment
9. Miscellaneous equipment
TOTAL GENERAL EQUIPMENT
TOTAL CAPITAL ASSETS IN USE
Note- (1) Capital expenditure on items F7 and G7 should include
contributions made by consumers towards service line charges,
(2) Where it is not possible to give segregation of capital expenditure in
respect of certain items and where high, medium or low voltage distribution lines
are carried on same supports, the combined figures for such items may be given.
(3) Retirements during the year referred to in Col. 4 in respect of: (i) intangible
assets relate to amounts written off during the year, (ii) tangible assets relate to
the original cost of assets transferred to the special account under paragraph VII
of the with Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. II-A - STATEMENT SHOWING THE WRITTEN DOWN COST
OF FIXED ASSETS RETIRED ON ACCOUNT OF OBSOLESCENCE
INADEQUACY, SUPERFLUITY, ETC.
Particulars
of the
assets
Written
down
cost of
assets at
the
beginning
of he
year
Written
down cost
of assets
retired
during the
year vide
Col. 4 St.
II less
Col. 8
Statement
V
Written
down
cost of
assets
sold
during
the
year
Amount
realised
during
the
year
Excess of
sale
proceeds
over written
down cost
transferred to
contingencies
Reserve
Account vide
Col. 4 of
Statement VI
Amount
written off
during
the year
vide col.
6
statement
VI
Balance
of
written
down
cost at
the end
of the
year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO. III STATEMENT OF OPERATING REVENUES FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19.........
Particulars of revenue Corresponding
amount for the
previous year
of account
Amount
for the
year of
account
Remarks
1 2 3 4
A. Net Revenue by sale of electricity
for cash & credit:
1. Domestic or residential
(a) Lights and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
2. Commercial
(a) Lights and Fans
(b) Heating and small power
3. Industrial
(a) Low and Medium voltage
(b) High voltage
4. Public Lighting
5. Public Water works and Sewage
pumping
6. Irrigation
7. Traction
8. Supplies in bulk to distributing
licences
TOTAL REVENUES BY SALE OF
ELECTRICITY
B. Miscellaneous Revenue from
Consumers:
1. Rentals from
(a) Meters
(b) Electric motors, fittings, appliances
& other apparatus hired to consumers
2. Service connection fees
3. Public Lighting Maintenance.
TOTAL MISCELLANEOUS REVENUE
FROM CONSUMERS
C. Other Revenues:
1. Sale of Stores
2. Repairs of lamps and other
apparatus
3. Commission for the collection of
electricity duty
4. Other miscellaneous items (to be
specified)
TOTAL OTHER REVENUES
TOTAL OPERATING REVENUES
Deduct-
Total Operating expenses as per St. IV
Net surplus or deficit carried to the Net
Revenue and
Appropriations account-St. X
NO. IV - STATEMENT OF OPERATING EXPENSES FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars of expenses Corresponding
amount for the
previous year
of account
Amount
for the
year of
account
Remarks
1 2 3 4
A. HYDRAULIC POWER
GENERATION
(a) Operation
1. Water for power
2. Lubricants and other consumable
stores
3. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
4. Proportion of salaries, allowances
gratuities, etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, Supervisory and
the staff
5. Wages and gratuities to labour
6. Contribution to Provident Fund, staff
pension & apprentice & other training
schemes
7. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b) Maintenance
1. Salaries for Supervisory staff
2. Buildings and civil engineering
works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Hydraulic works forming part of a
hydro electric system, including-
(i) Dams, spillways, weirs, canals
reinforced concrete flumes and syphons
(ii) Reinforced concrete pipelines and
surge tanks, steel pipelines, sluice gates,
steel surge tanks, hydraulic control valves
and other hydraulic works
4. Water wheels, generators and
ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
7. Other Civil works (to be specified)
8. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
9. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation
Depreciation to Hydraulic Power
Generating Plant and Equipment (From
Statement V)
TOTAL HYDRAULIC POWER
GENERATION EXPENSES
B. STEAM POWER GENERATION
(a) Operation
1. Fuel (excluding sale proceeds of
steam ashes, etc.)
2. Lubricants and other consumable
stores
3. Water (if purchased separately)
4. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
5. Proportion of salaries, allowances
gratuities, etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, Supervisory and
the staff
6. Wages and gratuities to labour
7. Contribution to Provident Fund, staff
pension & apprentice & other training
schemes
8. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b) Maintenance
1. Salaries for Supervisory staff
2. Building and civil engineering works
containing generating plant and equipment
3. Boiler plant and equipment
including plant foundations
4. Engines, turbines, generators and
ancillary equipment including plant
foundations
5. Water cooling system comprising
cooling towers and circulating water
systems
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
8. Other Civil works (to be specified)
9. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
10. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation
Depreciation on Steam Power Generating
Plant and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL STEAM POWER GENERATION
EXPENSES
C. INTERNAL COMBUSTION POWER
GENERATION:
(a) Operation
1. Fuel
2. Lubricants and other consumble
stores
3. Water (if purchased separately)
4. Station supplies and miscellaneous
expenses
5. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities etc. of Engineers,
Superintendents, Officers, supervisory and
other staff
6. Wages and gratuities to labour
7. Contributions to Provident Fund,
Staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
8. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL OPERATION
(b)Maintenance
1. Salaries for supervisory staff.
2. Buildings and civil engineering
works containing generating plant and
equipment
3. Engines, generators and ancillary
equipment including plant foundations
4. Water cooling system comprising
cooling towers and circulating water
system
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Miscellaneous power plant and
equipment
7. Other civil works (to be specified)
8. Contributions to provident fund, staff
pension and apprentice and other training
schemes
9. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking
TOTAL MAINTENANCE
(c) Depreciation:
Depreciation on Internal Combustion
Power Generating Plant and Equipment
(from Statement V)
TOTAL INTERNAL COMBUSTION
POWER GENERATION EXPENSES
D. POWER PURCHASED:
TOTAL PRODUCTION EXPENSES
(A+B+C+D)
E. TRANSMISSION (HIGH OR
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGE):
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers,
superintendents officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wages and gratuities to sub-station
labour
3. Wages and gratuities to labour on
lines
4. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
5. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having rating of 100 kilovolt amperes and
over
(ii) Others
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports.
8. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnecting
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
9. Contribution to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension
(b) Depreciation on Transmission Plant
and equipment (from Statement V).
TOTAL TRANSMISSION EXPENSES
F. DISTRIBUTION (HIGH VOLTAGE):
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc., of engineers,
superintendents, officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wages and gratuities of sub-station
labour
3. Wages and gratuities to labour for
mains
4. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
distribution plant and equipment
5. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having a rating of 100 Kilovolt amperes
and over
(ii) Others
6. Switchgear including cable
connections
7. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports operating at nominal
voltages higher than 13.2 kilovolts
(ii) Other lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(iii) Lines on wood supports
8. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnection
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
9. Service Lines
10. Metering Equipment
11. Contributions to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension.
(b) Depreciation on Distribution Plant
and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (H.V) EXPENSES
G. DISTRIBUTION MEDIUM AND
LOW VOLTAGE:
(a) Operation and Maintenance:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers,
superintendents, officers, supervisory and
other staff
2. Wage and Gratuities to labour
3. Buildings and structures including
civil engineering works containing
transmission plant and equipment
4. Sub-station transformers,
transformer kiosks, sub-station equipment
and other fixed apparatus including plant
foundations
(i) Transformers including foundations
having rating of 100 kilovolt amperes and
over
(ii) Others
5. Switchgear including cable
connections
6. Towers, poles, fixtures, overhead
conductors and devices
(i) Lines on steel or reinforced
concrete supports
(ii) Lines and wood supports
7. (i) Underground cables and devices
including joint boxes and disconnecting
boxes
(ii) Cable duct system
8. Service lines
9. Metering equipment
10.Contributions to Provident Fund or staff
person
(b) Depreciation on Distribution Plant
and equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION (M.&L.V)
EXPENSES
H. PUBLIC LIGHTING:
(a) Operation and maintenance
1. Operation and maintenance
2. Renewal of lamps
(b) Depreciation PL. System and
Equipment (from Statement V)
TOTAL PUBLIC LIGHTING EXPENSES
CONSUMERS’ SERVICING, METER
READING, BILLING,COLLECTING,
ACCOUNTING, SALES PROMOTING,
ETC.
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of engineers, secretary,
accountants, other officers etc.
2. Meter reading and inspection
3. Billing, collecting and accounting
4. Exhibition, demonstrations and
advertisements
5. Merchandising, servicing and
contract work
6. Miscellaneous expenses
7. Contributions to Provident Fund or
Staff Pension
8. Depreciation on general assets and
equipment, which are not allocated to
other sub-heads (from Statement V)
TOTAL CONSUMERS’ SERVICING,
METER READING, ETC. EXPENSES
K. GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT
CHARGES:
1. Proportion of salaries, allowances,
gratuities, etc. of general officers,
executive, etc.
2. Salaries, wages, gratuities, etc. of
general office staff
3. Contribution to local authority
administration for supervision (applicable
to local authority licensee only)
4. Travelling and other expenses of
officers and staff
5. Rents and Way leaves
6. Rates and Taxes
7. General Office expenses and
showroom maintenance and supplies
8. Repairs to office buildings, staff
quarters, furniture and fixtures, office
equipment etc., and maintenance
9. Depreciation on office and general
buildings, furniture, etc. not allocated to
other sub-heads (from Statement V)
10. Audit Services:
(a) Auditor of company
(b) Auditor appointed under the
provisions of the Act
11. Legal services
12. Insurance expenses.
13. Contributions to Provident Fund,
staff pension and apprentice and other
training schemes
14. Bonus paid to the employees of the
undertaking.
TOTAL GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT
CHARGES
L. OTHER CHARGES:
1. Interest paid and accrued on:
(a) Loans advanced by the State
Electricity Board
(b) Depreciation fund
(c) Consumer’s Security deposit
2. Bad debts written off
3. Other items (to be specified)
TOTAL OTHER CHARGES
M. MANAGEMENT EXPENSES
1. Director’s fees and expenses and
debenture Trustees’ fees; if any
2. Other Expenses
TOTAL MANAGEMENT EXPENSES
TOTAL OPERATING EXPENSES
TRANSFERRED TO STATEMENT-III
Note- (1) No appointment of expenses under sub-head ‘M’ be made to any of
the salary items under A(a), 4, B-(a)5, C-(a)5, E-8(a)l, F(a)l, G(a)l, J-1 and K-1,
which shall include the proportion of salaries and allowances of persons solely
employed for the purpose of the undertaking and of the engineering staff
employed by the Managing Agents under the provision of sub-para (3) of Para
XIII of the Sixth Schedule to the E(S) Act, 1948.
(2) Managing agent in this context refers to the managerial personnel as
given in the explanation under Paragraph XIII of the Sixth Schedule to the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. V - STATEMENT FOR PROVISION FOR DEPRECIATION FOR
THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19
Balance of
accured
depreciation
brought
forward
Balance of
arrear of
depreciation
brought
forward
Additions during the year Withdrawals
during
the year
vide col.3
Balance of
accrued
depreciation
carried over
to next
Balance of
arrears of
depreciation
carried over
to next
from last
account
from last
account
statement
II-A
account account
Interest
@ 4%
per
annum
on the
balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
under
para VI(I)
of the
Sixth
Schedule
to the
E(S) Act
1948
Depreciation
provide for
the year
Arrears of
deprecition
written off
during the
year
Total
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
aulic Power Plant:
m Power-Plant:
nal Combustion Plant:
smission Plants High or Extra-High Voltage:
ibution Plant High Voltage:
ibution Plant Medium and Low Voltage:
ic Lighting:
eral Equipment:
……………………….
Note- 1. Withdrawals from the depreciation account are permissible only to
the extent of past provisions made in respect of asset withdrawn from use and
transferred during the year to the special account under Para VIII of the sixth
Schedule to the E(S) Act, 1948.
2. A sum of Rs...........................................................from the accruals in the
depreciation account has been invested in securities in persuance of the
provisions of paragraphs XVIII (i) (d) of the Sixth Schedule to the E (S) Act, 1948.
NO. VI - STATEMENT OF CONTINGENCIES RESERVE FOR THE YEAR
ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19
Particulars Balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
Additions during the year Withdrawls during the year Balance
at he
end of
the year
Remarks
Appropriations
during the
year
Additions
under
paragraph
IX of the
sixth
schedule
to the
E(S) Act,
1948,
vide Col.
6 of
statement
II-A
Total Amount
written off
under
sub-para
(2) of
para VII
of the
Sixth
Schedule
to the
E(s) Act,
1948 vide
Col. 7 of
Statement
II-A
Expenses
and/or
compensation
under para V,
sixth
schedule of
the E(S) Act,
1948
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note- A sum of Rs.........................................................from the balance of the
Contingencies Reserve has been invested under the provisions of paragraph
IV(2) of the Sixth Schedule to the Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
NO. VII - STATEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT RESERVE ACCOUNT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19………
ce
the
ning
the
Development
rebate for
the year
permissible
under the
Indian
Development
reserve
permissible
for the year
under the
para VA(1)
Actual
appropriation
made under
the proviso
to para VA
(1) of the
Unabsorbed development reserve to be
appropriated in future years under paragraph
VA (2) of the sixth schedule to the Electricity
(Supply) Act, 1948
Balance
at he
end of
the year
Col.
(1+2+8)
Re
Income Tax
Act, 1961
(As per
details
attached)
of the sixth
schedule to
the E(S) Act,
1948 being
the amount
of relief on
Income Tax
& super Tax
on the
amount of
development
rebate
sixth
schedule to
the E(S) Act,
1948
Balance
at he
beginning
of the
year
Current
years
balance
Col. (3-
)
Total Instalment
appropriated
during the
year
Balance
awaited
adjustment
Col. (7-8)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO. VIII - STATEMENT OF TARIFFS AND DIVIDENDS CONTROL RESERVE
ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Distributed to
consumers
during the year
under
paragraph II(I)
of the sixth
schedule to the
E(S) Act, 1948
Appropriated
during the
year
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. IX STATEMENT CONSUMER’S REBATE RESERVE ACCOUNT FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars Balance at
the
beginning of
the year
Distributed to
consumers
during the year
under
paragraph II(I)
of the sixth
schedule to the
E(S) Act, 1948
Appropriated
during the
year
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. X - STATEMENT OF SPECIAL APPROPRIATIONS PERMITTED BY
STATE GOVERNMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Particulars
giving
reference to
the sanction
of the State
Government
permitting
the
appropriation
Balance at
the
beginning
of the year
Additions by
may of
appropriation
during the
year
Transfer by
way of reappropriation
during the
year (details
to be given
in the
remarks
column)
Balance
at the end
of the
year
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO. XI - STATEMENT OF NET REVENUE AND APPROPRIATIONS
ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31ST MARCH, 19....
Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. To Balance of loss brought
forward from last account.
2. To net operating deficit as per
Statement III.
3. To appropriations (applicable to
local
Authority Licensee only):-
(a) Interest on loan capital
(b) Instalment of redemption of loan
capital, as per (col 8 of St. 1.(A) (1).
(c) General Rates.
1. By Balance of profit brought forward
from last account.
2. By net operating surplus as per
Statement-III.
3. By interest on securities
investments.
4. By other receipts (non-operating
rents) outgoing not other
provided for transfer fee etc. specified.)
5. Adjustment in respect of excess
provision of income-tax.
4. (a) Provision for taxes on
Income and profit for the year
Rs………….
6. By Balance of loss carried over.
(b) Additional short provision in
respect of year 19... . ............
5. To instalment of write-down in
respect of intangible assets.
6. To instalment of contribution
towards arrears of Depreciation as per
Statement V-Column 6.
7. To contribution towards
Contingencies Reserve as per
Statement VI-Column 3.
8. To appropriation towards
development Reserve as per
Statement VII- Column 4 or 8 or 4+8.
9. To appropriation to Tariffs and
Dividends Controls Reserve, as per
Statement VIII-Column 3.
10. To appropriation to Consumers’
Rebate Reserve, as per Statement IX
column 4.
11. To other special appropriation
permitted
No by the State Government, as per
Statement X- Column 3.
12. To appropriation towards
interest paid and accrued and
dividends paid and payable:-
(a) Interest on debentures.
(b) Interest on loans borrowed from
Organisation or Institution approved by
the State Government.
(c) Interest on other secured loans.
(d) Interest on unsecured loans,
advances, deposits, bank over-drafts,
etc
(e) Dividends on preference share
capital.
(f) Dividends on ordinary share
capital. To balance of profit carried
over.
NO. XII - GENERAL BALANCE SHEET AS ON 31ST MARCH, 19
Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount Corresponding
figures of
previous year
Particulars Amount
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Capital raised and
appropriated vide Statement-I or
I-A
Reserve and Surplus.
1. Capital amount expended on
works in use-Statement-II.
Less-Accumulated provisions for
depreciation-Statement V
Net Block.
2. Non-statutory Reserve.
2. Balance of written down cost of
obsolete, inadequate etc. assets-
Statement IIA. Current Assets.
(a)
3. Contingencies Reserve Fund as per
Statement No. VI.
3. Capital Works in progress.
4. Development Reserve as per
Statement VII.
4. Stores and materials in hand-
(b) Fuel-Coal and/or etc. at cost.
(c) General stores at or below cost.
Note: - Contingent liabilities and outstanding commitments, if any, to be
stated on the face of this balance sheet.
5. Tariffs & Dividends Control
Reserve as per Statement VIII.
5. Debtors for amounts paid in
advance on account of contracts.
6. Consumers’ Rebate Reserve as
per Statement IX.
6. Sundry debtors for electricity
supplied.
7. Special appropriations (as
permitted by the State Government)
reserve as per Statement X.
7. Other debtors (as per the
Schedule attached).
8. Balance of Net Revenue and
Appropriations Account as per
Statement XI.
Current Liabilities and Provisions.
8. Accounts receivable (to be
specified).
9. Balances due on construction of
Plant, Machinery, etc.
9. Investments in statutory
securities of
cost.
(a) Contingencies Reserve Fund
Investment. (Market value on closing
date).
(b) Depreciation Reserve Fund
Investment. (Market value on closing
date).
(c) Other investments.
(Market value on closing date).
10. Creditors of open accounts (as
per schedule attached).
10. Special investments.
(a) In respect of taxation.
(b) Others (to be specified).
11. Consumers’ Security deposits:
(i) In Cash Rs............................
(ii) In Securities Rs............................
11. Balance at Bank:
(a) Deposit account.
(b) Current account and at call.
12. Accounts payable (to be
specified).
12. Cash in hand Debits Balances.
13. Temporary accommodations,
Bank overdrafts and other finances.
13. Net Revenue and Appropriations
Account balance at debit thereof
Statement XI.
14. Other current and accrued
liabilities (to be specified).
14. Deferred payments.
ANNUXURE VI
(See Rule 27)
MODEL FORM OF DRAFF CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY
Name of undertaking.............................................................................
PART - I
1. General-
(a) “The Act” means the Indian Electricity Act, 1910 as in force from time to
time.
(b) “Licensee” means................
(c) “Consumer” means any person who is supplied with energy by the
incensee or whose premises are for the time being connected for the purpose of
supply of energy with the works of the licensee.
(d) “Date of presentation” means the second day after the date of any bill
rendered by the licensee.
2. Application and agreement for supply-
(a) Application and agreement for supply of electrical energy shall be made in
the form attached hereto (Appendix ‘A:) obtainable free of cost at the local office
of the licensee. The application shall be signed by the owner or occupier of the
premises for which supply is required. Any assistance and information required
for filling up the form will be given to the applicant at the local office of licensee.
(b) If the supply is required for motors the applicant shall state the purpose for
which the motors are required.
3. Notice before connection- The intending consumer must give at least one
month’s notice before the supply is required.
4. Notice for fixing the position of service, meter, etc.- Upon receipt of the
requisition for supply seven clear days’ notice shall be sent by the licensee, to
the applicant for supply or to the contractor action on his behalf, for his
representative to meet the engineer of the licensee for the purpose of inspecting
the premises and fixing the point of entry of supply mains and the position of the
mains, cut-outs or circuit breakers and meters. The licensee will, in no case, fix
meters and main cut-out, nor allow the same to remain in any position which
entails entry of his employees into purdah or religious quarters.
5. Quotations, etc., for laying-Service lines-
(a) The position for the service having been agreed upon as provided for in
condition No. 4 above, the licensee shall thereafter submit to the applicant a
quotation of the estimate of the cost of carrying out the work. The quotation
having been accepted, the applicant shall be required to deposit the amount of
the estimate with the licensee before the service is laid. The deposit having been
duly paid, orders shall be issued for the work to be put in hand and the amount
so deposited shall be subsequently adjusted, if necessary, or compilation of the
figures of the actual cost of the service line. Other conditions being equal,
service lines shall as far as possible be laid in the order of the dates or receipt of
the deposit money.
Note- The service line, notwithstanding that a portion of the cost has been paid
for by the consumer, shall remain the property of the licensee by whom it is to be
maintained.
(b) If a consumer desires to have the position of the existing service line
altered the licensee shall carry out the work and charge the consumer the cost of
the additional material used and the labour employed plus 15 percent of the later
as supervision charges
(c) Service lines for temporary illumination shall be laid by the licensee where
possible and the cost incurred in laying and removing such service lines as
determined in the manner laid down in clause (b) above shall be paid by the
consumer.
(d) Where any difference or dispute arises as to the cost of fixing of the
position of service lines, the matter shall be referred to the Electrical Inspector for
and shall be decided by him.
(e) A consumer requiring high voltage supply must provide and maintain at
his expense a locked and weather proof enclosure of agreed design, for the
purposes of housing the licensees metering equipment. Such an enclosure may
be used by the consumer for his own similar metering equipment but for no other
purposes.
6. Service Lines- The licensee shall lay free of charge 30 metres of service
line from his nearest distribution main outside the limits of the property in respect
of which the requisition is made. Any length in excess of 30 metres, as defined
above and the whole of the service line within the limits of the property in respect
of which application is made shall be paid for by the applicant. The cost
mentioned above however, shall be exclusive of the proportionate cost of the first
pole and fittings beyond 30 mts. aforesaid. The proportionate cost of such poles
and fitting shall be in the same ratio as 30 metres is to the length of the line
beyond 30 metres from the point of tap-off of the service and the second support
of the service line.
The main cut-outs or fuses shall be inserted and sealed by the licensee free of
cost to the consumer.
7. Consumer not to interfere with the supply mains or apparatus- The meter
boards, main cut-outs, etc. must on no account be handled or removed by any
one who is not in the employ of the licensee. The seals which are fixed on the
meters and the licensee’s apparatus must on no account be broken.
8. Writing on consumer’s premises- For the protection of the consumer and
the public generally, it is necessary that the wiring on the consumer’s premises
should conferm to the I.E. Rules and the Rules of the Fire Insurance Company in
term of which the building is insured and be carried out by a licensed electrical
contractor. The material used for wiring shall comply with the standards laid
down in that behalf by the Indian Standards Institution or equivalent. As soon as
the consumer’s installation is completed in all respects and tested by the
consumer’s contractor, the consumer should submit to the licensee the wiring
contractor’s completion and test report. A form for this purpose shall be supplied
by the licensee. It is important that the conditions named herein are fully
complied with as otherwise there will be delay in obtaining the supply.
As required by rule 45 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, no electrical
installation work (including additions, alterations, repairs and adjustments to
existing installations), except such replacement of lamps, fans, fuses, switches,
low voltage domestic appliances and fittings as in no way alter the capacity and
the character of the installation, shall be carried out upon the premises on behalf
of any consumer or owner for the purposes of supply of energy to such consumer
or owner, except by an electrical contractor licensed by the in this behalf and
under the direct supervision of a person holding a certificate of competency
issued or recognised by the ... Any person committing a breach of rule 45 shall
render himself liable to punishment under rule 139 of the said rules.
9. Apparatus on consumer’s premises(
a) All transformers, switch gear and other electrical equipment belonging to
the consumer and connected to the mains of the licensee shall be maintained to
the reasonable satisfaction of the licensee.
(b) In the case of high voltage consumers, suitable protective devices
approved by the licensee shall be used so as to afford full protection to the
licensee’s apparatus placed on the consumer’s premises.
10. Procedure for testing installation by licensee and fee-
(a) Upon receipt of the test report the licensee shall notify to the applicant the
time and the day when the licensee’s representative proposes to inspect and test
the installation. It will then be the duty of the applicant to arrange that
representative of the wiring contractor employed by him is present at the
inspection to give the licensee’s representative any information that may be
required by him concerning the installation.
(b) No connection shall be made until the consumer’s installation has been
inspected and tested by the licensee and found satisfactory No charge shall be
made for the first test made by the licensee but subsequent tests due to faults
disclosed at the initial test shall be charged for in accordance with part III of these
conditions. Periodical tests of the installation will also be undertaken by the
licensee at rates that may be ascertained from his local office.
(c) Before taking the insulation test of the installation the wiring must be
completed in all respects. All fittings, whether incandescent lamps, fans, motors,
heating, cooking or other apparatus, must be connected to the conductors and all
fuses must be in place and all switches switched in the ‘on’ position before the
tests are carried out. Temporary wires or fittings or dead ends should not be
included in the installation and no part of the work should be left incomplete.
(d) A pressure of 500 volts will be applied between installation and “earth” and
the insulation resistance to earth after one minute’s electrification shall be such
as will not cause a leakage from the installation exceeding one five thousand part
of the maximum current demanded.
(e) The test between the poles should give at least half the result of that to
“earth”. (o Manufacturer’s test certificates in respect of all high voltage apparatus
shall be produced if required by the licensee.
11. Extensions and alterations- Should the consumer, at any time after the
supply of energy has been commenced increase the number or size of lights,
fans or motors, etc. on his premises or in any way alter the position of his writing
therein, notice thereof must be sent in writing to the licensee whose
representative will call and inspect the alteration and, if necessary, change the
meters and fuses and alter the service line. Failure to give such notice may
derange the supply system and render the supply liable to be summarily
discontinued. During such time as alterations, additions or repairs are being
executed, the supply to the circuit which is being altered, added to or repaired
must be entirely disconnected and it shall remain disconnected until the
alterations, additions or repairs have been tested and passed by the licensee.
12. Failure of supply-
(a) Should at any time the licensee’s service fuse or fuses fail, notice thereof
should be sent to the licensee’s local office or if there are sub-stations, to the
nearest sub-station. Only authorised employees bearing the badge of the
licensee are permitted to replace these fuses in the licensee’s cut-outs.
Consumers are not allowed to replace these fuses and they will render
themselves liable to a heavy penalty if the licensee’s seals placed to protect his
apparatus are broken. The licensee does not allow his employees to carry out
any repair except replacement of fuses in the consumer’s installation.
(b) The licensee shall not be liable for any claims for loss, damage or
compensation whatsoever arising out of failure of supply when such failure is due
either directly or indirectly to war, mutiny, civil commotion, riot, strike, lock-out,
fire, tempest lightning,
13. Access to premises and apparatus- The licensee’s servant possessing a
written authority signed by the engineer or manager or the licensee are entitled at
all reasonable time and on informing the occupier to enter the premises to which
the energy is supplied for the purpose of inspecting meters and for other
purposes connected with the apparatus belonging to the licensee.
14. Security Deposit- The licensee may require any consumer to deposit
security for the payment of his monthly bills for energy supplied and for the value
of the meter and other apparatus installed in his premises. No interest will be
allowed in deposits upto Rs. 25. Interest at the rate of............. per cent per
annum will be paid by the licensee oil deposits exceeding Rs. 25.
The licensee shall be at liberty at any time to apply any security deposited
towards payment or satisfaction of any money which shall become due or owing
by the consumer. The licensee shall also be at liberty to demand enhanced
security deposit from consumers at any time during the life of the contract. The
balance of the security deposit will be returned to the consumer on the
termination of the contract.
The consumer may at any time, with the previous consent of the licensee transfer
the contract and its liabilities to any other person approved by the licensee.
15. Method of charging for current(
a) The prince and method of charging for current supplied shall be such as
may be fixed by the licensee from time to time subject to the provisions of the
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
(b) Unless specified otherwise all rates refer to one point supply
16. Payment of bills-
(a) Bills should be paid at the licensees local office within 15 days from the
date of their presentation.
(b) Any complaints with regard to the accuracy of the bills shall be made in
writing to the licensee and the amounts of such bills shall be paid under protest
within the said period of 15 days. The amounts of bills paid under protest will be
regarded as advance to the credit of the consumer’s account until such time as
the bills in dispute have been fully settled.
(c) If the consumer fails to pay any bills presented to him within the said
period of 15 days, the licensee shall be at liberty to take action under sub-section
(1) of section 24 of the Act and to cut-off the supply after giving such consumer
not less than 7 clear days’ notice in writing without prejudice to his right to
recover the amount of the bill by suit. Where, however, any difference or dispute
has been referred under the Act to the Electrical Inspector for... before notice
aforesaid has been given by the licensee, the licensee shall not be at liberty to
cut-off the supply for failure to pay the bill except where the licensee has made a
request in writing to the consumer that the amount in dispute should be
deposited with the said Electrical Inspector and the consumer has failed to
comply with such request.
17. Notice of removal-
(a) Consumers about to vacate or sublet their premises should give to the
licensee a seven clear days’ notice in writing, together with an opportunity for
disconnecting the premises, otherwise the licensee cannot guarantee that the
meter readings will be taken on the required date. Failing such notice, the
consumer will be held responsible for energy consumed on the premises in
respect of which the licensee holds agreement for the supply of energy until the
expiration of seven days from the day on which the notice of removal in writing
has been received at his office.
(b) Consumers leaving the station for a period exceeding two months and
closing their houses while away, or those houses remain closed and unoccupied
owing to non-tenancy for the same period are requested to inform the licensee
before-hand so that the meters installed at the premises may be read,
installations disconnected and the licensee’s property removed if agreed to
between the licensee and the consumer or otherwise to notify the licensee where
the key can be obtained to enable the licensee’s engineer to remove, the fuses
whenever it is desired to test the distribution mains in the consumer’s district. In
such cases consumers will not be charged the monthly minimum provided that: -
(i) The rental of meter or meters of the licensee shall be paid so long as they
remain on the consumer’s premises if the meters are removed, the charges as
provided for in Part III will be payable for removing and re-fixing the meters;
(ii) The consumer agrees to the extension of the term of the agreement by the
period by which the monthly minimum charge has been waived if the period, of
his contract had not expired;
(iii) A reconnection fee as provided in part III is paid before reconnection.
Should the consumer require reconnection before the expiry of two months, both
the reconnection fee and the monthly minimum charge will have, to be paid by
the consumer. The life of the contract will not be extended in such cases.
(c) When a consumer, leaves his installation connected to the licensee’s
mains, but locks up the meter or otherwise makes it inaccessible for reading by
the employees of the licensee, for the first month of such inaccessibility the
consumer will be charged the monthly minimum. If in the next month the meter is
accessible for reading, the consumer will be charged the actual consumption less
the above minimum, but subject to the monthly minimum. If on the other hand
the meter remains inaccessible in the second month also the consumer will be
served with 24 hours’ notice (section 20 of the Act) to open his premises for the
reading of the meter by any employee of the licensee at a fixed time and date;
the meter is now made available for reading, the consumer will be charged the
actual consumption less the minimum charged or paid for the first month of
inaccessibility subject to monthly minimum. If the meter remains inaccessible
even after 24 hours’ notice, the premises will be disconnected. For that month
also the monthly minimum charge will be charged to the consumer. If the meter
is made accessible subsequent to the disconnection for purposes of reading the
meter and settling accounts or for reconnection of the service, as the case may
be the consumer will be charged the actual consumption less the two minima or
paid for the two months of inaccessibility subject to the proportionate minimum
for the period of inaccessibility of the meter upto the time of disconnection. If the
consumer applies for reconnection, fees under clause B.I of part III of these
conditions will be collected before reconnection
18. Accuracy of meters- Should the consumer dispute the accuracy of any
meter which is not his own property, he may, upon giving notice and paying the
prescribed fee, have the meter tested by the licensee or the Electrical Inspector,
in accordance with section 26 of the Act. In the event of the meter being tested
by the licensee and found to be beyond the limits of accuracy as prescribed in
the Indian Electricity Rules, in force from time to time, the testing fee shall be
returned and the amount of the bill adjusted in accordance with the result of the
test taken with respect to the meter readings of the three months prior to the
month in which the dispute has arisen, due regard being paid to conditions of
occupancy during the months. In the event of the test being undertaken by the
Electrical Inspector for.….and the meter being found to be incorrect, the period
during which the meter shall be deemed to have been incorrect, and the amount
of energy supplied to the consumer during this period shall be decided by the
Electrical Inspector for................where................ decision shall be final. Rent for
the meter for the period it is found inaccurate will not be charged by the licensee.
19. Discontinuance of Supply-
(a) If any consumer adopts any electrical appliance which is likely to affect
injuriously the supply to other consumers or uses the energy supplied or deals
with it in any manner so as to unduly or improperly to interfere with the efficient
supply of energy to any other person by the licensee or fails to keep in proper
order any meter belonging to him by which the supply is registered, the licensee
may discontinue the supply so long as such an appliance is so adopted or the
energy is so used or dealt with or the meter is not kept in proper order, and as
the case may be.
(b) The licensee shall not be bound to give or continue the supply if the
Electrical Inspector for................ or other competent person appointed by
the................ Government is satisfied that the electric supply-lines, fittings, works
or any other apparatus within the said premises are not in good order and
condition and are likely to effect injuriously the use of energy by the licensee or
by other persons.
(c) Any consumer who after having been duly notified, refuses to permit or
fails to give an authorised representative of the licensee, reasonable facilities to
enter any premises to which energy is, or has been supplied for the purpose of
testing or inspecting the installation of the consumer, shall be liable to have the
electricity supply discontinued after the expiry of 24 hours’ notice in writing in
accordance with section 20 of the Act.
20. System of supply- Supply of energy shall be given by the licensee on the
following systems, namely: -
(i) Low voltage Direct current
two wire or Alternating current single
phase
50 cycles;
(ii) Medium voltage- Direct current
three wire
or Alternating current
three phase
50 cycles;
(iii) High voltage- Alternating current
three phase
50 cycles.
21. Classification of installations- A.C. System-
(a) Two wire single phase, 230 volts-
(i) General supply not exceeding 10 amperes.
(ii) Motive power installations upto I BHP in aggregate.
(b) Four-wire, three phase, 230 volts between phase wires and neutral
general supply exceeding 10 amperes.
(c) Three-wire, three phase, 400 volts between phases- Motive general
supply exceeding 10 amperes.
D.C. system-
(a) Two-wire 130 volts-
(i) General supply not exceeding 10 amperes.
(ii) Motive power installations upto I BHP in aggregate.
(b) Three-wire 460 volts between outers- Motive power installations of over 1
BHP.
22. General Wiring Conditions-
(a) Mains- The consumer’s mains shall in all cases be brought back to the
licensee’s point of supply and sufficient cable shall be provided for connecting up
with the licensee’s apparatus.
(b) Switches and Fuses- The consumer shall provide linked quick break main
switches and a single pole fuse on each conductor except the neutral conductor
which shall be fixed as near as possible to the licensee’ meter board.
(c) Balance of installation- If the connected load of any installation exceeds
10 amperes at 230 volts, the installation shall be wired on the group system
separate neutral wires being brought back in each case to the licensee’s point of
supply An approved type of double pole linked switch shall control each main
circuit. The lamps, fans or any other apparatus of which the installation consists
shall be so grouped that under normal working conditions the current will be
balanced and no current will be following in the neutral wire.
(d) Medium voltage supply- With medium voltage supply, i.e., above 250 volts
and upto 650 volts, the licensee’s meter and service cut-outs shall be enclosed in
a strong teakwood box suitably ventilated and provided with a hasp staple and
lock. All wires between which a difference of potential of over 250 volts exists
shall be made inaccessible to unauthorised persons or enclosed in an earthed
metallic casing or conduit. A “Caution” Board printed in Hindi and the local
language of the district shall be fixed thereto.
(e) Overhead Mains- In order to save the expense of a long underground
service on private property, a consumer may, with the licensee’s approval erect a
pillar on that portion of his property which is nearest to the licensee’s supply
mains into which the service shall be laid and from which the consumer shall run
overhead mains to his premises. These overhead mains shall constitute a
portion of his installation and shall be laid in compliance with the Indian Electricity
Rules in force from time to time. An efficient chocking coil and lightning arrestor
maybe fixed at the commencement of the overhead line at the consumer’s cost
should be desire the same, as an additional protection for his installation.
(f) Earthing- Gas pipes shall on no account be used for earthing purposes.
(g) Domestic heating and cooking- A special circuit for heating and cooking
shall be run from the licensee’s point of supply Wall plugs used on these circuits
shall be of the three pin type, the third pin being an earth connection. Two pin
plugs or lighting sockets shall not be allowed. All appliances used in the
bathroom for heating or washing purposes or in any damp location must be
effectively earthed.
(h) Plugs- All plugs shall be switched on the live wire and not on the neutral.
(i) Wiring- Single leads shall not be allowed to be run separately in iron
conduit.
(j) A.C. Motor installation- Motors shall be provide with control gear so as to
prevent satisfactorily the maximum current demand from the consumer’s
installation exceeding the limits given in the following schedule at any time under
all possible conditions. Failure to comply with these regulations will render the
consumer liable to disconnection from the supply on account of interference with
the supply to other consumers: -
Nature of
supply
Size of installation Limit of maximum current
demanded
Single phase
Three Phase
Size of installation Upto and
including 1 BHP
Above 1 BHP and upto and
including 10 BHP
Above 10 BHP and upto and
including 15 BHP
Above 15 BHP
Six times full load current.
Three times full load current.
Twice full load current.
One and a half time full load
current.
Motor circuits shall be controlled by a triple pole linked switch protected by a no
volt release and T.P fuses (or over load releases). It is important that the release
should be maintained in thorough working order. Wiring for motors shall be run
with all three phase wires bunched in a single metallic conduit, which shall be
efficiently earthed throughout and connected to the frame of the motor from
which two separate earth wires shall be run. The minimum size of the earth-wire
permitted is No. 14 S.W.G. All motors shall comply in every respect with the
Indian Electricity Rules, in force from time to time.
Motors above 1 BHP shall be wound for three-phase, 400 volts between phases.
(k) Power Factor of Apparatus- The apparatus shall have a power factor of
not less than 85 per cent at normal working load.
Intending consumers are advised to consult the Engineer of the licensee before
ordering their motors, as in some cases it may be practicable to relax the starting
current limit dependent on the location and conditions of working.
23. Saving rights- Nothing in these conditions shall abridge or prejudice the
rights of the licensee and the consumer under the Indian Electricity Act, 1910, or
any rules thereunder and Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948.
PART - II
SCHEDULE OF RULES
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE LICENSEE)
PART - III
SCHEDULE OF SERVICE & MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES
A. Charges for service line- 30 metres of service line from distributing mains,
but not on the property for which a requisition for supply of electrical energy is
received shall be laid free of charge. The charges for the rest of the service line
shall be recovered on the basis of the actual cost in accordance with condition
No.6 of the conditions of supply plus 14 per centum of the labour charges to
cover supervision charges.
Extension for additions to service lines to meet increased maximum demand will
be charged for on the same basis.
B. Miscellaneous Charges: -
Item No. Name of charges Amount of charges
1 2 3
1. Re-connection fees(
a) For installations upto 11 KW-
(i) At cut outs,
(ii) At overhead mains,
(iii) At underground mains.
(b) For installations over 10 KW 25 per cent added to the charges under item
A above.
(c) If the same consumer is reconnected within 12 months of the date of last
reconnection, 50 per cent will be added to the charges under items (a) and (b)
above.
2. Meters-
(a) Hire of meter, where it is the property of licensee, per meter per-mensem-
(i) A.C. Single phase meter
(ii) A.C. Polyphase meter
(iii) Demand for special type meter.
(b) Removing of meter at consumer’s request.
(c) Re-fixing of meter at consumer’s request.
(d) Changing meter for one of higher capacity only at the request of the
consumer.
3. Testing-
(a) Installations-
(i) The first test and inspection will be carried out free of charge but should
any further test or inspection be necessitated by faults in the installation or by
non-compliance with the conditions of supply per extra test or inspection.
(ii) Periodical testing at consumer’s request, per test.
(b) Meters-
(i) A.C. Single phase meter
(ii) A.C. polyphase meter
(iii) Demand or special type meter.
4. Replacements of-
(i) Licensees’s fuse.
(ii) Consumer’s fuse.
Note- For the first month of service connection or on re-connection the meter
rent will be 50 per cent only if the period is 15 days or less, and full if more than
15 days. For the month in which meter is removed the rent will be calculated on
similar basis.
Note- (i) All charges except those under items 2(a) and 4 are payable in
advance.
(ii) The dispute between the consumer and the licensee regarding accuracy
of meter or any other indicator maybe referred by either party to the Electrical
Inspector for settlement.
APPENDIX A
APPLICATION AND AGREEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
FOR DOMESTIC/INDUSTRIAL PURPOSE
Application No………. Connection No……..
To
The Electrical Engineer/Secretary/Manager,
.................... Electric Supply Co. Ltd……..
I/We hereby agree to take from the…….. Electric Supply Co. Ltd. at the premises
stated below a supply of electrical energy not exceeding the connected load of
my/our installation as stated below for a period of not less than two years from
the date of commencement of supply and, I/We hereby further agree to pay for
the said supply at the tariff rates and on the conditions of supply in force, from
time to time and also to pay for all such other proper charges as become due by
me/us from time to time at rates as prescribed in part III of the conditions of
supply. I/We further agree that I/We lodge with you a deposit calculated as
prescribed in the licensees’ Conditions of Supply and I/We hereby declare that
the said Conditions of Supply have been perused by/read to me/us and I/We
agree to be bound by the provisions of Clause VI of the Schedule to the Indian
Electricity Act, 1910 and……. Electric Licence, 19………… I /We hereby request
you to supply the required energy within one month or such longer period as the
Electrical Inspector for ... may allow from the date of the requisition.
I/We further require you to supply me/us with the necessary meter/meters on hire
in terms of section 26 of the Indian Electricity Act, 1910. I/We agree to give you
such security as may be required for the price of the meter/meters whenever
called upon to do so.
The necessary requisition form duly filled in is attached herewith.
Signature of applicant
Present address
Dated……….
Signature & address of witness.
Accepted on behalf of…………. Electric Supply Co. Ltd.
Signature
Electrical Engineer/Secretary/Manager
Dated ……….
ANNEXURE VII
(SEE RULE 28)
FORM OF REQUISITION UNDER CLAUSE V (4) OF THE
SCHEDULE TO THE ACT
*1We, the undersigned being owners or occupiers of premises situated in or upon
.................. street, within the “area of supply” specified in the Licence, 19…… do
2The Government of……… the3 ……..of……… being charged with public lighting
of street, within the area of supply specified in the licence, 19……… do hereby
require you, in pursuance of Clause V of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity
Act, 1910, to provide, within six months of the date of this requisition distributing
main throughout the said street.4
Date at…………..
The…………. day of………. 19…………..
*1. In the case of two or more owners or occupiers.
2. In the case of State Government or a local authority.
3. The local authority’s name will have to be inserted.
4. Or such part of the street as may be specified.
ANNEXURE VIII
(SEE RULE 28)
FORM OF REQUISITION FOR SUPPLY OF ENERGY UNDER
CLAUSE VI (5) OF THE SCHEDULE TO THE ACT
To
Sir, (Name of Licensee)
I/We hereby require you, in accordance with Clause VI of the Schedule to the
Indian Electricity Act, 1910 within one month or within such longer period as the
Electrical Inspector may allow from the date of this requisition to supply energy
for the premises owned/occupied by me/us, and situated within the area of
supply specified in the ..................... Licence 19………….
I/We further require you to supply me/us with the necessary meter/meters on hire
in terms of section 26 of the Indian Electricity Act, 1910. I/We agree to give you
such security as may be required for the price of the meter/meters whenever
called upon to do so.
2. Applicant’s Name.
Occupation/Designation.
Class/Premises.
House No. and/or
Name of the Premises.
Street Town Village or Taluka
Locality
Owned/Tenanted by
3. The following are my/our requirements:
A. Domestic or Residential: No. of points Wattage Total Wattage.
(a) Lights and Fans.
(b) Heating and Small Power.
B. Commercial.
(a) Lights and Fans.
(b) Heating and Small Power.
C. Industrial Power.
Motor and/or apparatus No. of points H.P. & K.W. Total H.P. & K.W
Purpose
(a) Low Voltage
(b) Medium Voltage
(c) High Voltage
D. Other purposes.
4. Total connected load applied for ... Watt/Kilowatt.
5. This requisition is for:
(1) Anew service.
(2) A sub-service from one existing service.
The name and address of the consumer whose service is to be tapped:
His Service No. is
(3) An extension to my existing installation from Service No.
(4) A re-connection of Service No.
(5) A change of name from
Service No………….
(6) The system of wiring will be
1[(7) The wiring work has been/will be carried by:
Name of Contractor:
Address:
Licence No.:
Class:
Validity:]
Applicant’s signature
Dated the …….day of…….. 19……… Present address:
2. Under Clause VI(l) 1st proviso of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity Act,
1910, the licensee shall not be bound to comply with any such requisition unless
and until the person making it-
(a) Within fourteen’ days after the service on him by the licensee of a notice in
writing in this behalf, tenders to the licensee a written contract in the form,
approved by the State Government duly executed and with sufficient security
binding himself to take the supply of energy for not less than two years to such
amount as will assure to the licensee at the current rates charged by him, an
annual revenue not exceeding 15 percentum of the cost of the service line
required to comply with the requisition; and
(b) If required by the licensee so to do, pays to the licensee the cost of so
much of any service line as may be laid down or placed for the purposes of the
supply upon the property in respect of which the requisition is made, and of so
much of any service line as it may be necessary for the 6 said purposes to lay
down or place beyond 30 metres from the licensee’s distributing mains, although
not on that property.
3. In lieu of the contract referred to in Note 2(a) above, the licensee is
prepared to accept a declaration in the following form, subject to deposit of any
required securities by the applicant:
1. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
DECLARATION
I/We hereby declare that I/we desire to have and agree with the licensee to take
a supply of energy for the above mentioned purposes for a period of not less
than two years from the date of commencement of the supply and to be bound by
the provisions of Clause VI of the Schedule to the Indian Electricity Act, 1910 and
by the licensee’s charge appropriate tariffs applicable to me/us conditions of
supply as are from time to time in force.
Applicant’s signature.
Note- The applicant is requested to complete the clause referring to this
requisition and to strike out the clauses which are inapplicable.
ANNEXURE IX
One rupee stamp
FORM OF ORDER UNDER SUB-RULE (4) OF RULES 5, SUB-RULE (2) OF
RULE 46
To
Supplier, consumer owner, or occupier
1. Whereas the installation was inspected on ………and whereas it appears
to me that you have not complied with rule 5………of the Indian Electricity Rules,
1956, in the following respect* namely……… you are hereby called upon to
comply with the said rule (s) on or before……….day of 19 ... .... and to report
compliance in writing to me.
2. An appeal may be filed against this order under sub-rule (4) of rule 5 of
the Indian Electricity Rules, within three months of the date on which this order is
served or delivered or is deemed to have been delivered but this order must be
complied with, notwithstanding such appeal, unless the appellate authority on or
before the date specified in paragraph above, suspends its operation.
Dated at………….
The ……..day of………. 19………. Signature
Electrical Inspector,
Officer appointed under sub-rule (4) of rule 5
* Particulars to be given where necessary
ANNEXURE IX A
(SEE RULE 46)
MODEL FORMS OF INSPECTION REPORT
FORM I
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under Rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956) Low Voltage Installation of
Consumer
Report No…………………… Date of Inspection…………..
Challan No………………….. Dated……………..
Inspection Fee Rs…………… Date of Last inspection……………
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts………………………….
(ii) No. of Phases…………………
(iii) AC/DC……………………….
3. Type of wiring* …………………….
4. Name of the consumer/owner……………………
5. Address of the consumer/owner…………….
6. Location of the premises………………………..
7. Particulars of the installations:……………………………
I. Leakage on premises: Number ……Connected Load in KW
(1) Light Points……………………….
(2) Fan Points…………………
(3) Plug Points…………………
II. Other equipments (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………
(2)……………
Total Connected load in KW
Maximum current demand in Amps…………………………..
(on the basis of total connected load)
III. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)…………………………….
(2)…………………………….
8. General condition of the installation:
* Here state casing capping, lead covered of teak wood batten, concealed,
conduit, Tough, Rubber Sheathed and such other types.
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirement Report
1 2 3
29. (i) Is/Are there any sign(s) of overloading in respect of any apparatus
wiring?
(ii) Condition of flexible cords, sockets, switches, plug-pins, cut-outs and
lamp holders and such other fittings.
(iii) General condition of wiring.
(iv) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exists.
(v) State if sockets are controlled by individual switches.
(vi) Any other defect or condition which may be a source of danger.
30. Give report on condition of service lines, cables, wires, apparatus and
such other fittings placed by the supplier/owner of the premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cut-outs within consumer’s premises,
within enclosed fire proof receptacle?
32. (i) State if switches are provided on live conductors.
(ii) State if indication of a permanent nature is provided as per this rule so as
to distinguish neutral conductor from the live conductor.
(iii) Whether a direct line is provided on the neutral in the case of single
phase double pole iron clad switches instead of fuse?
33. (i) State if earthed terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Have three pin plugs been provided for plug points?
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
49. Leakage on premises:
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in megaohms.
50. (i) State if linked switches of requisite capacity are provided near the point
of commencement of supply
(ii) State if the wiring is divided in suitable number of circuits and each such
circuit is protected by suitable cut-out.
(iii) State if supply to each motor or apparatus is controlled by suitable linked
switch.
(iv) Has it been ensured that no live part is so accessible as to cause
danger?
61. (i) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor and so far as
practicable portable motor and the metallic parts (not intended as conductors)
of all other apparatus used for regulating** or controlling energy been earthed
by two separate and distinct connections with earth?
(ii) Is the earth wire free from any mechanical damage?
(iii) In the case of conduit/lead covered wiring, has the conduit or lead cover
been efficiently earthed?
(iv) If the consumer has him own earth-electrode, state if it is properly
executed and has been tested with satisfactory results.
Overhead lines:
74. (i) State if the consumer has any overhead line and if so their condition
with
TO
specific reference to relevant rule.
93. (ii) Is there any other overhead line near the premises of the consumer
which does not comply with rule 79 or 80?
(iii) Is guarding provided for overhead lines, if it is inside the factory, for road
crossings and busy localities?
(iv) Any other remarks.
Inspecting Officer’s Signature
Name………………………
Designation………………..
File No……………………
Dated:…………….
Copy for-warded to the Electrical Inspector for……... in accordance with rule
46(l)
(b) of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
Signature……………
Name…………….
** Not applicable to isolated wall tubes or to brackets, electroliers, switches,
ceiling fans and such other fittings (other than portable hand lamps and
transportable apparatus) unless provided with earth terminal.
FORM II
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956)
(Medium voltage installations of a consumer)
Report No…………….. Date of Inspection……………
Challan No……………. Dated……………………….
Inspection Fee Rs……... Date of Last inspection…………….
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts…………………………
(ii) No. of phases…………………..
(iii) AC/DC………………………..
3. Name of the consumer/owner…………….
4. Address of the consumer/owner………….
5. Location of the premises………………….
6. Particulars of the Installation:
I. Motors:
Make No. H.P Amps. Voltage
(1)………………………
(2)………………………
(3)……………………...
(4)………………………
(5)……………………...
II. Other equipment (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………………….
(2)……………………….
(3)………………………..
Total connected load h.p/k va……………………
III. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)………………………..
(2)………………………..
(3)………………………..
7. General condition of the installation:
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirements Reports
1 2 3
3. Is the list of authorised persons properly made and kept up to date duly
attested?
29. (i) Is/Are there any sign(s) of over loading?
(ii) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exist.
(iii) Are the electric supply lines and apparatus so installed, protected, worked
and maintained as to prevent danger?
(iv) Any other general remarks.
30. Service line and apparatus of the supplier on consumer’s premises.
Give report on condition of service lines, cables, wires and apparatus and such
other fittings placed by the supplier/owner on the premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cut-outs within consumer’s premises, in
an accessible position? Are they contained within an adequately enclosed fire
proof receptacle?
32. (i) State if switches are provided on live conductors.
(ii) State if indication of a permanent nature is provided as per this rule so as
to distinguish neutral conductor from live conductor.
(iii) Whether a direct link is provided on the neutral in the case of single phase
double pole iron-clad switches instead of fuse?
33. (i) State if earthed terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Is the Consumer’s separate earth efficient?
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
34. (i) Are bare conductors in building inaccessible?
(ii) Whether readily accessible switches have been provided for rendering
them dead?
(iii) Whether any other safety measures are considered necessary?
35. State if “Danger Notice” in Hindi and the local language of the district and
the type approved by the Electrical Inspector is affixed permanently in
conspicuous position as per this rule.
38. State if flexible cables used for portable or transportable equipment
covered under this rule, are heavily insulated and adequately protected from
mechanical injury.
44. (i) State if instructions in 1[English or Hindi and the local language of the
district
and where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi,] for the restoration of
persons suffering from electric shock have been affixed in a “conspicuous place.”
(ii) Are the authorised persons able to apply instructions for resuscitation of
persons suffering from electric shock?
49. Leakage on premises:,
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in Megaohms.
50.(i) Whether a suitable linked switch/circuit breaker is placed near the point of
commencement of supply so as to be readily accessible and capable of being
easily operated to completely isolate the supply?
(ii) Whether every distinct circuit is protected against excess energy by
means of a suitable circuit breaker or cut-out?
(iii) State if a suitable linked switch or circuit breaker is provided near each
motor or apparatus for controlling supply to the motor or apparatus.
(iv) State if adequate precautions are taken to ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
51. (i) State the condition of metallic coverings provided for various conductors.
(ii) (a) State whether clear space of 90 cm is provided in front of the main
switch board.
(b) State whether the space behind the switch board exceeds 75 cm in width
or is less than 23 cm.
(c) In case the clear space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm. state
whether a passage way from either end of the switch-board to a height of 1.80
metres is provided.
61. (i) Has the neutral conductor at the transformer been earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with earth.
(ii) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor and so far as
practicable portable motor and the metallic parts (not intended as conductors) of
all transformers and any other apparatus used for regulating or controlling energy
and all medium voltage energy consuming apparatus been earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with earth?
(iii) Have the metal casings or metallic coverings containing or protecting any
electric supply line or apparatus been properly earthed and so joined and
connected across all junction boxes as to make good mechanical and electrical
connection’
(iv) State if the consumer’s earth electrode is properly executed and has been
tested with satisfactory results.
(v) Is the earth wire free from any mechanical damage?
Overhead Lines:
74. (i) State if the consumer has any overhead lines and if so their condition to
with specific reference to relevant rules.
93. (ii) Is there any other overhead line near the premises of the consumer
which does not comply with rule 79 or 80?
(iii) Is guarding provided for overhead lines if it is inside the factory, for road
crossings and busy localities?
(iv) Any other remarks.
Inspecting Officer’s Signature
Name:………………..
Designation:………….
File No……………..
Dated: ……………….
1. Ins. by Notification No. G.S.R. 735, dated 4th September, 1982.
FORM III
INSPECTION REPORT
(Under rule 46 of the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956)
High and Extra-high Voltage Installation of a Consumer
Report No…………………… Date of Inspection
Challan No…………………… Dated
Inspection Fee Rs……………. Date of Last inspection
1. Consumer No
2. Voltage and system of supply:
(i) Volts…………………….
(ii) No. of phases……………
(iii) AC/DC…………..
3. Name of the consumer/owner…………………….
4. Address of the consumer/owner……………………
5. Location of the premises……………………………
6. Particulars of the installation
I. Motors:
Make No. H.P. Amps. Voltage
(1)………………
(2)……………….
(3)………………..
II. Transformers:
Make No. KVA Power Voltage
H.V L.V.
(1)…………………..
(2)…………………..
(3)………………….
III. Other equipment (complete details to be furnished):
(1)……………………
(2)……………………
(3)……………………….
IV Total capacity in h.p./KVA…………………………………..
V. Generators (in the case of consumer himself generating energy):
(1)……………………..
(2)…………………….
(3)…………………….
7. General condition of the installations:
Rule of the Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956
Requirement Report
1 2 3
3. (i) Is the list of authorised persons properly made and kept upto date
duly attested?
(ii) Whether the authorised persons are competent for the work
assigned to them?
29. (i) Is/are there any sign(s) of over-loading in respect of any
apparatus?
(ii) State if any unauthorised temporary installation exists.
(iii) Whether the H.V motors and controlling equipment are being over
hauled periodically and record kept of the same in a register?
(iv) Whether the transformer oil samples are being tested periodically
and results recorded in a register?
(v) Whether suitable lightning arrestors have been provided near the
transformers for protection against lightning?
(vi) Whether earth resistance is being measured periodically and results
recorded in a register?
(vii) Any other defect or condition which may be source of danger.
(viii) Any other general remarks.
30. Service line and apparatus of the supplier on consumer’s
premises:
Give report on the condition of service lines, cables, wires, circuit
breaker, isolating switches, protective recording and integrating
apparatus and such other fittings placed by the supplier/owner on the
premises.
31. Has the supplier provided suitable cutouts, within consumer’s
premises, in an accessible position? Are they within an adequately
enclosed fire proof receptacle?
33. (i) State if earth terminal is provided by the supplier.
(ii) Is the consumer’s separate earth efficient? (State the earth
resistance, if measured).
(iii) Report on the efficiency of the earthing arrangement.
34. (i) Are bare conductors (if any) in building inaccessible?
(ii) Whether readily accessible switches have been provided for
rendering them dead?
(iii) Whether any other safety measures are considered necessary?
35. State if “Danger Notices” in Hindi and the local language of the
district and of the type approved by the Electrical Inspector are affixed
permanently in conspicuous position as per this rule.
36. Whether the practice of working on live lines and apparatus is
adopted? If so, have the safety measure been approved by the
Electrical Inspector?
41. State if the circuits or apparatus intended for operating at different
voltage (s) are distinguishable by means of indications) of permanent
nature.
42. Whether all circuits and apparatus are so arranged that there is no
danger of any part(s) becoming accidentally charged to any voltage
beyond the limits of voltage for which it/they is/fire intended?
43. (i) In the case of generating and enclosed stations have fire-buckets,
filled with clean dry sand, been conspicuously marked and kept in
convenient situations in addition to fire-extinguishers suitable for dealing
with electric fires?
(ii) State if First Aid Boxes or Cupboards conspicuously marked and
properly equipped are provided and maintained.
(iii)Is some staff trained in First Aid Treatment?
44. (i) State if instructions in 1[English or Hindi and the local language of
the district and where Hindi is the local language, in English and Hindi,]
for the restoration of persons suffering from electric shock have been
affixed in a conspicuous place.
(ii) Are the authorised persons able to apply instructions for
resuscitation of persons suffering from electric shock?
1. Ins. by GSR 735, dt. 4.9.1982.
49. Leakage on premises:
State insulation resistance between conductors and earth in Megaohms.
50. (i) Whether a suitable linked switch/circuit breaker is placed near
the point of commencement of supply so as to be readily accessible and
capable of being easily operated to completely isolate the supply?
(ii) Is there a suitable linked switch or a circuit breaker to carry and
break the full load current on the secondary side of a transformer?
(iii) Whether every distinct circuit is protected against excess energy
by means of a suitable circuit breaker or cut-outs?
(iv) State if a suitable linked switch or circuit breaker is provided near
the High Voltage motor or other apparatus for controlling supply to the
motor or apparatus.
(v) State if adequate precautions are taken to ensure that no live
parts are so exposed as to cause danger.
51. (i) State the condition of metallic coverings provided for various
conductors.
(iii) (a) State whether clear space of 90 cm is provided in front of the
main switch-board.
(b) State whether the space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm.
in width or is less than 23 cm.
(c) In case the clear space behind the switch-board exceeds 75 cm
state whether a passage way from either end of the switch board to a
height of 1.80 meters is provided.
64. (i) State if all conductors and apparatus including live parts thereof
are inaccessible.
(ii) State if all windings of motors or other apparatus are suitably
protected.
(iii) State the method adopted to guard lower voltage circuits in
transformers becoming accidentally charged above its/their normal
voltage.
(iv) State in case of transformers or switches or static condensers
involving the use of more than 2,275 litres of oil in one chamber, if
suitable oil soak pits are provided.
(v) Where 9,000 litres or more of oil is used in any one oil tank, has
provision been made for draining away or removal of oil which may leak
or escape from such tank(s)?
(vi) State if trenches inside sub-station containing cables are filled
with noninflammable material or completely covered with noninflammable
slabs.
(vii) Are conductors and apparatus so arranged that they may be
made dead in sections for carrying out work thereon?
66. In case of metal sheathed electric supply lines, are the metal
sheaths connected with earth properly?
67. (i) Have the frame of every generator, stationary motor, and so far
as
practicable portable motor and metallic parts not intended as conductors
of all transformers and an other apparatus used for regulating or
controlling energy and all high voltage energy consuming apparatus
been earthed by two separate and distinct connections with earth?
(ii) Is the earth-wire free from any mechanical damage?
(iii) Have two separate and distinct connections with earth, each
having its own electrode, been provided for the earth neutral point?
(iv) Have the metal casings or’ metallic coverings containing or
protecting any electric supply line or apparatus been properly earthed
and so joined and connected across all junctions boxes as to make good
mechanical and electrical connections throughout their whole length?
68. Is the outdoor (except poletype) sub-station efficiently protected
by fencing not less than [1.8]1 metres in height?
69. (i) Where platform type construction is used for pole type
substation, has sufficient space for a man to stand on the platform been
provided?
(ii) Has hand-rail been provided and connected with earth (if metallic
and if sub-station has not been erected on wooden supports)?
70. Has suitable provision been made for immediate and automatic
discharge of every static condenser on disconnection of supply?
Overhead lines:
74. What is the minimum size of the conductors of overhead lines
used? State the type of conductors.
77. Are clearances above ground of the lowest conductor of overhead
lines, including services lines, as per this rule?
80. (i) On the basis of maximum sag, are verticle clearances where the
high or extra-high voltage line passes above or adjacent to any building
or part of a building as per this rule?
(ii) On the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, are
horizontal clearances between the nearest conductor and any part of
such building as per this rule?
81. Where conductors forming parts of system at different voltages
are erected on the same supports, has adequate provision been made to
guard against danger to linemen and others from the lower voltage
system being charged above its normal working voltage by leakage from
or contact with the higher voltage system?
87. Where overhead lines cross or are in proximity to each other have
they been suitably protected to guard against possibility of their coming
in contact with each other.
88.(i) Has every guard wire, been properly earthed at each point at
which its electrical continuity is broken?
(ii) What is the type and size of guard wire?
90.(i) Are the metal supports of overhead lines and metallic fittings
attached thereto permanently and efficiently earthed?
(ii) Has each stay-wire (except in case where an insulator has been
placed in it at a height not less than 3 metres from the ground) been
similarly earthed?
91. (i) Has the overhead line been suitably protected with a device for
rendering the line electrically ]Harmless in case it breaks? Whit type of
device is used?
(ii) Whether anticlimbing devices have been provided for each of the
high voltage and extra high voltage supports?
92. (i) Has the owner of overhead lines adopted efficient means for
diverting to earth any electrical surges due to lightning in every overhead
line which is so exposed as to be liable to injury from lightning? What
type of means are used?
(ii) Has earthing lead from the lightning arrestors been connected to a
separate earth electrode?
93. Are unused overhead lines being maintained in a safe mechanical
condition?
Any other remarks.
Dated:…….. Inspecting Officer’s Signiture…………
Name…………
Designation…………..
File No…………..
1. Subs. by GSR 735, for “2.45”, dt. 4.9.1982.
ANNUXURE X
FORM OF ANNUAL RETURN FOR MINES
(SEE RULE 111)
This form must be correctly filled up by the owner, agent, 1[manager or engineer]
and sent to the Inspector not later than the first day of February every year.
Part A
Year ending ……………….19...
Name of Mine
Situation of Mine
State
District
Postal address of mine
Name and address of owner
Name of agent
Name of Manager.
2[Name of Engineer]
3[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
1. Amended by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
2. Added by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
3. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
Part B
1. System of supply (whether direct current or alternating current) Voltage of
supply
Periodicity (if alternating current)
Source of supply.
2. Voltage at which electricity is used for: -
Lighting
Power
3. Particulars of Motors etc.
POWER
(a) On Surface
Type H.P/K.W. of
Motor/apparatus
and voltage
Type of control
Gear
Location Purpose for which
used
(b) In Mine
Type H.P/K.W. of
Motor/apparatus
and voltage
Type of control
Gear
Location Purpose
for
which
used
Ventilation
percentage
LIGHTING
Type of light fitting Wattage Location Percentage of
Inflammable gas or
vapour
ANNEXURE XI
FORM OF ANNUAL RETURN FOR OIL-FIELDS
(SEE RULE 111)
This form must be correctly filled up by the owner, agent, 1[manager or engineer]
and sent to the Inspector not later than the first day of February every year.
Part A
Year ending..................... 19......
Situation of Oil-field
Name of Oil-field
State
District
Postal address of Oil-field
Name and address of Owner
Name of Agent
Name of Manager
2[Name of Engineer]
3[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
1. Subs. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
2. Ins. by GSR 137, dt. 12.2.1983.
3. Ins. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
Part B
1. System of Supply (whether direct current or alternating current) Voltage of
supply
Periodicity (if alternating current)
Source of Supply
2. Voltage at which electricity is used for: -
Lighting
Power
3. Particulars of Motors, etc. in use on the field: -
(a) On wells
No. of other
identifying
mark of well
Drilling or
pumping
Type and H.P.
of motor
No. of lamps
& type
Other
electrical
appliances
(b) Not on wells
Type and H.P. of motors Purpose for which used Identifying
mark on map
4. Other electrical appliances, not included in item 3, in use on the field.
Appliances Type and size
in K.W.
Purpose for
which used
Identifying
mark on map
ANNEXURE XII
LOG SHEET FOR MINES AND OIL-FIELDS
[SEE SUB-RULE (5) OF RULE 131]
Daily Log sheet for
1. 1[Name of Electrical Supervisor]
2. Report as to: -
(a) Condition of the insulation of the system.
(b) Specified defects of insulation (particulars of each failure of apparatus
should be given).
(c) Accidents or dangerous occurrence (including any cases of electric shock
and any cases of open sparking in apparatus in use in places where rule 126
applies).
2[(d) Disconnection and reconnection of the supply as required by rule 126 5(i)
and (ii).]
(e) Examination of earth fault detectors or recorders as provided by rule
116(3). Examinations of apparatus as provided by rule 131: -
(i) Routine examinations as required by clause (a) of sub-rule (3) of rule 131.
(ii) [Special examination]* as required by clause (b) of sub-rule (3) of rule 131.
3. Remarks--
Signed
Examined by
1[Electrical Supervisor…………..
Electrician…………………
Manager……………………]
*State which apparatus has been examined or tested and result.
Note: This log sheet should be filled in as completely as possible. If, for
instance, there are no defects of insulation of report, the word ‘non’ should be
written in the vacant space.
1. Subs. by GSR 45, dt. 1.1.1993, w.e.f. 23.1.1993.
2. Subs. by GSR 466, dt. 18.7.1991, w.e.f. 17.8.1991.
1[ANNEXURE XIII]
FORM FOR REPORTING ELECTRICAL ACCIDENTS
(See rule 44-A)
1. Subs. by GSR 425, dt. 27.4.1985.
1. Date and time of accident.
2. Place of accident (Village/Town, Tehsil/Thana, District and State).
3. System and voltage of supply, (Whether EHV/HV/LV Line, substation/
generating station/consumer’s installations/service lines/other
installations).
4. Designation of the Officer-in-charge of the supplier in whose jurisdiction
the accident occurred.
5. Name of owner/user of energy in whose premises the accident occurred.
6. Details of victim(s): -
(a) Human:
Sl.
No.
Name Father’s Sex of
victim
Full Postal
Address
Approximate
age
Fatal/nonfatal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(b) Animal
Sl.
No.
Discription Number(s) Name(s)
of
Address(es)
of owner(s)
Fatal/non-fatal
owner(s)
7. In case the victim(s) is/are employee(s) of supplier:-
(a) Designation of such person(s).
(b) Brief description of the job undertaken, if any
(c) Whether such person/persons was/were allowed to work on the job.
8. In case the victim(s) is/are employees) of a licensed contractor:-
(a) Did the victim(s) possess any electric workman’s permit(s), supervisor’s
certificate of competency issued under rule 45? If yes give number and date of
issue and the name of issuing authority.
(b) Name and designation of the person who assigned the duties of the
victim(s).
9. In case of accident in the supplier’s system, was the permit to work (PTW)
taken?
10. (a) Describe fully the nature and extent of injuries, e.g.
fatal/disablement (permanent or temporary) of any portion of the body or bums or
other injuries.
(b) In case of fatal accident, was the post mortem performed?
11. Detailed causes leading to the accident.
(To be given in a separate sheet annexed to this form).
12. Action taken regarding first-aid, medical attendance etc. immediately after
the occurrence of the accident (give details).
13. Whether the District Magistrate and Police Station concerned have been
notified of the accident (if so, give details).
14. Steps taken to preserve the evidence in connection with the accident to
extent possible.
15. Name and designations of the person(s) assisting, supervising the
person(s) killed or injured.
16. What safety equipments were given to and used by the person(s) who met
with this accident (e.g. rubber gloves, rubber mats, safety belts and ladders
etc.)?
17. Whether isolating switches and other sectionalising devices were
employed to deaden the sections for working on the same? Whether working
section was earthed at the site of work?
18. Whether the work on the live lines was undertaken by authorised
person(s)? If so, the name and the designation of such person(s) may be given.
19. Whether artificial resuscitation treatment was given to the person(s) who
met with the electric accident? If yes, how long was it continued before its
abandonment?
20. Names and designations of persons present at and witnessed the
accident.
21. Any other information remarks.
Place:……………..
Time:……………..
Date:……………..
Signature ……………..
Name ………………
Designation………………
Address of the person reporting…….
1[ANNEXURE XIV]
[See rate 3(2A)]
GUIDELINES FOR PROVIDING TRAINING AS REQUIRED UNDER
RULE 3(2A)
1. Ins. GSR 461, dt. 9.5.1981 .
1. The owner of every generating station of capacity of 100MW and above
shall arrange for training of personnel, engaged in the operation and
maintenance of his generating station, in the manner specified below: -
(1) (a) The training may be arranged in his own institute or any other
institute established for this purpose.
(b) Any institute where such training is arranged shall have been recognised
by the Central Electricity Authority.
(2) There shall be separate training courses for the persons to be engaged in
operation and maintenance of thermal power stations and hydro power stations
together with associated sub-stations. In respect of thermal stations, separate
course may be arranged for the operating and supervisory staff and other skilled
persons who are to assist them.
(3) Refresher courses shall be arranged periodically for the persons who have
already undergone training under para (2) above and those who have already
sufficient experience in the operation and maintenance of a generating station
and are engaged in its operation and maintenance under clause (b) of sub-rule
2(A) of rule 3 to familiarise with modern practices of operation and maintenance.
2. Duration and content of training shall be as specified below: -
(1) Thermal Power Stations- The duration of the training courses for the
operating supervisory staff (both electrical and mechanical) shall not be less than
12 months. This shall include 186 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-I to
this Annexure followed by specialised lectures as specified in Appendix-II to this
Annexure for the mechanical and electrical fields. The lectures may be arranged
during the half day and the other half day shall be spent on observation by the
trainees in the power stations to get familiarised with different sections of the
power station- After the lecture course is completed the trainees should be taken
on visits to a few modern power stations and factories manufacturing turbines,
generators, switchgear, instrumentation and auxiliary equipments. The
remaining period will be spent on in-plant training where the candidates will be
given an opportunity to operate or maintain the machinery by themselves under
close supervision of the regular operating staff as well as the training
supervisors. Arrangements shall be made for familiarising the trainees with the
operation of power stations, through simulator facilities.
(2) The duration of the training course for the skilled person to assist the
operators and supervisory staff in a thermal power stations shall not be less than
nine months. This shall include 82 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-Ill
to this Annexure followed by specialised lectures as specified in Appendix IV.
The lectures may be arranged during the half day and the other half day being
spent on observation by the trainees in the power stations so that they get
familiarized with different sections of the power station. After the later course is
completed; the trainee shall be taken on visits to study a few modern power
stations and factories manufacturing turbines, Generators, switch gear,
instrumentation and auxiliary equipments. The remaining period will be spent on
in-plant training under close supervision.
(3) The duration of the training course for the operation and supervisory staff
to work in hydro power stations shall not be less than nine months. This shall
include 124 hours of lectures as specified in Appendix-V to this Annexure. The
procedure for familiarization visits and in-plant training shall be similar to that
which has been specified in respect of thermal power stations.
(4) Those who are expected to be engaged in the operation and maintenance
of the sub-station associated with the generating station shall be given a training
of duration of not less than six months as specified in Appendix-VI to this
Annexure. This shall be followed by visits and in-plant training.
(5) The duration and contents of the refresher course shall be determined
jointly by the owner of the generating station and the training institute.
3. Qualifications
The minimum qualification for the operating and supervisory staff shall preferably
be a high second class diploma in mechanical or electrical engineering or a
degree from a recognized institute or university The minimum qualifications for
the persons to assist the operating and supervisory staff shall be certificate from
a recognised Industrial Training Institute in appropriate trade.
4. Creation of the Institute
(1) Every training institute shall be established adjacent to a power station so
as to facilitate familiarization and provide in-plant training.
(2) The training institute shall preferably be of residential type and shall have
a full me Principal and adequate number of teaching staff. The training institute
shall have facilities for demonstrations by models, simulators and for exhibition of
slides and movies.
(3) The institute shall have a systematised scheme of evaluation and
assessment of performance of the candidates by conducting oral and written
tests at adequate intervals. The assessment forms shall be specified in
Appendix-VII to this Annexure.
(4) The number of trainees in any one batch shall not normally exceed 25 so
as to maintain a good-teacher-trainees relationship.
(5) The institute shall have facilities to arrange refresher courses for those
personnel have already experience in the operation and maintenance of a
generating station. The staff of the training institute shall be properly qualified
and preferably undergone a specialised training course in the art of imparting
training.
APPENDIX I
SYLLABUS FOR THE OPERATING AND
SUPERVISORY STAFF ENGAGED IN THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE
THERMAL POWER STATIONS
(General course for Electrical and Mechanical)
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I Concept of modern Thermal Station: Central Station and utility
systems, base load and peaking stations, concept of unit system,
typical thermal cycles, parameters, heat rates, fuel rates, steam rates,
typical heat balance of boiler, turbine and generator
4
II Choice of location of large thermal station Site availability, water
requirements, fuel, load, centres, transport facilities, air pollution,
topography, choice of size of generating units
3
III Plant lay out in large central station including machine
arrangements, equipment layout and auxiliary arrangements
3
IV Constructional details of large pulverised fuel boilers and
auxiliaries
(i) Water and steam drums, heaters and tubes.
(ii) Types of furnace and firing arrangements, burner details.
(iii) Economisers, primary, secondary, superheaters, re-heaters and
attemperators.
(iv) Forced drough, Induced draught, Primary Air exhauster and gas
recirculation fans, compressors.
(v) Types of coal mills (balls/recess, balltube, bowl roller) stoker,
coal feeders.
(vi) Air preheaters, Lunstorm, tubes, steam.
(vii) Dust extraction plant-electrostatic, mechanical.
(viii) Soot blowers: steam/compressed air operated.
(ix) Station compressed air system-reciprocating and rotary
compressors.
(x) Oil handling and firing equipment.
(xi) Boiler mountings, gauge glasses, safety valves, stop valves,
startup devices, stampling, chemical dosing, continuous blow down.
(xii) Refractories and laggings as used in modern power stations.
16
V Turbine and auxiliaries, constructional details
(i) Principle of operation, heat conversion cycles, types of turbines.
(ii) Casing, steam chests, ‘Wheel blading, nozzles, diaphragms,
glands, flanges and bolt heating, bearings.
(iii) Condenser and vacuum extraction plant, ejectors.
(iv) Lubrication system, pumps, coolers, filters, shaft turbines and
lifting gear
(v) Feed water booster and extraction and colling water pump.
(vi) Low pressure and high pressure feed water heaters, deaerators
and evaporators.
(vii) High and low power by pass systems.
(viii) Oil purifications unit.
9
VI Alternators and excitation systems
(i) Constructional details of alternators, methods of cooling
(Hydrogen/air cooling).
(ii) Main and pilot excitors, voltage regulators, types and
characteristics, amplidyne and magnetic amplifier.
(iii) Methods of grounding.
6
VII Coal handling plant: Tipples, hoppers, vibratory feeders and
conveyors,
crushers, magnetic separators and pulleys
6
VIII Ash and slag handling plant: Electrostatic precipitators,
methods of conveying pneumatic, vacuumatic, hydraulic; bucket
elevators conveyors, screw extractors
2
IX Water sources, treatment: Raw water pumping station,
domestic, circulating and boiler make up water treatment, river salinity,
local water conditions, their variations in different seasons and effects
on power station operation
7
X (i) Fuels: Solid, liquid and gaseous fuels-analysis
(ii) Coal-types and suitability for different kinds of boilersalterations
in firing methods due to change of coal composition
6
XI Basic flow diagrams in power station practice
(i) Coal and fuel oil cycle
(ii) Air and gas cycle
(iii) Fly ash and slag handling arrangements
(iv) Condensate and feed heating cycle (from condenser hotwell
upto economiser)
(v) Steam and water cycle (from economiser to turbine inlet).
(vi) Circulating water cycle
(vii) Hydrogen filling in generator and hydrogen gland sealing of
generator.
(viii) Bearing cooling system.
8
XII Direct and closed cooling circuits, cooling towers, types and
characteristics
2
XIII D.C. & A.C. power supply for auxiliaries arrangements of units
and station boards, station lighting and automatic changeover
4
XIV Transformers: main transformers, interconnecting transformer,
station/ unit transformers, voltage grounding transformers, types of
connections paralleling, tapchanger gear
5
XV Out-door switchyard single line diagrams, busbars, circuit
breakers, isolators, current transformers, potential transformers,
lightning arrestors, grounding
5
XVI Indoor and outdoor switchgear: types bulk oil, minimum oil, air
blast, air break-constructional details
3
XVII Instrumentation and measurements: constructional details of
measuring instruments for pressure, flow temperature, level, draught,
vibration eccentricity, conductivity, pH value, differential expansion,
oxygen analyser, current, power, reactive power, frequency, energy,
winding temperature.
Auto-controllers, hydrogen purity meter. Axial shift indicator and
recorder, flue gas analysers, Megger-its use for primary
detection of faults
16
XVIII Operation, control and supervision
(i) General boiler start-up procedure.
(ii) Operation of boilers under different loading conditions, soot
blowing.
(iii) Banking and preservation of boilers.
(iv) Demonstration wherever possible through simulators of various
operating conditions.
(v) Handling of boiler under emergency conditions such as tripping
of turbo-alternator set, high/low drum levels, flame failure, failure of
supply to auxiliaries.
(vi) General start-up procedure for high pressure multicy under
reheat type turbines froth cold, warm and hot conditions.
(vii) Handling of turbine, generator and auxiliary plant under
emergency conditions, such as vaccum failure, low feed water,
condenser levels, excitation failure, circulating water failure, feed water
heater high levels, excessive vibration, water or oil ingress in
generator, failure of lubricating, sealing oil circuits.
(viii) Alternator-synchronising, loading, parallel operations, MW &
MVAR sharing.
15
XIX Controls and Protection-sequential operation and interlocks:
(i) Boiler and auxiliaries
(ii) Turbines and auxiliaries.
(iii) Combustion control-pressure, fuel, air and feed heating
cycle
(iv) Analysis of feed and boiler water, fuel gas at station laboratory
(v) Feed water and feed heating cycle controls
(vi) Turbine governing, speed setting, speed drop setting and
control circuits
(vii) Generator protection, under-voltage, over-voltage, differential,
reverse power, under excitation, negative phase sequence, earth fault
with types of the relays used
(viii) Importance of sequential inter-locks
(ix) Transformer protection-differential, overload, earth faults, high
(x) Types of motors and variable speed-drive and speed controls
(xi) Various types of pumps and their starting and control.
(xii) Steam temperature control
(xiii) Furnace purging
2
2
2
4
2
3
4
2
4
4
3
3
3
XX Fire fighting and mulsifier type protection 3
XXI General safety precautions, treatment of electrical or acid alkali
burn, permit to work, first aid
2
XXII Indian Boiler Rules, Factory Act, Indian Electricity Act, 1910,
Electricity (Supply) Act, 1948, Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 and other
statutory regulation concerning Power Stations (General outline)
4
XXIII General plant maintenance procedure, PERT/CPM Methods,
Power Station records and calculation of efficiency
10
XXIV Various type of valves, traps, their constructional details and
application
2
XXV Cranes, hoists, characteristics and control 3
XXVI Personnel management, duties and responsibilities, Labour
Laws and Labour Welfare
6
XXVII Broad principles of material management and inventory control
4
TOTAL 186
APPENDIX II
1. SPECIALISED MECHANICAL COURSE FOR OPERATING &
SUPERVISORY STAFF WHO WILL BE ENGAGED ON THE
MECHANICAL SIDE OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I Corrosion of boiler and auxiliaries, condenser and feed water
heating plant: Scale formation in boiler in relation to water conditions
7
II Acid cleaning and preservation of boilers. Mechanical removal
of scale and deposits from boilers where acid cleaning is not
advisable. High pressure water jet equipment
14
III Annual boiler and auxiliaries overhaul hydraulic test, floating of
safety valves, preventive and breakdown maintenance of boiler
auxiliaries
10
IV Efficient operation of boilers -interpretation of gas analysis for
proper combustion controls and methods of reducing of other losses.
8
V Constructional details of hydraulic and other types of couplings
torque convertors, servo-motor
5
VI Constructional details of various types of pumps, their drives
and automatic starting, air-conditioning. Constructional details of
various types of drought fans, their drives and automatic starting.
Types of wear on fans and pumps and their effects, detection of
unbalance in fans and pumps, instruments for measuring vibrations,
methods of primary balancing-balancing instruments and their use
9
VII Coal handling plant
(i) Sequential operation, (ii) conveyor and conveyor drives, (iii)
tensioning arrangements, (iv) maintenance of guide rollers, (v) sway
switches/slip switches, (vi) beatle chargers for wagon marshalling, (vii)
wagon tipplers and coal crushers, weighing of coal, different types of
weighing bridges and weight meters, storage problems and prevention
of spontaneous combustion. Sampling of coal/British Standards
Specification/Indian Standards Specification, procedure and proximate
analysis.
8
VIII Water treatment-hardness, pH value clarifiers, treatment,
phosphate and hydrazine dosing, base exchangers.
6
IX Annual overhaul and inspection of turbine and auxiliary plant,
condenser tube cleaning, maintenance of pumps, lubrication system,
recycling of lubricating oil and selection of lubricant, condenser tube
materials wear and tear and effect of local water conditions, types of
failure, detection, preventive maintenance and retubing of condensers
10
X Maintenance practice valve grinding methods, high pressure
joints, heat insulation me,-hods, pipe-work, alignments, beating,
scraping & matching practice, radiography and stress relieving
methods
6
XI Indian Boiler Regulations and other statutory regulations 4
XII Workshop, fabrication of spares, repairs and maintenance of
mechanical equipments such as vehicles, tractors, dozers, shunters,
cranes and hoists, welding-modern techniques and their applications
in maintenance of boilers, turbine & associated plant
10
XIII Compositions, properties and behaviours of engineering 8
materials used
in power stations
105
Common course for mechanical and electrical 186
Supplementary course for mechanical 105
Total Hours 291
2. SPECIALISED ELECTRICAL COURSE FOR OPERATING
AND SUPERVISORY STAFF WHO WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE
ELECTRICAL SIDE OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
I Generators protection-earth fault, rotor and stator, negative
phase sequence, loss of excitation, differential protection, back up
protection, reverse power-protection, under voltage protection,
constructional details of the relays used, method of setting and their
testing, overload protection and over heating of rotors.
15
II Transformers protection, Buchholz relay, over current, differential
and earth fault protection, types of relays used, their construction,
testing and settings
6
III Transformers, commissioning-dielectric strength of oil,
insulation resistance, tap changers, filtration of oil, pre commissioning
testing.
Tano resistivity of oil and preventive maintenance of
transformers
6
IV Circuit breakers, commissioning and maintenance, isolators,
disconnectors, busbar arrangements, charging, synchronising with the
grid, disconnecting for repairs, maintenance of switchgear contractors
8
V Maintenance of equipments in the outdoor switchyard, current
transformers, potential transformer and lightning arrestors, operation
and maintenance bus differential protection
6
VI Cables, control, high voltage and extra-high voltage types,
layouts, testing and maintenance
8
VII Principle of electronic controls and transistorised circuits 5
VII Pneumatic and di-electric transmitters and receivers,
servomotors
6
IX Interlocking sequential control circuits, details of components
used
7
X Calibration and testing of various types of instruments,
indicating, measuring instruments, recorders and analyser
8
XI Statutory Electricity Acts and rules, permit procedure 4
XII Starting and control equipments of various types of motors
Station Battery-care & maintenance, trickle charging and extended
charging, operation and maintenance of rectifiers and battery charges
8
XIII Economic load despatch, power system control and operation,
MVARcontrol,
voltage regulation and frequency control, carrier current
equipments, telephones, telemetering
5
XIV Station emergency lighting arrangements
1
93
Common Course for electrical and mechanical 186
Supplementary course for electrical 93
Total Hours 279
APPENDIX III
SYLLABUS FOR SKILLED PERSONS FOR ASSISTING THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THERMAL POWER
STATIONS
(General course for Electrical and Mechanical)
Item No. Particulars Number
of Hours
1 2 3
I General description of thermal power stations and outline of
power station operation
5
II Fundamental units and their conversion (mechanical, electrical,
thermodynamics
2
III Fuels and combustion types of fuels-their properties and testing
1
IV Boilers and boiler house plant and auxiliaries
1. General description.
2. Arrangement of boilers.
3. Boiler auxiliaries.
4. Boiler instrumentation.
5. Fabrication and assembly of different parts of boiler and its
accessories.
6. High pressure welding in boilers.
7. Arrangement of pulverised fuel boiler in a modern thermal
power station.
10
V. Water conditioning, pretreatment and demineralisation 4
VI Ash handling-electrostatic precipitation and mechanical dust
collector-Function and description of two types
2
VII Turbine and turbine house auxiliaries
1. Fundamental principle of steam turbine.
2. Theory and operation of steam turbine.
3. Governing and protection of turbine.
5
VIII Handling of turbines and boilers under emergency conditions 4
IX Condensor and vaccum extraction plant
1. Purpose and function.
2. Construction of surface Condensor and vacuum pumps.
3
X Regenerative feed water heating-constructional details of low
pressure and high pressure feed water heaters, deaerators and
2
evaporators
XI Cooling water systems and cooling towers 1
XII Flow diagrams of basic cycles:
1. Coal handling.
2. Steam and condensate.
3. Ash and slag handling.
4. Station services, domestic water, airconditioning, ventilation,
lifts.
5. Air services, air compressors, switchgear.
6. Bearing cooling and general service water systems.
7. Circulating water systems.
8. Feed water and reheating plant.
9. Fuel oil system.
10. Station batteries and battery charging equipment.
11. Station lighting, power supply and distribution Boards.
12
XIII Station instrumentation and controls 8
XIV Fire fighting installations in a thermal power station 2
XV Electric shocks, acid burn, alkali, wounds, chlorine gas
poisoning and their treatment
3
XVI Duties and responsibilities of operators and plant attendants,
carrying out instructions, reporting to supervisors, recording readings,
unusual’ occurrences, expected behaviour, discipline, sincerity,
cleanliness and love for machines
3
XVII Personnel safety equipment, cleanliness, caution and care in
power station working
3
XVIII How electricity is generated, transmitted and distributed i.e.,
generator to consumer service board
2
XIX Fundamental units, conversion and measurement of electrical
quantities
1
XX Principle and working of alternating current and direct current
generators and their parallel operation
2
XXI Principle and working of transformers and their parallel
operation
2
XXII Principle and working of alternating current and direct current
motors, their speed characteristics, controls
2
XXIII Storage battery-principle, construct-on and charging 1
XXIV Alternator cooling, different systems of cooling, advantages of
hydrogen cooling over others, hydrogen plant
2
82
APPENDIX IV
1. SPECIALISED ELECTRICAL COUITSE FOR SKILLED
PERSONS WHO WILL BE ENGAGED ON THE ELECTRICAL SIDE
OF THE POWER PLANT
Item No. Particulars Number
of
hours
1 2 3
I. Alarm systems-Visual and audible 2
II. Isolators, circuit breakers and contractors 3
III. Earthing and neutral grounding necessity of methods for safety
rules while handling electrical equipments
4
IV Motor winding and repairs 4
V Maintenance of internal telephones and primary air systems 3
VI. Meggering and testing of wiring and cable faults. 3
VII. Maintenance of electrical motors 6
VIII. Maintenance of electrical switchgear 8
IX. Fuses-rewirable type-catridges type high rupturing capacity
fuse, constructional features of fuse and fuse sockets, knife type high
rupturing capacity fuses-use of pullers for insertion and removal, colour
code for fuse rating.
8
X. Motor starters and their applications direction line, star-delta,
rotor resistance
5
XI. Meggers, avometers, voltmeters, ammeters, wattmeters, energy
meters general information about their use
6
XII. Maintenance of transformers & Tap changer 6
XIII. Joint-Ing of low & medium voltage cables
XIV Connections, earthing, principles of operation of all small
distribution transformers
2
XV Current & potential transformers, purpose, connection and use
2
XVI. Various types of drive 2
XVII. Elementary knowledge of Engineering material & their
properties
2
XVIII. Lubrication & cooling system 4
74
Common course for electrical and mechanical 82
Supplementary course for electrical 74
Total Hours 156
2. SPECIALISED MECHANICAL COURSE FOR SKILLED
PERSONS WHO WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE MECHANICAL SIDE
OF THE POWER STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
hours
1 2 3
I. Type of bearing and their uses 2
II. Types of valves-safety valve, suction valve, delivery valve, nonreturn
valve, bypass valve, drain valve, air release valve, control valve,
float operated valve, solenoid operated and pneumatically operated
valves and their applications
III. Pressure gauges-Bolirden type gauge, manometer, vacuum
gauge, barometer, principles of operation, absolute pressure, gauge
and vaccum
pressure and their inter relationship
5
IV Temperature indicators, merctry thermometers, resistance
thermometers, thermocouples, pyrometers, gas thermometers,
temperature alarm
5
V. Level gauges-different types-Level Alarm 4
VI. Flow meters-steam and water-general principles 3
VII. Couplings-different types, rigid, flexible, magnetic and fluid
couplings
3
VIII. Clutches-different types and uses 2
IX. Maintenance of pneumatic measuring instruments, servometers,
power cylinders and other thermostats, monostats
2
X. Maintenance of instruments, recorders, clocks 4
XI. Vibration-general knowledge of their causes, effects, remedies,
misalignment, wornout bearings, vibration, fed to foundations, cracking,
eccentricity and differential expansion, their causes, remedies
5
40
Common course for electrical & mechanical 82
Specialized course for mechanical 44
Total Hours 122
APPENDIX V
SYLLABUS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF WHO
WILL BE ENGAGED IN THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF
HYDRO-ELECTRIC GENERATING STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
Hours
1 2 3
I. Concept of a modem hydro station: Type of stations, its role in
the power systems, base load, peak load operation, plant layout,
capacity; underground power station, hydraulic and electrical design,
features, interconnection with other stations
3
II. Hydraulic system; reservoirs-type of reservoirs, storage
capacity, operation of reservoirs, intake tower, surge tank, tunnels, fore
bays and penstocks, protection against water hammer and negative
pressure in penstocks, provision for draining penstocks
3
111. Types of valves-Butterfly valve, spherical valve, needle valve,
their operation and control
3
IV Water turbines-types of turbines; their characteristics, ratings,
specifications, constructional details
2
V. Governing system; control circuit for governing, types of
governors, pendulum, hydraulic, electronic
3
VI. Generator: type and rating, cooling and ventilation system,
bearing cooling arrangements, lubrication system, construction and
characteristics of generators, split-phase double layer winding,
synchronising, loading, grounding of generators neutral
3
VII. Excitation system, types of excitors, voltage, control, automatic
voltage control, amplidyne control, magnetic amplifier
5
VIII. Generator protection: earth fault (rotor and stator), negative
phase sequence, differential protection, backup protection, reverse
power protection, under voltage protection, constructional details of the
relays used, method of settling and their testing
10
IX. Hydraulic and electrical protective devices, load frequency
control
3
X. Starting, shutting down and operation procedure. 3
XI. Power transformer connections, parallel operation, three single
phase unit versus three phase unit, regulation, voltage control, tap
changing, weights and size, grounding
5
XII. Transformer protection: Buchholz relay, over current, differential
and earth fault protection, types of relays used, their construction,
testing and settings
5
XIII. Transformers-commissioning: Dielectric strength of oil,
insulation, resistance tap changer, filtration of oil, precommissioning
testing
3
XIV Cooling system for transformers 2
XV. Circuits breakers, isolators, disconnectors, busbar
arrangements, charging and synchronising with the grid, disconnecting
for repairs, maintenance of switchgear contractors
4
XVI. Maintenance of equipments in the outdoor switchyard current
transformers, potential transformers and lightning arrestors, erection,
operation and maintenance
4
XVII. Cables-high voltage, oil filled cable, types of cables used, rating
of cables, layout, testing
4
XVIII. Principle of electronic controls and transistorised circuits 3
XIX. Pneumatic and electric transmitters and receivers, servomotors 3
XX. Control Board-layout, indicating and recording instruments for
monitoring and supervision, remote control of various equipments,
signalling and interlocking, automatic reclosure of breakers on outgoing
lines and enunciation system
3
XXI. Interlocking sequential control circuits, details of components
used
4
XXII. Calibration and testing of various types of instruments,
indicating, recording and analysers
4
XXIII. Study of communication/system 1
XXIV House turbine set-its functions and use 1
XXV. Station transformers, alternating current, auxiliary supply,
essential auxiliaries, auxiliaries in emergency, study of single line
diagrams
3
XXVI. Station Direct Current system-storage battery, rectifiers, motor
generator set etc. their control and operation, standby source of station
power, automatic change over to standby source of supply
3
XXVII. Records- (hourly, daily, monthly, annually) of operations 2
XXVIII. Flow diagram and single line diagram for hydraulic and
electrical system in the station
5
XXIX. Air conditioning and ventilation plant, compressors 2
XXX. Operation under emergency conditions 2
XXXI. General plant maintenance procedures. 3
XXXII. Cranes, hoists-characteristics and controls 2
XXXIII. Statutory Electricity Acts and Rules, permit procedure 2
XXXIV Fire fighting 6
XXXV. General safety precautions, first-aid 6
XXXVI. Personnel management, duties and responsibilities, labour
laws & labour welfare
4
Total hours 124
APPENDIX VI
SYLLABUS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF IN
EXTRA-HIGH VOLTAGE SUB-STATION
Item No. Particulars Number
of
Hours
1 2 3
I. Layout and location of 220/132/66/33 K.V sub-station 4
II. Main equipments used together with their specifications 3
III. Construction of high voltage lines, types of towers, types of
insulators and their electrical and mechanical characteristics
3
IV Hightension feeders, their load carrying capacities 1
V (i) Alternating and direct currents, relation between voltage,
current, power, reactive power & common units in use. Power factor,
Ohm’s Law, resistance, reactance, impedance, percentage impedance.
Three phase vectors phase, displacement between current and
voltage
(ii) Basic principle of transformation, magnetisation, hysteresis,
reluctance, retentivity, electromagnets Flux density, ampereturns,
equation for transformation etc.
(iii) Two winding, three winding and auto transformers, grounding
transformers, salient features of shell type and core type transformers,
hot rolled and cold rolled steel cores, Stampings and their assembly
Different vector groups and terminal connections.
(iv) Transformer fixtures e.g. Buchholz relay, on-load and off-load
tap changer, breathers, conservators, bushings of different types,
thermometers, indicators, alarms
(v) Cooling of transformer and oil, different methods of cooling,
importance of oil filtering and drying-out of tranfromers, dielectric
strength of oil, different varieties of filters and their comparison, types
of radiators
(vi) Transformer tests-failures and causes, maintenance and repairs
(vii) Parallel operation, regulation, voltage control, tap, changing,
commissioning test
3
4
4
4
4
3
5
VI. Breakers:
(i) Functions of breakers, their action
(ii) Different types of outdoor and indoor breakers e.g. bulk oil,
minimum oil and air blast, principles and their applications.
(iii) Operating mechanism, manual, spring, hydraulic, pneumatic,
motor 8 (iv) Current rating rupturing capacity, clearance time.
(v) Breaker maintenance, failures and their causes, commissioning
procedure
8
VII. Busbars:
(i) Indoor busbars, their capacity, forces on them during short
circuit, busbar mountings and their clearances
(ii) Strung and tabular type busbars, their current ratings, supports,
jumpers, clearances
(iii) Busbars fittings and connectors
(iv) High Voltage and Extra-high voltage cables, types, their
maintenance and testing
6
VIII. Current and potential transformers:
(i) Types of current and potential tranformers, their working
principles, ratings, accuracies
(ii) Functions of current and potential transformers
(iii) Failures of current and potential transformers, their causes
3
IX. Isolators:
(i) Tilting and rotating isolators, with and without arcing horns,
earthing blades, current ratings, breaking of circuits by isolator,
interlocking with circuit breaker
(ii) Maintenance of isolators
3
X. Lightning arrestors:
(i) Simple description of lightning phenomena and surges
(ii) Construction of lightning arrestors and the principles of their
working
(iii) Different type of lightning arrestors and ratings
(iv) Earthing and location of lightning arrestors
XI. Control Room:
(i) Necessity and function of a control board, types of boards,
instruments on the board
(ii) Functions of the various relays and indicators, Mimic diagram
indicators, annunciator and alarm characteristics of relays, testing and
setting of relays
(iii) Remote control of breakers, isolators, tap changers, indicators
on the control board
(iv) Control and power cables
10
XII. Auxiliary supply:
(i) Current and ampere-hour ratings of batteries, battery charging
equipment, checking of specific gravity of electrolyte, maintenance of
batteries
(ii) Importance of direct current supply and its functions
(iii) Auxiliary direct current supply
3
XIII. Clearance and Compliance of I.E. Rules, 1956:
(i) Minimum clearance for different voltages between phases and
phase to ground
(ii) Indian Electricity Rules pertaining to sub-stations
3
XIV Earthing:
(i) Safety earthing and system earthing, the method of earthing e.g.
solid earthing, resistance earthing, peterson coil earthing, earthing
of lightning arrestor, importance and advantages of each type
(ii) Different types of earth electrodes, earthing mats,
recommended values of earth resistance, measurement of earth
resistances
3
XV Maintenance:
Maintenance of log sheet and other records
The importance of maintenance of good records
3
XVI. Safety:
(i) Safety procedures and procedures for giving line clear and
taking it back, Maintenance of records of line clear
(ii) First-aid, artificial respiration and shock treatment
10
XVII. Interlocking and sequential operation of different equipments 1
XVIII. Synchronising, charging and discharging of high voltage lines.
Live line testing
3
XIX. Calibration and testing of various types of equipments indicating
and measuring equipments, recorders, analysers
4
XX. Handling emergency conditions 3
XXI. Diagnosing troubles in the plant from instruments and
annunciation
3
XXII. Study of carrier system 2
XXIII. Auxiliary equipments such as compressors, Station lighting etc.
1
XXIV Fire fighting equipment-their operation, maintenance and
refilling
1
XXV Personnel managements, duties and responsibilities, labour
welfare and labour laws
4
Total Hours 115
APPENDIX VII
(1) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR OPERATING AND SUPERVISORY
STAFF
Name of the Trainee………………..
Period: From……….. to……………………….(extended period)
Working in……………………..
Section……………………….
Department…………………..
Sl. No. Particulars Marks allotted Marks
given
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
1. (a) Punctuality and attendance
(b) Is he reluctant to continue on overtime
(c) Is he in the habit of taking leaves at the eleventh hour
(d) Does he insist on compensatory off
+(5)
- (1)
- (1)
- (1)
2. Intelligence and grasp:
(a) Does he have full knowledge of the plant and
equipment on which he is working and follows the instructions
given to him and can execute them properly
(b) Is he industrious, hard working and painstaking
(c) Has he shown any special skill of operation in saving
plant & equipment in trouble or emergency?
+(10)
+(5)
+(10)
3. Temperament and behaviour:
(a) Behaviour with superiors/colleagues and
subordinates
(b) Capacity to take quick and correct decisions
(c) Capacity to handle independent responsibility
+(5)
+(5)
+(10)
4. Any special qualifications-capacity to execute a
particular or difficult job economically, intelligently,
resourcefully with special skill
+(10)
5. Judgment of the candidate by taking viva-voce test or
by asking questions verbally
+(40)
Total Marks +100
The Marks may be given as below:-
Excellent Very good Good Average Below
average
100-91% 90-71% 70-61% 60-51% Below
51%
Special Remarks if any:-
Station Superitendent Section-in-
Charge
(II) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR OPERATING AND
SUPERVISORY STAFF
(For use of the Training Department)
1. Name of the Trainee……………………………
2. Date of birth/age…………………………….
3. Training period: From………………….. (Months)……………….
4. Technical qualification…………………
5. Specialisation if any ………………………
6. Practical experience…………………….
7. Marks secured in periodical tests:………….
Test Date Written
(75)
Viva
(25
Total
I Test
II Test
III Test
Final Test
8. Percentage of marks secured in all the tests:………………..
9. Gradation: (A,B,C, etc.)………………………
10. General Remarks and Recommendations: Director of the
Institute
(III) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR SKILLED PERSONS TO ASSIST
OPERATORS AND SUPERVISORS
Name of the Trainee:……………………..
Period: From……………………… to ……………………
(extended period), Working in:……………………..
Section………………………………………………………………….Department.
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
Allotted
Marks
given
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
1. Punctuality and Attendance:
(a) Does he attend the duty punctually or remain
absent without prior intimation frequently
(b) Is he reluctant to continue on overtime
(c) Is he in the habit of taking leave at the
eleventh hour
(d) Is he even prepared to take leave without
wages
(e) Whether he availed medical leave often
+(5)
-(1)
-(1)
-(4)
-(1)
2. Intelligence and Grasp:
(a) Does he have full knowledge of the plant
and equipment on which he is working and follows
the instructions given to him and can execute them
properly
+(10)
(b) Is he industrious, hard working and
painstaking
+(5)
(c) (i) Has he shown any special skill of operation in
saving plants and equipment in trouble or
emergency
OR
(ii) Has he shown any special skill or innovation
in any maintenance job
+(10)
3. Temperament and Behaviour
(a) Behaviour with superiors and colleagues
+(5)
(b) Capacity to take quick and correct decisions
by himself or to point out the discrepancies to
superiors promptly while attending auxiliary plant
and equipment
+(5)
(c) Capacity to take independent charge as
auxiliary plant attendants (Name of the auxiliary
plant)
+(10)
4. Any Special Qualifications:
(a) Is he suitable for any other plant other than
the one mentioned above at 3(c)
(b) Can he record the readings correctly
(c) Is he suitable for any particular skilled
maintenance job, as an artisan
(d) Has he specialised in any particular trade
such as winder, high pressure welding, etc.
+(10)
5. Judgment of the candidate by taking vivavoce
test or by asking questions verbally about
power plant and equipment
+(40)
Total Marks +100
The Marks may be given as below:-
Excellent Very good Good Average Below
average
100-91% 90-71% 70-61% 60-51% Below
51%
Special Remarks if any: -
Station Superintendent
(IV) ASSESSMENT FORM FOR SKILLED PERSONS TO ASSIST
OPEITATORS AND SUPERVISORS
(For the use of Training Department)
1. Name of the Trainee…………………
2. Date of birth/age…………………….
3. Training period: from …………….to……….. (months)………….
4. Highest technical qualifications…………………
5. Specialisation, if any………………….
6. Practical experience………………….
7. Marks secured in periodical tests: -
Test Date Written Viva Total
(60) (40)
I Test
II Test
III Test
8. Job test (100 Marks)……………….
9. Percentage of Marks secured in all the tests:…………….
10. Gradation: (A, B, C, etc.)…………….
11. General remarks & recommendations:…………………….
Director of Institute
Comments
Post a Comment